Output

DI−1
DIAGNOSTICS − ENGINE (2JZ−GE)
ENGINE (2JZ−GE)
DI63H−06
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING

When using hand−held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following page.
Titles inside are titles of pages in

Vehicle Brought to Workshop this manual with the page number indicated
in the bottom portion. See the indicated
1 Customer Problem Analysis P. DI−4 pages for detailed explanations.
2 Connect hand−held tester to DLC3 P. DI−17

If display indicates a communication fault in tool, inspect DLC3 P. DI−17
3 Check DTC and Freezed Frame Data (Precheck)

Record or Print DTC and Freezed Frame Data P. DI−17
4 Clear DTC and Freezed Frame Data P. DI−17
5 Visual Inspection
6 Setting Check Mode Diagnosis P. DI−17
7 Problem Symptom Confirmation

If engine does not start, perform steps 10 and 12 first
Malfunction Malfunction does not occur.
occurs. 8 Symptom Simulation P. IN−30
9 DTC Check P. DI−17

Normal Malfunction code.
10 Basic Inspection P. DI−17 11 DTC Chart P. DI−21
12 Problem Symptoms Table*
14 Parts Inspection 13 Circuit Inspection P. DI−21
15 Check for Intermittent Problems P. DI−17
Identification of Problem
16 Adjustment, Repair
*: See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−24.
17 Confirmation Test
End
LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

DI−2
When not using hand−held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following page.

1 pages for detailed explanations.
Customer Problem Analysis P. DI−17
2 Check and clear DTC (Precheck) P DI−21

Malfunction does not occur.
Malfunction
occurs. 4 Symptom Simulation P. IN−30

Normal code. Malfunction code.
8 Problem Symptoms Table*
10 Circuit Inspection P. DI−21
9 Parts Inspection
End
*: See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−24

DI−3
DI63I−01
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s
Name
Customer’s Name Model and Model

Year
Driver’s Name Frame No.
Date Vehicle
Brought in Engine Model
km
License No. Odometer Reading miles
Engine does Engine does not crank No initial combustion No complete combustion
not Start
Difficult to Engine cranks slowly

Start Other
Problem Symptoms
Incorrect first idle Idling rpm is abnormal High ( rpm) Low ( rpm)
Poor Idling
Rough idling Other
Poor Hesitation Back fire Muffler explosion (after−fire) Surging

Driveability Knocking Other
Soon after starting After accelerator pedal depressed

Engine Stall After accelerator pedal released During A/C operation
Shifting from N to D Other
Others
Dates Problem
Occurred
Constant Sometimes ( times per day/month) Once only
Problem Frequency
Other
Weather Fine Cloudy Rainy Snowy Various/Other
Outdoor
Hot Warm Cool Cold (approx. ˚F/ ˚C)
Problem Occurs
Condition When
Temperature
Highway Suburbs Inner city Uphill Downhill

Place
Rough road Other
Engine Temp. Cold Warming up After warming up Any temp. Other
Starting Just after starting ( min.) Idling Racing

Engine Operation Driving Constant speed Acceleration Deceleration
A/C switch ON/OFF Other
Normal Mode Normal Malfunction code(s) (code )

(Precheck) Freezed frame data ( )
DTC Inspection
Normal Malfunction code(s) (code )
Check (Test) Mode
Freezed frame data ( )

DI−4
DI85I−01
PRE−CHECK
1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
(a) Description for EURO−OBD (European spec.)
S When troubleshooting Euro−OBD vehicles, the
only difference from the usual troubleshooting pro-
cedure is that you connect to the vehicle the OBD
scan tool complying with ISO 15031−4 or hand−
held tester, and read off various data output from
FI0534
the vehicle’s engine ECU.
Euro−OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s
on−board computer lights up the check engine
warning ignition the instrument panel when the
computer detects a malfunction in the emission
control system/components or in the powertrain
control components which affect vehicle emissions,
or a malfunction in the computer. In addition to the
check engine warning light (CHK ENG) lighting up
when a malfunction is detected, the applicable
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by
ISO15031−6 are recorded in the engine ECU
memory (See page DI−21). If the malfunction does
not repaired in 3 consecutive trips, the (CHK ENG)
goes off automatically but the DTCs remain re-
corded in the engine ECU memory.
Hand−Held Tester S To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or
hand−held tester to the Data Link Connector 3
(DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand−
held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and
check freezed frame data and various forms of en-
gine data (For operating instructions, see the OBD
scan tool’s instruction book.).
DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufac-
DLC3
B06162 turer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must
be set as prescribed by the ISO, while manufacturer
controlled codes can be set freely by the manufac-
turer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on
page DI−21).
S The diagnosis system operates in normal mode
during normal vehicle use. It also has a check mode
for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms
and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection
logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and ensure
thorough malfunction detection. By switching the
engine ECU to check mode when troubleshooting,
DI−5
the technician can cause the check engine warning

light to light up for a malfunction that is only detected
once or momentarily (Hand−held tester only) (See
step 2).
S *2 trip detection logic:
When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunc-
tion is temporarily stored in the engine ECU
memory. (1st trip) If the same malfunction is de-
tected again during the second drive test, this se-
cond detection causes the (CHK ENG) to light up.
(2nd trip) (However, the ignition switch must be
turned OFF between the 1st trip and the 2nd trip.).
S Freeze frame data:
Freeze frame data records the engine condition
when a misfire (DTCs P0300 − P0306) or fuel trim
malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174 and
P0175) or other malfunction (first malfunction only),
is detected.
Because freeze frame data records the engine
conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine
coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, ve-
hicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected,
when troubleshooting, it is useful to determine
whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the en-
gine was warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio was
lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
Priorities for troubleshooting:
If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the
applicable DTC chart, these should be followed.
If no instructions are given, troubleshoot DTCs according to the
following priorities.
(1) DTCs other than fuel trim malfunction (DTCs
P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175) and misfire
(DTCs P0300 − P0306).
(2) Fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174
and P0175).
(3) Misfire (DTCs P0300 − P0306).
(b) Description for M−OBD (Except European spec.)

S When troubleshooting Multiplex OBD (M−OBD) ve-
hicles, the only difference from the usual trouble-
shooting procedure is that you connect the vehicle
to the hand−held tester, and read off various data
output from the vehicle’s engine ECU.
S The vehicle’s on−board computer indicates the
check engine light (CHK ENG) on the instrument
FI6907 panel when the computer detects a malfunction in
the computer itself or in drive system components.
DI−6
In addition to an indication of the CHK ENG when

a malfunction is detected, the applicable Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) recorded in the engine ECU
memory (See page DI−21). When the malfunction
does not reoccur, the CHK ENG is indicated until the
ignition switch is turned off, and then the CHK ENG
is not indicated when the ignition switch is turned on
but the DTCs remain recorded in the engine ECU
memory.
S To check the DTCs, connect the hand−held tester
to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle or
read the DTC which is indicated on the multi in-
formation display when TC and CG terminals on the
DLC3 are connected. The hand−held tester also
enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed
frame data and various forms of engine data. (For
operating instructions, see the instruction book.)
during normal vehicle use. It also has a check (test)
mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symp-
toms and troubleshoot. Most DTCs use 2 trip detec-
tion logic* to prevent erroneous detection, and en-
sure thorough malfunction detection. By switching
the engine ECU to check (test) mode using hand−
held tester when troubleshooting, the technician
can cause the CHK ENG on the light up for a mal-
function that is only detected once or momentarily
(Hand−held tester only) (See step 2).
S * 2 trip detection logic:
When a logic malfunction is fist detected, the mal-
function is temporally stored in the engine ECU
memory. If the same malfunction is detected again
during the second drive test, this second detection
cases the CHK ENG to light up.
The 2 trip repeats the same mode for 2 times. (How-
ever, the ignition switch must be turned OFF be-
tween the 1st trip and 2nd trip)
when malfunction is detected.
conditions (fuel system, calculator load, water tem-
perature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed,
etc.) when the malfunction is detected, when trou-
bleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the
vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was
warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio was lean or rich,
etc. at the time of the malfunction.

DI−7
(c) Check the DLC3.

The vehicle’s engine ECU uses the ISO 9141−2 (Euro−
OBD)/ISO 14230 (M−OBD) communication protocol. The
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO
9 10 1112 1314 15 16 15031−3 and matches the ISO 9141−2/ISO 14230 for-
mat.
DLC3
A04550
Terminal No. Connection/Voltage or Resistance Condition

7 Bus Line/Pulse generation During transmission
4 Chassis Ground « Body Ground/1 W or less Always
16 Battery Positive « Body Ground/9 − 14 V Always
HINT:
Only for Euro−OBD:
If your display shows UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE
when you have connected the cable of the OBD scan tool or
hand−held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON
and operated the scan tool, there is a problem on the vehicle
side or tool side.
S If communication is normal when the tool is connected to
another vehicle, inspect DLC3 on the original vehicle.
S If communication is still not possible when the tool is con-
nected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the
tool itself, so consult the Service Department listed in the
tool’s instruction manual.
2. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (Normal Mode)
(a) Check the DTC using hand−held tester.
NOTICE:
Hand−held tester only:
When the diagnosis system is switched from normal mode
to check mode, it erases all DTCs and freezed frame data
recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes, al-
ways check the DTCs and freezed frame data, and note
them down.
(1) Prepare the hand−held tester.
(2) Connect the hand−held tester to DLC3.
(3) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand−held
tester main switch ON.
(4) Use the hand−held tester to check the DTCs and
freezed frame data, note them down. (For operating
instructions, see the hand−held tester instruction
book.)
(5) See page DI−21 to confirm the details of the
DTCs.

DI−8
(b) Except European spec.:

Check the DTC when not using hand−held tester.
(1) Turn the ignition switch ON.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (2) Using SST, connect between terminals 13 (TC) and
9 10 1112 1314 15 16 4 (CG) of the DLC3.
SST 09843−18040
DLC3
A04550
(3) Read the DTC from the check engine warning light
Normal (CHK ENG).
As an example, the blinking patterns for codes, nor-
0.26 sec.
mal, 12 and 31 are as shown in the illustration.
ON ON ON ON (4) Check the details of the malfunction using the DTC
chart on page.
OFF OFF OFF (5) After completing the check, disconnect terminals 13
(TC) and 4 (CG) and turn off the display.
0.26 sec. HINT:
0.5 sec. 1.5 sec.
12 and 31
In the event of 2 or more malfunction cords, the indication will
4.5 sec. 4.5 sec.
begin from the smaller numbered cord and continue in order to
2.5
sec. the larger.
ON (6) Push the function key of the steering switch until EFI
OFF will be displayed on the instrument panel.
0.5 sec. Repeat
One Cycle (7) Read the DTC on the instrument panel.
HINT:
Start
S If a DTC is not indicated, check the TC terminal circuit.
FI0294
S If a code No.89 is indicated, read the number of blinks of
BR3589 A08718 the ECT SNOW indication to get the DTC for the electric
throttle control system (ETCS).
NOTICE:
S When simulating symptoms with out a hand−held tes-
ter to check the DTCs, use normal mode. For code on
the DTC chart subject to ”2 trip detection logic”, turn
the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simu-
lated the first time. Then repeat the simulation pro-
cess again. When the problem has been simulated
twice, the CHECK ENG is indicated on the instrument
panel and the DTCs are recorded in the engine ECU.
S Check the 1st trip DTC using Mode 7 for ISO 15031
(Continuous Test Results of Euro−OBD function in
hand−held tester).
(c) Check the DTC for ETCS
HINT:
If the ECT SNOW indicator does not light up, troubleshoot the
combination meter (See page BE−4).

DI−9
(2)Using SST, connect between terminals 13 (TC) and

4 (CG) of the DLC3.
SST 09843−18040
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 1112 1314 15 16
DLC3
A04550
(3) Read the DTC from the ECT snow indicator the
combination meter.
HINT:
If a DTC is not output, check the TC terminal circuit.
(4) Check details of the malfunction using the DTC
chart on page DI−21.
(5) After completing the check, disconnect terminals 13
A07110
Nomal HINT:
In the event of 2 or more malfunction codes, indication will begin
0.26 sec. from the smaller numbered code and continue in order to the
lager.
ON ON ON ON (d) Clear the DTC.
The DTCs and freezed frame data will be erased by either
OFFOFFOFF actions.
(1) Operating the hand−held tester to erase the codes
0.26 sec. (See the hand−held tester’s instruction book for op-
Code No.21 and 31 erating instructions.).
0.5 sec. 1.5 sec. (2) Disconnecting the battery terminals of EFI and
4.5 sec. 4.5 sec. ECTS fuses.
2.5
NOTICE:
sec.
ON If the hand−held tester switches the engine ECU from nor-
OFF mal mode to check mode or vice−versa, or if the ignition
0.5 sec.
Repeat switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during check
One Cycle
mode, the DTCs and freezed frame data will be erased.
Start 3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (Check (Test) Mode)
FI0294
A05913 A09389 HINT:
Compared to the normal mode, the check mode has an in-
creased sensitivity to detect malfunctions.
Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in
the normal mode can also be detected in the check (test) mode.
(a) Check the DTC.
(1) Initial conditions
S Battery voltage 11 V or more
S Throttle valve fully closed.
S Transmission in P or N position
S A/C switched OFF
DI−10
(2) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

(4) Connect the hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(6) Switch the hand−held tester from the normal mode
to the check (test) mode.
NOTICE:
If the hand−held tester switches the engine ECU from nor-
mal mode to check mode or vice−versa, or if the ignition
switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during check
(7) Start the engine.
(8) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction de-
scribed by the customer.
NOTICE:
Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the
DTCs, etc.
(9) After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the
hand−held tester diagnosis selector to check the
DTCs and freezed frame data, etc.
HINT:
Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF. Turning the ignition
switch OFF switches the diagnosis system from check (test)
mode to normal mode. so all DTCs, etc. are erased.
(10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable cir-
cuit.
Interface Vehicle (b) Engine ECU Terminal Values Measurement Using

Box Harness Break−Out−Box and Hand−Held Tester
(1) Hook up the break−out−box and hand−held tester
to the vehicle.
(2) Read the engine ECU input/output values by follow-
ing the prompts on the tester screen.
HINT:
S Hand−held tester has a ”Snapshot” function.
Toyota Break−Out−Box N09348 This records the measured values and is effective in the
diagnosis of intermittent problems.
S Please refer to the hand−held tester/break−out−box op-
erator’s manual for further details.
4. FAIL−SAFE CHART
If any of the following codes is recorded, the engine ECU enters fail−safe mode.
DTC No. Fail−Safe Operation Fail−Safe Deactivation Conditions
From the amount of throttle valve opening and the engine
P0100/31 Returned to normal condition
rpm, estimate the amount of inhaled air.
P0110/24 Intake air temperature is fixed at 20˚C (68˚F) Returned to normal condition
P0115/22 Water temperature is fixed at 80˚C (176˚F) Returned to normal condition

DI−11
P0120/41 Saved driving mode Ignition switch OFF

P0135/21
P0141/21 The heater circuit in which an abnormality is detected is
Ignition switch OFF
P0155/28 turned off
P0161/28
P0325/52
Max. timing retardation Ignition switch OFF
P0330/53
P1300/14
P1305/15
P1310/14
P1315/14
Fuel cut Returned to normal condition
P1320/14
P1325/14
P1330/14
P1340/14
5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
HINT:
By putting the vehicle’s engine ECU in the check (test) mode, 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of 2
trip detection logic and sensitivity to detect open circuits is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermit-
tent problems.
(a) Clear the DTCs (See step 2).
(b) Set the check (Test) mode (See step 3).
(c) Perform a simulation test (See page IN−20).
(d) Check the connector and terminal (See page IN−30).
(e) Handle the connector (See page IN−30).
6. BASIC INSPECTION
When the malfunction code is not confirmed in the DTC check, troubleshooting should be performed in the
order for all possible circuits to be considered as the causes of the problems. In many cases, by carrying
out the basic engine check shown in the following flow chart, the location causing the problem can be found
quickly and efficiently. Therefore, use of this check is essential in engine troubleshooting.
1 Is battery voltage 11 V or more when engine is stopped?
NO Charge or replace battery.
YES
2 Is engine cranked?
NO Proceed to problems table (See Pub. No.

RM588E on page DI−25).
YES

DI−12
3 Does engine start?
NO Go to step 7.
YES
4 Check air filter.
Outside PREPARATION:
Remove the air filter.
CHECK:
Visually check that the air filter is not dirty or excessive oily.
HINT:
If necessary, clean the air filter with compressed air. First blow
Inside from inside thoroughly, then blow from outside of the air filter.
A07103 NG Repair or replace
OK
5 Check idle speed.
PREPARATION:
(a) Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
(b) Switch off all the accessories.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (c) Switch off the A/C.
9 10 1112 1314 15 16 (d) Shift the transmission into the N position.
(e) Connect the hand−held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle.
(f) If you have no hand−held tester, connect tachometer test
TAC DLC3
prove to terminal 9 (TAC) of the DLC3.
A04550 SST 09843−18030
NOTICE:
As some tachometers are not compatible with this ignition
system, we recommend that you confirm the compatibility
of your unit before use.
CHECK:
Check the idle speed.
OK:
Idle speed: 600 − 700 rpm
NG Proceed to problem symptoms table (See Pub.

No. RM588E on page DI−25).

DI−13
OK
6 Check ignition timing.
PREPARATION:
CG (a) Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
(b) Shift the transmission into the N position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (c) Keep the engine speed at idle.
(d) Using SST, connect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of the
9 10 11 12 1314 15 16
DLC3.
SST 09843−18040
TC DLC3
(e) Using a timing light, connect the tester to the ignition coil
connector wire (See Pub. No. RM588E on page EM−15).
CHECK:
Check the ignition timing.
OK:
Ignition timing: 10˚ BTDC at idle
NG Proceed to Pub. No. RM588E on page IG−1 and

A04550
A08524 A09390
continue to troubleshoot.
OK
Proceed to problem symptoms table (See

Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−25).
7 Check fuel pressure.
PREPARATION:
(a) Be sure that enough fuel is in the tank.
(b) Connect the hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(c) Turn the ignition switch ON and push hand−held tester
main switch ON.
(d) Use the ACTIVE TEST mode to operate the fuel pump.
(e) Please refer to the hand−held tester operator’s manual
for further details.
B06168 (f) If you have no hand−held tester, connect the positive (+)
and negative (−) leads from the battery to the fuel pump
connector (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−6).

DI−14
CHECK:
Check that pulsation damper screw rises up when fuel pump
operates.
HINT:
At this time, you will hear a fuel flowing noise.
NG Proceed to Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−6 and

OK
8 Check for spark.
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the ignition coil from the spark plug.
(b) Remove the spark plug.
(c) Install the spark plug to the ignition coil.
(d) Disconnect the injector connector.
(e) Ground the spark plug.
CHECK:
Check if spark occurs while engine is being cranked.
NOTICE:
To prevent excess fuel being from injected from the injectors during this test, don’t crank the engine
for more than 5 − 10 seconds at a time.
NG Proceed to Pub. No. RM588E on page IG−1 and

OK
Proceed to problem symptoms table (See

Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−25).
7. ENGINE OPERATING CONDITION

NOTICE:
The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values, so a vehicle may still be
normal even if its value varies differ from those listed here. So do not decide whether a part is faulty
or not solely according to the ”Normal Condition” here.
Hand−held tester display Measurement Item Normal Condition*
Fuel System Bank 1
FUEL SYS #1 OPEN: Air−fuel ratio feedback stopped Idling after warming up: CLOSED
CLOSED: Air−fuel ratio feedback operating
Fuel System Bank 2
DI−15
Calculator Load:
Idling: 19.7 − 50.4 %
CALC LOAD Current intake air volume as a proportion of max.
Racing without load (2,500rpm): 16.8 − 47.4 %
intake air volume
COOLANT TEMP Water Temp. Sensor Value After warming up: 80 − 95˚C (176 − 203˚F)
SHORT FT #1 Short−term Fuel Trim Bank 1 0 ± 20 %
LONG FT #1 Long−term Fuel Trim Bank 1 0 ± 20 %
ENGINE SPD Engine Speed Idling: 700 − 800 rpm
VEHICLE SPD Vehicle Speed Vehicle stopped: 0 km/h (0 mph)
IGN ADVANCE Ignition Advance: Ignition Timing of Cylinder No.1 Idling: BTDC 5 − 15˚
INTAKE AIR Intake Air Temp. Sensor Value Equivalent to ambient temp.
Idling: 3.5 − 5.0 gm/ sec.
MAF Air Flow Rate Through Mass Air Flow Meter Racing without load (2,500 rpm):
12.5 − 17.9 gm/sec.
Voltage Output of Throttle Position Sensor Calcu- Throttle fully closed: 8 − 20 %
THROTTLE POS
lated as a percentage: 0 V ® 0 %, 5 V ® 100 % Throttle fully open: 64 − 96 %
Voltage Output of Oxygen Sensor Bank 1 Sensor

O2S B1 S1 Idling: 0.1 − 0.9 V
1
O2S B1 S2 Driving (50 km/h, 31 mph): 0.1 − 0.9 V
2

O2S B2 S1 Idling: 0.1 − 0.9 V
1
O2S B2 S2 Driving: (50 km/h, 31 mph): 0.1 − 1.0 V
2
Oxygen Sensor Fuel Trim Bank 1, Sensor 1

O2FT B1 S1 0 ± 20 %
(Same as SHORT FT #1)
O2FT B2 S1 0 ± 20 %
Distance since activation of check engine warn-

MIL ON RUN DIST When there is no DTC: 0 km/h (0 mph)
ing light
INJECTOR Fuel injection time for cylinder No.1 Idling: 1.92 − 3.37 ms
MISFIRE RPM Engine RPM for first misfire range Misfire 0: 0 rpm
MISFIRE LOAD Engine load for first misfire range Misfire 0: 0 g/r
STARTER SIG Starter Signal Cranking: ON
A/C SW A/C Switch Signal A/C ON: ON
PNP SW Park/Neutral Position Switch Signal P or N position: ON
ELE LOAD SIG Electrical Load Signal Defogger switch ON: ON
SW Closed Throttle Position Throttle fully closed: ON
STOP LIGHT SW Stop Light Switch Signal Stop light switch ON: ON
PS OIL PRESS SW Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch Signal Turn steering wheel: ON
Fuel Cut Idle: Fuel cut when throttle valve fully
FC IDL Fuel cut operating: ON
closed, during deceleration
FC TAU Fuel Cut TAU: Fuel cut during very light load Fuel cut operating: ON
CYL#1 − CYL#6 Abnormal revolution variation for each cylinder 0%
Total number of ignition for every 1,000 revolu-
IGNITION 0 − 300
tions
INTAKE CTRL VSV1 Intake Air Control Valve VSV Signal VSV operating: ON

DI−16
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Signal Idling: ON

EVAP VSV EVAP VSV Signal VSV operating: ON
Throttle fully closed: 2.0 − 2.9 V
THROTTLE POS #2 Throttle position sensor No.2 output voltage
Throttle fully open: 4.6 − 5.0 V
Accelerator pedal position sensor No.1 Accelerator pedal released: 0.25 − 0.9 V
ACCEL POS #1
output voltage Accelerator pedal depressed: 3.2 − 4.8 V
ACCEL POS #2
THROTTLE TARGET Target position of throttle valve Idling: 0.4 − 1.1 V
Throttle fully closed: 0 %
DUTY Throttle motor opening duty ratio When accelerator pedal is depressed,
duty ratio is increased
THROTL CLS DUTY Throttle motor closed duty ratio When accelerator pedal is quick released, duty
ratio is increased
THROTTLE MOT Whether or not throttle motor control is permitted Idling: ON
Whether or not magnetic clutch control
CLUTCH Idling: ON
is permitted
Whether or not electric throttle control system

+BM Idling: ON
power is inputted
Whether or not accelerator pedal position sensor
ACCEL IDL POS Idling: ON
is detecting idle
Whether or not throttle position sensor is

THROTTLE IDL POS Idling: ON
detecting idle
FAIL #1 Whether or not fail safe function is executed ETCS is failed: ON
THROTTL INITAL Throttle fully closed learning value 0.4 − 0.8 V
ACCEL LEARN VAL Accelerator fully closed learning value 0.4 − 0.8 V
THROTTLE MOT Throttle motor control current Idling: 0 − 3.0 A
CLUTCH Magnetic clutch control current 0.8 − 1.0 A
A/C MAG CLUTCH A/C switch signal A/C ON: ON
VVT CTRL VVT control signal VVT operation: ON
Total Fuel Trim Bank 1: Average value for fuel
TOTAL FT B1 Idling: 0.5 − 1.4
trim system of bank 1

Oxygen Sensor Lean Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1:
O2 LR B1 S1 Response time for oxygen sensor output to Idling after warming up: 0 − 1,000 msec.
switch from lean to rich
Oxygen Sensor Lean Rich Bank 2 Sensor 1:
O2 LR B2 S1 Response time for oxygen sensor output to Idling after warming up: 0 − 1,000 msec.
Oxygen Sensor Rich Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1:
O2 RL B1 S1 Response time for oxygen sensor output to Idling after warming up: 0 − 1,000 msec.
switch from rich to lean
Oxygen Sensor Rich Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1:
O2 RL B2 S1 Response time for oxygen sensor output to Idling after warming up: 0 − 1,000 msec.
*: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the shift lever is at N or P position, the A/C switch
is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF.

DI−17
DI63K−04
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART

HINT:
Parameters listed in the chart may not be exactly the same as your reading due to the type of instrument
or other factors.
If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check in the check mode, check the circuit for the code
listed in the table below. For details of each code, turn to the page referred to under the ’’See page’’ for the
respective ’’DTC No.’’ in the DTC chart.
ENGINE TROUBLE CODES
(L: Refer to Pub. No. RM588E)
*1
DTC No.
Detection Item Trouble Area CHK ENG Memory
(See page)
S Open or short in Air Flow Meter circuit

P0100/31 Air Flow Meter Circuit Malfunc-
S Air Flow Meter f f
(DI−21) tion
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit
P0110/24 Intake Air Temp. Circuit Malfunc-
S Intake air temp. sensor f f
(DI−30) tion
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in water temp. sensor circuit
P0115/22
Water Temp. Circuit Malfunction S Water temp. sensor f f
(L)
S Engine ECU
P0116/22*3 Water Temp. Circuit Range/Per- S Water temp. sensor
f f
(DI−31) formance Problem S Cooling system
S Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit

P0120/41 Throttle Position Sensor Circuit
S Throttle position sensor f f
(L) Malfunction
S Engine ECU
P0121/41 Throttle Position Sensor Circuit
(L) Range/Performance Problem
S Open or short in oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) circuit

S Oxygen Sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1)
S Air induction system
P0125/91*3 Insufficient Coolant Temp. for
S Fuel pressure f f
(DI−38) Closed Loop Fuel Control
S Injector
S Gas leakage on exhaust system
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in oxygen sensor circuit
S Oxygen sensor
P0130/21*4 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunc- S Air induction system f*3
f
(L) tion (Bank 1 Sensor 1) S Fuel pressure
S Injector
S Engine ECU

S Oxygen sensor
P0133/21*3 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Re- S Air induction system
f*3 f
(DI−42) sponse (Bank 1 Sensor 1) S Fuel pressure
S Injector
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in heater circuit of oxygen sensor

P0135/21*4 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit
S Oxygen sensor heater f*3 f
(L) Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
S Engine ECU
P0136/27*4 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunc- S Open or short in oxygen sensor circuit
f*3 f
(L) tion (Bank 1 Sensor 2) S Oxygen sensor

DI−18

S Same as DTC No. P0135/21 f*3 f
P0150/28*4 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunc-
(L) tion (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
P0153/28*3 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Re-

S Same a DTC No. P0130/21 f*3 f
(DI−42) sponse (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
P0156/29*4 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunc-

(L) tion (Bank 2 Sensor 2)

S Injector blockage
S Vacuum Sensor
S Water temp. sensor
P0171/25 System too Lean (A/F Lean Mal-
S Fuel pressure f*3 f
(DI−48) function, Bank 1)
S Open or short in oxygen sensor (bank1, 2 sensor1) circuit
S Oxygen sensor (bank1, 2 sensor1)
S Engine ECU
S Injector leak, blockage
S Vacuum sensor
S Ignition system
P172/26*3 System too Rich (A/F Rich Mal-
S Fuel pressure f f
S Engine ECU
P0174/25 System too Lean (A/F Lean Mal-
P0175/26*3 System too Rich (A/F Rich Mal-
S Same as DTC No. P0172/26 f f
P0300/93*3 Random/Multiple CylinderMisfire
(DI−53) Detected
P0301/93*3 S Open or short engine wire
Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected S Connector connection
(DI−53)
S Vacuum
V hose
h connection
ti
P0302/93*3
Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected S Ignition system
(DI−53)
S Injector
P0303/93*3 S Fuel pressure
Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected f f
(DI−53) S Vacuum sensor
P0304/93*3 S Water temp. sensor
Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected S Compression pressure
(DI−53)
S Valve
V l clearance
l
P0305/93*3
Cylinder 5 Misfire Detected S Valve timing
(DI−53)
S Engine ECU
P0306/93*3
Cylinder 6 Misfire Detected
(DI−53)
S Open or short in knock sensor 1 circuit
P0325/52 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunc-
S Knock sensor 1 (looseness) f f
(L) tion (Bank 1)
S Engine ECU

DI−19

(L) tion (Bank 2)
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit
P0335/12, 13 Crankshaft Position Sensor Cir- S Crankshaft position sensor
f f
(L) cuit Malfunction (NE Signal) S Crankshaft timing pulley
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit

P0340/12 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit S Camshaft position sensor
f f
(L) Malfunction (G Signal) S Intake camshaft
S Engine ECU

P0420/94*3 Catalyst System Efficiency Be-
S Oxygen sensor f f
(DI−56) low Threshold (Bank 1)
S Three−way catalytic converter
P0430/94*3 Catalyst System Efficiency Be-
S Same as DTC P0420/94 f f
Evaporative Emission Control S Open or short in VSV circuit for EVAP
P0443/94*3
System Purge Control Vent Con- S VSV for EVAP f f
(DI−60)
trol Malfunction S Engine ECU
S Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit
P0500/42 Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunc-
S Transmission output speed sensor f f
(L) tion
S Engine ECU
P0505/33*3 S Air induction system
Idle Control System Malfunction f f
(DI−61) S Electric throttle control system
P0550/75 Power Steering Pressure Sensor S PS pressure sensor

f f
(DI−63) Circuit Malfunction S Engine ECU
S Open or short in accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
P1120/19 Accelerator Pedal Position Sen-
S Accelerator pedal position sensor f f
(L) sor Circuit Malfunction
S Engine ECU
P1121/19 Accelerator Pedal Position Sen-
(L) sor Range/Performance Problem
S Open or short in throttle control motor circuit
P1125/89*2 Throttle Control Motor Circuit
S Throttle control motor f f
(L) Malfunction
S Engine ECU
P1126/89*2 S Open or short in magnetic clutch circuit
Magnetic Clutch Circuit Malfunc-
(L) S Magnetic clutch f f
tion
S Engine ECU
P1127/89*2 ETCS Actuator Power Source S Open in ETCS power source circuit
f f
(L) Circuit Malfunction S Engine ECU
P1128/89*2 Throttle Control Motor Lock Mal- S Throttle control motor

f f
(L) function S Throttle body
P1129/89*2 Electric Throttle Control System S Electric throttle control system
f f
(L) Malfunction S Engine ECU
S Open or short in fuel pump relay circuit

P1200/78*5 Fuel Pump Relay/Engine ECU
S Fuel pump relay f f
(L) Circuit Malfunction
S Engine ECU
S Ignition system
P1300/14 S Open or short in IGF or IGT1 circuit from igniter to engine ECU
Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.1) f f
(L) S Igniter
S Engine ECU

DI−20

Crankshaft Position Sensor Cir-
P1335/13 S Crankshaft position sensor
cuit Malfunction (During engine − f
(L) S Crankshaft timing pulley
running)
S Engine ECU
VVT Sensor/Camshaft Position S Mechanical system (Jumping teeth of timing belt, belt
P1346/18
Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- stretched) f f
(DI−64)
mance Problem (Bank 1) S ECM
S Valve timing
P1349/59 VVT System Malfunction (Bank S OCV
f*6 f
(L) 1) S VVT controller assembly
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in stop light switch signal circuit

P1520
Stop Light Switch Signal Circuit S Stop light switch f f
(DI−67)
S Engine ECU
P1633/89*2 Engine ECU Malfunction (ETCS
S Engine ECU f f
(L) Circuit)
S Body ECU
P1645/82
Body ECU Malfunction S A/C ECU − −
(L)
S Communication bus
S Open or short in VSV circuit for ACIS
P1651/96*3
VSV for ACIS Circuit Malfunction S VSV for ACIS f f
(DI−67)
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in OCV circuit
P1656/39 OCV Circuit Malfunction (Bank
S OCV f f
(L) 1)
S Engine ECU
S Short in neutral start switch circuit
P1780/97*2 Park/Neutral Position Switch
S Neutral start switch f f
(DI−261) Malfunction
S Engine ECU
*1: f ... CHK ENG is indicated. − ... CHK ENG is not indicated.
*2: If the DTC No.89 is indicated on the check engine warning light, read the DTC for ETCS from ECT SNOW
indicator to get the detail of the DTC No.89. If using the hand−held tester, the detail DTC for ETCS is dis-
played on the hand−held tester.
*3: Europe.
*4: Except G.C.C.
*5: Except Europe.
*6: Except Australia.

DI−21
DI7GR−06
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC P0100/31 Air Flow Meter Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The air flow meter uses a platinum hot wire. The hot wire air flow meter consists of a platinum hot wire, therm-
istor and a control circuit installed in a plastic housing. The hot wire air flow meter works on the principle that
the hot wire and thermistor located in the intake air bypass of the housing detect any changes in the intake
air temperature.
The hot wire is maintained at the set temperature by controlling the current flow through the hot wire. This
current flow is then measured as the output voltage of the air flow meter.
The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and thermistor provide a bridge circuit with the power
transistor controlled so that the potential of A and B remains equal to maintain the set temperature.
B+
Thermistor Air Flow Meter
Power Transistor
Platinum Hot Wire

Intake Air
Temp. Sensor
A B Output
Voltage
Thermistor
Platinum Hot Wire
FI6929
A13069 A12542
DTC No. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area
S Open or short in air flow meter circuit

Open or short in air flow meter circuit with more than 3 sec.
P0100/31 S Air
Ai flow
fl meter
t
and engine speed is less than 4,000 rpm
S Engine ECU
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0100/31, use the hand−held tester to confirm the air flow ratio from the CURRENT
DATA.
Air Flow Value (gm/sec.) Malfunction
S Air flow meter power source circuit open
Approx. 0.0
S VG circuit open or short
271.0 or more S EVG circuit open

DI−22
WIRING DIAGRAM
J14 (*1) J4 (*1)
A11
J34 (*2) J/C J28 (*2) J/C
4 Mass Air Flow Meter Engine ECU
3 1
B−R B−R W 19
IA3 II1 B EA3 +B G−W
A A B 1 E2G E3 EVG
(*2) (*1) 2
10
L−Y
EFI Relay VG E3 VG
3
B−R
1 1
3 5 B−Y
J5 (*1) 15 10
W−B B−Y B−Y
J29 (*2) 1 1 IA2 E6 MREL
A 2 1
J/C
A EFI
B−L
1 1
1 2
W−B Engine Room No. 1 R/B

*1: LHD
*2: RHD
Battery EE
A14791
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using hand−held tester. Because freeze frame records the engine conditions when
the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was run-
ning or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at the time of the
malfunction.
1 Connect hand−held tester, and read value of air flow rate.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand−held tester main switch ON.
(c) Start the engine.
CHECK:
Read the air flow rate on the hand−held tester.
RESULT:
Type I Type II
Air Flow Rate (gm/sec.) 0.0 271.0 or more
Type I Go to step 2.
Type II Go to step 5.

DI−23
2 Check voltage of air flow meter power source.
ON
PREPARATION:
(a) Disconnect the air flow meter connector.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
1
Measure the voltage between terminal 1 of the air flow meter
(+) connector and body ground.
OK:
(−)
Voltage: 9 − 14 V
BE6653
P24310 A00099
NG Check for open in harness and connector be-

tween EFI main relay (Marking: EFI MAIN) and
air flow meter (See page IN−30).
OK
3 Check voltage between terminals VG of engine ECU connector and body ground.
PREPARATION:
VG (a) Remove the engine ECU hood.
(b) Start the engine.
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminal VG of the engine ECU
connector and body ground while the engine is idling.
(+) (−) OK:
Voltage:
A01945 0.2 − 4.9 V (P or N position and A/C switch OFF)
OK Check and replace engine ECU

(See page IN−30).
NG
4 Check for open and short in harness and connector between air flow meter and
engine ECU (See page IN−30).
NG Repair or replace harness or connector.
OK

DI−24
Replace air flow meter.
5 Check continuity between terminal EVG of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
PREPARATION:
EVG Remove the engine ECU hood.
CHECK:
Check the continuity between terminal EVG of the engine ECU
connector and body ground.
OK:
Continuity (1 W or less)
A01946 NG Check and replace engine ECU

(See page IN−30).
OK
6 Check for open in harness and connector between air flow meter and engine
ECU (See page IN−30).
OK

DI−25
DI63Q−04
DTC P0110/24 Intake Air Temp. Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The intake air temperature sensor is built into the air cleaner
(Fig. 1) and senses the intake air temperature.
A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value
30 according to the intake air temperature.
20
The lower the intake air temperature, the greater the thermistor
10 resistance value, and the higher the intake air temperature, the
lower the thermistor resistance value (See Fig. 1).
5
Acceptable The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the engine
Resistance kW
3
2 ECU (See below). The 5 V power source voltage in the engine
ECU is applied to the intake air temp. sensor from terminal THA
1
via resistor R.
0.5
0.3
That is, resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are
connected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air
0.2
temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the
0.1 intake air temperature, the potential at terminal THA also
changes. Based on this signal, the engine ECU increases the
− 20 0 20 40 60 80 100
(− 4) 32 68 104 140 176 212 fuel injection volume to improve driveability during cold engine
Temp. ˚C (˚F) operation.
FI4741
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area

P0110/24 Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit S Intake air temp. sensor
S Engine ECU
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0110/24, use the hand−held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the
CURRENT DATA.
Temperature Displayed Malfunction
−40˚C (−40˚F) Open circuit
140˚C ( 284˚F ) or more Short circuit

DI−26
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
Intake Air Temp. Sensor

(Inside air flow meter) 5V
22 R
4 W−R THA
E3
18
5 BR E2
E3
E1
A00328
HINT:
S If DTCs P0100/31, P0101/31, P0110/24, P0115/22, P0120/41, P0121/41, P1120/19 and P1121/19
are output simultaneously, E2 (sensor ground) may be open.
S Read freeze frame data using hand−held tester. Because freeze frame records the engine conditions
when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle
was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc. at
the time of the malfunction.
When using hand−held tester:
1 Connect hand−held tester, and read value of intake air temperature.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Read the temperature value on the hand−held tester.
OK:
Same as actual intake air temperature.
HINT:
S If there is open circuit, hand−held tester indicates −40˚C (−40˚F).
S If there is short circuit, hand−held tester indicates 140˚C (284˚F) or more.
NG −40˚C (−40˚F) ... Go to step 2

140˚C (284˚F) or more ... Go to step 4.
OK
Check for intermittent problems

(See page DI−17).

DI−27
2 Check for open in harness or engine ECU.
ON PREPARATION:
(a) Disconnect the intake air temperature sensor connector.
Engine ECU (b) Connect the sensor wire harness terminals together.
Intake Air
Temp. Sensor 5V
(c) Turn the ignition switch ON.
1 THA CHECK:
E2
2 E1 OK:
BE6653
Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more
A00347
A00348
OK Confirm good connection at sensor. If OK, re-

place intake air temperature sensor.
NG
3 Check for open in harness or engine ECU connector.
ON PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the engine ECU hood.
Intake Air Engine ECU (b) Connect between terminals THA and E2 of the engine
Temp. Sensor ECU connector.
5V
1 THA HINT:
E2 The intake air temperature sensor connector is disconnected.
2 E1 Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the
engine ECU connector (See page IN−30).
THA E2
CHECK:
OK:
BE6653
FI7057
A01947 A02202 OK Open in harness between terminals E2 or THA,
repair or replace harness.
NG
Confirm good connection at engine ECU. If

OK, check and replace engine ECU (See page
IN−30).

DI−28
4 Check for short in harness and engine ECU.
ON PREPARATION:
(a) Disconnect the intake air temperature sensor connector.
Intake Air Engine ECU (b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
Temp. Sensor 5V CHECK:
1 Read the temperature value on the hand−held tester.
THA
OK:
E2
E1 Temperature value: −40°C (−40°F)
2
BE6653
A00362 A00363 OK Replace intake air temperature sensor.
NG
5 Check for short in harness or engine ECU.
ON PREPARATION:
Engine ECU (b) Disconnect the E3 connector from the engine ECU.
Intake Air Temp. Sensor 5V
HINT:
THA The intake air temperature sensor connector is disconnected.
E2
E1 CHECK:
OK:
Temperature value: −40°C (−40°F)
BE6653 E3 Connector
FI7056
A01948 A02203 OK Repair or replace harness or connector.
NG
Check and replace engine ECU

(See page IN−30).

DI−29
When not using hand−held tester:
1 Check voltage between terminals THA and E2 of engine ECU connector.
ON PREPARATION:
THA (+) E2 (−)
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminals THA and E2 of the en-
gine ECU connector.
OK:
Intake Air temperature Voltage
A04534
20˚C (68˚F) 0.5 − 3.4 V
60˚C (140˚F) 0.2 − 1.0 V
OK Check for intermittent problems

(See page DI−17).
NG
2 Check intake air temperature sensor (See page FI−2).
NG Replace intake air temperature sensor.
OK
3 Check for open and short in harness and connector between engine ECU and
intake air temperature sensor (See page IN−30).
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−30
DI07J−11
DTC P0116/22 Water Temp. Circuit Range/Performance

Problem
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0115/22 of Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−37.
When the fluctuations in the engine coolant temperature are
within 3 ˚C (37 ˚F) before and after the following conditions are
met:
19.IDL OFF time 250 sec.
20.Vehicle speed change of 28 km/h (17 mph) or more occurs S Water temp. sensor
P0116
10 times or more. S Cooling system
21.−40 ˚C (−40 ˚F) % Engine coolant temperature when the
ignition switch is turned ON < 60 ˚C (140 ˚F)
22.Intake air temperature after starting the engine −6.7 ˚C
(20 ˚F)
HINT:
S If DTC P0115/22 and P0116/22 are output simultaneously, engine coolant temp. sensor circuit may
be open. Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0115 first.
when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0116/22) being output?
YES Go to relevant DTC chart.
NO
2 Check thermostat (See Pub. No. RM588E on page CO−10).
NG Replace thermostat.
OK
Replace water temp. sensor.

DI−31
DI85J−01
DTC P0125/91 Insufficient Coolant Temp. for Closed Loop

Fuel Control
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
To obtain a high purification rate for the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three−way cata-
lytic converter is used, but for the most efficient use of the three−way catalytic converter, the air−fuel ratio
must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air−fuel ratio.
The oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) has the characteristic which its output voltage changes suddenly
in the vicinity of the stoichiometric air−fuel ratio. This characteristic is used to detect the oxygen concentra-
tion in the exhaust gas and provide the engine ECU with feedback to control of the air−fuel ratio.
When the air−fuel ratio becomes LEAN, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust increases and the oxygen
sensor informs the engine ECU of the LEAN condition (small electromotive force: < 0.45 V).
When the air−fuel ratio is RICHER than the stoichiometric air−fuel ratio the oxygen concentration in the ex-
haust gas is reduced and the oxygen sensor informs the engine ECU of the RICH condition (large electromo-
tive force: > 0.45 V). The engine ECU judges by the electromotive force from the oxygen sensor whether
the air−fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN and controls the injection time accordingly. However, if malfunction of the
oxygen sensor causes output of abnormal electromotive force, the engine ECU is unable to perform accu-
rate air−fuel ratio control. The oxygen sensors include a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater
is controlled by the engine ECU. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is
low) current flows to the heater to heat the sensor for accurate oxygen concentration detection.
Atmosphere
Ideal Air−Fuel Mixture
Housing
Platinum Electrode
Output Voltage
Solid Electrolyte
(Zirconia Element)
Platinum Electrode
Heater
Coating (Ceramic)
Richer − Air Fuel Ratio − Leaner

Cover
P20302
FI7210
Exhaust Gas A00798

After engine is warmed up, heated oxygen sensors (bank 1, 2
sensor 1) output does not indicate RICH (0.45 V) even once
S Oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1)
when conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) continue for at least 90
sec.:
P0125/91 S Fuel pressure
(a) Engine speed: 1,400 rpm or more
S Injector
(b) Vehicle speed: 40 − 100 km/h (25 − 62 mph)
(c) Throttle valve does not fully closed
S Engine ECU
(d) 180 sec. or more after starting engine
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0125, use the hand−held tester to confirm voltage output of the oxygen sensor (bank
1, 2 sensor 1) from the CURRENT DATA. If voltage output of the oxygen sensor is less than 0.1 V, oxygen
sensor circuit may be open or short.
DI−32
CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN
Vehicle speed 20 sec. 20 sec. 20 sec.

or more or more or more
40 km/h
(24 mph) (d) (d) (d)
Idling(c) (e) (e) (f)

IG SW OFF
100 sec. 20 sec. 20 sec.

(a) (b) 30 sec.
A09299

(b) Switch the hand−held tester from normal mode to check mode (See page DI−4).
(c) Start the engine and let the engine idle for 100 seconds or more.
(d) Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (24 mph) or more for 20 seconds or more.
(e) Let the engine idle for 20 seconds or more.
(f) Let the engine idle for 30 seconds.
HINT:
If a malfunction exists, the MIL will light up during step (f).
NOTICE:
If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of the malfunction will not be possible.
If you do not have a hand−held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps (c) to (f),
then perform steps (c) to (f) again.

DI−33
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD:
Engine ECU
15 10
B−Y B−Y B−Y
IA2 E6 MREL
J9 H23 Heated Oxygen Sensor
1 1 1 J/C (Bank2 Sensor2) 25
Engine
BR BR GR−B
Room No. 1 R/B E 4 E1 HT 1 E7 HT2B
2 5 E
1 D 24
EFI EFI J4 B−R R
+B OX 3 E7 OX2B
Relay J/C 2
1 3 2 D BR H16 Heated Oxygen Sensor
(Bank2 Sensor1) 11
B−R +B W
2 OX E3 OX2A
1 1 1 EA3 7 3
3
BR Y
B−R E1 HT E3 HT2A
4 1
W−B H14 Heated Oxygen Sensor
1
(Bank1 Sensor1) 12
II1 B−R +B B
BR OX 3 E3 OX1A
2
A
J5 4
BR R
B−L B−R J/C E1 HT E3 HT1A
J4 4 1
A H15 Heated Oxygen Sensor
A J/C 9 BR (Bank1 Sensor2) 10 8
J14 B−R B−R B−R B−R +B OX W W
EA2 3 EA4 E5 OX1B
J/C A B B 2
A 3 26
BR GR GR
E1 HT EA4 E7 HT1B
4 1
W−B 1
BR W−B
E3 E03
Battery EE ED EC EC
A14529

DI−34
RHD:
Engine ECU
15 10
B−Y B−Y B−Y
IA2 E6 MREL
J36 H23 Heated Oxygen Sensor
1 1 1 J/C (Bank2 Sensor2) 25
Engine
BR BR GR−B
Room No. 1 R/B A 4 E1 HT 1 E7 HT2B
2 5 A
1 D 24
EFI EFI J28 B−R R
Relay J/C 2 +B OX 3 E7 OX2B
1 3 2 D BR H16 Heated Oxygen Sensor
(Bank2 Sensor1) 11
B−R +B W
2 OX E3 OX2A
1 1 1 7 EA3 3
3
BR Y
B−R E1 HT E3 HT2A
4 1
W−B H14 Heated Oxygen Sensor
(Bank1 Sensor1) 12
3 IA3 B−R +B B
BR OX 3 E3 OX1A
2
A
J29 4
BR R
B−L B−R J/C E1 HT E3 HT1A
J28 4 1
A H15 Heated Oxygen Sensor
A J/C 9 BR (Bank1 Sensor2) 10 8
J34 B−R B−R B−R B−R +B OX W W
EA2 3 EA4 E5 OX1B
J/C A B B 2
A 3 26
BR GR GR
EA4 E7 HT1B
4 E1 HT 1
W−B 1
BR W−B
E3 E03
BR
Battery EE ED EC EC
A14529

DI−35
HINT:
S If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air−fuel ratio is LEAN and DTC P0125 will be recorded. The CHE
ENG (MIL) then comes on.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0125) being output?
YES Go to relevant DTC chart (See page DI−21).
NO
2 Connect the hand−held tester, and read value for voltage output of oxygen sen-
sors (bank 1, 2 sensor 1).
PREPARATION:
(b) Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (above 75˚C (169˚F)).
CHECK:
Read voltage output of the oxygen sensors when the engine is suddenly raced.
HINT:
Perform quick racing to 4,000 rpm 3 times using the accelerator pedal.
OK:
Oxygen sensor output a RICH signal (0.45 V or more) at least once.
OK Go to step 9
NG
oxygen sensors (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) (See page IN−30).
OK

DI−36
4 Check whether misfire is occurred or not by monitoring DTC and data list.
NG Perform troubleshooting for misfire (See Pub.

No. RM588E on page DI−24).
OK
5 Check air induction system (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−1).
NG Repair or replace.
OK
6 Check fuel pressure (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−6).
NG Check and repair fuel pump, pressure regulator,

fuel pipe line and filter (See Pub. No. RM588E on
page FI−1).
OK
7 Check injector injection (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−22).
NG Replace injector.
OK
8 Check gas leakage on exhaust system.
OK

DI−37
Replace oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1).
9 Perform confirmation driving pattern.
GO
10 Is there DTC P0125 being output again?
YES Check and replace engine ECU

(See page IN−30).
NO
11 Did vehicle runs out of fuel in past?
NO Check for intermittent problems

(See page DI−17).
YES
DTC P0125 is caused by running out of fuel.
1 Are there any other codes (besides code 91) being output?
NO

DI−38
DI563−09
DTC P0133/21 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Response

(Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC P0153/28 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Response

(Bank 2 Sensor 1)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0125/91 on page DI−38.
S Oxygen sensor
Response time for oxygen sensor’s voltage output to change
P0133/21 S Air induction system
from rich to lean, or from lean to rich, is 1.1 sec. or more during
P0153/28 S Fuel pressure
idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)
S Injector
S Engine ECU
HINT:
S Bank 1 refers to bank that includes cylinder No.1.
S Bank 2 refers to bank that does not include cylinder No.1.
S Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closer to the engine body.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0125/91 on page DI−38.
HINT:
the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was run-
malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0133 or P0153) being output?
NO
2 Check output voltage of oxygen sensor during idling.
PREPARATION:
Warm up the oxygen sensor with the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approx. 90 sec.
DI−39
CHECK:
Use the hand−held tester to read the output voltage of the oxygen sensor during idling.
OK:
Oxygen sensor output voltage:
Alternates repeatedly between less than 0.4 V and more than 0.55 V (See the following table).
P18349
OK Go to step 7.
NG
oxygen sensor (See page IN−30).
OK
OK

fuel pipe line and filter (See Pub. No. RM588E
on page FI−1).

DI−40
OK
OK
Replace oxygen sensor.
7 Perform confirmation driving pattern (See page DI−38).
GO
8 Is there DTC P0133 or P0153 being output again?
NO Check for intermittent problems (See page

DI−17).
YES
Check and replace engine ECU (See page

IN−30).
1 Are there any other codes (besides code 21 or 28) being output?
NO

DI−41

DI−42
DI63Y−03
DTC P0171/25 System too Lean (A/F Lean Malfunction,

Bank 1)
DTC P0172/26 System too Rich (A/F Rich Malfunction,

Bank 1) (Europe)
DTC P0174/25 System too Lean (A/F Lean Malfunction,

Bank 2)
DTC P0175/26 System too Rich (A/F Rich Malfunction,

Bank 2) (Europe)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Fuel trim refers to the feedback compensation value compared to the basic injection time. Fuel trim includes
short−term fuel trim and long−term fuel trim.
Short−term fuel trim is the short−term fuel compensation used to maintain the air−fuel ratio at its ideal
theoretical value. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor indicates whether the air−fuel ratio is RICH or
LEAN compared to the ideal theoretical value, triggering a reduction in fuel volume if the air−fuel ratio is rich,
and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
Long−term fuel trim is overall fuel compensation carried out long−term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short−term fuel trim form the central value due to individual engine differences, wear overtime and
changes in the usage environment.
If both the short−term fuel trim and long−term fuel trim are LEAN or RICH beyond a certain value, it is de-
tected as a malfunction and the CHK ENG on the multi information display.
S Injector blockage
S Vacuum sensor
When air−fuel ratio feedback is stable after engine warming up, S Water temp. sensor
P0171/25
fuel trim is considerably in error on LEAN side S Fuel pressure
P0174/25
(2 trip detection logic) S Gas leakage on exhaust system
S Open or short in oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1)
S Engine ECU
S Vacuum sensor
When air−fuel ratio feedback is stable after engine warming up, S Ignition system
P0172/26
fuel trim is considerably in error on RICH side S Fuel pressure
P0175/26
S Engine ECU

DI−43
HINT:
S When the DTC P0171/25 or P0174/25 is recorded, the actual air−fuel ratio is on the LEAN side. When
DTC P0172/26 or P0175/26 is recorded, the actual air−fuel ratio is on the RICH side.
S If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air−fuel ratio is LEAN and DTC P0171/25 and P0174/25 is recorded.
The CHK ENG then comes on.
S If the total of the short−term fuel trim value and long−term fuel trim value is within ± 38 %, the system
is functioning normally.
S The oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) output voltage and the short−term fuel trim value can be read
using the hand−held tester.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0125 on page DI−38.
HINT:
malfunction.
OK
OK
3 Check air flow meter (See page FI−2) and water temperature sensor (See Pub.
No. RM588E on page FI−56).
OK

DI−44
4 Check for spark and ignition (See Pub. No. RM588E on page IG−1).
OK

fuel pipe line and filter.
OK
OK
7 Check output voltage of oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) during idling.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Used the hand−held tester to read the output voltage of the oxygen sensor during idling.
OK:
OK NG NG NG
1V
0.55 V
0.4 V
0V
A00292

DI−45
OK Go to step 9.
NG
oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) (See page IN−30).
OK
Go
10 Is there DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 being output again?
YES Check and replace engine ECU (See page

IN−30).
NO

DI−17).
YES
DTC P0171, P0172, P0174, or P0175 is caused by running out of fuel.

DI−46
OK
NG Check and repair fuel pump, fuel pipe line and

filter (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−1).
OK
OK
No. RM588E on page FI−56).
OK
5 Check for spark and ignition (See Pub. No. RM588E on page IG−1).
OK
DI−47
6 Does malfunction disappear when a good oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1)

installed?
YES Repair oxygen sensor.
NO

IN−30).

DI−48
DI63Z−03
DTC P0300/93 Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0301/93 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Misfire: The engine ECU uses the crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor to monitor
changes in the crankshaft rotation for each cylinder.
The engine ECU counts the number of times the engine speed change rate indicates that misfire has oc-
curred. And when the misfire rate equals or exceeds the count indicating that the engine condition has deteri-
orated, the CHK ENG lights up.
If the misfire rate is high enough and the driving conditions will cause catalyst overheating, the CHK ENG
blinks when misfiring occurs.
Misfiring of random cylinders is detected during any particular S Open or short in engine wire
200 or 1,000 revolutions S Connector connection
P0300/93 S Vacuum hose connection
1 trip detection logic: CHK ENG to brink
2 trip detection logic: CHK ENG to light up S Ignition system
S Injector
For any particular 200 revolutions of engine, misfiring is de- S Fuel pressure
P0301/93
tected which can cause catalyst overheating S Vacuum sensor
P0302/93
(This causes CHK ENG to blink) S Water temp. sensor
P0303/93
S Compression
C i pressure
P0304/93
For any particular 1,000 revolutions of engine, misfiring is de- S Valve clearance
P0305/93
tected which causes a deterioration in emissions S Valve timing
P0306/93
(2 trip detection logic) S Engine ECU

DI−49
HINT:
When codes for a misfiring cylinder is recorded repeatedly but no random misfire code is recorded, it indi-
cates that the misfires were detected and recorded at different times.
WIRING DIAGRAM
I12 J16 (*1)
Ignition Switch J39 (*2) J/C Engine ECU
7 I5 Injector No. 1 5
AM2 IG2 B−W B−W B−W B−W Y
EA2 2 E3 #10
7 6 A A 1
B−W I6 Injector No. 2 6
B−W B
9 7 E3 #20
2 1
W−R
IA1 IK1 B−W I7 Injector No. 3 1
(*1) (*2) B−W L
E2 #30
2 1
Engine Room No. 1 R/B B−W I8 Injector No. 4 2
B−W R
AM2 E2 #40
2 1
W−R
1 1 B−W I9 Injector No. 5 3
1 2
B−W W
E2 #50
2 1
B−W I10 Injector No. 6 4
B−W R−L
B−L E2 #60
2 1
21
W−B
E2 E01
31
Battery W−B
E2 E02
(*1): LHD
EC
(*2): RHD
A14778

(b) Record DTC and the freeze frame data.
(c) Use the hand−held tester to set to the Check (Test) Mode (See page DI−17).
(d) Drive the vehicle several times with the engine speed, load and its surrounding range shown with EN-
GINE SPD, CALC LOAD in the freeze frame data or MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the data list.
If you have no hand−held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simulated the first time.
Then repeat the simulation process again.
HINT:
In order to memorize DTC of misfire, it is necessary to drive around MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the
data list for the following period of time.
Engine Speed Time
Idling 3 minutes 30 seconds or more
1,000 rpm 3 minutes or more
2,000 rpm 1 minute 30 seconds or more
3,000 rpm 1 minute or more
(e) Check whether there is misfire or not by monitoring DTC and the freeze frame data. After that, record
them.
(f) Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds.
DI−50
HINT:
S If it is the case that DTC besides misfire is memorized simultaneously, first perform the troubleshooting
for them.
S When the vehicle is brought to the workshop and the misfire is not occurred, misfire can be confirmed
by reproducing the condition of freeze frame data. Also, after finishing the repair, confirm that there
is no misfire (See confirmation driving pattern).
S When either of SHORT FT #1, LONG FT #1, SHORT FT #2 or LONG FT #2 in the freeze frame data
is besides the range of ± 20 %, there is a possibility that the air−fuel ratio is inclining either to RICH
(−20 % or less) or LEAN (+20 % or more).
S When COOLANT TEMP in the freeze frame data is less than 80˚C (176˚F), there is a possibility of
misfire only during warmed up.
S In the case that misfire cannot be reproduced, the reason may be because of the driving with lack of
fuel, the use of improper fuel, a stain of the ignition plug, and etc.
1 Check wire harness, connector and vacuum hose in engine room.
CHECK:
(a) Check the connection conditions of wire harness and connector.
(b) Check the disconnection, piping and break of vacuum hose.
NG Repair or replace, then confirm that there is no

misfire (See confirmation driving pattern).
OK
2 Check spark plug and spark of misfiring cylinder (See Pub. No. RM588E on page
IG−1).
NG Replace or check ignition system (See Pub No.

RM588E on page IG−1).
OK

DI−51
3 Check voltage of engine ECU terminals for injector of failed cylinder.
ON PREPARATION:
#50 #40 #30#20 #10 (b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
#60
Measure the voltage between applicable terminals #10 − #60
of the engine ECU connectors and body ground.
(−) OK:
(+) Voltage: 9 − 14 V
BE6653
A02967 A03442
Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE

With the engine idling, check the waveform between terminals #10 − #60 and E01 of the engine ECU con-
nectors.
HINT:
The correct waveform is as shown.
Injector Signal Waveform
(Magnification)
10 V/ 10 V/
Division Division
GND GND
FI6588 FI6538 100 msec./Division (Idling) 1 msec./Division (Idling)

Injection duration A00064
OK Go to step 5.
NG

DI−52
4 Check resistance of injector of misfiring cylinder (See Pub. No. EM588E on page
FI−1).
OK
Check for open and short in harness and connector between injector and engine ECU (See page
IN−30).
5 Check fuel pressure (See Pub. No. EM588E on page FI−6).

fuel pipe line and filter (See Pub. No. RM588E on
page FI−1).
OK
6 Check injector injection (See Pub. No. EM588E on page FI−22).
OK
No. EM588E on page FI−56).
OK
Check compression pressure (See Pub. No. RM588E on page EM−5), valve clearance (See Pub.
No. RM588E on page EM−6) and valve timing (See Pub. No. RM588E on page EM−23).

DI−53
DI643−04
DTC P0420/94 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold

(Bank 1) (European spec. (Except Taiwan))
DTC P0430/94 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold

(Bank 2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The engine ECU compares the waveform of the oxygen sensor located before the catalyst with the waveform
of the oxygen sensor located after the catalyst to determine whether or not catalyst performance has deterio-
rated.
Air−fuel ratio feedback compensation keeps the waveform of the oxygen sensor before the catalyst repeat-
edly changing back and forth from rich to lean.
If the catalyst is functioning normally, the waveform of the oxygen sensor after the catalyst switches back
and forth between rich and lean much more slowly than the waveform of the oxygen sensor before the cata-
lyst.
But when both waveform change at a similar rate, it indicates that catalyst performance has deteriorated.
Waveform of Oxygen Sensor Normal Catalyst Waveform of Oxygen Sensor

before Catalyst after Catalyst
FI7081

After engine and catalyst are warmed up, and while vehicle is S Gas leakage on exhaust system
P0420/94
driven within set vehicle and engine speed range, waveform of S Oxygen sensor
P0430/94
oxygen sensors have same amplitude (2 trip detection logic) S Three−way catalytic converter

DI−54
CONFIRMATION ENGINE RACING PATTERN

Engine Speed
(3) (4)
2,500 − 3,000 rpm
(2)
Idling
(1)
IG SW OFF
Warmed up 3 min. or so Check Time
FI7132
(1)Connect the hand−held tester to the DLC3, or connect the probe of the oscilloscope between
terminals OX1A, OX1B, OX2A, and E1 of the engine ECU connectors.
(2) Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessories switched OFF until engine coolant tem-
perature is stable.
(3) Race the engine at 2,500 − 3,000 rpm for about 3 min.
(4) After confirming that the waveform of the oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) (OX1A, OX2A),
oscillate around 0.5 V during feedback to the engine ECU, check the waveform of the oxygen
sensor (bank 1 sensor 2) (OX1B).
HINT:
OX Signal Waveform (Oscilloscope)
If there is a malfunction in the system, the waveform of the oxy-
1.0 V gen sensor (bank 1 sensor 2) (OX1B) is almost the same as that
of the oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) (OX1A, OX2A) on the
left.
There are some cases where, even though a malfunction ex-
0V
ists, the CHK ENG may either light up or not light up.
200 msec./Division FI6514
HINT:
malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides P0420/94 or P0430/94) being output?
NO

DI−55
OK
3 Check oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−63).
OK
4 Check oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 2) (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−63).
OK
Replace three−way catalytic converter.

DI−56
DI85K−01
DTC P0443/94 Evaporative Emission Control System Purge

Control Vent Control Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
To reduce HC emissions, evaporated fuel from the fuel tank is routed through the charcoal canister to the
intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders.
The engine ECU changes the duty signal to the VSV for the EVAP so that the intake quantity of HC emissions
is appropriate for the driving conditions (engine load, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) after the engine is
wamed up.
S Open or short in VSV circuit for EVAP
P0443/94 Proper response to engine ECU command does not occur S VSV for EVAP
S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD:
Engine ECU
15 10
B−Y B−Y B−Y
IA2 E6 MREL
1 1 1
Engine
Room No. 1 R/B
2 5 1
EFI
EFI
Relay
1 3 2
1 1 1 J14 J4 V3
W−B J/C J/C
1 9 VSV for EVAP 7
B−R B−R B−R B−R B−R B−Y
II1 EA2 E3 PRG
A A B B 1 2
B−L A
J5
J/C
A W−B
Battery EE
A14526

DI−57
RHD:
Engine ECU
15 10
B−Y B−Y B−Y
IA2 E6 MREL
1 1 1
Engine
Room No. 1 R/B
2 5 1
EFI
EFI
Relay
1 3 2
1 1 1 J34 J28 V3
W−B J/C J/C
3 9 VSV for EVAP 7
B−R B−R B−R B−R B−R B−Y
IA3 EA2 E3 PRG
A A B B 1 2
B−L A
J29
J/C
A W−B
Battery EE
A14526
HINT:
malfunction.

DI−58
1 Connect hand−held tester and check operation of VSV for EVAP.
PREPARATION:
Air Air (a) Connect the hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand−held tes-
E E ter main switch ON.
F F (c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the hand−held tester.
CHECK:
Check the operation of the VSV when the VSV is operated by
VSV is ON VSV is OFF the hand−held tester.
A14470 OK:
VSV is ON:
Air from port E flows out through port F.
VSV is OFF:
Air from port E does not flows out through port F filter.
OK Check for intermittent problems (See page

DI−17).
NG
2 Check VSV for EVAP (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−51).
NG Replace VSV for EVAP.
OK
3 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay and
OK

IN−30).

DI−59
1 Check VSV for EVAP (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−51).
OK
2 Check voltage between terminal PRG of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
ON PREPARATION:
PRG
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminal PRG of the engine ECU
(+) (−) OK:
Voltage: 9 − 14 V
A14510
NG Check for open and short in harness and con-

nector between EFI main relay and engine ECU
(See page IN−30).
OK

IN−30).

DI−60
DI2P2−05
DTC P0505/33 Idle Control System Malfunction (European

spec.)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The idle speed is controlled by the Electric Throttle Control System (ETCS).
ETCS is composed of the throttle motor to operate the throttle valve, the magnetic clutch to connect the
throttle motor with the throttle valve, the throttle position sensor to detect the opening angle of the throttle
valve, the accelerator pedal position sensor to detect the accelerator pedal position, the engine ECU to con-
trol the ETCS and the one valve type throttle body.
The engine ECU controls the throttle motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly for the target
idle speed.
Idle speed continues to vary greatly from target speed S Air induction system
P0505
(2 trip detection logic) S Electric throttle control system
HINT:
ning or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air−fuel was ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the
malfunction.
1 Are there any other codes (besides P0505/33) being output?
NO
OK
Check electric throttle control system (See

Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−32).

DI−61
DI6ZR−02
DTC P0550/75 Power Steering Pressure Sensor Circuit

Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Engine ECU controls the idle speed the most appropriate according to the signal from the power steering
pressure sensor.
Condition (a) or (b) continues with more than 0.5 secs.: S Open in power steering pressure sensor circuit
P0550/75 (a) PNP < 0.28 V S Power steering oil pressure sensor
(b) PNP > 4.9 V S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
Power Steering Oil Pressure Sensor Engine ECU
2
3 L−Y VC
E3
B−Y 9
2
E3 PSP
18
1 BR E2
E2
A09073

DI−62
1 Check power steering oil pressure sensor.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the 3 dry batteries of 1.5 V in series.
(b) Connect the wire harness as shown in the illustration.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals Vout and GND.
(−)
OK:
180 kW
Power steering fluid pressure Voltage (V)
(+)
0 kPa (0 kgf/cm2, 0 psi) Approx. 0.45
A09071
3,500 kPa (36 kgf/cm2, 512 psi) Approx. 2.25
7,000 kPa (71 kgf/cm2, 1,010 psi) Approx. 4.05
NG Replace power steering oil pressure sensor.
OK
2 Check for open in harness and connector between engine ECU and power steer-
ing oil pressure sensor (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace engine ECU.

DI−63
DI64F−03
DTC P1346/18 VVT Sensor/Camshaft Position Sensor Cir-

cuit Range/Performance Problem (Bank 1)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0335/12, 13 of Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−68.
S Mechanical system (Jumping teeth of timing belt, belt
Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and camshaft
P1346 stretched)
position sensor signal (2 trip detection logic)
S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0335/12, 13 of Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−68.
HINT:
S Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0335/12, 13 first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the following
mechanical systems.
1 Check valve timing (Check for loose and jumping teeth of timing belt) (See Pub.
No. RM588E on page EM−23).
NG Adjust valve timing (Repair or replace timing

belt).
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−64
DI088−13
DTC P1520/52 Stop Light Switch Signal Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This signal is used to detect when the brakes have been applied. The STP signal voltage is the same as
the voltage supplied to the stop lights.
The STP signal is used mainly to control the fuel cut−off engine speed (The fuel cut−off engine speed is re-
duced slightly when the vehicle is braking.).
S Short in stop light switch signal circuit
The stop light switch does not turn off even once the vehicle is
P1520/52 S Stop light switch
driven (2 trip detection logic)
S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
J7 (*1)
S12
Driver Side J/B J39 (*2) Engine ECU
Stop Light
J/C
1 1 STOP 8 Switch 6
W G−W G−W
1A 1K 1H E5 STP
2 1 (*2) B (*1) A A (*1) B (*2)
(*2) (*1) (*1) A
W (*2) B
Engine Room No. 1 R/B G−W
ALT
1 1 IC3 9
2 1
G−W L4
Light Failure
B Sensor
(*1) J20
B−L G−W
(*2) J43 ST+1
B 9
J/C To
B
Stop Light
G
ST+2
Battery 10
(*1): LHD
(*2): RHD
A14528

DI−65
HINT:
the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was run-
malfunction.
1 Check operation of stop light.
CHECK:
Check if the stop lights go on and off normally when the brake pedal is operated and released.
NG Check and repair stop light circuit.
OK
2 Check STP signal.
ON When using hand−held tester:

PREPARATION:
Brake Pedal Brake Pedal (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and hand−held tester main
Depressed Released
switch ON.
CHECK:
Read the STP signal on the hand−held tester.
OK:
ON Brake pedal is depressed: STP ... ON
Brake pedal is released: STP ... OFF
STP When not using TOYOTA hand−held tester:
PREPARATION:
Turn the ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
Check voltage between terminal STP of the engine ECU and
body ground.
(−) (+) OK:
BE6653
Q06993 Brake pedal Voltage
BE6653
A01961 A02299
Depressed 7.5 − 14 V
Released Below 1.5 V

DI−17).
NG

DI−66
3 Check harness and connector between engine ECU and stop light switch (See
page IN−30).
OK

IN−30).

DI−67
DI64K−04
DTC P1651/96 VSV for ACIS Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit opens and closes the Intake Air Control Valve (IACV) in response to the engine load in order to
increase the intake efficiency (ACIS: Acoustic Control Induction System).
When the engine speed is 4,300 rpm or less and the throttle valve opening angle is 30˚ or more, the ECM
turns the VSV ON and closes the IACV. At all other times, the VSV is OFF, so the IACV is open.
Throttle Valve IACV Closed (VSV : ON)
Vacuum
IACV Actuator
Tank
VSV
Opening Angle
Engine Speed
Throttle Valve
30˚
Throttle
ECM
Position
Throttle Valve
4,300 rpm
Engine Speed A00734

Proper response to engine ECU command does not occur
P1651/96 S VSV for ACIS
(2 trip detection logic)
S Engine ECU

DI−68
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
LHD: 15 10
B−Y B−Y B−Y
IA2 E6 MREL
1 1 1
2 Engine
5 1
EFI
Room No. 1 R/B
EFI Relay
1 3 2
1 1 1 J14 J4 V2
J/C J/C VSV for ACIS
1 9 5
B−R W−B B−R B−R B−R B−R B−L
II1 EA2 E2 ACIS
A A B B 2 1
B−L A
J5
J/C
A W−B
EE
Battery
RHD: Engine ECU

15 10
B−Y B−Y B−Y
IA2 E6 MREL
1 1 1
Engine
2 5 1 Room No. 1 R/B
EFI
EFI Relay
1 3 2
1 1 1 J34 J28 V2
J/C J/C VSV for ACIS
W−B 3 9 5
B−R B−R B−R B−R B−R B−L
IA3 EA2 E2 ACIS
A A B B 2 1
B−L A
J29
J/C
A W−B
Battery EE
A15188

DI−69
LEXUS hand−held tester:
1 Connect LEXUS hand−held tester, and check operation of VSV for ACIS.
ON PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the LEXUS hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the LEXUS hand−
VSV is ON VSV is OFF held tester main switch ON.
(c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the LEXUS hand−held
Air
Air tester.
CHECK:
E E Check the operation of the the VSV when the VSV is operated
by the LEXUS hand−held tester.
F OK:
F Air Filter VSV is ON:
VSV is OFF:
BE6653
FI7073 FI7074 A00307 Air from port E flows out through air filter.
OK Check for vacuum tank.
NG
2 Check VSV for ACIS (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−53).
NG Replace VSV for ACIS.
OK
3 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay
(Marking: EFI) and ECM (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN−30).

DI−70
OBD II scan tool (excluding LEXUS hand−held tester):
1 Check VSV for ACIS (See Pub. No. RM588E on page FI−53).
OK
2 Check voltage between terminal ACIS of ECM connector and body ground.
ON PREPARATION:
ACIS (a) Remove the engine room ECM cover and hood.
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminal ACIS of the ECM con-
nector and body ground.
(−) OK:
(+) Voltage: 9 − 14 V
BE6653
A02974 A03547

nector between EFI main relay (Marking: EFI)
and ECM (See page IN−30).
OK
3 Check for vacuum tank.
OK
Check and replace ECM (See page IN−30).

DI−71
DIAGNOSTICS − ENGINE (3UZ−FE)
ENGINE (3UZ−FE)
DI4DW−14

When using hand−held tester, troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure on the following page.

1 Customer Problem Analysis P. DI−72 pages for detailed explanations.
2 Connect the hand−held tester to DLC3 P. DI−73

If the display indicates a communication fault in the tool, inspect DLC3 P. DI−73
3 Check DTC and Freezed Frame Data (Precheck)

Record or Print DTC and Freezed Frame Data P. DI−73
4 Clear DTC and Freezed Frame Data P. DI−73
5 Visual Inspection
6 Setting the Check (Test) Mode Diagnosis P. DI−73

If the engine does not start perform steps 10 and 12 first
Malfunction Malfunction does not occur.
occurs. 8 Symptom Simulation P IN−20.

Normal Malfunction code.
12 Problem Symptom Table P. DI−93
14 Parts Inspection 13 Circuit Inspection P. DI−95 − DI−199
End

DI−72
DI4DX−02

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s
Name
Customer’s Name Model and Model

Year
Driver’s Name Frame No.
Data Vehicle
Brought in Engine Model
km
License No. Odometer Reading miles
Engine does Engine does not crank No initial combustion No complete combustion
not Start
Difficult to Engine cranks slowly

Start Other
Problem Symptoms
Incorrect first idle Idling rpm is abnormal High ( rpm) Low ( rpm)
Poor Idling
Rough idling Other
Poor Hesitation Back fire Muffler explosion (after−fire) Surging

Drivability Knocking Other
Soon after starting After accelerator pedal depressed

Engine Stall After accelerator pedal released During A/C operation
Shifting from N to D Other
Others
Datas Problem
Occurred
Constant Sometimes ( times per day/month) Once only
Problem Frequency
Other
Weather Fine Cloudy Rainy Snowy Various/Other
Outdoor
Hot Warm Cool Cold (approx. ˚F/ ˚C)
Problem Occurs
Condition When
Temperature
Highway Suburbs Inner City Uphill Downhill

Place
Rough road Other
Engine Temp. Cold Warming up After Warming up Any temp. Other
Starting Just after starting ( min.) Idling Racing

Engine Operation Driving Constant speed Acceleration Deceleration
A/C switch ON/OFF Other
Condition of check engine warning light

Remains on Sometimes light up Does not light up
(CHK ENG)
Normal mode Normal Malfunction code(s) (code )

(Precheck) Freezed frame data ( )
DTC Inspection
Normal Malfunction code(s) (code )
Check Mode
Freezed frame data ( )

DI−73
DI7O5−03
PRE−CHECK
1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
(a) Description
FI2547
S Euro−OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s
warning light on the instrument panel when the
control system / components or in the power train
check engine warning light lighting up when a mal-
function is detected, the applicable Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTC) prescribed by ISO 15031−4
are recorded in the engine ECU memory (See page
DI−84). If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 con-
secutive trips, the check engine warning light goes
off automatically but the DTCs remain recorded in
the engine ECU memory.
Hand−Held Tester S To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or
hand−held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3)
on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand−held
tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and
gine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD
scan tool’s instruction book.)
DLC3 I12054 turer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must
turer within the prescribed limits. (See DTC chart on
page DI−84)

DI−74

once or momentarily. (hand−held tester only) (See
step 2)
S *2 trip detection logic: When a malfunction is 1st de-
tected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the
engine ECU memory. (1st trip) If the same malfunc-
tion is detected again during the second drive test,
this 2nd detection causes the check engine warning
light to light up. (2nd trip)
(However, the IG switch must be turned OFF be-
tween the 1st trip and the 2nd trip.)
when a misfire (DTCs P0300 − P0308) or fuel trim
malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175)
or other malfunction (first malfunction only), is de-
tected.
conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine
coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, ve-
hicle speed, etc.) when the malfunction is detected,
when troubleshooting it is useful for determining
whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the en-
gine warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio lean or rich,
Priorities for troubleshooting:
If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the
applicable DTC chart, these should be followed.
If no instructions are given troubleshoot DTCs according to the
following priorities.
(1) DTCs other than fuel trim malfunction (DTCs
P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175) and misfire (DTCs
P0300 − P0308).
(2) Fuel trim malfunction (DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174,
P0175).
(3) Misfire (DTCs P0300 − P0308).

DI−75
(b) Check the DLC3.

The vehicle’s engine ECU uses the ISO 9141−2 commu-
nication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 complies with ISO 15031−03 and matches the ISO
9 10 1112 1314 15 16 9141−2 format.
DLC3
A04550
Terminal No. Connection / Voltage or Resistance Condition

7 Bus Line / Pulse generation During transmission
4 Chassis Ground / « Body Ground 1 W or less Always
16 Battery Positive / « Body Ground 9 − 14 V Always
HINT:
If your display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE”
hand−held tester to DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and
operated the hand−held tester, there is a problem on the vehicle
side or tool side.
S If communication is still not possible is when the tool is
connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in
the tool itself, so consult the Service Debarment listed in
the tool,s instruction manual.

(a) Check the check engine warning light.
(1) The check engine warning light (CHK ENG) comes
on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the en-
gine is not running.
HINT:
If the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) does not light up,
troubleshoot the combination meter.
FI2547 (2) When the engine is started, the check engine warn-
ing light should go off. If the lamp remains on, the
diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or ab-
normality in the system
(b) Check the DTC, using hand−held tester.
NOTICE:
to check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freezed frame
data recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes,
always check the DTCs and freezed frame data, and note
them down.
DI−76

(3) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand−
held tester main switch ON.
freezed frame data; note them down. (For operating
instructions, see the hand−held tester,s instruction
book.)
DTCs.
(c) Check the DTC for ETCS
HINT:
If the ECT SNOW indicator does not light up, troubleshoot the
combination meter (See page BE−4).
(2)Using SST, connect between terminals 13 (TC) and

4 (CG) of the DLC3.
SST 09843−18040
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 1112 1314 15 16
DLC3
A04550
(3) Read the DTC from the ECT snow indicator the
combination meter.
HINT:
If a DTC is not output, check the TC terminal circuit (See page
DI−216).
(4) Check details of the malfunction using the DTC
chart on page DI−84.
A07110 (TC) and 4 (CG) and turn off the display.

DI−77
Nomal
HINT:
0.26 sec. from the smaller numbered code and continue in order to the
lager.
ON ON ON ON (d) Clear the DTC.
OFFOFFOFF actions.
(1) Operating the hand−held tester to erase the codes.
0.26 sec. (See the hand−held tester’s instruction book for op-
Code No.21 and 31 erating instructions.)
0.5 sec. 1.5 sec. (2) Disconnecting the battery terminals of EFI and
4.5 sec. 4.5 sec. ECTS fuses.
2.5
NOTICE:
sec.
ON If the hand−held tester switches the engine ECU from nor-
OFF mal mode to check mode or vice−versa, or if the ignition
0.5 sec.
Repeat switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during check
One Cycle
Start (e) Clear the DTC.
FI0294
A05913 A09389 The following actions will erase the DTCs and freezed
frame data.
S Operating the hand−held tester to erase the
codes. (See the hand−held tester’s instruc-
tion book for operating instructions.)
S Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI
fuse.
NOTICE:
3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (Check (Test) Mode)
HINT:
(a) Check the DTC.
S Battery positive voltage 11V or more.
S Transmission in ”P” or ”N” position.
S Air conditioning switched OFF.
(2) Turn ignition switch OFF.
(4) Connect the hand−held tester to DLC3 on the at the
lower left of the instrument panel.
(5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the push the
hand−held tester ON.

DI−78
(6) Switch the hand−held tester normal mode to check

(test) mode. (Check that the check engine warning
light (CHK ENG) flashes.)
Flashing (7) Start the engine. (The check engine warning (CHK
ON ENG) light goes out after the engine start.)
OFF (8) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction de-
0.13 Second NOTICE:
FI3605 Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the
DTC, etc.
HINT:
(10) After checking the DTCs, inspect the applicable cir-
cuit.
Interface Box (b) Using break−out−box and hand−held tester

Vehicle Harness (1) Hook up the break−out−box and hand−held tester
to the vehicle.
(2) Read the engine ECU input/output values following
Engine the prompts on the tester screen.
ECU HINT:
Hand−held tester has a ”Snapshot” function. This records the
measured values and is effective in the diagnosis of intermittent
Break−Out−Box N09348 problems. Please refer to the hand−held tester/break−out−box
operator,s manual for further details.
4. FAIL−SAFE CHART
If any of the following codes is recorded, the engine ECU enters fail−safe mode.
DTC No. Fail−Safe Operation Fail−Safe Deactivation Conditions
P0100 S Ignition timing fixed at 5˚ BTDC Returned to normal condition
P0110 Intake air temp. is fixed at 20˚C (68˚F) Returned to normal condition
P0115 Water temp. is fixed at 80˚(176˚F) Returned to normal condition
The following condition must be repeated at least 2 times
consecutively
P0120 VTA is fixed at 0˚
When closed throttle position switch is ON:
0.1 V % VTA and 0.95 V
P0325 Max. timing retardation IG switch OFF

DI−79
High RPM for cut is prohibited Returned to normal condition

P0500
ISC control prohibited
P1300
P1305
P1310 Fuel cut Feturned to normal condition
P1315
P1320
P1325
P1330
P1340
5. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

HAND−HELD TESTER only:
By putting the vehicle’s engine ECU in check (test) mode, 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of 2 trip
detection logic and sensitivity to detect open circuits is increased. This makes it easier to detect intermittent
problems.
(1) Clear the DTC (See step 3.).
(2) Set the check (test) mode (See step 3.).
(3) Perform a simulation test (See page IN−20).
(4) Check the connector and terminal (See page IN−30).
(5) Check the visual check and contact pressure (See page IN−30).
(6) Handle the connector (See page IN−30).
6. BASIC INSPECTION
When the malfunction code is not confirmed in the DTC check, troubleshooting should be carried out in the
order for all possible circuits to be considered as the causes of the problems. In many cases, by carrying
out the basic engine check shown in the following flow chart, the location causing the problem can be found
quickly and efficiently. Therefore, use of this check is essential in engine troubleshooting.
1 Is battery positive voltage 11V or more when engine is stopped ?
NO Charge or replace battery.
YES
2 Is engine cranked ?
NO Proceed to problem table on page DI−93.
YES

DI−80
3 Does engine start ?
NO Go to step 7.
YES
4 Check air filter.
PREPARATION:
Remove the air filter.
Outside CHECK:
Visually check that the air filter is not excessively dirty or oily.
HINT:
If necessary, clean the filter with compressed air. First blow from
inside thoroughly, then blow from outside of filter.
Inside
P00495
OK
5 Check engine idle speed (See page EM−11).
NG Proceed to problem symptoms table on page

DI−93.
OK
6 Check ignition timing (See page EM−9).
NG Proceed to page IG−1 and continue to trouble-

shoot.
OK

DI−81
Proceed to problem symptoms table on page

DI−93.
7 Check fuel pressure (See page FI−6).
NG Proceed to page FI−6, and continue to trouble-

shoot.
OK
8 Check for spark (See page IG−1).
NG Proceed to page IG−1 and continue to trouble-

shoot.
OK
Proceed to problem symptoms table on page

DI−93.
7. ENGINE OPERATING CONDITION

NOTICE:
The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values, so a vehicle may still be
normal even if its value from those listed here. So do not decide whether a part is faulty or not solely
according to the ”Normal Condition” here.
Hand−held tester display Measurement Item Normal Condition*
Fuel System Bank 1
Fuel System Bank 2
Calculator Load:
Idling: 13.9 − 19.7 %
CALC LOAD Current intake air volume as a proportion of max.
Racing without load (2,500rpm): 13.9 − 19.7 %
intake air volume
COOLANT TEMP. Water Temp. Sensor Value After warming up: 80 − 95˚C (176 − 203˚F)
ENGINE SPD Engine Speed Idling: 700 − 800 rpm
DI−82
VEHICLE SPD Vehicle Speed Vehicle stopped: 0 km/h (0 mph)

Ignition Advance:
IGN ADVANCE Idling: BTDC 5 − 15˚
Ignition Timing of Cylinder No. 1
INTAKE AIR Intake Air Temp. Sensor Value Equivalent to ambient temp.
Idling: 4.5 − 6.3 gm/sec.
MAF Air Flow Rate Through Air Flow Meter Racing without load (2,500 rpm):
14.8 − 21.1 gm/sec.
Voltage Output of Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle fully closed: 8 − 20 %
THROTTLE POS Calculated as a percentage:
Throttle fully open: 64 − 96 %
0 V ® 0 %, 5 V ® 100 %
Voltage Output of Oxygen Sensor
O2S B1, S1 Idling: 0.1 − 0.9 V
Bank 1, Sensor 1
Voltage Output of Oxygen Sensor Driving (50 km/h, 31 mph):

O2S B1, S2
Bank 1, Sensor 2 0.1 − 0.9 V
Voltage Output of Oxygen Sensor
O2S B2, S1 Idling: 0.1 − 0.9 V
Bank 2, Sensor 1
Voltage Output of Oxygen Sensor Driving (50 km/h, 31 mph):

O2S B2, S2
Bank 2, Sensor 2 0.1 − 0.9 V
O2FT B1, S1 0 ± 20 %

O2FT B2, S1 0 ± 20 %
Distance since activation of check engine warn-
MIL ON RUN DIST When there is no DTC: 0 km (0 mile)
ing light
Total number of ignition for every 1,000 revolu-

IGNITION 0 − 2,000
tions
CYL#1 − #8 Abnormal revolution variation for each cylinder 0%
MISFIRE RPM Engine RPM for first misfire range Misfire 0: 0 rpm
MISFIRE LOAD Engine load for first misfire range Misfire 0: 0 g/r
INJECTOR Fuel injection time for cylinder No.1 Idling: 1.8 − 3.2 ms
STARTER SIG Starter Signal Cranking: ON
A/C SIG A/C Switch Signal A/C ON: ON
PNP SW Park/Neutral Position Switch Signal P or N position: ON
CTP SW Closed Throttle Position Throttle fully closed: ON
STOP LIGHT SW Stop Light Switch Signal Stop light switch ON: ON
Fuel Cut Idle: Fuel cut when throttle valve fully
FC IDL Fuel cut operating: ON
closed, during deceleration
FC TAU Fuel Cut TAU: Fuel cut during very light load Fuel cut operating: ON
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Signal Idling: ON
EVAP VSV EVAP VSV Signal VSV operating: ON
Throttle fully closed: 2.0 − 2.9 V
THROTTLE POS #2 Throttle position sensor No.2 output voltage
Throttle fully open: 4.6 − 5.0 V
ACCEL POS #1
ACCEL POS #2
THROTTLE TARGET Target position of throttle valve Idling: 0.4 − 1.1 V

DI−83

DUTY Throttle motor opening duty ratio When accelerator pedal is depressed,
THROTL CLS DUTY Throttle motor closed duty ratio When accelerator pedal is quick released,
THROTTLE MOT Whether or not throttle motor control is permitted Idling: ON
Whether or not electric throttle control system
+BM Idling: ON
power is inputted
Whether or not accelerator pedal position sensor

ACCEL IDL POS Idling: ON
is detecting idle
Whether or not throttle position sensor is
THROTTLE IDL POS Idling: ON
detecting idle

THROTTLE INITIAL Throttle fully closed learning value 0.4 − 0.8 V
ACCEL LEARN VALUE Accelerator fully closed learning value 0.4 − 0.8 V
THROTTLE MOT Throttle motor control current Idling: 0 − 3.0 A

Oxygen Sensor Lean Rich Bank 1, Sensor 1
O2 LR B1, S1 Response time for oxygen sensor output to Idling after warming up: 0 − 1,000 msec.
Oxygen Sensor Lean Rich Bank 2, Sensor 1
O2 LR B2, S1 Response time for oxygen sensor output to Idling after warming up: 0 − 1,000 msec.
Oxygen Sensor Rich Lean Bank 1, Sensor 1
O2 RL B1, S1 Response time for oxygen sensor output to Idling after warming up: 0 − 1,000 msec.
Oxygen Sensor Rich Lean Bank 1, Sensor 1
O2 RL B2, S1 Response time for oxygen sensor output to Idling after warming up: 0 − 1,000 msec.
*: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”, it means the shift lever is at P position, the A/C switch
is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF.

DI−84
DI1L4−10

HINT:
Parameters listed in the chart may not be exactly the same as your reading due to the type of instrument
or other factors.
If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check in the check mode, check the circuit for the code
listed in the table below. For details of each code, turn to the page referred to under the ’’See page’’ for the
respective ’’DTC No.’’ in the DTC chart.
ENGINE TROUBLE CODES
*
DTC No.
(See page)
(MIL)
P0100 Mass Air Flow Circuit Malfunc-
S Air flow meter f f
(DI−95) tion
S Engine ECU
P0110 Intake Air Temp. Circuit Malfunc-
S Intake air temp. sensor f f
(DI−99) tion
S Engine ECU
P0115
Water Temp. Circuit Malfunction S Water temp. sensor f f
(DI−103)
S Engine ECU
P0116 Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit S Engine coolant temp. sensor
f f
(DI−107) Range/Performance Probrem S Cooling system
S Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit
P0120 Throttle Position Sensor Circuit
S Engine ECU
P0121 Throttle Position Sensor Circuit
(DI−112) Range/Performance Problem
S Oxygen Sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1)
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temp. for
S Fuel pressure f f
(DI−113) Closed Loop Fuel Control
S Injector
S Engine ECU
S Oxygen sensor
P0130 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunc- S Air induction system
f f
(DI−118) tion (Bank 1 Sensor 1) S Fuel pressure
S Injector
S Engine ECU

S Oxygen sensor
P0133 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Re- S Air induction system
f f
(DI−122) sponse (Bank 1 Sensor 1) S Fuel pressure
S Injector
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in heater circuit of oxygen sensor

P0135 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit
S Oxygen sensor heater f f
(DI−125) Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
S Engine ECU
P0136 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunc- S Open or short in oxygen sensor circuit
f f
(DI−127) tion (Bank 1 Sensor 2) S Oxygen sensor

S Same as DTC No. P0135 f f

DI−85
P0150 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunc-

(DI−118) tion (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
P0153 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Re-
S Same a DTC No. P0130 f f
(DI−122) sponse (Bank 2 Sensor 1)

P0156 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunc-
(DI−127) tion (Bank 2 Sensor 2)

S Injector blockage
S Vacuum Sensor
P0171 System too Lean (A/F Lean Mal-
S Fuel pressure f f
S Engine ECU
S Vacuum sensor
S Ignition system
P172 System too Rich (A/F Rich Mal-
S Fuel pressure f f
S Engine ECU
P0174 System too Lean (A/F Lean Mal-
P0175 System too Rich (A/F Rich Mal-

P0300 Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire
(DI−134) Detected
P0301
(DI−134)
P0302 S Open or short engine wire
Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected S Connector connection
(DI−134)
S Vacuum
V hose
h connection
ti
P0303
Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected S Ignition system
(DI−134)
S Injector
P0304 S Fuel pressure
Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected f f
(DI−134) S Vacuum sensor
P0305 S Water temp. sensor
Cylinder 5 Misfire Detected S Compression pressure
(DI−134)
S Valve
V l clearance
l
P0306
Cylinder 6 Misfire Detected S Valve timing
(DI−134)
S Engine ECU
P0307
(DI−134)
P0308
(DI−134)
(DI−140) tion (Bank 1)
S Engine ECU

DI−86

(DI−140) tion (Bank 2)
S Engine ECU
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor Cir- S Crankshaft position sensor
f f
(DI−144) cuit Malfunction (NE Signal) S Crankshaft timing pulley
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit

P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit S Camshaft position sensor
f f
(DI−146) Malfunction (G Signal) S Intake camshaft
S Engine ECU

P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Be-
S Oxygen sensor f f
P0430 Catalyst System Efficiency Be-
Evaporative Emission Control S Open or short in VSV circuit for EVAP
P0443
System Purge Control Vent Con- S VSV for EVAP f f
(DI−151)
trol Malfunction S Engine ECU
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunc-
S Transmission output speed sensor f f
(DI−154) tion
S Engine ECU
P0505 S Air induction system
Idle Control System Malfunction f f
(DI−157) S Electric throttle control system
S Open or short in accelerator pedal position sensor circuit

P1120 Accelerator Pedal Position Sen-
(DI−108) sor Circuit Malfunction
S Engine ECU
P1121 Accelerator Pedal Position Sen-
(DI−112) sor Range/Performance Problem
S Open or short in throttle control motor circuit

P1125 Throttle Control Motor Circuit
S Throttle control motor f f
S Engine ECU
P1127 ETCS Actuator Power Source S Open in ETCS power source circuit
f f
(DI−166) Circuit Malfunction S Engine ECU
P1128 Throttle Control Motor Lock Mal- S Throttle control motor

f f
(DI−168) function S Throttle body
P1129 Electric Throttle Control System S Electric throttle control system
f f
(DI−170) Malfunction S Engine ECU
S Ignition system
P1300 S Open or short in IGF or IGT1 circuit from igniter to engine ECU
(DI−171) S Igniter
S Engine ECU
S Ignition system
S Engine ECU
S Ignition system
S Engine ECU

DI−87
S Ignition system
S Engine ECU
S Ignition system
S Engine ECU
S Ignition system
S Engine ECU
S Ignition system
S Open or short in IGF1 and IGT7 circuit from No.7 ignition coil
P1330
Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.7) with igniter to Engine ECU f f
(DI−171)
S No.7 ignition coil with igniter
S Engine ECU
S Ignition system
S Open or short in IGF2 and IGT8 circuit from No.8 ignition coil
P1340
Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.8) with igniter to Engine ECU f f
(DI−171)
S No.8 ignition coil with igniter
S Engine ECU
Crankshaft Position Sensor Cir-
P1335 S Crankshaft position sensor
cuit Malfunction (During engine − f
(DI−178) S Crankshaft timing pulley
running)
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in VVT sensor circuit

P1345 VVT Sensor Circuit Malfunction
S VVT sensor f f
(DI−179) (Bank 1)
S Engine ECU
VVT Sensor/Camshaft Position S Mechanical system (Jumping teeth of timing belt, belt
P1346
Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- stretched) f f
(DI−181)
mance Problem (Bank 1) S Engine ECU
S Valve timing
P1349 VVT System Malfunction (Bank S OCV
f f
(DI−182) 1) S VVT controller assembly
S Engine ECU
VVT Sensor/Camshaft Position

P1350
Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank S Same as DTC No. P1345 f f
(DI−179)
2)
VVT Sensor/Camshaft Position
P1351
Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- S Same as DTC No. P1346 f f
(DI−181)
mance Problem (Bank 2)
P1354 VVT System Malfunction (Bank
(DI−182) 2)
S Short in stop light switch signal circuit

P1520 Stop Light Switch Signal Mal-
S Stop light switch f f
(DI−189) function
S Engine ECU
P1600 S Open in back up power source circuit
Engine ECU BATT Malfunction f f
(DI−192) S Engine ECU
P1633 Engine ECU Malfunction (ETCS

S Engine ECU f f
(DI−194) Circuit)
S Body ECU
P1645
Body ECU Malfunction S A/C ECU − −
(DI−195)
S Communication bus

DI−88

P1651
VSV for ACIS Circuit Malfunction S VSV for ACIS f f
(DI−196)
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in OCV circuit
P1656 OCV Circuit Malfunction (Bank
S OCV f f
(DI−199) 1)
S Engine ECU
S Open or short in OCV circuit (bank 2)
P1663 OCV Circuit Malfunction (Bank
S OCV (bank 2) f f
(DI−194) 2)
S Engine ECU
P1780 Park/Neutral Position Switch
S Neutral start switch f f
S Engine ECU
S Key
B2795/99 Unmatch Key Code − f
S Unregistered key inserted before?
S Key
S Transponder key coil
No Communication in
B2796/99 S Amplifier − f
Immobilizer System
S Wireharness
S Engine ECU
Communication Malfunction S Communication contests
B2797/99 − f
No.1 S Unregistered key inserted before?
S Key
Communication Malfunction
B2798/99 S Amplifier − f
No.2
S Wireharness
S Engine ECU
*: f ... CHK ENG is indicated. − ... CHK ENG is not indicated.

ETCS TROUBLE CODES (When not use hand−held tester)
*
DTC No.
(See page)
(MIL)
21 Throttle Control Motor Circuit
23 ETCS Actuator Power Source

(DI−166) Circuit Malfunction
31 Throttle Control Motor Lock Mal-
(DI−168) function
32 Electric Throttle Control System

33
ECU Malfunction (ETCS) S Same as DTC No. P1633 f f
(DI−194)
*: f ... CHK ENG is indicated.

DI−89
DI2C2−04
PARTS LOCATION
VVT Sensor (Bank 2)

VVT Sensor (Bank 1)
Oxygen Sensor (Bank 2 Sensor 2)
Ignition Coil with Ignitor
Combination Meter
Injector Fuel Pump ECU

Throttle Position Sensor
VSV for EVAP Fuel Pump
Throttle Control Motor
Air Flow Meter
DLC3
Neutral Start Switch
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor

OCV (Bank 2)
Water Temp. Sensor Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

Knock Sensor 1
VSV for
AICS Knock Sensor 2
Crankshaft Position
Sensor OCV (Bank 1)
Camshaft Position
Sensor
A14472

DI−90
DI63M−02
TERMINALS OF ECU
E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
A14471
Symbols (Terminals No.) Wiring Color Condition STD Voltage (V)

BATT (E6−4) − E1 (E3−7) B−Y « BR
Al
Always 9 − 14
+BM (E6−7) − E1 (E3−7) V−Y « BR
IGSW (E6−17) − E1 (E3−7) B−O « BR
+B (E6−6) − E1 (E3−7) B−R « BR IG switch ON 9 − 14
+B1 (E6−5) − E1 (E3−7) B−R « BR
VC (E2−23) − ETA (E2−22) L−R « BR IG switch ON 4.5 − 5.5
IG switch ON, Accelerator pedal fully closed 0.4 − 1.0
VTA (E2−25)
(E2 25) − ETA (E2−22)
(E2 22) Y « BR
IG switch ON, Accelerator pedal fully open 3.2 − 4.8
IG switch ON, Accelerator pedal fully closed 2.0 − 2.9
VTA2 (E2−24)
(E2 24) − ETA (E2−22)
(E2 22) B « BR
IG switch ON, Accelerator pedal fully open 4.6 − 5.1
VCPA (E5−35) − EPA (E5−34) B « BR IG switch ON 4.5 − 5.5
VPTK (E5−27) − EPTK (E5−26) L−R « BR IG switch ON 4.5 − 5.5
IG switch ON
0.3 − 0.9
Accelerator pedal fully closed
VPA (E5
(E5−33)
33) − EPTK (E5
(E5−26)
26) L « BR
IG switch ON
3.2 − 4.8
Accelerator pedal fully open
IG switch ON
1.8 − 2.7
Accelerator pedal fully closed
VPA2 (E5−32)
(E5 32) − EPA (E5
(E5−34)
34) B « BR
IG switch ON
4.7 − 5.1
Accelerator pedal fully open
VG (E4−27) − EVG (E4−26) L−Y « G−W Idling, P or N position, A/C switch OFF 0.5 − 3.0
THA (E4−32) − ETHA (E4−31) P−L « BR Idling, Intake air temp. 20˚C (68˚F) 0.5 − 3.4
THW (E4−24) − ETHW (E4−25) R−L « BR Idling, water temp. 80˚C (176˚F) 0.2 −1.0
STA (E6−12) − E1 (E3−7) B « BR Shift lever position P or N position, ignition switch START 6.0 or more
#1 (E2−15) − E01 (E4−2) L « W−B

#2 (E4−17) − E01 (E4−2) W « W−B IG switch ON 9 − 14
#3 (E2−14) − E01 (E4−2) W « W−B
# (E4−16)
#4 (E 16) − E01 (E4−2)
(E 2) G«W W−B
B
#5 (E2−13) − E01 (E4−2) G « W−B
#6 (E4−15) − E01 (E4−2) BR « W−B Pulse generation
Idling
#7 (E2−12) − E01 (E4−2) BR « W−B (See page DI−134)
#8 (E4−14) − E01 (E4−2) L « W−B

DI−91
IGT1 (E2−17) − E1 (E3−7) G−W « BR

IGT2 (E4−13) − E1 (E3−7) L−R « BR
IGT3 (E2−16) − E1 (E3−7) L « BR
IGT4 (E4−12) − E1 (E3−7) R « BR Pulse generation
Idling
IGT5 (E2−27) − E1 (E3−7) G « BR (See page DI−171)
IGT6 (E4−11) − E1 (E3−7) R−L « BR
IGT7 (E2−26) − E1 (E3−7) P−L « BR
IGT8 (E4−10) − E1 (E3−7) B−W « BR
IF1L (E4−6) − E1 (E3−7) LG « BR IG switch ON 4.5 − 5.5

IF2L (E4
(E4−4)
4) − E1 (E3−7)
(E3 7) G−B
G B « BR
IF1R (E4−7) − E1 (E3−7) G « BR Pulse generation
Idling
IF2R (E4−5) − E1 (E3−7) L−B « BR (See page DI−171)
G2 (E2−29) − G2 − (E2−28) L«Y Pulse generation

Idli
Idling
NE+ (E2−31) − NE− (E2−32) R«G (See page DI−144)
MREL (E6−13) − E1 (E3−7) B−Y « BR IG switch ON 9 − 14

DI (E6−15) − E1 (E3−7) B−R « BR IG switch ON 0 − 3.0
FPC (E6−14) − E1 (E3−7) B−L « BR IG switch ON 9 − 14
Brake pedal is depressed 7.5 − 14
STP (E5
(E5−4)
4) − E1 (E3
(E3−7)
7) G W « BR
G−W
Brake pedal is released Below 1.5
PRG (E2−11) − E1 (E3−7) G−B « BR IG switch ON 9 − 14
OXL1 (E3−28) − E1 (E3−7) B « BR
OXL2 (E5−28) − E1 (E3−7) W « BR Maintain engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 2 minutes Pulse generation
OXR1 (E4−28) − E1 (E3−7) W « BR after warming up (See page DI−148)
OXR2 (E5−17) − E1 (E3−7) R « BR
HTL (E3−9) − E1 (E3−7) L−Y « BR

Idling Below 3.0
HTL2 (E5−7) − E1 (E3−7) GR « BR
HTR (E4−30) − E1 (E3−7) G−Y «BR
IG switch ON 9 − 14
HTR2 (E5−8) − E1 (E3−7) GR−B«BR
KNKL (E3−1) − E1 (E3−7) B « BR Pulse generation
M i t i engine
Maintain i speed
d att 4,000
4 000 rpm after
ft warming
i up
KNKR (E3−2) − E1 (E3−7) W « BR (See page DI−140)
TC (E5−3) − E1 (E3−7) P−B « BR IG switch ON 9 − 14

Idling 9 − 14
W (E5
(E5−2)
2) − E1 (E3−7)
(E3 7) GR R « BR
GR−R
IG switch ON Below 3.0
A/C switch ON (At Idling) Below 3.0
ACMG (E6
(E6−16)
16) − E1 (E3−7)
(E3 7) L O « BR
L−O
A/C switch OFF 9 − 14
ENG+ (E5−19) LG « L
− ENG− (E5−30)
Idling Pulse generation
TRC+ (E5−18) P«V
− TRC− (E5−29)
VVL+ (E2−18) − VVL− (E2−19) R«G Pulse generation

Idli
Idling
VVR+ (E4−19) − VVR− (E4−18) Y«L (See page DI−178)
OCV+ (E2−6)
L−Y « G−W
− OCV− (E2−5) Pulse generation
IG switch
it h ON
OCR+ (E4−9) (See page DI−182)
L−W « L−B
− OCR− (E4−8)
IG switch ON 9 − 14
ACIS (E4
(E4−21)
21) − E01 (E3
(E3−2)
2) L W«W
L−W W−B
B
Engine speed between 2,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm Below 3.0

DI−92
M+ (E2−3) − E1 (E3−7) L « BR Pulse generation

Idling
M− (E2−2) − E1 (E3−7) Y « BR (See page DI−164)
IG switch ON, Brake pedal is depressed Below 1.5
ST1 (E6−8)
ST1− (E6 8) − E1 (E3
(E3−7)
7) B L « BR
B−L
IG switch ON, Brake pedal is released 7.5 − 14
SIL (E6−26) − E1 (E3−7) W−G « BR During transmission Pulse generation
Pulse generation
SP2+ (E3−23) − SP2− (E3−22) G«R Vehicle is driving
(See page DI−154)

DI−93
DI2T1−04
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

When the malfunction is not confirmed in the diagnostic trouble code check and the problem still can not be
confirmed in the basic inspection, proceed to this matrix chart and troubleshoot according to the numbered
order given below.
Symptom Suspect Area See page
1. Starter and starter relay ST−2
Engine does not crank (Does not start)
2. Neutral start switch circuit DI−333
1. Engine ECU power source circuit DI−205

2. Ignition coil with igniter DI−171
No initial combustion (Does not start)
3. Fuel pump control circuit DI−210
4. Injector circuit DI−134

No complete combustion (Does not start) 2. Ignition coil with igniter DI−171
1. Starter signal circuit DI−202
Engine cranks normally (Difficult to start)
4. Spark plug IG−1
5. Compression EM−3

Cold engine (Difficult to start) 3. Injector circuit DI−134
Hot engine (Difficult to start) 3. Injector circuit DI−134
4. Ignition coil IG−1
1. A/C signal circuit (Compressor circuit) −
2. Engine ECU power source circuit DI−205
High engine idle speed (Poor idling)
4. Back up power source circuit DI−192

Low engine idle speed (Poor idling)
5. Air flow meter circuit DI−95

Rough idling (Poor idling)
4. Compression EM−3

Hunting (Poor idling) 2. Engine ECU power source circuit DI−205
Hesitation/Poor acceleration (Poor driveability) 3. Fuel pump control circuit DI−210
5. A/T faulty −

DI−94
1. Ignition coil IG−1

Muffler explosion, after fire (Poor driveability) 2. Spark plug IG−1
3. Injection circuit DI−134
Surging (Poor driveability) 2. Spark plug IG−1
3. Injection circuit DI−134
Engine stall (Soon after starting)
Engine stall (After accelerator pedal depressed) 1. Air flow meter circuit DI−95
Engine stall (After accelerator pedal released)
2. Engine ECU IN−30
Engine stall (During A/C operation)
2. Engine ECU IN−30
Engine stall (When shifting N to D) 1. Neutral start switch circuit DI−333

DI−95
DI85L−01
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC P0100 Mass Air Flow Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The air flow meter uses a platinum hot wire. The hot wire air flow meter consists of a platinum hot wire, tem-
perature sensor and a control circuit installed in a plastic housing. The hot wire air flow meter works on the
principle that the hot wire and temperature sensor located in the intake air bypass of the housing detect any
changes in the intake air temperature.
The hot wire is maintained at the set temperature by controlling the current flow through the hot wire. This
current flow is then measured as the output voltage of the air flow meter.
The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and temperature sensor provide a bridge circuit, with
the power transistor controlled so that the potential of A and B remains equal to maintain the set temperature.
B+
Temperature Sensor
Power Transister
Platinum Hot wire
A B
Output
Voltage
A15213

Open or short in air flow meter circuit with more than 3 sec.
P0100 S Air flow meter
engine speed less than 4,000 rpm
S Engine ECU
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0100 use the hand−held tester to confirm the air flow ratio from CURRENT DATA.
Air Flow Value (gm/sec.) Malfunction
S Air flow meter power source circuit open
Approx. 0.0
S VG circuit open or short
271.0 or more S EVG circuit open

DI−96
WIRING DIAGRAM
J14 (*1) J4 (*1)
A11
J34 (*2) J/C J28 (*2) J/C
4 Mass Air Flow Meter Engine ECU
3 1
B−R B−R B−R W 26
IA3 II1 B EA3 +B G−W
A A B 1 E2G E4 EVG
(*2) (*1) 2
27
L−Y
EFI Relay VG E4 VG
3
B−R
1 1
3 5 B−Y
J5 (*1) 15 13
W−B B−Y B−Y
J29 (*2) 1 1 IA2 E6 MREL
A 2 1
J/C
A EFI
B−L
1 1
1 2
W−B Engine Room No. 1 R/B

*1: LHD
*2: RHD
Battery EE
A14791
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using OBD scan tool or hand−held tester. Because freeze data frame records the
engine conditions when malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether
the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the
time of the malfunction.
1 Connect OBD scan tool or hand−held tester, and read value of air flow rate.
PREPARATION:
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester main switch ON.
(c) Start the engine.
CHECK:
Read air flow rate on the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester.
RESULT:
Type I Type II
Air flow rate (gm/sec.) 0.0 271.0 or more

DI−97
Type I Go to step 2.
2 Check voltage of air flow meter power source.
ON PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminal 1 of the air flow meter
OK:
Voltage: 9 − 14 V
BE6653 1(+) A00099
P24310
NG Check for open in harness and connector be-
tween EFI main relay (Marking: EFI) and air flow
meter (See page IN−30).
OK
3 Check voltage between terminals VG of engine ECU connector and body ground.
PREPARATION:
VG (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover
(See page FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminal VG of the engine ECU
connector and body ground while engine is idling.
(+) (−) OK:
A14473 Voltage:
0.5 − 3.0 V (P or N position and A/C switch OFF)

(See page IN−30).
NG

DI−98
4 Check for open and short in harness and connector between air flow meter and
OK
5 Check continuity between terminal EVG of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
PREPARATION:
Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page FI−74).
CHECK:
Check continuity between terminal EVG of the engine ECU
OK:
Continuity (1 W or less)
EVG
A14474 OK Check and replace engine ECU
(See page IN−30).
NG
6 Check for open in harness and connector between air flow meter and engine
OK

DI−99
DI85M−01
DTC P0110 Intake Air Temp. Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The intake air temp. sensor is built into the air flow meter and
(fig. 1) senses the intake air temperature.
A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value
30 according to the intake air temperature.
20
The lower the intake air temperature, the greater the thermistor
10 resistance value, and the higher the intake air temperature, the
lower the thermistor resistance value (See fig. 1).
5
Acceptable The intake air temp. sensor is connected to the engine ECU
Resistance kW
3
2 (See below ). The 5 V power source voltage in the engine ECU
is applied to the intake air temp. sensor from the terminal THA
1
via resistor R.
0.5
0.3
That is, the resistor R and the intake air temp. sensor are con-
nected in series. When the resistance value of the intake air
0.2
temp. sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake
0.1 air temperature, the potential at terminal THA also changes.
Based on this signal, the engine ECU increases the fuel injec-
− 20 0 20 40 60 80 100
(− 4) (32) (68) (104) (140) (176) (212) tion volume to improve driveability during cold engine opera-
Temp. ˚C (˚F) tion.
FI4741

P0110 Open or short in intake air temp. sensor circuit S Intake air temp. sensor (inside air flow meter)
S Engine ECU
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0110, use the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to confirm the intake air temperature
from CURRENT DATA.
140˚C ( 284˚F ) or more Short circuit

DI−100
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
A11
Intake Air Temp. Sensor
(Inside air flow meter) 5V
32 R
2 P−L THA
E4
31
1 BR ETHA
E4
E1
A00328
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using a OBD scan tool or hand−held tester. Because freeze frame records the en-
gine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether
1 Connect OBD scan tool or hand−held tester, and read value of intake air temper-
ature.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester main switch ON.
CHECK:
Read temperature value on the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester.
OK:
Same as actual intake air temperature
HINT:
S If there is open circuit, OBD scan tool or hand−held tester indicates −40˚C (−40˚F).
S If there is short circuit, OBD scan tool or hand−held tester indicates 140˚C (284˚F) or more.
NG −40˚C (−40˚F)...Go to step 2

140˚C (284˚F) or more...Go to step 4.
OK
Check for intermittent problems (See page

DI−73).

DI−101
ON PREPARATION:
(b) Connect the sensor wire harness terminals together.
Intake Air Temp. Engine ECU (c) Turn the ignition switch ON.
Sensor 5V CHECK:
2 THA
Read temperature value on the OBD scan tool or hand−held
1 ETHA tester.
E1 OK:
A00391 Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more

place air flow meter.
NG
PREPARATION:
ON (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover
(See page FI−74).
(b) Connect between terminals THA and ETHA of the engine
Intake Air Temp. Engine ECU ECU connector.
Sensor 5V
HINT:
THA
Air flow meter connector is disconnected.
ETHA
E1
Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the
CHECK:
THA ETHA Read temperature value on the OBD scan tool or hand−held
tester.
OK:
OK Open in harness between terminals ETHA or

A14476
THA, repair or replace harness.
A14475
NG
Confirm good connection at engine ECU.

If OK, check and replace engine ECU.
(See page IN−30)

DI−102
ON PREPARATION:
Engine ECU (b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
Intake Air Temp. CHECK:
Sensor 5V
2 THA Read temperature value on the hand−held tester.
1 ETHA
OK:
E1 Temperature value: −40°C (−40°F)
A00393
OK Replace air flow meter.
NG
ON PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover
(See page FI−74).
(b) Disconnect the E4 connector of the engine ECU.
Engine ECU
Intake Air Temp. HINT:
Sensor 5V
Air flow meter connector is disconnected.
THA
ETHA
E1
CHECK:
tester.
OK:
E4 Connector
A14477 A14478
OK Repair or replace harness or connector.
NG

IN−30).

DI−103
DI85N−01
DTC P0115 Water Temp. Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
A thermistor built into the water temp. sensor changes the resistance value according to the water tempera-
ture.
The structure of the sensor and connection to the engine ECU is the same as in the DTC P0110 shown on
page DI−99.
P0115 Open or short in water temp. sensor circuit S Water temp. sensor
S Engine ECU
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0115, use the OBD scan tool hand−held tester to confirm the water temperature from
CURRENT DATA.
140C˚ (284˚F) or more Short circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
W3
Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor 5V
2 24
P−L THW
E4
25
1 BR THEW
E4
E2
FI6448

DI−104
HINT:
1 Connect OBD scan tool or hand−held tester, and read value of water tempera-
ture.
PREPARATION:
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand−held tester main switch ON.
CHECK:
Read temperature value on the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester.
OK:
Same as actual water temperature
HINT:
S If there is open circuit, Hand−held tester indicates −40˚C (−40˚F).
S If there is short circuit, Hand−held tester indicates 140˚C (284˚F) or more.
NG −40˚C (−40˚F)...Go to step 2.

140˚C (284˚F) or more...Go to step 4.
OK
Check for intermittent problems (See page

DI−73).

DI−105
ON PREPARATION:
(a) Disconnect the water temp. sensor connector.
(b) Connect sensor wire harness terminals together.
Engine ECU (c) Turn the ignition switch ON.
Water Temp. Sensor 5V
CHECK:
2 THW
1 ETHW tester.
E1
OK:
A00395 Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more

place water temp. sensor.
NG
PREPARATION:
ON (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
FI−74).
(b) Connect between terminals THW and ETHW of the en-
Water Engine ECU gine ECU connector.
Temp. Sensor 5V
2 HINT:
THW
Water temp. sensor connector is disconnected.
1 ETHW
E1
Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the
ETHW (c) Turn the ignition switch ON.
THW
CHECK:
tester.
OK:
A14481 A14502 OK Open in harness between terminals ETHW or

THW, repair or replace harness.
NG
Confirm good connection at engine ECU.If

OK, check and replace engine ECU (See page
IN−30).
DI−106
ON PREPARATION:
(a) Disconnect the water temp. sensor connector.
Engine ECU
Water Temp. Sensor 5V
CHECK:
THW
ETHW
tester.
E1 OK:
A00397
OK Replace water temp. sensor.
NG
PREPARATION:
ON (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
FI−74).
(b) Disconnect the E4 connector of the engine ECU.
Engine ECU
Water Temp. Sensor HINT:
2 THW
5V
Water temp. sensor connector is disconnected.
1 ETHW
E1
CHECK:
tester.
OK:
OK Repair or replace harness or connector.
E4 connector
A14477 A14478
NG

IN−30).

DI−107
DI6TR−06
DTC P0116 Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit Range/

Performance Problem
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the engine starts, the water temp. is −7˚C (20˚F) or
less. And, 20 min. or more after the engine starts, the water
temp. sensor
value is 20˚C (68˚F) or less
(2 trip detection logic) S Water temp. sensor
P0116
When the engine starts, the water temp. is between −7˚C S Cooling system
(20˚F) and 10˚C (50˚F)
And, 5 min. or more after the engine starts, the water temp.
sensor value is 20˚C (68˚F) or less
HINT:
NO
2 Check thermostat (See page CO−12).
NG Replace thermostat.
OK
Replace engine coolant temp. sensor.

DI−108
DI85O−01
DTC P0120 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch ”A”

Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Throttle position sensor is mounted on the throttle body and it have the 2 sensors to detect the throttle open-
ing angle and the malfunction of the throttle position sensor’s own.
The voltage applied to the terminals VTA and VTA2 of the engine ECU changes between 0 V and 5 V in
proportion to the opening angle of the throttle valve.
The engine ECU judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals input from termi-
nals VTA and VTA2, and the engine ECU controls the throttle motor to make the throttle valve angle properly
in response to driving condition.
If this DTC is stored, the engine ECU shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle valve is
fully closed by the return spring.
Movable Range Movable Range VTA2
Throttle Position Sensor
5 *1: Throttle valve

Output Voltage (V)
*1 fully closed
Usable
Usable Range *2: Throttle valve
Range *2
fully open
1.5
VTA
*1
*2 0 70 125
*1 *2
Usable Range
E2 VTA2 VTA VC Throttle Valve Opening Angle (deg)
A02395 A02396 A02624

Condition (a), (b), (c), (d) or (e) continues for 2.0 seconds:
(a) VTA % 0.2 V
(b) VTA2 % 0.5 V
(c) VTA 4.8 V S Open or short in throttle position sensor circuit
P0120 (d) When VTA 0.2 V and % 2.0 V, and VTA2 4.97 V S Throttle position sensor
(e) VTA−VTA2 % 0.02 V S Engine ECU
Condition (a) or (b) continues for 0.4 seconds:
(a) VTA % 0.2 V and VTA2 % 0.5 V
(b) VTA−VTA2 % 0.02 V
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0120 use the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to confirm the throttle valve opening
percentage .
Accelerator pedal position expressed as percentage and voltage
Acceleratorpedalreleased Acceleratorpedaldepressed Trouble area
THROTTLEPOS THROTTLEPOS#2 THROTTLEPOS THROTTLEPOS#2
0% 0V 0% 0V VC line open
0% 2.0 − 2.9 V 0% 4.6 − 5.1 V VTA line open or grand short
8 − 20 % 0V 64 − 96 % 0V VTA2 line openor grandshort
100 % 5V 100 % 5V E2 line open

DI−109
WIRING DIAGRAM
T10
Throttle Position Sensor Engine ECU
2 25
Y VTA
E2
5V
23
1 L−R VC
E2
24
3 B VTA2
E2
22
4 BR
E2
ETA
A03843
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using OBD scan tool or hand−held tester. Because freeze frame records the engine
conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the
vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time
of the malfunction.
1 Connect OBD scan tool or hand−held tester, read throttle valve opening percent-
age.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to DLC3.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the OBD scan tool
or hand−held tester main switch ON.
CHECK:
Read the throttle valve opening percentage for VTA circuit and
read the voltage for VTA2 circuit.
OK:
FI7052 Throttle valve opening
Voltage
Accelerator pedal position expressed
(VTA2)
as percentage (VTA)
Released 8 − 20 % 2.0 − 2.9 V
Depressed 64 − 96 % 4.6 − 5.1 V

(See page IN−30).
NG
DI−110
2 Check voltage between terminals VC and ETA of engine ECU connector.
ON PREPARATION:
VC ETA (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals VC and ETA of the engine
ECU connector.
(+) (−) OK:
A14479 Voltage: 4.5 − 5.5 V
NG Check and replace engine ECU

(See page IN−30).
OK
3 Check voltage between terminals VTA, VTA2 and ETA of engine ECU connector.
ON PREPARATION:
VTA VTA2 ETA (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals VTA, VTA2 and ETA of the
engine ECU connector.
(+) (−) OK:
A14480 Voltage
A
Accelerator
l t pedal
d l
VTA VTA2
Released 0.4 − 1.0 V 2.0 − 2.9 V
Depressed 3.2 − 4.8 V 4.6 − 5.1 V

(See page IN−30).
NG

DI−111
4 Check throttle position sensor (See page FI−35).
NG Replace throttle position sensor

(See page FI−38).
OK
Check for open and short in harness and connector between engine ECU and throttle position
sensor (VC, VTA, VTA2, ETA line) (See page IN−30).

DI−112
DI1LI−14
DTC P0121 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch ”A”

Circuit Range/Performance Problem
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
While vehicle speed drops from 30 km/h (19 mph) or more to 0
S Throttle position sensor
P0121 km/h (0 mph), output value of throttle position sensor is out of
S Engine ECU
applicable range. (2 trip detection logic)
HINT:
of the malfunction.
Replace throttle body (See page FI−38).

DI−113
DI7J3−04
DTC P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temp. for Closed Loop

Fuel Control
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
To obtain a high purification rate for the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three−way cata-
lytic converter is used, but for the most efficient use of the three−way catalytic converter, the air−fuel ratio
must be precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air−fuel ratio.
The oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) has the characteristic which its output voltage changes suddenly in
the vicinity of the stoichiometric air−fuel ratio. This characteristic is used to detect the oxygen concentration
in the exhaust gas and provide the engine ECU with feedback to control the air−fuel ratio.
When the air−fuel ratio becomes LEAN, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust increases and the oxygen
sensor informs the engine ECU of the LEAN condition (small electromotive force: < 0.45 V).
When the air−fuel ratio is RICHER than the stoichiometric air−fuel ratio the oxygen concentration in the ex-
haust gas is reduced and the oxygen sensor informs the engine ECU of the RICH condition (large electromo-
tive force: > 0.45 V). The engine ECU judges by the electromotive force from the oxygen sensor whether
the air−fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN and controls the injection time accordingly. However, if malfunction of the
oxygen sensor causes output of abnormal electromotive force, the engine ECU is unable to perform accu-
rate air−fuel ratio control. The oxygen sensors include a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater
is controlled by the engine ECU. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is
low) current flows to the heater to heat the sensor for accurate oxygen concentration detection.
Atmosphere
Ideal Air−Fuel Mixture
Housing
Platinum Electrode
Output Voltage
Solid Electrolyte
(Zirconia Element)
Platinum Electrode
Heater
Coating (Ceramic)
Richer − Air−Fuel Ratio − Leaner

Cover
P20302
FI7210
Exhaust Gas A00798

S Open or short in oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) circuit
After engine is warmed up, oxygen sensors (bank 1, 2 sensor
S Oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 1)
1) output does not indicate RICH (0.45 V) even once when
conditions (a), (b) and (c) continue for at least 65 sec.:
(a) Engine speed: 1,400 rpm or more
S Injector
(b) Vehicle speed: 40 − 100 km/h (25 − 62 mph)
(c) 180 sec. or more after starting engine
S Engine ECU
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0125, use the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to confirm voltage output of the
oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) from the CURRENT DATA. If voltage output of the oxygen sensor is less
than 0.1 V, oxygen sensor circuit may be open or short.

DI−114
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
15 13
B−Y B−Y
IA2 E6 MREL
J14 (*1)
1 2
1 J34 (*2) H15 Heated Oxygen Sensor
J/C (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
3 1
B−R B−R B−R 7
1 1 IA3 II1 +B GR
3 A A 2 HT E5 HTL2
B−Y 5 (*2) (*1) 1
EFI Relay J9 (*1) J36 (*2) AA 28
J/C 3 W
1 BR 4 OX E5 OXL2
E (*1)
E1
E (*1)
EFI C (*2) C (*2)
H23 Heated Oxygen Sensor
1 E (*1) (Bank 2 Sensor 2)
2 1 BR B−R 8
C (*2) +B GR−B
2 HT E5 HTR2
B−R 1
1 17
D B 3 R
Engine Room BR 4 OX E5 OXR2
J4 (*1) E1
No. 1 R/B J28 (*2) H16 Heated Oxygen Sensor
J/C 4
W−B D B (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
30
BR EA3 +B G−Y
A B−R W W 2 HT 1 E4 HTR
J5 (*1) B−L
J29 (*2) 28
3 EA3 3 W
J/C 4 OX E4 OXRI
A E1
BR
H14 Heated Oxygen Sensor
(Bank 1 Sensor 1)
BR W 9
2 +B HT 1
L−Y
E3 HTL
28
3 B
4 OX E3 OXL1
BR E1
W−B 4
A B B
E2 E03
J49 B W−B
J/C
A BR
W−B
W−B *1: LHD
EE Battery EC ED *2: RHD
A14792
HINT:
S If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air−fuel ratio is LEAN and DTC P0125 will be recorded. The CHK
ENG warning light then comes on.
S Read freeze frame data using OBD scan tool or hand−held tester. Because freeze frame records the
engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining
whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio was

DI−115
NO
2 Connect OBD scan tool or hand−held tester, and read value for voltage output of
oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1).
PREPARATION:
(b) Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (above 75˚C (169˚F)).
CHECK:
Read the voltage output of the oxygen sensors when the engine is suddenly raced.
HINT:
Perform quick racing to 4,000 rpm 3 times using the accelerator pedal.
OK:
Oxygen sensor output a RICH signal (0.45 V or more) at least once.
OK Go to step 9.
NG
OK
4 Check whether misfire has occurred or not by monitoring DTC and data list.
NG Perform troubleshooting for misfire (See page

DI−134).
OK

DI−116
5 Check air induction system (See page FI−1).
OK

fuel pipe line and filter.
OK
7 Check injector injection (See page FI−24).
OK
OK
GO

DI−117
10 Is there DTC P0125 being output again?
YES Check and replace engine ECU

(See page IN−30).
NO
NO Check for intermittent problems

(See page DI−73).
YES
DTC P0125 is caused by shortage of fuel.

DI−118
DI85P−01
DTC P0130 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction

(Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC P0150 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction

(Bank 2 Sensor 1)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area
Condition (a) and (b) continues for 60 secs. or more:
P0130 (a) Voltage output of oxygen sensor remains at 0.35 V or more, S Oxygen sensor
P0150 or 0.70 V or less, during idling after engine is warmed up. S Fuel trim malfunction
(b) Oxygen sensor output voltage amplitude is less than 0.3 V.
HINT:
Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closer to the engine body. The oxygen sensor’s output voltage and the short−
term fuel trim value can be read using the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester.
Vehicle speed 20 sec. 20 sec. 20 sec.

40 km/h
(24 mph) (4) (4) (4)
Idling(3) (5) (5) (6)

IG SW OFF
100 sec. 20 sec. 20 sec.

(1) (2) 30 sec.
A09299

(2) Switch the hand−held tester from normal mode to check mode (See page DI−73).
(3) Start the engine and let the engine idle for 100 seconds or more.
(4) Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (24 mph) or more for 20 seconds or more.
(5) Let the engine idle for 20 seconds or more.
(6) Let the engine idle for 30 seconds.
HINT:
If a malfunction exists, the check engine warning light will light up during step (6).
NOTICE:
If you do not have a hand−held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps (3) to (6),
then perform steps (3) to (6) again.
DI−119
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
of the malfunction.
NO
2 Check the output voltage of oxygen sensor during idling.
PREPARATION:
Warm up the oxygen sensor with the engine at 2,500 rpm for approx. 90 sec.
CHECK:
Use the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to read the output voltage of the oxygen sensor during idling.
OK:
P18349
OK Go to step 7.
NG

DI−120
OK
NG Repair or replace induction system.
OK
NG Check and repair fuel pump, fuel pipe line and

filter (See page FI−6).
OK
OK

DI−121
7 Perform confirmation driving pattern.
Go
8 Are there DTC P0130 or P0150 being output again?
YES Check for intermittent problems

(See page DI−73).
No
Check and replace engine ECU.

DI−122
DI563−10
DTC P0133 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Response

(Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC P0153 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Response

(Bank 2 Sensor 1)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
S Oxygen sensor
Response time for oxygen sensor’s voltage output to change
P0133 S Air induction system
from rich to lean, or from lean to rich, is 1.1 sec. or more during
idling after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)
S Injector
S Engine ECU
HINT:
S Bank 1 refers to bank that includes cylinder No.1.
S Bank 2 refers to bank that does not include cylinder No.1.
S Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closer to the engine body.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the
vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio was lean or rich, etc.
at the time of the malfunction.
NO
2 Check output voltage of oxygen sensor during idling.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Use the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to read the output voltage of the oxygen sensor during idling.
DI−123
OK:
P18349
OK Go to step 7
NG
OK
OK

fuel pipe line and filter (See page FI−1).
OK

DI−124
OK
GO
8 Is there DTC P0133 or P0153 being output again?

DI−73).
YES

IN−30).

DI−125
DI2S8−16
DTC P0135 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit

Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1)



CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
P0135 When the heater operates, heater current exceeds 2 A

(2 trip detection logic) S Open or short in heater circuit of oxygen sensor
P0141
S Oxygen
O sensor heater
h t
P0155 Heater current of 0.2 A or less when the heater operates
S Engine ECU
P0161 (2 trip detection logic)
WIRING DIAGRAM

DI−126
HINT:
of the malfunction.
1 Check voltage between terminals HTR, HTR2, HTL, HTL2 of engine ECU connec-
tor and body ground.
PREPARATION:
ON HTR2 HTL2 (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
HTL
HTR FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminals HTR, HTR2, HTL,
HTL2 of the engine ECU connector and body ground.
(−) (+)
HINT:
A14509 S Connect terminal HTL to bank 1 sensor 1.
S Connect terminal HTR to bank 2 sensor 1.
S Connect terminal HTL1 to bank 1 sensor 2.
S Connect terminal HTR2 to bank 2 sensor 2.
OK:
Voltage: 9 − 14 V

(See page IN−30).
NG
2 Check resistance of oxygen sensor heater (See page FI−67).
NG Replace oxygen sensor.
OK
Check and repair harness or connector

between main relay and oxygen
sensor and engine ECU (See page IN−30).

DI−127
DI7J5−02
DTC P0136 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1

Sensor 2)
DTC P0156 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2

Sensor 2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Voltage output of heated oxygen sensor remains at 0.4 V or
P0136 S Open or short in heated oxygen sensor circuit
more or 0.5 V or less when vehicle is driven at 30 km/h (19
P0156 S Oxygen sensor
mph) or more after engine is warmed up (2 trip detection logic)
HINT:
Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farther away from the engine body.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Once Twice Nine times

40 sec. 40 sec. 40 sec.
Vehicle speed
30 km/h
(19 mph) (d) (d) (d)
Idling(c) (e) (e) (e)

IG SW OFF
60 sec. 10 sec. 10 sec. 10 sec.

(a) (b) or more
A09300

(b) Switch the hand−held tester from the Normal Mode to the Check (Test) Mode (See page
DI−73).
(c) Start the engine and let the engine idle for 60 seconds or more.
(d) Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (18 mph) or more for 40 seconds or more.
(e) Let the engine idle for 10 seconds or more.
(f) Preform steps (d) to (e) 9 times.
HINT:
If a malfunction exists, the MIL will be indicated on the multi information display during step (f).

DI−128
NOTICE:
If you do not have a hand−held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps (3) to (6),
then perform steps (3) to (6) again.
HINT:
of the malfunction.
NO
OK
3 Check output voltage of heated oxygen sensor.
PREPARATION:
(b) Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
CHECK:
Read voltage output of the heated sensor when the engine suddenly raced.
HINT:
Perform quick racing to 4,000 rpm for 3 min. using the accelerator pedal.
OK:
Oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates from 0.4 V or less to 0.5 V or more.
OK Check that each connector is properly con-

nected.
NG

DI−129

DI−130
DI63Y−04
DTC P0171 System too Lean (A/F Lean Malfunction,

Bank 1)
DTC P0172 System too Rich (A/F Rich Malfunction,

Bank 1)
DTC P0174 System too Lean (A/F Lean Malfunction,

Bank 2)
DTC P0175 System too Rich (A/F Rich Malfunction,

Bank 2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Fuel trim refers to the feedback compensation value compared to the basic injection time. Fuel trim includes
short−term fuel trim and long−term fuel trim.
Short−term fuel trim is the short−term fuel compensation used to maintain the air−fuel ratio at its ideal
theoretical value. The signal from the heated oxygen sensor indicates whether the air−fuel ratio is RICH or
LEAN compared to the ideal theoretical value, triggering a reduction in fuel volume if the air−fuel ratio is rich,
and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
Long−term fuel trim is overall fuel compensation carried out long−term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short−term fuel trim form the central value due to individual engine differences, wear overtime and
changes in the usage environment.
If both the short−term fuel trim and long−term fuel trim are LEAN or RICH beyond a certain value, it is de-
tected as a malfunction and the check engine warning light on the multi information display.
S Injector blockage
S Vacuum sensor
When air−fuel ratio feedback is stable after engine warming up, S Water temp. sensor
P0171
fuel trim is considerably in error on LEAN side S Fuel pressure
P0174
S Engine ECU
S Vacuum sensor
When air−fuel ratio feedback is stable after engine warming up, S Ignition system
P0172
fuel trim is considerably in error on RICH side S Fuel pressure
P0175
S Engine ECU

DI−131
HINT:
S When the DTC P0171 or P0174 is recorded, the actual air−fuel ratio is on the LEAN side. When DTC
P0172 or P0175 is recorded, the actual air−fuel ratio is on the RICH side.
S If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air−fuel ratio is LEAN and DTC P0171 and P0174 is recorded. The
check engine warning light then comes on.
S If the total of the short−term fuel trim value and long−term fuel trim value is within −35 to +40 %, the
system is functioning normally.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
OK
OK
3 Check air flow meter (See page FI−34) and water temperature sensor (See page
FI−61).
OK
4 Check for spark and ignition (See page IG−1).

DI−132
OK

OK
OK
7 Check output voltage of oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) during idling.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Used the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to read the output voltage of the oxygen sensor during idling.
OK:
OK NG NG NG
1V
0.55 V
0.4 V
0V
A00292

DI−133
OK Go to step 9.
NG
OK
Go
10 Is there DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 being output again?
YES Check and replace engine ECU (See page

DI−73).
NO

DI−93).
YES
DTC P0171, P0172, P0174, or P0175 is caused by running out of fuel.

DI−134
DI63Z−04
DTC P0300 Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Misfire: The engine ECU uses the crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor to monitor
changes in the crankshaft rotation for each cylinder.
The engine ECU counts the number of times the engine speed change rate indicates that misfire has oc-
curred. And when the misfire rate equals or exceeds the count indicating that the engine condition has deteri-
orated, the check engine warning light lights up.
If the misfire rate is high enough and the driving conditions will cause catalyst overheating, the check engine
warning light blinks when misfiring occurs.

DI−135
Misfiring of random cylinders is detected during any particular S Open or short in engine wire
200 or 1,000 revolutions S Connector connection
P0300
1 trip detection logic: check engine warning light to brink S Vacuum hose connection
2 trip detection logic: check engine warning light to light up S Ignition
g system
y
S Injector
P0301
For any particular 200 revolutions of engine, misfiring is de- S Fuel pressure
P0302
tected which can cause catalyst overheating S Vacuum sensor
P0303
(This causes check engine warning light to blink) S Water temp. sensor
P0304
S Compression
C pressure
P0305
For any particular 1,000 revolutions of engine, misfiring is de- S Valve clearance
P0306
tected which causes a deterioration in emissions S Valve timing
P0307
P0308
HINT:
When codes for a misfiring cylinder is recorded repeatedly but no random misfire code is recorded, it indi-
cates that the misfires were detected and recorded at different times.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
7 Injector 15
B B B L
EA2 E2 #1
B−W B B 1 2
B No. 1 17
A B B W
J16 (*1) E4 #2
B 1 2
J39 (*2) No. 2 14
J/C J48 B W
B 1 2 E2 #3
A I12 J/C
Ignition SW No. 3 16
B B G
E4 #4
B−W W−R 1 2
6 IG2 AM2 7 No. 4 13
B G
9 IA1 (*1) B 1 E2 #5
2
Engine Room No. 1 R/B No. 5 15
7 IK1 (*2) B BR
AM2 E4 #6
1 2 1 2
1 1 No. 6 12
W−R B BR
E2 #7
1 2
B−L No. 7 14
J49 B L
E4 #8
J/C 1 2
No. 8 2
W−B W−B A A W−B
E4 E01
1
Battery ED EC A W−B
E4 E02
*1: LHD
*2: RHD
A14793

DI−136

(b) Record DTC and the freeze frame data.
(c) Use the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to set to the Check (Test) Mode (See page DI−73).
(d) Drive the vehicle several times with the engine speed, load and its surrounding range shown with EN-
GINE SPD, CALC LOAD in the freeze frame data or MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the data list.
If you have no OBD scan tool or hand−held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simulated
the first time. Then repeat the simulation process again.
HINT:
In order to memorize DTC of misfire, it is necessary to drive around MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the
data list for the following period of time.
Engine Speed Time
Idling 3 minutes 30 seconds or more
1,000 rpm 3 minutes or more
2,000 rpm 1 minute 30 seconds or more
3,000 rpm 1 minute or more
(e) Check whether there is misfire or not by monitoring DTC and the freeze frame data. After that, record
them.
(f) Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds.
HINT:
S If it is the case that DTC besides misfire is memorized simultaneously, first perform the troubleshooting
for them.
S When the vehicle is brought to the workshop and the misfire is not occurred, misfire can be confirmed
by reproducing the condition of freeze frame data. Also, after finishing the repair, confirm that there
is no misfire (See confirmation driving pattern).
S When either of SHORT FT #1, LONG FT #1, SHORT FT #2 or LONG FT #2 in the freeze frame data
is besides the range of ± 20 %, there is a possibility that the air−fuel ratio is inclining either to RICH
(−20 % or less) or LEAN (+20 % or more).
S When COOLANT TEMP in the freeze frame data is less than 80˚C (176˚F), there is a possibility of
misfire only during warmed up.
S In the case that misfire cannot be reproduced, the reason may be because of the driving with lack of
fuel, the use of improper fuel, a stain of the ignition plug, and etc.
1 Check wire harness, connector and vacuum hose in engine room.
CHECK:
(a) Check the connection conditions of wire harness and connector.
(b) Check the disconnection, piping and break of vacuum hose.
NG Repair or replace, then confirm that there is no

misfire (See confirmation driving pattern).

DI−137
OK
2 Check spark plug and spark of misfiring cylinder (See page IG−1).
NG Replace or check ignition system (See page

IG−1).
OK
3 Check voltage of engine ECU terminals for injector of failed cylinder.
#4 PREPARATION:
#5
#7 #6 #8 (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
#1 #2
#3 FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between applicable terminals #1 − #8 of
(−) the engine ECU connectors and body ground.
(+) (−) OK:
A14482 Voltage: 9 − 14 V
With the engine idling, check the waveform between terminals #1 − #8 and E01 of the engine ECU connec-
tors.
HINT:
The correct waveform is as shown.
Injector Signal Waveform
(Magnification)
10 V/ 10 V/
Division Division
GND GND
FI6588 FI6538 100 msec./Division (Idling) 1 msec./Division (Idling)

Injection duration A00064

DI−138
OK Go to step 5.
NG
4 Check resistance of injector of misfiring cylinder (See page FI−19).
OK
Check for open and short in harness and connector between injector and engine ECU (See page
IN−30).

OK
OK
7 Check air flow meter (See page FI−34) and water temperature sensor (See page
FI−61).
OK

DI−139
Check compression pressure (See page EM−3), valve clearance (See page EM−4) and valve tim-
ing (See page EM−22).

DI−140
DI85Q−01
DTC P0325 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0330 Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Knock sensors are fitted one to the right bank and left bank of the cylinder block to detect engine knocking.
This sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed, which
occurs when the cylinder block vibrates due to knocking. If engine knocking occurs, ignition timing is retarded
to suppress it.
No knock sensor 1 signal to engine ECU with engine speed
P0325 S Knock sensor 1 (looseness)
between 1,700 rpm and 5,400 rpm
S Engine ECU
No knock sensor 2 signal to engine ECU with engine speed
P0330 S Knock sensor 2 (looseness)
between 1,700 rpm and 5,400 rpm
S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
Knock Sensor 2
(on Left Bank)
3 1
1 B B KNKL
EC1 E3
E1
Knock Sensor 1
(on Right Bank)
2
1 2
GR W KNKR
EC1 E3
E1
A03898

DI−141
HINT:
S DTC P0325 is for the left bank knock sensor circuit.
S DTC P0330 is for the right bank knock sensor circuit.
engine conditions when the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining
whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio lean or
rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
1 Connect OBD scan tool or hand−held tester and check knock sensor circuit.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to the
Engine ECU
DLC3.
EC1 (b) Disconnect the wire to wire connector EC1.
Knock Sensor
1 2 2 KNKL (c) Connect the terminals of the disconnected EC1 male con-
nector and EC1 female as follows.
KNKR Male connector « Female connector
1
3 3 Terminal 1 « Terminal 2
Male Female
Terminal 2 « Terminal 1
Connector Connector
(d) Turn ignition switch ON and switch the hand−held tester
main switch ON.
EC1 (e) After the engine is warmed up, perform quick racing to
4,000 rpm three times.
CHECK:
1 1 Check the DTC.
2 3 3 2 RESULT:
DTC same as when vehicle brought in.
FI7050 Type I
A01996 P0325 ® P0325 or P0330 ® P0330
A01997 A02439
DTC different to when vehicle brought in.
Type II
P0325 ® P0330 or P0330 ® P0325

DI−142

KNK signal waveform S With the engine racing (4,000 rpm) measure between ter-
0.5V
Division minal KNK1, KNK2 of the engine ECU connector and
body ground.
0V
HINT:
The correct waveforms are as shown.
5 m sec./Division
S Spread the time on the horizontal axis, and confirm that

0.5V/
period of the wave is 0.13 m sec.
Division
(Normal mode vibration frequency of knock sensor:
7.6 kHz)
0V HINT:
If normal mode vibration frequency is not 7.6 kHz, the sensor
is malfunctioning.
0.2 m sec./Division
A00068
Type I
2 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EC1 connector and
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−143
3 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EC1 connector and
knock sensor (See page IN−30).
HINT:
S If DTC P0325 has changed to P0330, check the knock sensor circuit on the left bank side.
S If DTC P0330 has changed to P0325, check the knock sensor circuit on the right bank side.
OK
Replace knock sensor.

DI−144
DI641−03
DTC P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunc-

tion (NE Signal)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The crankshaft position sensor, which detects the engine speed and crankshaft angle signal (NE signal),
has been installed on the oil pump body.
The NE signal plate of the crankshaft timing pulley has 34 teeth. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals
of every engine revolution. The engine ECU detects the standard crankshaft angle based on the G signal,
and the actual crankshaft angle and the engine speed by the NE signal.
No crankshaft position sensor signal to engine ECU during S Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit
cranking (2 trip detection logic) S Crankshaft position sensor
P0335
No crankshaft position sensor signal to engine ECU with en- S Crankshaft timing pulley
gine speed 600 rpm or more (2 trip detection logic) S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
C1
Camshaft Position Sensor
29
1 L G2
E2
28
2 Y E2 G2−
31
1 R NE+
E2
32
2 G
E2
NE−
C4 E2
Crankshaft Position Sensor
A14794
HINT:
S Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0335 first. If no trouble is found, troubleshoot the following mechani-
cal systems.
engine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting it is useful for determining
whether the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio was

DI−145
1 Check resistance of crankshaft position sensor (See page IG−1).

G and NE Signal Waveforms
During cranking or idling, check the waveform between termi-
5V
/Division nals G2 and G2−, and NE and NE− of the engine ECU connec-
G tor.
HINT:
NE
20 msec./Division (Idling)
5V
/Division
G
NE
FI7059
FI7060
10 msec./Division (Idling)
A00069
NG Replace crankshaft position sensor.
OK
crankshaft position sensor (See page IN−30).
OK
3 Inspect sensor installation and signal plate teeth of crankshaft timing pulley.
NG Tighten sensor.
Replace crankshaft timing pulley.
OK

IN−30).

DI−146
DI642−03
DTC P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunc-

tion (G Signal)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor (G signal) consists of an iron core and pickup coil.
The G signal rotor has 3 teeth, and is installed on the intake camshaft.
When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal rotor and the air gap on the pickup coil change, caus-
ing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil.
The NE signal plate has 34 teeth and is installed on the crankshaft timing pulley. The NE signal sensor gener-
ates 34 signals for every engine revolution. The engine ECU detects the standard crankshaft angle based
on the G2 signal and the actual crankshaft angle and the engine speed by the NE signals.
No camshaft position sensor signal to engine ECU during S Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit
cranking (2 trip detection logic) S Camshaft position sensor
P0340
No camshaft position sensor signal to engine ECU with engine S Intake camshaft
speed 600 rpm or more S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
1 Check resistance of camshaft position sensor (See page IG−1).

NG Replace camshaft position sensor.
OK
camshaft position sensor (See page IN−30).
OK
DI−147
3 Inspect sensor installation and signal rotor of the intake camshaft.
NG Tighten sensor. Replace intake camshaft.
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−148
DI1EE−16
DTC P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold

(Bank 1)
DTC P0430 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold

(Bank 2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The engine ECU compares the waveform of the A/F sensor located before the catalyst with the waveform
of the oxygen sensor located behind the catalyst to determine whether or not catalyst performance has dete-
riorated.
Air−fuel ratio feedback compensation keeps the waveform of the A/F sensor before the catalyst repeatedly
changing back and forth from rich to lean.
If the catalyst is functioning normally, the waveform of the oxygen sensor behind the catalyst switches back
and forth between rich and lean much more slowly than the waveform of the A/F sensor before the catalyst.
But when both waveforms change at a similar rate, it indicates that catalyst performance has deteriorated.
Waveform of A/F Sensor Waveform of Oxygen Sensor

Normal Catalyst
before Catalyst behind Catalyst
FI7081

After the engine and the catalyst are warmed up, and while the
vehicle is driven within the set vehicle and engine speed range,
P0420 S Open or short in oxygen sensor (bank1, 2 sensor2)
the waveforms of the A/F sensors (bank1, 2 sensor 1) and
P0430 circuit
oxygen sensors (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) have the same amplitude

DI−149
CONFIRMATION ENGINE RACING PATTERN
Engine Speed
(3) (4)
2,500 − 3,000 rpm
(2)
Idling
IG SW OFF
(1)
Warmed up 3 min. or so Check Time
FI7132
(1) Connect the hand−held tester to the DLC3, or connect the probe of the oscilloscope between terminals
OXL1, OXL2, OXR1, OXR2 and E1 of the engine ECU.
(2) Start engine and warm it up with all accessories switched OFF until water temp. is stable.
(3) Race the engine at 2,500 − 3,000 rpm for about 3 min.
(4) After confirming that the waveforms of the oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1 (OXL1, OXR1)), oscillate
around
0.5 V during feedback to the engine ECU, check the waveform of the oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2
sensor 2 (OXL2, OXR2)).
OX Signal Waveform (Oscilloscope)

HINT:
If there is a malfunction in the system, the waveform of the oxy-
1.0 V gen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2 (OXL1, OXR1)), is almost the
same as that of the oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1 (OXL1+,
OXR1)), on the left.
There are some cases where, even though a malfunction ex-
0V
ists, the check engine warning light may either light up or not
light up.
200 m sec. /Division FI6514

DI−150
HINT:
1 Are there any other codes (besides DTC P0420, P0430) being output?
NO
OK
3 Check oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 1) (See page FI−67).
OK
4 Check oxygen sensor (bank 1, 2 sensor 2) (See page FI−67).
OK
Replace three−way catalytic converter.

DI−151
DI644−07
DTC P0443 Evaporative Emission Control System Purge

Control Vent Control Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
To reduce HC emissions, evaporated fuel from the fuel tank is routed through the charcoal canister to the
intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders.
The engine ECU changes the duty signal to the VSV for the EVAP so that the intake quantity of HC emissions
is appropriate for the driving conditions (engine load, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) after the engine is
wamed up.
S Open or short in VSV circuit for EVAP
P0443 Proper response to engine ECU command does not occur S VSV for EVAP
S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
B−Y
J34 (*2) J28 (*2) Engine and
1 J14 (*1) J4 (*1) ECT ECU
1
EFI Relay J/C J/C
3 1
5 3 1 B−R B−R B−R B−R
2 IA3 II1
A A B B
(*2) (*1)
EFI 1 2 W−B
1
4
1
1 EA3 +B
1
1
Engine Room No.1 R/B A 15 13
B−L J5 (*1) B−Y B−Y MREL
IA2 E6
J29 (*2)
J/C W V3
A
W−B VSV for EVAP 11
2 1 G−B PRG
Battery EE E2
*1: LHD E01

*2: RHD
A14795

DI−152
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using a hand−held tester. Because freeze frame records the engine conditions when
the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was run-
malfunction.
1 Connect hand−held tester and check operation of VSV for EVAP.
PREPARATION:
ON
(b) Turn the ignition switch and push the hand−held tester
main switch ON.
E (c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the hand−held tester.
E
CHECK:
F Check the operation of the VSV when the VSV is operated by
F
the hand−held tester.
VSV is ON VSV is OFF
A13575 OK:
VSV is ON:
VSV is OFF:
Air from port E flows out with hardly through port F.

DI−73).
NG
2 Check VSV for EVAP (See page FI−55).
OK
3 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay
(Marking: EFI) and engine ECU (See page IN−30).
OK
DI−153

IN−30).
When using OBD scan tool:
1 Check VSV for EVAP (See page FI−55).
OK
2 Check voltage between terminal PRG of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
PRG
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminal PRG of the engine ECU
(+) (−) OK:
A14483 Voltage: 9 − 14 V

and engine ECU (See page IN−30).
OK

IN−30).

DI−154
DI85R−01
DTC P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The vehicle speed sensor detects the rotation speed of the transmission output shaft and sends signals to
the engine ECU. The engine ECU determines the vehicle speed based on these signals. An AC voltage is
generated in the vehicle speed sensor coil as the rotor mounted on the output shaft rotates, and this voltage
is sent to the engine ECU.
Generated
Rotor Transmission Output
+V Wave Form
Speed Sensor Rotor
ECM
−V
D01826 AT5606 D01804
Output Voltage Transmission Output Speed SensorD02637

No vehicle speed sensor signal to engine ECU under condi-
tions (a) and (b):
P0500 S Transmission output speed sensor
(a) Park/neutral position switch is OFF
S Engine ECU
(b) Vehicle is being driven
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
S1
5V
Vehicle Speed Sensor 23
1 G SP2+
E3
22
2 R SP2−
E3
A09392

DI−155
HINT:
1 Connect OBD scan tool or hand−held tester and read value of vehicle speed val-
ue.
PREPARATION:
(b) Start the engine and push the the hand−held tester main switch ON.
CHECK:
Drive the vehicle and read vehicle speed value.
OK:
Vehicle speed matches tester speed value.
OK Check and replace engine ECU (See page

IN−30).
NG
2 Check speedometer circuit (See page BE−6).
NG Repair or replace speedometer circuit.
OK
3 Check resistance between terminals SP2+ and SP2− of engine ECU connector.
SP2+ SP2−
PREPARATION:
FI−74).
(b) Disconnect the E3 connector from the engine ECU.
CHECK:
Check the resistance between terminals SP2+ and SP2− of the
E3 Connector
engine ECU connector.
OK:
A14484 Resistance: 560 − 680 W

IN−30).

DI−156
NG
4 Check vehicle speed sensor.
PREPARATION:
Remove the vehicle speed sensor from the transmission.
CHECK:
Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed
2 sensor.
OK:
Resistance: 560 − 680 W
Reference: CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR’S FUNC-
TION
1 CHECK:
Magnet Check the voltage between terminals 1 and 2 of the vehicle
speed sensor when a magnet is put close to the front end of the
(−) (+) vehicle speed sensor then taken away quickly.
OK:
Voltage is generated intermittently.
HINT:
Voltage generated is extremely low.
Q08285
Q08292 D01709

Check the waveform between terminals SP2+ and SP2− when
the vehicle speed is approx. 60 km/h (37 mph).
0V
AT8761
NG Replace vehicle speed sensor.
OK
Check and repair harness and connector be-

tween engine ECU and vehicle speed sensor
(See page IN−30).
DI−157
DI2P2−06
DTC P0505 Idle Control System Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The idle speed is controlled by the Electric Throttle Control System (ETCS).
ETCS is composed of the throttle motor to operate the throttle valve, the magnetic clutch to connect the
throttle motor with the throttle valve, the throttle position sensor to detect the opening angle of the throttle
valve, the accelerator pedal position sensor to detect the accelerator pedal position, the engine ECU to con-
trol the ETCS and the one valve type throttle body.
The engine ECU controls the throttle motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly for the target
idle speed.
Idle speed continues to vary greatly from target speed S Air induction system
P0505
(2 trip detection logic) S Electric throttle control system
HINT:
vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air−fuel was ratio lean or rich, etc.
1 Are there any other codes (besides P0505) being output?
NO
OK
Check electric throttle control system (See

page FI−35).

DI−158
DI646−02
DTC P1120 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit

Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Accelerator pedal position sensor is mounted on the accelerator pedal bracket and it have the 2 sensors
to detects the accelerator position and a malfunction of the accelerator position’s own.
The accelerator pedal position sensor is the voltage applied to the terminals VPA and VPA2 of the ECU
changes between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the opening angle of the accelerator pedal.
The engine ECU judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals input from
terminals VPA and VPA2 and the engine ECU controls the throttle motor based on these signals.
Movable Range Movable Range VPA2
5 *1: Accelerator pedal
Output Voltage (V)

Accelerator Pedal
Usable *1 Position Sensor released (15˚)
Range *2: Accelerator pedal
*2 Usable Range depressed (about
100˚)
*1 0.8 VPA
EPTK *2 0
125
*1 105
Usable Range *2
EPA VPA VPA2 VCPA VPTK Accelerator Pedal Opening Angle (deg) A14697

Condition (a), (b), (c) or (d) continues for 2.0 seconds:
(a) VPA % 0.2 V
(b) VPA2 % 0.5 V
(c) VPA 4.8 V S Open or short in accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
P1120 (d) When VPA 0.2 V and % 3.4 V, and VPA2 4.8 V S Accelerator pedal position sensor
(e) VPA−VPA2 % 0.02 V S Engine ECU
Condition (a) or (b) continues for 0.4 seconds:

(a) VPA % 0.2 V and VPA2 % 0.5 V
HINT:
After confirming DTC P1120, use the OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to confirm the accelerator pedal
opening percentage.
Throttle valve position expressed as voltage
Accelerator pedalreleased Acceleratorpedaldepressed Trouble area
ACCEL POS #1 ACCEL POS #2 ACCEL POS #1 ACCEL POS #2
0V 0V 0V 0V VC line open
0V 0.9 − 2.3 V 0V 3.3 − 5.0 V VPA line open or grandshort
0.5 − 1.1 V 0V 3.0 − 4.6 V 0V VPA2 line openorgrandshort
5V 5V 5V 5V E2 line open

DI−159
WIRING DIAGRAM
A10
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Engine ECU
32
2 B E5 VPA2
33
5 L
E5 VPA
34
1 BR
E5 EPA
35
6 B
E5 VCPA
26
3 BR
E5 EPTK
27
4 L−R
E5 VPTK
A14796
HINT:
1 Connect hand−held tester, read voltage for accelerator pedal position sensor
data.
PREPARATION:
ter main switch ON.
CHECK:
Read the voltage for the accelerator pedal position sensor data.
OK:
Accelerator Pedal VPA VPA2
FI7052
Released 0.5 − 1.1 V 0.9 − 2.3 V
Depressed 3.0 − 4.6 V 3.3 − 5.0 V

(See page IN−30).
NG

DI−160
2 Check voltage between terminals VCPA and EPA, VPTK and EPTK of engine ECU
connector.
ON (+) (−) PREPARATION:

EPTK (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
VPTK
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminals VCPA and EPA, VPTK
and EPTK of the engine ECU connector.
VCPA OK:
EPA
(+) (−) A14485 Voltage: 4.5 − 5.5 V

(See page IN−30).
OK
3 Check voltage between terminals VPA and EPTK, VPA2 and EPA of engine ECU
connector.
ON (−) (+) PREPARATION:

VPA (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
EPTK
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminals VPA and EPTK, VPA2
and EPA of the engine ECU connector.
EPA (+) (−) OK:
VPA2
A14486 Voltage
A
Accelerator
l t pedal
d l
VPA − EPTK VPA2 − EPA
Released 0.5 − 1.1 V 0.9 − 2.3 V
Depressed 3.0 − 4.6 V 3.3 − 5.0 V

(See page IN−30).
NG

DI−161
4 Check accelerator pedal position sensor (See page FI−35).
NG Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
OK
Check for open and short in harness and connector in VCPA, VPTK, VPA, VPA2, EPTK and EPA
circuits between engine ECU and accelerator pedal position sensor (See page IN−30).
1 Check voltage between terminals VCPA and EPA, VPTK and EPTK of engine ECU
connector.
ON (+) (−) PREPARATION:

EPTK (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
VPTK
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminals VCPA and EPA, VPTK
and EPTK of the engine ECU connector.
VCPA OK:
EPA
(+) (−) A14485 Voltage: 4.5 − 5.5 V

(See page IN−30).
OK

DI−162
2 Check voltage between terminals VPA and EPTK, VP2 and EPA of engine ECU
connector.
ON (−) (+) PREPARATION:

VPA (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
EPTK
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminals VPA and EPTK, VPA2
and EPA of the engine ECU connector.
EPA (+) (−) OK:
VPA2
A14486 Voltage
A
Accelerator
l t pedal
d l
VPA − EPTK VPA2 − EPA
Released 0.5 − 1.1 V 0.9 − 2.3 V
Depressed 3.0 − 4.6 V 3.3 − 5.0 V

(See page IN−30).
NG
3 Check accelerator pedal position sensor (See page FI−35).
NG Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
OK
Check for open and short in harness and connector in VCPA, VPTK, VPA, VPA2, EPA and EPTK
circuits between engine ECU and accelerator pedal position sensor (See page IN−30).

DI−163
DI647−02
DTC P1121 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Range/

Performance Problem
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Condition (a) continue for 2.0 seconds:
P1121 S Accelerator pedal position sensor
(a) Difference between VPA and VPA2 is out of threshold
HINT:
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.

DI−164
DI85S−01
DTC P1125 Throttle Control Motor Circuit Malfunction

*: ETCS trouble code No. is 21.
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Throttle motor is operated by the engine ECU and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor which is mounted on the
throttle body and it provides feedback to the engine ECU to control the throttle motor in order to the throttle
valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
Condition (a) and (b) continues for 0.5 seconds:
(a) Throttle control motor output duty 80 %
(b) Throttle control motor current < 0.5 A S Open or short in throttle control motor circuit
P1125 S Throttle control motor
Throttle control motor current 16 A
S Engine ECU
Under condition continue for 0.6 seconds:
Throttle control motor current 7 A
WIRING DIAGRAM
Throttle Control Motor Engine ECU

with magnetic clutch (Shielded)
3
2 L
E2 M+
2
1 Y
E2 M−
1
E2 GE01
A14031
HINT:

DI−165
1 Check throttle control motor circuit.
M+ Signal Waveform PREPARATION:

5V/ (a) Connect the oscilloscope between terminals M+ or M−
Division and E1 of the engine ECU connector.
CHECK:
Check the waveform between terminals M+ or M− and E1 of the
GND engine ECU when the engine is idling.
OK:
1 m sec./Division
HINT:
M− Signal Waveform
The waveform frequency varies depending on the throttle
5V/
opening.
Division
GND
(See page IN−30).
A03403
A03404
1 msec./Division A03675
NG
2 Check throttle control motor (See page FI−35).
NG Replace throttle body (See page FI−38).
OK
3 Check for open and short in harness and connector between throttle control mo-
tor and engine ECU (See page IN−30).
OK

IN−30).

DI−166
DI64A−04
DTC P1127 ETCS Actuator Power Source Circuit Mal-

function
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal BM of the engine ECU even once when the ignition switch
is OFF for the electric throttle control system.
S Open in ETCS power source circuit
P1127 Open in ETCS power source circuit
S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
6 7
L−Y (*1) V−Y +BM
IA2 E6
L−Y (*2)
1
2
ECTS
Engine Room No.1 R/B

1
1
B−L *1: LHD
*2: RHD
Battery
A03820
HINT:

DI−167
1 Check ETCS fuse.
PREPARATION:
Engine Room No. 1 R/B Remove the ETCS fuse from the engine room No.1 R/B.
CHECK:
Check the continuity of the ETCS fuse.
OK:
Continuity
ECTS Fuse
A02993
NG Check for short in all harness and components

connected to ETCS fuse.
OK
2 Check voltage between terminal +BM of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
PREPARATION:
Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
+BM
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminal +BM of the engine ECU
OK:
(−) (+) Voltage: 9 − 14 V
A14487

(See page IN−30).
NG
Check and repair harness or connector be-

tween battery and ETCS fuse, and ETCS fuse

DI−168
DI85T−01
DTC P1128 Throttle Control Motor Lock Malfunction

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Throttle motor is operated by the ECU and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor which is mounted on the
throttle body and it provides feedback to the engine ECU to control the throttle motor in order the throttle
valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
Lock throttle control motor during control throttle S Throttle control motor
P1128
control motor S Throttle body
HINT:
1 Check throttle control motor (See page FI−35).
NG Replace throttle body (See page FI−38).
OK
2 Visually check throttle valve.
PREPARATION:
Remove the air cleaner.
CHECK:
Check whether or not a foreign body is caught between the throttle valve and the housing.
NG Remove a foreign body and clean throttle body.

DI−169
OK
Replace throttle body.

DI−170
DI64C−04
DTC P1129 Electric Throttle Control System Malfunction

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Electric Throttle Control System (ETCS) is composed of the throttle motor to operate the throttle valve, the
throttle position sensor to detect the opening angle of the throttle valve, the accelerator pedal position sensor
to detect the accelerator pedal position, the engIne ECU to control the ETCS and the one valve type throttle
body.
The engIne ECU controls the throttle motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response
driving condition.
The throttle position sensor which is mounted on the throttle body detects the opening angle of the throttle
valve, and it provides feedback to the engIne ECU to control the throttle motor.
If the ETCS has a malfunction, the engIne ECU shuts down the power for the throttle motor, and the throttle
valve is fully closed by the return spring.
Throttle opening angle continues to vary great from target S Electric throttle control system
P1129
throttle opening angle S EngIne ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
NO
Replace engIne ECU, and clear DTC. If DTC P1129 is memorized again, and then replace throttle
body.

DI−171
DI2UP−03
DTC P1300 Igniter Circuit Malfunction (No.1)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
A DIS (Direct Ignition System) has been adopted. The DIS improves the ignition timing accuracy, reduces
high−voltage loss, and enhances the the overall reliability of the ignition system by eliminating the distributor.
The DIS is a 1−cylinder ignition system which ignites one cylinder with one ignition coil. In the 1−cylinder
ignition system, the one spark plug is connected to the end of the secondary winding. High voltage generated
in the secondary winding is applied directly to the spark plug. The spark of the spark plug pass from the center
elecrtode to the ground electrode.
The engine ECU determines ignition timing and outputs the ignition signals (IGT) for each cylinder. Based
on IGT signals, the power transistors in the igniter cuts off the current to the primary coil in the ignition coil
is supplied to the spark plug that are connected to the end of the secondary coil. At the same time, the igniter
also sends an ignition confirmation signal (IGF) as a fail−safe measure to the engine ECU.

DI−172
From Battery
Engine ECU Igniter
No.1 Ignition Coil with Igniter
Spark Plug
IGT1
No.1 Cylinder
IF1L
Crankshaft Ignition Coil

Position
Sensor IGT2 No.2 Ignition No.2 Cylinder
IF2R Coil with Igniter
IGT3 No.3 Ignition No.3 Cylinder

IF2L Coil with Igniter
Camshaft IGT4 No.4 Ignition No.4 Cylinder

Position IF2R Coil with Igniter
Sensor
Coil with Igniter

Coil with Igniter
Various
Sensor IGT7 No.7 Ignition No.7 Cylinder
Coil with Igniter

Coil with Igniter
TAC
To Tachometer
A14488

P1300
P1305
S Open or short in IF1L, IF2L, IF1R or IF2R and IGT1 − 8 circuit
P1310
from
P1315
No IF signal to engine ECU while engine is running ignition coil with igniter
P1320
S No.1 − No.8 ignition coil with igniter
P1325
S Engine ECU
P1330
P1340

DI−173
WIRING DIAGRAM
Ignition Coil J48 J/C Engine ECU

and Igniter 6
W−B LG LG
E4 IF1L
4 2 A A
J48 J/C
7 A 16
B B B 1 3 P−L
EA2 E2 IGT7
B B No.7
B−W B 7
W−B G G
E4 IF1R
4 2
A
J16(*1) 11
J39(*2) B B 1 3 R−L
E4 IGT6
J/C No.6
A
B−W W−B G
B
6 4 2
IG2 I12 12
Ignition B B 1 3 R
E4 IGT4
SW
AM2 No.4
W−B LG
7 B B W−B
4 2
W−R
27
B B 1 3 G−W
E2 IGT1
9 IA1 (*1) No.1
1 5
7 IK1 (*2) 1 W−B L−B L−B
E4 IF2R
4 2
10
W−R B 1 3 B−W
E4 IGT8
No.8
4
N6 N5 W−B G−B G−B
1 W−B E4 IF2L
Noise Noise 4 2
2 Filter Filter 27
B 1 3 G
Engine Room E2 IGT5
AM2
No.1 R/B No.5
1 W−B W−B G−B
4 2
1
16
B 1 3 L
E2 IGT3
No.3
B−L
W−B W−B L−B
W−B
4 2
Battery
13
ED EC B 1 3 L−R
E4 IGT2
*1: LHD No.2
*2: RHD
A14798

DI−174
HINT:
S If DTC P1300 is displayed, check No.1 ignition coil with igniter circuit.
S If DTC P1300 and P1330 are output simultaneously, IF1L circuit may be open or short.
S If DTC P1315 and P1325 are output simultaneously, IF1R circuit may be open or short.
S If DTC P1310 and P1320 are output simultaneously, IF2L circuit may be open or short.
S If DTC P1305 and P1340 are output simultaneously, IF2R circuit may be open or short.
1 Check spark plug and spark (See page IG−1).
NG Go to step 4.
OK
2 Check for open and short in harness and connector in IF and IGT signal circuit
between engine ECU and ignition coil with igniter (See page IN−30).
OK

DI−175
3 Disconnect ignition coil with igniter connector and check voltage between
terminals IF1L, IF2L, IF1R, IF2R of engine ECU connector and body ground.
ON PREPARATION:
IF1R IF1L IF2R (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
IF2L FI−74).
(b) Disconnect the ignition coil with igniter connector.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals IF1L, IF2L, IF1R, IF2R of
(−) (+) the engine ECU connector and body ground.
A14489 OK:
Voltage: 4.5 − 5.5 V
OK Replace ignition coil with igniter.
NG

(See page IN−30).
4 Check for open and short in harness and connector in IGT signal circuit between
engine ECU and ignition coil with igniter (See page IN−30).
OK

DI−176
5 Check voltage between terminals IGT1 − 8 of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
ON IGT3 PREPARATION:
IGT4 IGT6 Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
IGT2 IGT8 FI−74).
IGT1 CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals IGT1 − 8 of the engine
ECU connector and body ground when engine is cranked.
IGT5 OK:
(−)
Voltage: More than 0.1 V and less than 4.5 V
IGT7 (+)
A14490

IGT signal waveform
2 V/ During cranking or idling, check waveform between terminals
Division IGT1 − 8 and E1 of the engine ECU connector.
IGT
HINT:
GND Correct waveform appears as sohwn, with rectangle waves.
IGF
GND
20 m sec./Division
A03401
(See page IN−30).
OK
6 Disconnect ignition coil with igniter connector and check voltage between termi-
nals IGT1 − 8 of engine ECU connector and body ground.
ON IGT3 PREPARATION:
IGT4 IGT6 (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
IGT2 IGT8 FI−74).
IGT1 (b) Disconnect the ignition coil with igniter connector.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals IGT1 − 8 of the engine
IGT5 ECU connector and body ground when engine is cranked.
(−)
OK:
IGT7 (+) Voltage: More than 0.1 V and less than 4.5 V
A14490

(See page IN−30).
OK

DI−177
7 Check ignition coil with igniter power source circuit.
ON PREPARATION:
1 (+)
Disconnect the ignition coil with igniter connector.
CHECK:
START
Measure voltage between terminal 1 of ignition coil with igniter
connector and body ground, when ignition switch is turned to
”ON” and ”START” position.
OK:
Voltage: 9 − 14 V
BE6653
A01761 A01861
OK Repair ignition coil with igniter power source

circuit.
NG
8 Check for open and short in harness and connector between ignition switch and
ignition coil with igniter (See page IN−30).
OK
Replace ignition coil with igniter.

DI−178
DI64E−05
DTC P1335 Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunc-

tion (During engine running)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
No crankshaft position sensor signal to engine ECU with en- S Crankshaft position sensor
P1335
gine speed 1,000 rpm or more S Crankshaft timing pulley
S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
Refer to DTC P0335on page DI−144.

DI−179
DI2UR−02
DTC P1345 VVT Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1)
DTC P1350 VVT Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
VVT sensor (VVL or VVR signal) consist of a signal plate and pickup coil.
The VVL or VVR signal plate has 1 tooth on its outer circumference and is mounted on the intake camshafts.
When the camshafts rotate, the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil change,
causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil.
The actual camshaft angle is detected by the VVT sensor and it provides feedback to the engine ECU to
control the intake valve timing in response to during condition.
No VVT sensor signal to engine ECU during cranking at 4 sec.
or more
S Open or short in VVT sensor circuit
P1345 No VVT sensor signal to engine ECU with 5 sec. or more en-
S VVT sensor
P1350 gine speed 600 rpm or more
S Engine ECU
While the crankshaft rotates twice, VVT sensor signal will be
input to engine ECU 5 times.
WIRING DIAGRAM
V8 Engine ECU
VVT Sensor LH (Bank 1)
18
1 R VVL+
E2
19
2 G VVL−
E2
V9
VVT Sensor RH (Bank 2)
19
1 Y VVR+
E4
18
2 L
E4 VVR−
A02961

DI−180
HINT:
S If DTC P1345 is dysplayed, check left bank VVT sensor.
S If DTC P1350 is dysplayed, check right bank VVT sensor.
was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time
of the malfunction.
1 Check resistance of VVT sensor (See page FI−70).

VVL Signal Waveform
During idling, check between terminals VVL+ and VVL−, VVR+
1V/
Division and VVR− of the engine ECU connector.
HINT:
GND S The correct waveform is as shown.
S The waveform frequency is shortened as the engine
speed becomes higher.
50 m sec./Division A03402
NG Replace VVT sensor.
OK
VVT sensor (See page IN−30).
OK
3 Inspect sensor installation.
NG Tighten sensor.
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−181
DI1MB−12
DTC P1346 VVT Sensor/Camshaft Position Sensor Cir-

DTC P1351 VVT Sensor/Camshaft Position Sensor Cir-

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTCs P1345 and P1350 on page DI−179.
DTC No. Detection Item Trouble Area
Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and VVT sensor
P1346 S Mechanical system (Jumping teeth of timing belt, belt
1 signal (2 trip detection logic)
stretched)
t t h d)
Deviation in crankshaft position sensor signal and VVT sensor
P1351 S Engine ECU
2 signal (2 trip detection logic)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTCs P1345 and P1350 on page DI−179.
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using hand−held tester or OBD scan tool. Because freeze frame records the engine
conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether the
1 Check valve timing (Check for loose and jumping teeth of timing belt) (See page
EM−22).
NG Adjust valve timing (Repair or replace timing

belt).
OK

IN−30).

DI−182
DI2US−02
DTC P1349 VVT System Malfunction (Bank 1)
DTC P1354 VVT System Malfunction (Bank 2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
VVT system controls the intake valve timing to proper timing in response to driving condition.
engine ECU controls OCV (Oil Control Valve) to make the intake valve timing properly, and, oil pressure con-
trolled with OCV is supplied to the VVT controller, and then, VVT controller changes relative position between
the camshaft and the crankshaft.
Condition (a) or (b) continues for after the engine is
S Valve timing
warmed up and engine speed at 400 ~ 4,000 rpm :
P1349 S Oil control valve
(a) Valve timing does not change from of current valve
P1354 S VVT controller assembly
timing
S Engine ECU
(b) Current valve timing is fixed.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
OCV (Bank 1)
1 L−Y 6
E2 OC1+
2 G−W 5
E2 OC1−
OCV (Bank 2)
1 L−W 9
E4 OC2+
8
2 L−B
E4 OC2−
A07621 A09776

DI−183
HINT:
S If DTC P1349 is displayed, check left bank VVT system circuit.
S If DTC P1354 is displayed, check right bank VVT system circuit.
was running or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time
of the malfunction.
1 Check valve timing (See page EM−22).
NG Repair valve timing.
OK
2 Check operation of OCV.
PREPARATION:
(a) Start the engine and warmed it up.
(b) Connect the hand−held tester and select VVT from ACTIVE TEST menu.
CHECK:
Check the engine speed when operate the OCV by the hand−held tester.
OK:
OCV is OFF:
Normal engine speed
OCV is ON:
Rough idle or engine stall
OK VVT system is OK.*
*: DTC P1349 and P1354 are also output after the foreign object
is caught in some part of the system in the engine oil and the
system returns to normal in a short time. As engine ECU con-
trols so that foreign objects are ejected, there is no problem
about VVT. There is also no problem since the oil filter should
get the foreign object in the engine oil.
NG

DI−184
3 Check voltage between terminals OCV+ and OCV− of engine ECU connector.
OCV Signal Waveform Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE

5 V/ Turn the ignition switch ON, check waveform between terminals
Division OCV+ and OCV− of the engine ECU connector.
(A) (A) (A) HINT:
S The correct waveform is as shown.
GND S The waveform frequency (A) is lengthened as the engine
1 m sec./Division
A02397

(See page IN−30).
OK
4 Check VVT controller assembly.
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the timing belt (See page EM−15).
(b) Remove the cylinder head cover.
(c) Remove the oil control valve (See page EM−36).
(d) Drain oil into the VVT controller assembly
(See page EM−36).
CHECK:
Check whether the oil into VVT controller assembly is drained
A02852 or not.
OK:
The oil into VVT controller assembly is drained.
NG Replace VVT controller assembly, and then

go to step 5.
OK
5 Check oil control valve (See page FI−43).
NG Replace oil control valve, and then go to step 6.
OK

DI−185
6 Check blockage of oil control valve, oil check valve and oil pipe No.1.
OK
7 Check whether or not DTC P1349/P1354 is stored.
PREPARATION:
(a) Clear the DTC (See page DI−73).
(b) Perform simulation test.
CHECK:
Check whether or not DTC P1349/P1354 is stored (See page DI−73).
OK:
DTC P1349/P1354 is not stored
NG
Replace engine ECU
1 Check valve timing (See page EM−22).
NG Repair valve timing.
OK

DI−186
PREPARATION:
OCV Connector
(a) Start the engine.
CHECK:
(a) Check the engine speed when disconnect the OCV con-
nector.
(b) Check the engine speed when apply battery positive volt-
age between terminals of OCV.
RESULT:
Result Check (a) Check (b)
1 Normal engine speed Rough idle or engine stall
(b) 2 Except 1
(−) (+)
A02386
A02628
2 Go to step 4.
A02387

DI−187
3 Check voltage between terminals OCV+ and OCV− of engine ECU connector.
OCV Signal Waveform Reference: INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE

5 V/ Turn the ignition switch ON, check waveform between terminals
Division OCV+ and OCV− of the engine ECU connector.
(A) (A) (A) HINT:
S The correct waveform is as shown.
GND S The waveform frequency (A) is lengthened as the engine
1 m sec./Division
A02397 OK VVT system is OK.*
NG

(See page IN−30).
4 Check VVT controller assembly.
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the timing belt (See page EM−15).
(b) Remove the cylinder head cover.
(c) Remove the oil control valve (See page EM−36).
(d) Drain oil into the VVT controller assembly
(See page EM−36).
CHECK:
Check whether the oil into VVT controller assembly is drained
A02852 or not.
OK:
The oil into VVT controller assembly is drained.
NG Replace VVT controller assembly, and then

go to step 5.
OK

DI−188
5 Check oil control valve (See page FI−43).
NG Replace oil control valve, and then go to step 6.
OK
6 Check blockage of oil control valve, oil check valve and oil pipe No.1.
OK
7 Check whether or not DTC P1349/P1354 is stored.
PREPARATION:
(a) Clear the DTC (See page DI−73).
(b) Perform simulation test.
CHECK:
Check whether or not DTC P1349/P1354 is stored (See page DI−73).
OK:
DTC 59 is not stored
NG
Replace engine ECU

DI−189
DI088−14
DTC P1520 Stop Light Switch Signal Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This signal is used to detect when the brakes have been applied. The STP signal voltage is the same as
the voltage supplied to the stop lights.
The STP signal is used mainly to control the fuel cut−off engine speed (The fuel cut−off engine speed is re-
duced slightly when the vehicle is braking.).
The stop light switch does not turn off even once the vehicle is S Short in stop light switch signal circuit
P1520 driven S Stop light switch
WIRING DIAGRAM
S12 Engine ECU
Driver Side J/B
Stop Light SW
STOP 8 4
W G−W G−W STP
1H E5
2 1 A(*1) A(*1)
B(*2) B(*2)
1 *3 A(*1)
B(*2) J7(*1)
W
G−W J39(*2)
1 J/C
Engine Room
No.1 R/B 9 IC3
2 ALT
1 G−W R14
Light Failure
B
J20(*1) Sensor
1 G
J43(*2) ST+2
B 10
B−L J/C
B To Stop Light
Battery *1: LHD
*2: RHD G−W
*3: 1A (RHD) ST+1
9
A03823 1K (LHD) A10639

DI−190
HINT:
gine conditions when the malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, it is useful for determining whether
the vehicle was running or stopped, the engine was warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio was lean or rich,
CHECK:
Check if the stop lights go on and off normally when the brake pedal is operated and released.
OK
2 Check STP signal.
ON When using hand−held tester:

PREPARATION:
Brake Pedal Brake Pedal (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand−held tes-
Depressed Released
ter main switch ON.
CHECK:
OK:
Brake Pedal STP Signal
ON Depressed ON
Released OFF
PREPARATION:
(−) (+)
CHECK:
Check the voltage between terminal STP of the engine ECU
STP connector and body ground.
OK:
A14491
Brake Pedal Voltage

(See page DI−73).
NG

DI−191
3 Check harness and connector between engine ECU and stop light switch
(See page IN−30).
OK

IN−30).

DI−192
DI7JD−03
DTC P1600 ECM BATT Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal BATT of the engine ECU even when the ignition switch is OFF
for use by the DTC memory and air−fuel ratio adaptive control value memory, etc.
S Open in back up power source circuit
P1600 Open in back up power source circuit
S Engine ECU
HINT:
If DTC P1600 appear, the engine ECU does not store another DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
3 3 4 BATT
B−Y B−Y
IA1 II4 E6
(*2) (*1)
1
Engine Room No.1 J/B
2
EFI
1
1
B−L
Battery
*1: LHD
*2: RHD
A14799
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using OBD scan tool or hand−held tester. Because free frame records the engine

DI−193
1 Check voltage between terminal BATT of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
LOCK PREPARATION:
BATT Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal BATT of the engine ECU
OK:
Voltage: 9 − 14 V
(−) (+)
A14492

IN−30).
NG
2 Check EFI fuse.
PREPARATION:
Engine Room No. 1J/B Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room J/B.
CHECK:
Check continuity of EFI fuse.
OK:
Continuity

EFI Fuse A02993
connected to EFI fuse.
OK
Check and repair harness or connector be-

tween battery, EFI fuse and engine ECU (See
page IN−30).

DI−194
DI2UT−03
DTC P1633 ECU Malfunction (ETCS Circuit)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

P1633 ECU malfunction S Engine ECU
HINT:
of the malfunction.
Replace engine ECU.

DI−195
DI64J−04
DTC P1645 Body ECU Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
ECU receives the operating condition (ON/OFF) of A/C from A/C ECU and it also receives the electrical load
information from the body ECU.
ECU uses these information to control the engine (idle up, etc.).
Condition (a) or (b) continues for 5.0 seconds or more: S Body ECU
P1645 (a) No communication from body ECU S A/C ECU
(b) No communication from A/C ECU S Communication bus
Perform troubleshooting the Multiplex Communication System (See page DI−739).

DI−196
DI64K−05
DTC P1651 VSV for ACIS Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit opens and closes the Intake Air Control Valve (IACV) in response to the engine load in order to
increase the intake efficiency (ACIS: Acoustic Control Induction System).
When the engine speed is 4,700 rpm or more and the throttle valve opening angle is 60˚ or more, the VSV
is OFF, so the is IACV open. All the other times, the ECM turns the VSV ON and closes the IACV.
IACV IACV closed (VSV: ON)
Intake Throttle valve

Manifold opening angle
60˚
4,700
Engine speed (rpm)
A01995 A15196 A15197

Proper response to engine ECU command does not occur
P1651 S VSV for ACIS
S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
B−Y
J34(*1) J28(*1)
1 1 J14(*2) J4(*2) Engine ECU
EFI Relay 3 1 J/C J/C
5 3 B−R B−R B−R B−R
2 1 IA3 II1
A A B B
(*2) (*1)
EFI 1 2 W−B
1 4
1
EA3 +B
1
1
EngineRoom A 15 13
J5(*1) B−Y B−Y
B−L No.1 R/B IA2 E6 MREL
J29(*2)
J/C V2
A W
W−B VSV for ACIS 21
ACIS
1 2 L−W E4
Battery EE
*1: LHD
*2: RHD E01
A14795

DI−197
HINT:
1 Connect hand−held tester and check operation of VSV for ACIS.
ON PREPARATION:
VSV is ON VSV is OFF ter main switch ON.
(c) Select the ACTIVE TEST mode on the hand−held tester.
Air
Air CHECK:
Check operation of the VSV when VSV is operated by the
E E hand−held tester.
OK:
F VSV is ON:
F Air Filter Air from port E flows out through port F.
VSV is OFF:
Air from port E flows out through the air filter.
BE6653
FI7073 FI7074 A00307
OK Check for vacuum tank (See page FI−59).
NG
2 Check VSV for ACIS (See page FI−59).
OK
3 Check for open and short in harness and connector between EFI main relay and
(Marking: EFI) engine ECU (See page IN−30).
OK

DI−198

(See page IN−30).
1 Check VSV for ACIS (See page FI−59).
OK
2 Check voltage between terminal ACIS of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
ON PREPARATION:
ACIS (a) Remove the engine ECU hood and cover (See page
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminal ACIS of the engine ECU
OK:
(−) (+)
A14493 Voltage: 9 − 14 V

OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−199
DI2UV−02
DTC P1656 OCV Circuit Malfunction (bank 1)
DTC P1663 OCV Circuit Malfunction (bank 2)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P1349, P1354 on page DI−182.
S Open or short in oil control valve circuit
P1656
Open or short in oil control valve circuit S Oil control valve
P1663
S Engine ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P1349, P1354 on page DI−182.
HINT:
S If DTC P1656 dysplayed, check left bank OCV circuit.
S If DTC P1663 dysplayed, check right bank OCV circuit.
1 Check OCV circuit.
PREPARATION:
(b) Connect the hand−held tester and select VVT from ACTIVE TEST menu.
CHECK:
Check the engine speed when operate the OCV by the hand−held tester.
OK:
VVT system is OFF (OCV is OFF):
Normal engine speed
VVT system is ON (OCV is ON):
Rough idle or engine stalled

(See page DI−73).
NG

DI−200
START PREPARATION:
(b) Disconnect the OCV connector.
(c) Apply battery positive voltage between terminals of the
OCV.
CHECK:
Check the engine speed.
(−) (+) OK:
BE6653
A02387 A02629 Rough idle or engine stalled.
NG Replace OCV.
OK
3 Check voltage between terminals OCV+ and OCV− of engine ECU connector
(See page DI−181).

(See page IN−30).
OK
4 Check for open and short in harness and connector between OCV and engine
OK
Check for intermitent problems

(See page DI−73).

DI−201
START PREPARATION:
(b) Disconnect the OCV connector.
(c) Apply battery positive voltage between terminals of the
OCV.
CHECK:
Check the engine speed.
(−) (+) OK:
BE6653
A02387 A02629 Rough idle or engine stalled
NG Replace OCV.
OK
2 Check voltage between terminals OCV+ and OCV− of engine ECU connector

(See page IN−30).
OK
3 Check for open and short in harness and connector between OCV and engine
OK
Check for intermitent problems

(See page DI−73).

DI−202
DI85U−01
Starter Signal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the engine is cranked, the intake air flow is slow, so fuel vaporization is poor. A rich mixture is therefore
necessary in order to achieve good startability. While the engine is being cranked, the battery positive volt-
age is applied to terminal STA of the engine ECU. The starter signal id mainly used to increase the fuel injec-
tion volume for the starting injection control and after−start injection control.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine ECU
IG Switch Driver Side J/B
7 9 10 STARTER 1
W−R W−R B B−L
IK1 IA1 1F 1F
7 8
(*2) (*1)
1 B
1
STARTER Relay 9 EA3
3 5
L−Y
2 9
2 1 B N1
AM2 1
Neutral
W−B IA2 13 (*2) Start
1 1
MAIN IA2 7 (*1) Switch
6
1 2 BR
1 5 EA2
B
B−L 2 8 J/C C C
B
IA3 II4 J3 J27 B
(*2) (*1) (*1) (*2)
EA2 8 A A A C C 12
B 1 B STA
EC1 B−R J28 J4 J3 J27 E6
(*2) (*1) (*1) (*2)
B−L 1 S2 1 A J5(*1)
S3 J29(*2)
W−B
J/C
*1: LHD
Battery EE
*2: RHD
Starter
A14800

DI−203
HINT:
This diagnostic chart is based on the premise that the engine is cranked normally. If the engine is not
cranked, proceed to the problem symptoms table on page DI−93.
1 Connect hand−held tester and check STA signal.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Read STA signal on the hand−held tester while starter operates.
OK:
Ignition Switch Position ON START
STA signal OFF ON
OK Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on

problem symptoms table (See page DI−93).
NG
2 Check for open in harness and connector between engine ECU and starter relay
(Marking: STARTER) (See page IN−30).
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−204
1 Check voltage between terminal STA of engine ECU connector and body ground.
START PREPARATION:
STA FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal STA of the engine ECU con-
nector and body ground, during engine cranking.
OK:
(−) (+)
A14494 Voltage: 6 V or more

NG
2 Check for open in harness and connector between engine ECU and starter relay
(Marking: STARTER) (See page IN−30).
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−205
DI2UX−04
ECU Power Source Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the ignition switch is turned ON, battery positive voltage is applied to the terminal IGSW of the engine
ECU and the EFI main relay (Making: EFI) control circuit in the engine ECU sends a signal to the terminal
MREL of the engine ECU switching on the EFI main relay.
This signal causes current to flow to the coil, closing the contacts of the EFI main relay and supplying power
to the terminals +B of the engine ECU.
If the ignition switch is turned off, the engine ECU continues to switch on the EFI main relay for a maximum
of 2 seconds for the initial setting of the ISC valve.
WIRING DIAGRAM
J16(*1) J15(*1)
I12 J39(*2) J36(*2)
Ignition SW J/C J/C Engine ECU
6 IGN 7 17
W−R B−W B−O B−O
1J 1G E6 IGSW
7 AM2 IG2 6 A A E E
Driver Side J/B
B B 5
J14(*1) B−R
9 IA1 (*1) J34(*2) J27 J3 E6 +B1
J/C (*2) (*1)
7 IK1 (*2) 3 1 B B B B 6
B−R B−R B−R
IA3 II1 J4 J28 J27 J3 E6 +B
(*2) (*1) A A (*1) (*2) (*2) (*1)
B−R J/C
W−R 3 5 B−Y
1 1
2 1 15 13
W−B B−Y B−Y
1 1 IA2 E6 MREL
J5(*1)
A J29(*2) EFI Relay
7
1 J49 B BR
1 E3 E1
EFI 2 J/C
A J/C B−L B
1
W−B BR
W−B
1
2 AM2 1
EE Battery ED EC
*1 : LHD
*2 : RHD
A14801

DI−206
1 Check voltage between terminals + B and E1 of engine ECU connector.
ON PREPARATION:
E1 (−) +B
FI−74).
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals +B and E1 of the engine
ECU connector.
(−) (+)
OK:
A14495 Voltage: 9 − 14 V

Problem symptoms table (See page DI−93).
NG
2 Check for open in harness and connector between terminal E1 of engine ECU
and body ground (See page IN−30).
OK
3 Check voltage between terminal IGSW of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
ON PREPARATION:
IGSW Turn the ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal IGSW of the engine ECU
and body ground.
OK:
Voltage: 9 − 14 V
(−) (+) OK Go to step 6.

A14496
NG

DI−207
4 Check IGN fuse.
PREPARATION:
Remove the IGN fuse from the instrument panel J/B.
CHECK:
Driver Side J/B
Check continuity of the IGN fuse.
OK:
Continuity
IGN Fuse
A02994
connected to IGN fuse.
OK
5 Check ignition switch (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−31).
NG Replace ignition switch.
OK
Check and repair harness and connector

between battery and ignition switch, ignition
switch and engine ECU.

DI−208
6 Check voltage between terminal MREL of engine ECU connector and body
ground.
ON PREPARATION:
MREL Turn the ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal MREL of the engine ECU
OK:
Voltage: 9 − 14 V
(−) (+) NG Check and replace engine ECU

A14497
(See page IN−30).
OK
7 Check EFI No.1 fuse of engine room J/B (See page DI−192).

connected to EFI No.1 fuse.
OK
8 Check EFI main relay (Marking: EFI) (See page FI−53).
NG Replace EFI main relay (Marking: EFI).
OK

DI−209
9 Check for open and short in harness and connector between terminal MREL of
engine ECU and body ground (See page IN−30).
NG Repair and replace harness or connector.
OK
Check and repair harness or connector

between EFI No.1 fuse and battery.

DI−210
DI2SK−04
Fuel Pump Relay/ECU Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The fuel pump speed is controlled at 3 steps (high speed, medium speed, low speed) by the condition of
the engine (starting, idling, light load, heavy load), when the engine starts (STA ON) or heavy loads with en-
gine high speed, the engine ECU sends a Hi signal (about 3.8 V) to the fuel pump ECU (FPC terminal). The
fuel pump ECU then outputs Hi voltage (battery positive voltage) to the fuel pump so that the fuel pump oper-
ates at high speed. When the heavy loads with engine low spped, the engine ECU sends a Mid signal (about
2.5 V) to the fuel pump ECU (FPC terminal). The fuel pump ECU then outputs Mid voltage (about 10 V) to
the fuel pump so that the fuel pump operates at medium speed.
When the idling or light loads, the engine ECU sends a Low signal (about 1.3 V) to the fuel pump ECU (FPC
terminal). The fuel pump ECU then outputs Low voltage (about 8.5 V) to the fuel pump so that the fuel pump
operates at low speed.
WIRING DIAGRAM
3 1 Engine ECU
B−R
1 IA3 II1
(*2) (*1) +B
3 5 B−Y B−R
1
15 13 MREL
2 1 B−Y B−Y
1 IA2 E6
EFI Relay
IC2 8
1 2 B−R
1 +B
EFI Fuel Pump ECU
1 B−L 19 14 FPC
1 10 +B FPC B−L B−L
IC3 E6
Engine Room L−R 7 FP 8
W−B 4
No.1 R/B
Fuel
A
J5(*1) Pump DI 7 15 DI
J29 (*2) 6 FP− B−R B−R
5 IC3 E6
L−W E 9
J/C
A 5 W−B
W−B J21(*1) A
J44(*2) A
J/C W−B *1 : LHD
EE Battery
BK BJ *2 : RHD
A14802
HINT:
of the malfunction.

DI−211
1 Connect OBD scan tool or hand−held tester and check operation of fuel pump
(See page FI−6).
OK Go to step 7.
NG
2 Check voltage of fuel pump ECU power source.
ON PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the fuel pump ECU (See page FI−72).
10 (+) (b) Disconnect the fuel pump ECU connector.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal 10 of fuel pump ECU con-
nector and body ground.
OK:
BE6653
A02998 A03970 Voltage: 9 − 14 V
NG Check for open and short in harness and

connector between EFI main relay and
fuel pump engine ECU (See page IN−30).
OK
3 Check voltage between terminals 5 and 8 of fuel pump ECU connector.
START PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the fuel pump ECU (See page FI−72).
5 (−) 8 (+) (b) Disconnect the fuel pump ECU connector.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals 5 and 8 of fuel pump ECU
connector when ignition switch is turned to start.
OK:
Voltage: 3.3 − 4.3 V
BE6653
A02999 A03971
OK Go to step 5.
NG

DI−212
4 Check for open and short in harness and connector between terminals FPC of
engine ECU and 8 of fuel pump ECU, terminal 5 of fuel pump ECU and body
ground (See page IN−30).
OK

IN−30).
5 Check fuel pump (See page FI−6).
NG Repair or replace fuel pump.
OK
6 Check for open and short in harness and connector between terminal 7 of fuel
pump ECU and fuel pump and terminal 6 of fuel pump ECU and fuel pump (See
page IN−30).
OK
7 Check for open and short in harness and connector between terminals DI of en-
gine ECU and 9 of fuel pump ECU (See page IN−30).
OK

IN−30).
DI−213
DI6QO−08
Check Engine Warning Light Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
If the engine ECU detects trouble, the check engine warning lights up. At this time, the engine ECU records
a DTC in memory.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Check Engine
Warning Light Engine ECU
R−L 1 12 7 2
GR GR−R
C11 C12 IE1 E5 W
Driver Side J/B I12 Ignition SW

4 GAUGE 1 B−Y
1D 1J 4 2
IG1 AM1
W 1 1 AM1 3
1 2 W−L
1A 1K 1J
(*2) (*1)

ALT B−L
2 1
1 1
*1 : LHD
Battery *2 : RHD
A14803
HINT:
Troubleshoot in accordance with the chart below for each trouble symptom.
Start inspection from step 1 in case of using hand−held tester and
Check engine warning light does not light up
start from step 2 in case of not using hand−held tester
After inspection of step 3, start inspection from step 4 in case of

Check engine warning light remains on using hand−held tester and start from step 5 in case of not using
hand−held tester

DI−214
1 Check operation of check engine warning light.
PREPARATION:
(c) Switch the hand−held tester from the normal mode to the check mode.
CHECK:
Check if the check engine warning light blinks.
OK:
The check engine warning light blinks.

IN−30).
NG
2 Check check engine warning light.
See combination meter troubleshooting (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−2).
NG Repair or replace bulb or combination meter as-

sembly.
OK
3 Check that engine ECU connectors are securely connected to engine ECU.
NO Connect connector to engine ECU.
YES
Check for open circuit in harness and connector between combination meter and engine ECU
(See page IN−30).

DI−215
4 Check operation of check engine warning light (See step 1).

IN−30).
NG
5 Is DTC output?
Check DTC on page DI−73.
YES Repair circuit indicated by output code.
NO
Check for short circuit in harness and connector between DLC3 and engine ECU (See page
IN−30).

DI−216
DI6SV−10
TC Terminal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Terminal TC and CG are located in the DLC3. When connecting these terminals, DTCs in normal mode or
test mode can be read through the check engine warning light in combination meter by flashing it.
WIRING DIAGRAM
C3 Engine ECU
Check Connector J/C
D D D D 3
11 P−B P−B
TC J31 J9 J31 J9 E5 TC
(*2) (*1) (*2) (*1)
E C E C
BR
E1 J9 J36 J9 J36
3
(*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)
BR
BR D D D D
J28 J4 J28 J4
(*2) (*1) (*2) (*1)
3 EA3
BR B J49
J/C
W−B B
BR *1 : LHD
EC ED *2 : RHD
A14804

DI−217
HINT:
S Even though terminal TC is not connected with terminal CG, the check engine warning light blinks.
S For the above phenomenon, an open or short in the wire harness, or malfunction inside the engine
ECU is the likely cause.
1 Check voltage between terminals TC and CG of DLC3.
ON PREPARATION:
CG CHECK:
(−) Measure the voltage between terminals TC and CG of the
DLC3.
OK:
(+) Voltage: 9 − 14 V
TC OK Check and replace engine ECU

F08565
(See page IN−30).
NG
2 Check continuity between terminal CG of DLC3 and body ground.
OK
3 Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between engine ECU
and DLC3, and DLC3 and body ground (See page IN−30).
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−218
DIAGNOSTICS − AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (2JZ−GE)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (2JZ−GE)

DI61K−03

When using hand−held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages.
Vehicle Brought to Workshop Items inside are titles of pages in this manual, with the
page number indicated in the bottom portion. See the indicated
pages for detailed explanations.
1 Customer Problem Analysis
P. DI−220
2 Connect the hand−held tester or OBD scan tool to DLC3.

If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the
OBD scan tool/hand−held tester, inspect DLC3 P. DI−221
3 Check DTC and Freeze Frame Data (Precheck)

Record or Print DTC and Freeze Frame Data P. DI−221
4 Clear DTC and Freeze Frame Data P. DI−221
5 Visual Inspection
6 Setting the Check Mode Diagnosis P. DI−221

Symptom does not occur
7 Problem Symptom Confirmation 8 Symptom Simulation
Symptom occurs P. IN−20
9 DTC Check OK Code 11 Basic Inspection NG

P. DI−221 P. DI−221
OK
10 DTC Chart 12 Mechanical System Test NG
P. DI−234 P. DI−221
OK
NG 13 NG
Manual Shifting Test
P. DI−221
14 Problem Symptoms Table− P. DI−240
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 NG

OK OK
(Electronic) (On−Vehicle) (Off−Vehicle)
P. DI−240 P. DI−240 P. DI−240
NG NG
15 Circuit S Stop Light Switch Signal Circuit Check 16 Parts Inspection

Inspection S Transmission Shift Switch Circuit Check
P. DI−266 to DI−272
17 18
Identification of Problem Repair Confirmation Test End

DI−219
When not using hand−held tester, troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages.
Items inside are titles of pages in this manual, with the

Vehicle Brought to Workshop page number indicated in the bottom portion. See the indicated

P. DI−220
2 Check and Clear DTCs (Precheck)

P. DI−221

P. DI−221 P. IN−20
Symptom occurs
7 NG
5 DTC Check OK Code Basic Inspection
P. DI−221 P. DI−221
NG
OK
P. DI−234 P. DI−221
OK
9 NG
P. DI−221
10 Problem Symptoms Tables − P. DI−240
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3

OK OK NG
P. DI−240 P. DI−240 P. DI−240
NG NG
11 Circuit S Stop Light Switch Signal Circuit Check 12 Parts Inspection

Inspection S Transmission Shift Switch Circuit Check
P. DI−266 to DI−272
13 14

DI−220
DI61L−02
Transmission Control Inspector’s

System Check Sheet Name :
Registration No.
Customer’s Name Registration Year / /
Frame No.
Date Vehicle / / km
Odometer Reading
Brought In mile
Date Problem / /
Occurred
How Often Does j Continuous j Intermittent ( times a day)
Problem Occur?
j Vehicle does not move ( j Any range j Particular range)

j No up−shift ( j 1st ® 2nd j 2nd ® 3rd j 3rd ® 4th )
j No down−shift ( j 4th ® 3rd j 3rd ® 2nd j 2nd ® 1st )
j Lock−up malfunction
Symptoms j Shift point too high or too low
j Harsh engagement ( j N ® D j Lock−up j Any drive range)
j Slip or shudder
j No kick−down
j Others
Check Engine
Check Item Warning Light Normal Remains ON
(CHK ENG)
1st Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC )

DTC Check
2nd Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC )

DI−221
DI87P−01
PRE−CHECK
1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
(a) Description for EURO−OBD
FI6907
warning light on the instrument panel when the
control system/components or in the power−train
ISO15031−6 are recorded in the engine ECU
not reoccur in 3 consecutive trips, the (CHK ENG)
Hand−held Tester S To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or
gine data. (For operating instructions, see the OBD
scan tool’s instruction book.)
DLC3 D10066 turer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must
page DI−17).

DI−222

step 2).
memory (1st trip). If the same malfunction is de-
cond detection causes the (CHK ENG) to light up
(2nd trip).
(However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF
between the 1st trip and the 2nd trip.)
(b) Description for M−OBD
S When troubleshooting Multiplex (M−OBD) vehicles,
the only difference from the usual troubleshooting
procedure is that you connect the hand−held tester
to the vehicle, and read off various data output from
the vehicle’s Engine & ECT ECU.
The vehicle’s on−board computer lights up the
check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the
FI6907 instrument panel when the computer detects a mal-
function in the computer itself or in drive system
components. In addition to the CHK ENG lighting up
DTCs are recorded in the Engine & ECT ECU
memory (See page DI−17).
If the malfunction only occurs in 3 trips, the CHK
ENG goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the
Engine & ECT ECU memory.
Hand−held Tester S To check the DTCs, connect a hand−held tester to

DLC3 on the vehicle or read the number of blinks of
the CHK ENG when Tc and CG terminals on the
DLC3 are connected. The hand−held tester also
enables you to erase the DTCs and activate the
several actuators and check freeze frame data and
various forms of engine data (For instruction book).
DLC3 D10066

DI−223

during normal vehicle use, and also has a check
(test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction
symptoms and perform troubleshooting. Most
DTCs use 2−trip detection logic (*) to prevent erro-
neous detection and ensure thorough malfunction
detection. By switching the Engine & ECT ECU to
check (test) mode using hand−held tester when
troubleshooting, the technician can cause the CHK
ENG to light up for a malfunction that is only de-
tected once or momentarily.
When a logic malfunction is first detected, the mal-
function is temporarily stored in the Engine & ECT
ECU memory.
If the same malfunction is detected again during the
2nd test drive, this 2nd detection causes the CHK
ENG to light up.
2. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (NORMAL MODE)

(a) Check the CHK ENG.
(1) The CHK ENG comes on when the ignition switch
is turned ON and the engine is not running.
HINT:
If the CHK ENG does not light up, troubleshoot the combination
meter (See page BE−11).
(2) When the engine is started, the CHK ENG should
FI6907 go off. If the light remains on, the diagnosis system
has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the
system.
(b) Check the DTC (Using hand−held tester).
NOTICE:
When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode
to check (test) mode, it erases all DTCs and freeze frame
data recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes,
always check the DTCs and freeze frame data, and note
them down.
Hand−held Tester (1) Prepare hand−held tester.

(2) Connect the hand−held tester to DLC3 at the lower
part of the instrument panel.
(3) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the hand−held
tester switch ON.
book.
DLC3 D10066 (5) See page DI−221 to confirm the details of the
DTCs.
DI−224
(c) M−OBD only:

Check the DTC (Not using hand−held tester).
(1) Turn the ignition switch ON, but do not start the en-
gine.
(2) Using SST, connect terminals 13 (Tc) and 4 (CG) of
DLC3.
DLC3 SST 09843−18040
N09214
Normal Code (3) Read the DTC indicated by the number of times the
0.26 Seconds CHK ENG blinks.
HINT:
ON
If the system is operating normally, the light will blink 2 times per
second.
OFF
0.26 Seconds
AT0716
(d) Inspect the DLC3.

(1) The vehicle’s Engine and ECT ECU uses ISO
9141−2 (Euro−OBD)/ISO 14230 (M−OBD) for com-
munication. The terminal arrangement of DLC3
complies with SAE J1962 and matches the ISO
9141−2/ISO 14230 format.
DLC3
N09214
Terminal No. Connection Voltage or Resistance Condition

7 Bus Line Pulse generation During transmission
4 Chassis Ground « Body Ground / 1 W or less Always
16 Battery Positive « Body Ground / 9 − 14 V Always
HINT:
Only for Euro−OBD:
hand−held tester to DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON and
operated the scan tool, there is a problem on the vehicle side
or tool side.

DI−225
Malfunction Code ”42” For Next Code (2) The malfunction code is indicated, as shown in the
0.52 Seconds 2.5 Seconds chart on the left (DTC ”42” is shown as an example).
HINT:
ON When 2 or more malfunction codes are stored in memory, the
lower−numbered code is displayed first.
OFF
3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE)
HINT:
4.0 Seconds 1.5 Seconds 4.5 Seconds Hand−held tester only: Compared to the Normal mode, the
Repeat
AT0713 Check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions.
normal mode can also be detected in Check mode.
(a) Check the DTC.
(1) Check the initial conditions.
S Battery positive voltage 11 V or more
S Throttle valve fully closed
S Transmission in P range
S Air conditioning switched off
(3) Prepare a hand−held tester.
(4) Connect the hand−held tester to DLC3 at the lower

Hand−held Tester
part of the instrument panel.
(5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand−
held tester ON.
DLC3 D10066
(6) Switch the hand−held tester from Normal mode to

Check mode (Check that the CHK ENG flashes).
0.13 sec. 0.13 sec. (7) Start the engine (CHK ENG goes out after the en-
gine starts).
ON
NOTICE:
OFF Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the
BR3904 DTCs, etc.
DTCs and freeze frame data, etc.
HINT:
Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF, as turning it off
switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal
mode, all DTCs etc. are erased.
cuit.

DI−226
(b) When using hand−held tester:

Clear the DTC.
The following actions will erase the DTC and freeze frame
data. Operate a hand−held tester to erase the codes.
(c) When not using hand−held tester:
Clear the DTC.
Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI fuse for 10 se-
conds or more.
4. ENGINE & ECT ECU OR ECT ECU STANDARD VAL-

Hand−Held Tester
UES MEASUREMENT USING BREAK−OUT−BOX AND
HAND−HELD TESTER
(a) Hook up the break−out−box and hand−held tester to the
vehicle.
Engine & ECT (b) Read the Engine & ECT ECU input/output values by fol-
ECU
lowing the prompts on the tester screen.
HINT:
Break−Out−Box N09348 Hand−held tester has ”Snapshot” function. This records the
measured values and is effective in the diagnosis of intermittent
problems. Please refer to the hand−held tester/break−out−box
operator’s manual for further details.
5. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Taking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms of the
trouble. If the problem is that the transmission does not shift up, shift down, or the shift point is too high or
too low conduct the following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem
symptoms.
6. ROAD TEST
NOTICE:
Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 − 80 ˚C (122 − 176 ˚F).
(a) D range test (NORM and PWR pattern):
Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.
(1) Check up−shift operation.
Check to see that 1 ® 2, 2 ® 3, 3 ® 4 and 4 ® 5 up−shift take place, at that the shift point conform
to the automatic shift schedule (See page SS−29).
HINT:
S 5th Gear Up−shift Prohibition Control (Coolant temp. is 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) or less.)
S 5th Gear Lock−up Prohibition Control (1. Brake pedal is depressed. 2. Coolant temp. is 60 ˚C (140
˚F) or less)
(2) Check for shift shock and slip.
Check for shock and slip at the 1 ® 2, 2 ® 3, 3 ® 4 and 4 ® 5 up−shifts.
(3) Check for abnormal noises and vibration.
Run at the D range lock−up or 5th gear and check for abnormal noises and vibration.
HINT:
The check for the cause of abnormal noises and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be
due to loss of balance in the differential, torque converter, etc.

DI−227
(4) Check kick−down operation.

While running in the D range, 2nd, 3rd and 5th gears, check to see that the possible kick−down
vehicle speed limits for 2 ® 1, 3 ® 2, 4 ® 3 and 5 ® 4 kick−downs conform to those indicated
in the automatic shift schedule (See page SS−29).
(5) Check abnormal shock and slip at kick−down.
(6) Check the lock−up mechanism.
S Drive in D range, 5th gear, at a steady speed (lock−up ON) of about 70 km/h (43 mph).
S Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change
abruptly.
If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock−up.
(b) 4 range test:
Shift into the 4 range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.
Check to see that the 1 ® 4 up−shift takes place and that the shift point conforms to the automatic
shift schedule (See page SS−29).
HINT:
There is no 5th up−shift in the 4 range.
(2) Check engine braking.
While running in the 4 range and 4th gear, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine
braking effect.
(3) Check for abnormal noises during acceleration and deceleration, and for shock at up−shift and
down−shift.
(c) 3 range test:
While running in the 3 range and 3rd gear, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine
braking effect.
down−shift.
(d) 2 range test:
While running in the 2 range and 2nd gear, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine
braking effect.
down−shift.
(e) L range test:
Shift into the L range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.
(1) Check no up−shift.
While running in the L range, check that there is no up−shift to 2nd gear.
While running in the L range, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine braking effect.
(3) Check for abnormal noises during acceleration and deceleration.

DI−228
(f) R range test:

Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping.
CAUTION:
Before conducting this test ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction.
(g) P range test:
Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5˚) and after shifting into the P range, release the parking
brake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.
7. ACTIVE TEST
You are able to set the A/T gear position as you like by operating each solenoid value forcibly using hand−
held tester.
However, the condition that you can set the gear position differs in the setting gear position, so conduct the
ACTIVE TEST following the table below.
No. Indication Gear Condition Starting Condition Canceling Condition
1 1st, 2nd Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 mph) Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 mph) or vehicle
2 3rd Vehicle speed: less than 50 km/h (31 mph)
running at 4th or 5th gear
S Vehicle running at 3rd or 5th gear

3 4th V hi l speed:
Vehicle d less
l than
th 50 km/h
k /h (31 mph)
h)
S Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 mph)
S Vehicle speed:
more than 60 km/h (37 mph) S Vehicle speed: less than 60 km/h (37 mph)
4 5th S Vehicle running at 4th gear S Throttle value opening angle:
S Throttle value opening angle: more than 50 %
less than 50 %
8. BASIC INSPECTION
(a) Check the fluid level.
HINT:
Drive the vehicle so that the engine and transmission are at nor-
mal operating temperature.
Fluid temperature: 70 − 80 ˚C (158 − 176 ˚F)
Brake Pedal
Parking Brake
D01835
(1) Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the park-
OK if hot ing brake.
(2) With the engine idling and the brake pedal de-
Add if hot
pressed, shift the shift lever into all ranges from P
to L range and return to P range.
(3) Pull out the dipstick and wipe it clean.
(4) Push it back fully into the pipe.
Q09790

DI−229
(5) Pull it out and check that the fluid level is in the HOT
range.
If the level is not within the range, add new fluid.
Fluid type: ATF TYPE T−IV
NOTICE:
Do not overfill.
(b) Check the fluid condition.
If the fluid smells burnt or is black, replace it.
(c) Replace the ATF.

(1) Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
(2) Reinstall the drain plug securely.
(3) With the engine OFF add new fluid through the oil
filler pipe.
Capacity: 2.0 liters (2.1 US qts, 1.8 Imp.qts)
(4) Start the engine and shift the shift lever into all
AT5143 ranges from P to L range and then shift into P range.
(5) With the engine idling, check the fluid level. Add
OK if hot fluid up to the COOL level on the dipstick.
Add if hot (6) Check the fluid level at the normal operating tem-
perature, 70 − 80 ˚C (158 − 176 ˚F), and add as
necessary.
NOTICE:
Do not overfill.
(d) Check the fluid leaks.
Q09790 Check for leaks in the transmission.
If there are leaks, it is necessary to repair or replace O−rings,
FIPGs, oil seals, plugs or other parts.
Neutral Position (e) Inspect and adjust the shift lever position.
S When shifting the shift lever from the N range to oth-
er ranges, check that the lever can be shifted
smoothly and accurately to each range and that the
position indicator is not aligned with the correct
position.
If the indicator is not aligned with the correct position, carry out
Loosen this nut the following adjustment procedures.
D02224 S Loosen the nut on the shift lever.

DI−230
S Push the control shaft fully rearward.

S Return the control shaft lever 2 notches to N range.
S Set the shift lever to N range.
S While holding the shift lever lightly toward the R
range side, tighten the shift lever nut.
Torque: 13 N·m (130 kgf·cm, 9 ft·lbf)
S Start the engine and make sure that the vehicle
moves forward when shifting the lever from the N to
D range and reverses when shifting it to the R
range.
(f) Inspect and adjust the neutral start switch.
Check that the engine can be started with the shift lever
Neutral Basic Line only in the N or P range, but not in other ranges.
If it is not as stated above, carry out the following adjustment
Bolt procedures.
S Loosen the neutral start switch bolt and set the shift
Groove lever to the N range.
S Align the groove and neutral basic line.
D07987 S Hold the switch in position and tighten the bolt.
S For continuity inspection of the neutral start switch,
see page DI−261.
9. MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS
(a) Measure the stall speed.
The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transmission and engine by measuring
the stall speeds in the D ranges.
NOTICE:
S Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 − 80 ˚C (122 − 176 ˚F).
S Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds.
S To ensure safety, do this test in a wide, clear level area which provides good traction.
S The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the condi-
tions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.
TAC S Chock the 2 wheels.

S Connect a hand−held tester to DLC3 or
tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with
SST.
SST 09843−18030
S Fully apply the parking brake.
DLC3
S Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the
brake pedal.
N09214 S Start the engine.

DI−231
S Shift into the D range. Press all the way down

on the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
Quickly read the stall speed at this time.
Stall speed: 2,700 ± 150 rpm
Evaluation:
Problem Possible cause
S Engine output may be insufficient
S Stator one−way clutch is operating properly
(a) Stall speed low in D ranges
HINT: If more than 600 rpm below the specified value, the torque
converter could be faulty.
S Line pressure too low

S Forward clutch slipping
(b) Stall speed high in D range
S No. 2 one−way clutch not operating properly
S O/D one−way clutch not operating properly
(b) Measure the time lag.

when the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling, there will be a certain time lapse or lag before
the shock can be felt. This is used for checking the condition of the O/D direct clutch, forward clutch,
and 1st & reverse brake.
NOTICE:
S Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests.
S Take 3 measurements and take the average value.
TAC S Chock the 4 wheels.

S Connect a hand−held tester to DLC3 or
SST.
SST 09843−18030
S Start engine and check idle speed.
DLC3 Idle speed: 700 ± 50 rpm (In N range and A/C OFF)
S Shift the lever from N to D range. Using a stop
N09214 watch, measure the time from when the lever
is shifted until the shock is felt.
Time lag: N ® D less than 1.2 seconds
S In the same way, measure the time lag for N
® R.
Time lag: N ® R less than 1.5 seconds

DI−232
Evaluation (If N ® D time or N ® R time lag is longer than the specified):

N ® D time lag is longer S Forward clutch worn
S Direct clutch worn
N ® R time lag is longer
S 1st & reverse brake worn
10. HYDRAULIC TEST

Measure the line pressure.
NOTICE:
S Do the test at normal operation ATF temperature 50 − 80 ˚C (122 − 176 ˚F).
S The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe
the conditions of wheels or wheel stopper outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.
S Be careful to prevent SST’s hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe.
(1) Warm up the ATF.
(2) Remove the test plug on the right side of the transmission case and connect SST.
(See page AT−25 for the location to connect SST)
SST 09992−00095 (09992−00231, 09992−00271)
(3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels.
(4) Connect a hand−held tester to DLC3.
(5) Start the engine and check idling speed.
(6) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal and shift into D range.
(7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling.
(8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when
engine speed reaches stall speed.
(9) In the same way, do the test in R range.
Specified line pressure:
Condition D range kPa (kgf / cm2, psi) R range kPa (kgf / cm2, psi)
Idling 395 − 455 (4.0 − 4.6, 57 − 65) 0
Stall 1,200 − 1,360 (12.2 − 13.8, 174 − 196) 1,655 − 1,960 (16.9 − 20.0, 240 − 282)
If the measured pressure is not up to the specified value, recheck the throttle cable adjustment and retest.
Evaluation:
S SLT solenoid value defective
If the measured values at all ranges are higher
S Regulator valve detective
S SLT solenoid value defective

S Regulator valve defect
If the measured values at all ranges are lower
S Oil pump defect
S O/D direct clutch defect
S D range circuit fluid leakage

If pressure is low in the D range only
S Forward clutch defect
S R range circuit fluid leakage

If pressure is low in the R range only S Direct clutch defect
S 1st & reverse brake defect

DI−233
11. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST

HINT:
By this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is within
the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transmis-
sion.
(a) Disconnect the solenoid wire.
(b) Inspect the manual driving operation.
Check that the shift and gear positions correspond to the
D01880 table below.
While driving, shift through the L, 2, 3, 4 and D ranges.
Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift
range.
Shift range Gear position
D 5th
4 5th
3 4th
2 3rd
L 3rd
R Reverse
P Pawl Lock
HINT:
If the L, 2, 3, 4 and D range gear positions are difficult to distin-
guish, do the following read test.
If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is in
the transmission itself.
(c) Connect the solenoid wire.
(d) Cancel out DTC.

DI−234
DI1G9−03

If a DTC is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed in the table below and proceed to the
page given.
Euro OBD:
DTC No. *2Memory
Detection Item Trouble Area *1CHK ENG
(See Page)
S Vehicle speed sensor
S Combination meter F f
(L) tion
S Engine & ECT ECU
S Automatic transmission assembly
Transmission Fluid Temperature S Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit
P0710
Sensor Circuit Malfunction S ATF temperature sensor circuit F f
(L)
(ATF Temperature Sensor) S Engine & ECT ECU
Transmission Fluid Temperature S Open in ATF temperature sensor circuit
P0711
Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- S ATF temperature sensor F f
(DI−245)
mance problem S Engine & ECT ECU
S Open or short in O/D direct clutch speed sensor circuit
Input/Turbine Speed Sensor Cir-
P0715 S O/D direct clutch speed sensor
cuit Malfunction (O/D Direct F f
(L) S Engine & ECT ECU
Clutch Speed Sensor)
S No. 1 solenoid valve is stuck open or closed

P0750 Shift Solenoid ”A” Malfunction
S Valve body is blocked up or stuck F f
(DI−246) (No. 1 Solenoid Valve)
Shift Solenoid ”A” Electrical Mal- S Open or short in No. 1 solenoid valve circuit
P0753
function S No. 1 solenoid valve F f
(DI−249)
(No. 1 Solenoid Valve) S Engine & ECT ECU
P0755 Shift Solenoid ”B” Malfunction
Shift Solenoid ”B” Electrical Mal- S Open or short in No. 2 solenoid valve circuit
P0758
(DI−249)
P0760 Shift Solenoid ”C” Malfunction
Shift Solenoid ”C” Electrical Mal- S Open or short in No. 3 solenoid valve circuit
P0763
(DI−249)
Shift Solenoid ”D” Electrical Mal- S Open or short in No. 4 solenoid valve circuit
P0768
(DI−255)
S SLU solenoid valve is stuck open or closed
P0770 Shift Solenoid ”E” Malfunction S Valve body is blocked up or stuck
F f
(DI−258) (SLU Solenoid Valve) S Lock−up clutch
S Open or short in SLU solenoid valve circuit

Linear Solenoid for Lock−up
P1755 S SLU solenoid valve
Control Circuit Malfunction F f
(SLU Solenoid Valve)
Linear Solenoid for Line Pres- S Open or short in SLT solenoid valve circuit
P1760
sure Control Circuit Malfunction S SLT solenoid valve F f
(L)
(SLT Solenoid Valve) S Engine & ECT ECU

DI−235
Linear Solenoid for Accumulator

S Open or short in SLN solenoid valve circuit
P1765 Pressure Control Circuit Mal-
S SLN solenoid valve F f
(L) function
S Engine & ECT ECU
(SLN Solenoid Valve SLN)
Park/Neutral Position Switch S Short in neutral start switch circuit

P1780
Malfunction S Neutral start switch F f
(DI−261)
(Neutral Start Switch) S Engine & ECT ECU
L: See Pub. No. RM588E
*1: ”F” mark means check engine waning light (CHK ENG) blinks once every 2 seconds.
*2: ”f” mark means Engine & ECT ECU memorizes the malfunction code if the Engine & ECT ECU detects
the DTC detection condition.
HINT:
This DTC may be output when the clutch, brake and gear components etc. inside the automatic transmission
are damaged.
M−OBD (Except European spec.):
DTC No.
Detection Item Trouble Area *CHK ENG *2Memory
(See Page)

Vehicle Speed Sensor S Vehicle speed sensor
P0500/42
Malfunction S Combination meter F f
(L)
S Engine & ECT ECU
S Automatic Transmission Assembly
P0710/38
Sensor Circuit Malfunction S ATF temperature sensor circuit F f
(L)
P0715/67 S O/D direct clutch speed sensor
S Automatic Transmission Assembly
Shift Solenoid ”A” Electrical S Open or short in No. 1 solenoid value circuit
P0753/62
Malfunction S No. 1 solenoid valve F f
(DI−249)
Shift Solenoid ”B” Electrical S Open or short in No. 2 solenoid valve circuit
P0758/63
(DI−249)
Shift Solenoid ”C” Electrical S Open or short in No. 3 solenoid valve circuit
P0763/76
(DI−249)
Shift Solenoid ”D” Electrical S Open or short in No. 4 solenoid valve circuit
P0768/65
(DI−255)
Linear Solenoid for Line Pres- S Open or short in SLU solenoid valve circuit
P1755/68
sure Control Circuit Malfunction S SLU solenoid valve X f
(L)
(SLU Solenoid Valve) S Engine & ECT ECU
P1760/77
sure Control Circuit Malfunction S SLT solenoid valve X f
(L)

DI−236

P1765/46 Pressure Control Circuit Mal-
S SLN solenoid valve X f
(L) function
S Engine & ECT ECU
(SLN Solenoid Valve)
Park/Neutral Position Switch S Short in neutral start switch circuit

P1780/97
Malfunction S Neutral start switch F f
(DI−261)
(Neutral Start Switch) S Engine & ECT ECU
*1: ”F” mark means check engine warning light (CHK ENG) blinks once every 2 seconds.
”X” mark means CHK ENG never blinks.

*2: ”f” mark means Engine & ECT ECU memorizes the malfunction code if the Engine & ECT ECU
detects the DTC detection condition.

HINT:
are damaged.

DI−237
DI1GA−02
PARTS LOCATION
Check Engine Warning Light (CHK ENG)
SNOW Indicator Light
Gear Position Indicator Light

Stop Light Switch
Transmission Shift Switch
DLC3
Pattern Select Switch Shift Lock Control ECU and

E−shift Main Switch
No. 2 Solenoid Valve
Vehicle Speed Sensor

Engine & ECT
ECU
SLN Solenoid Valve

Neutral Start Switch SLU Solenoid Valve
ATF Temperature Sensor SLT Solenoid Valve
O/D Direct Clutch Speed Sensor
D10065

DI−238
DI1GB−10
TERMINALS OF ECU
E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7
E2 E3 E4
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 12 11 10 9 8 7
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 17 16 15 14 13
E5 E6 E7
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
A01888

IG ON Below 1.5
S1 « E1 (E4−1
(E4 1 « E3
E3−17)
17) L « BR 3rd, 4th or 5th gear Below 1.5
1st or 2nd gear 9 − 14
IG ON Below 1.5
S2 « E1 (E4−2
(E4 2 « E3
E3−17)
17) G−Y
G Y « BR 1st, 4th or 5th gear Below 1.5
2nd or 3rd gear 9 − 14
IG ON Below 1.5
S3 « E1 (E4−3
(E4 3 « E3
E3−17)
17) Y−G
Y G « BR 1st, 2nd, 3rd or 5th gear Below 1.5
4th gear 9 − 14
IG ON Below 1.5
S4 « E1 (E4−6
(E4 6 « E3
E3−17)
17) Y « BR 1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear Below 1.5
5th gear 9 − 14
IG ON Below 3
SLU+ « SLU−
G−W « L−R Pulse signal is output
(E4−7 « E4−13) Engine is idling
below 1.5 « 9 − 14
IG ON Below 3
SLN+ « SLN−
P « L−B Pulse signal is output
below 1.5 « 9 − 14
IG ON Below 3
SLT+ « SLT−
G−B « R−B Pulse signal is output
below 1.5 « 9 − 14
SP2+ « SP2− Pulse signal is output
L−Y « R−L Engine is idling
(E4−5 « E4−11) below 1.5 « 4 − 6
NCO+ « NCO− Pulse signal is output

R«G Engine is idling
(E4−4 « E4−10) below 1.5 « 4 − 6

DI−239
OIL « E2
G−R « BR IG ON and ATF temperature 110 ˚C (176 ˚F) Below 1
(E4−17 « E3−18)
IG ON and shift lever P range 7.5 − 14
P « E1 (E5−26
(E5 26 « E3
E3−17)
17) R W « BR
R−W
IG ON and shift lever other than P range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever R range 7.5 − 14
R « E1 (E5−16
(E5 16 « E3
E3−17)
17) R B « BR
R−B
IG ON and shift lever other than R range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever N range 7.5 − 14
N « E1 (E3−13
(E3 13 « E3
E3−17)
17) G R « BR
G−R
IG ON and shift lever other than N range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever D or M range 7.5 − 14
D « E1 (E5−17
(E5 17 « E3
E3−17)
17) Y B « BR
Y−B
IG ON and shift lever other than D and M range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever M range 7.5 − 14
4 « E1 (E5−7
(E5 7 « E3
E3−17)
17) Y G « BR
Y−G
IG ON and shift lever other than M range Below 1.5
*1G « BR IG ON and shift lever 3 range 7.5 − 14

3 « E1 (E3−20
(E3 20 « E3
E3−17)
17)
*2G−R « BR IG ON and shift lever other than 3 range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever 2 or L range 7.5 − 14
2 « E1 (E3−21
(E3 21 « E3
E3−17)
17) G B « BR
G−B
IG ON and shift lever other than 2 and L range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever L range 7.5 − 14
L « E1 (E2−14
(E2 14 « E3
E3−17)
17) R Y « BR
R−Y
IG ON and shift lever other than L range Below 1.5
IG ON and brake pedal depressed 7.5 − 14
STP « E1 (E5−6
(E5 6 « E3
E3−17)
17) G W « BR
G−W
IG ON and brake pedal released Below 1.5
IG ON and accelerator pedal depressed 9 − 14
*3KD « E1 (E5−15
(E5 15 « E3
E3−17)
17) Y R « BR
Y−R
IG ON and accelerator pedal released Below 1.5
IG ON and ”Up” transmission shift switch pressed Below 3
SFTU « E1 (E5−4
(E5 4 « E3
E3−17)
17) L Y « BR
L−Y
IG ON and ”Up” transmission shift switch released 7 − 12
IG ON and ”Down” transmission shift switch pressed Below 3
SFTD « E1 (E5−14
(E5 14 « E3
E3−17)
17) R G « BR
R−G
IG ON and ”Down” transmission shift switch released 7 − 12
*1 :LHD
*2: RHD
*3: Except G.C.C.

DI−240
DI1GC−12

HINT:
If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the trouble still occurs, check the circuits for each
symptom in the order given in the charts on the following pages and proceed to the page given for trouble-
shooting.
The Matrix Chart is divided into 3 chapters.
S If the instruction ”Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart” is given in the flow chart
for each circuit, proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check.
S If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits, then check
and replace the Engine & ECT ECU.
1. CHAPTER 1: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT MATRIX CHART
No up−shift
Engine & ECT ECU IN−30
(A particular gear, from 1st to 4th gear, is not up−shifted)
1. E−shift main switch circuit DI−269
No up−shift (4th ® 5th)
2. Engine & ECT ECU IN−30

No down−shift (5th ® 4th)
No down−shift
1. Stop light switch signal circuit DI−266

No lock−up
No lock−up off Engine & ECT ECU IN−30
1. Pattern select switch circuit L
Shift point too high or too low

Up−shift to 5th from 4th while shift lever is M position
Up−shift to 5th from 4th while engine is cold Engine & ECT ECU IN−30
1. Kick−down switch circuit L
No kick−down
No pattern select
1. Stop light switch signal circuit DI−266

Engine stalls when starting off or stopping
No 2nd start

2. Transmission shift switch circuit DI−272
No E−shift system

DI−241
2. CHAPTER 2: ON−VEHICLE REPAIR

(L: A650E AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Repair Manual Pub. No. RM579U)
1. Transmission control rod DI−221
2. Manual valve L
Vehicle does not move in any forward range and reverse range
3. Parking lock pawl L
4. Off−vehicle repair matrix chart −
1. Reverse control valve L

Vehicle does not move in R range
Vehicle does not move in particular range or ranges
Off−vehicle repair matrix chart −
(Except R range)
1. 1−2 shift valve L

No up−shift (1st ® 2nd)
No up−shift (2nd ® 3rd)

No up−shift (3rd ® 4th)

No down−shift (4th ® 3rd)

No down−shift (3rd ® 2nd)
No down−shift (2nd ® 1st)
1. Lock−up control valve L

No lock−up or No lock−up off 2. Lock−up relay valve L
1. Accumulator control valve L
2. Solenoid modulator valve L
Harsh engagement (N ® D) 3. C1 accumulator L
4. Orifice control valve L
2. Lock−up relay valve L
Harsh engagement (Lock−up)
3. Solenoid relay valve L

2. C2 accumulator L
Harsh engagement (N ® R)
Harsh engagement (2 ® L) Coast brake control valve L

Harsh engagement (2nd ® 3rd ® 4th ® 5th)

2. B3 control valve L
Harsh engagement (1st ® 2nd) 3. B2 release control valve L

DI−242

3. B2 accumulator L
Harsh engagement (2nd ® 3rd) 4. B3 control valve L
5. B2 release control valve L
Harsh engagement (3rd ® 4th)
3. C2 accumulator L

Harsh engagement (4th ® 5th)
3. B0 accumulator L

3. C0 accumulator L

2. Oil strainer L
Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse)
3. Pressure relief valve L

Slip or shudder (Particular range)
1. Coast brake control valve L

No engine braking (1st: L range) 2. B−4 relay valve L
No engine braking (2nd: 2 range)

No kick−down 2. 2−3 shift valve L

DI−243
3. CHAPTER 3: OFF−VEHICLE REPAIR

1. O/D one−way clutch (F0) L
2. O/D direct clutch (C0) L
3. O/D planetary gear unit L
4. Torque converter *
1. Center and rear planetary gear unit L

2. Direct clutch (C2) L
3. 1st & reverse brake (B4) L
4. O/D brake (B0) L
No up−shift (1st ® 2nd) 2nd brake (B3) L

1. 3rd brake (B2) L
2. One−way clutch No. 1 (F1) L
No up−shift (3rd ® 4th) Direct clutch L
No up−shift (4th ® 5th) O/D brake (B0) L
No lock−up or No lock−up off Torque converter *
1. Forward clutch (C1) L
Harsh engagement (N ® D) 2. O/D one−way clutch (F0) L
Harsh engagement (N ® R) 2. O/D brake (B0) L
Harsh engagement (1st ® 2nd) 2nd brake (B3) L
1. 3rd brake (B2) L
Harsh engagement (2nd ® 3rd) 2. 2nd brake (B3) L
Harsh engagement (3rd ® 4th) Direct clutch (C2) L
1. O/D brake (B0) L
Harsh engagement (Lock−up) Torque converter *

Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse: After warm−up) 2. O/D one−way clutch (F0) L
Slip or shudder (Particular range: Just after engine starts) Torque converter *
Slip or shudder (R range) 2. O/D brake (B0) L
Slip or shudder (1st)
2. No. 2 one−way clutch (F2) L
Slip or shudder (2nd) 2nd brake (B3) L
1. 3rd coast brake (B1) L
Slip or shudder (3rd) 2. 3rd brake (B2) L
Slip or shudder (4th) Direct clutch L
Slip or shudder (5th) O/D brake (B0) L
No engine braking (1st − 4th: D range) O/C direct clutch (C0) L
No engine braking (1st: L range) 1st & reverse brake (B4) L
No engine braking (2nd: 2 range) 2nd brake (B3) L
No engine braking (3rd: 3 range) 3rd coast brake (B1) L

DI−244
Poor acceleration (All ranges) Torque converter *

1. O/D brake (B0) L
Poor acceleration (5th)
Engine stalls when starting off or stopping Torque converter *

*: See Pub. No. RM588E

DI−245
DI87Q−01
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature sensor

Circuit Range / Performance
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC P0710 on Pub. No. RM588E.
Both (a) and (b) detected.
(a) After 12 seconds of the engine start, the temp. of the atmo- S Open in ATF temperature sensor circuit
P0711 sphere and that of the engine coolant is more than −10 ˚C. S ATF temperature sensor
(b) After a normal driving for over 20 minutes and 6.2 miles (10 S Engine & ECT ECU
km), the ATF temp. is less than 10 ˚C.
HINT:
NO
Replace ATF temperature sensor.

DI−246
DI87R−01
DTC P0750 Shift Solenoid ”A” Malfunction

(No. 1 Solenoid Valve)
DTC P0755 Shift Solenoid ”B” Malfunction

DTC P0760 Shift Solenoid ”C” Malfunction

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Engine & ECT ECU uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor and input/turbine speed sensor to detect
the actual gear position (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th or 5th gear). The Engine & ECT ECU then compares the actual
gear with the shift schedule in the Engine & ECT ECU memory to detect mechanical trouble of the solenoid
valves, valve body and automatic transmission (clutch, brake or gear etc.).
P0750 During normal driving, the gear required by the Engine & ECT S No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 solenoid valve is stuck open or closed
P0755 ECU does not match the actual gear S Valve body is blocked up or stuck
P0760 (2−trip detection logic) S Automatic transmission assembly
HINT:
Check the No. 1 solenoid valve when DTC P0750 is output, check No. 2 solenoid valve when DTC P0755
is output and check the No. 3 solenoid valve when DTC P0760 is output.

DI−247
1 Check No. 1, No. 2 , or No. 3 solenoid valve operation.
PREPARATION:
No. 2 Solenoid Valve (a) Remove the oil pan.
(b) Remove the No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3 solenoid valve.
CHECK:
No. 2 solenoid valve:
(+) (−) (a) Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) of compressed air,
check that the solenoid valves do not leak air.
(b) When battery positive voltage is supplied to the shift sole-
noid valves, check that the solenoid valves are open.
(+) (−) No. 1 and No. 3 solenoid valve:
Connect the positive (+) lead with 8 − 10 W bulb to terminal 2
No. 1 Solenoid Valve and the negative (−) lead to terminal 1, then check the move-
ment of the valve.
OK:
(+)
When B+ is applied. Valve moves in direction
in illustration on the left.
When B+ is cut off. Valve moves in direction

(−) in illustration on the left.
(+)
(−)
D10482
NG Replace the No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3 solenoid valve.
OK

DI−248
2 Check valve body (See page DI−240).
NG Repair or replace the valve body.
OK
Replace the transmission

(See Pub. No. RM588E on page AT−28).

DI−249
DI2LB−02
DTC P0753/62 Shift Solenoid A Electrical Malfunction

DTC P0758/63 Shift Solenoid B Electrical Malfunction

DTC P0763/76 Shift Solenoid C Electrical Malfunction

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Shifting from 1st to 5th is performed in combination with ON and OFF of the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 solenoid
valves controlled by Engine & ECT ECU. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the solenoid valves,
the Engine & ECT ECU controls the remaining normal solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated
smoothly (Fail safe function).
HINT:
Check the No. 1 solenoid valve when DTC P0753/62 is output, check the No. 2 solenoid valve when DTC
P0758/63 is output and check the No. 3 solenoid valve when DTC P0763/76 is output.
The Engine & ECT ECU checks for an open or short circuit in
the No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3 solenoid valve circuit when it
changes.
The Engine & ECT ECU records DTC P0753/62, P0758/63 or
P0763/76 if condition (a) or (b) is detected once, but it does not
light up CHK ENG.
P0753/62 After Engine & ECT ECU detects condition (a) or (b) continu- S Open or short in No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 solenoid valve circuit
P0758/63 ously 8 times or more in 1 trip, it causes the CHK ENG lights S No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 solenoid valve
P0763/76 up until condition (a) or (b) disappears. S Engine & ECT ECU
After that, if the Engine & ECT ECU detects condition (a) or (b)
once, it starts lighting up CHK ENG again.
(a) Solenoid resistance is 8 W or less (short circuit) when the
solenoid is energized.
(b) Solenoid resistance is 100 kW or more (open circuit) when
the solenoid is not energized.

DI−250
Fail Safe Function:

If either of the shift solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short, the Engine & ECT ECU turns the other
solenoid valve ON and OFF to shift to the gear positions shown in the table below. The Engine & ECT ECU
also turns the SLU solenoid valve OFF at the same time. If both solenoids are malfunctioning, hydraulic con-
trol cannot be performed electronically and must be done manually.
Manual shifting as shown in the following table must be done (In the case of a short circuit, the Engine &
ECT ECU stops sending current to the short circuited solenoid).
No. 1 Solenoid Valve No. 2 Solenoid Valve No. 3 Solenoid Valve
Normal
Malfunction Malfunction Malfunction
Range Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve
Gear Gear Gear Gear
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
ON OFF OFF 1 X OFF®ON OFF 5®3 ON X OFF 1 ON OFF X 1
OFF ON OFF 3 X ON OFF 3 OFF X OFF®ON 5®4 OFF ON X 3
D
OFF OFF ON 4 X OFF ON 4 OFF X ON 4 OFF OFF X 5
OFF OFF OFF 5 X OFF OFF 5 OFF X OFF 5 OFF OFF X 5
ON OFF OFF 1 X OFF®ON OFF 5®3 ON X OFF 1 ON OFF X 1
4 OFF ON OFF 3 X ON OFF 3 OFF X OFF®ON 5®4 OFF ON X 3
ON OFF OFF 1 X OFF®ON OFF®ON 4®3 ON X OFF 1 ON OFF X 1
3 OFF ON ON 3 X ON ON 3 OFF X ON 4 OFF ON X 3
ON OFF ON 1 X OFF ON 3 ON X ON 1 ON OFF X 1
2
OFF ON ON 3 X ON ON 3 OFF X ON 3 OFF ON X 3
L ON OFF OFF 1 X OFF OFF 3 ON X OFF 1 ON OFF X 1
No. 1 and No. 2 Solenoid No. 1 and No. 3 Solenoid No. 2 and No. 3 Solenoid No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 So-
Valve Malfunction Valve Malfunction Valve Malfunction lenoid Valve Malfunction
Range
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve
Gear Gear Gear Gear
X X OFF®ON 5®4 X OFF®ON X 5®3 ON X X 1 X X X 5
X X OFF®ON 5®4 X ON X 3 OFF X X 5 X X X 5
D
X X ON 4 X OFF X 5 OFF X X 5 X X X 5
X X OFF 5 X OFF X 5 OFF X X 5 X X X 5
X X OFF®ON 5®4 X OFF®ON X 5®3 ON X X 1 X X X 5
4 X X OFF®ON 5®4 X ON X 3 OFF X X 5 X X X 5
X X OFF 4 X OFF®ON X 4®3 ON X X 1 X X X 4
3 X X ON 4 X ON X 3 OFF X X 4 X X X 4
X X OFF 3 X OFF X 3 ON X X 1 X X X 3
2
X X ON 3 X ON X 3 OFF X X 3 X X X 3
L X X OFF 3 X OFF X 3 ON X X 1 X X X 3

DI−251
WIRING DIAGRAM
Transmission Engine & ECT ECU
No. 1 Solenoid Valve B+

6 1
W L S1
E1 E4
B+
12 2
B G−Y S2
E1 E4
B+
5 3
Y Y−G S3
E1 E4
D01788

DI−252
1 Measure resistance between terminal S1, S2 or S3 of Engine & ECT ECU and
body ground.
S3 S2 S1
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the connector from Engine & ECT ECU.
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminal S1, S2 or S3 of Engine
& ECT ECU and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 11 − 15 W at 20 ˚C (68 ˚F)
D01794
OK Check and replace the Engine & ECT ECU

(See page IN−30).
NG
2 Check harness and connector between Engine & ECT ECU and automatic trans-
mission solenoid connector.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the solenoid connector from the automatic trans-
S2
mission.
CHECK:
Check the harness and connector between terminal S1, S2 or
S3 of Engine & ECT ECU and terminal S1, S2 or S3 of solenoid
S1 connector.
S3 OK:
There is no open and no short circuit.
Solenoid Connector S1
S3 S2
D01795
NG Repair or replace the harness or connector.
OK

DI−253
3 Check No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3 solenoid valve.
Electrical Check:
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the oil pan.
CHECK:
(a) Measure resistance between solenoid connector and
body ground.
(b) Connect positive lead to terminal of solenoid connec-
tor, negative lead to solenoid body.
OK:
No. 2 Solenoid Valve (a) Resistance: 11 − 15 W at 20 ˚C (68 ˚F)
(b) The solenoid makes an operating noise.
D10483

DI−254
Mechanical Check:
PREPARATION:
(+) (a) Remove the oil pan.
CHECK:
(−) No. 2 solenoid valve:
(+)
(a) Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) of compressed air,
(−) noid valves, check that the solenoid valves open.
No. 1 and No. 3 solenoid valves:
No. 1 Solenoid Valve Connect the positive (+) lead with 8 − 10 W bulb to terminal 2
and the negative (−) lead to terminal 1, then check the move-
(+) ment of the valve.
OK:

in the illustration on the left.
(−) Valve moves in direction
When B+ is cut off.

(+)
(−)
D10482
NG Replace the solenoid valve.
OK
Repair or replace the solenoid wire.

DI−255
DI2LC−02
DTC P0768/65 Shift Solenoid D Electrical Malfunction

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
No. 4 solenoid valve is controlled by Engine & ECT ECU and it switches ON and OFF of the O/D direct switch.
the No. 4 solenoid valve circuit when it changes.
The Engine & ECT ECU records DTC P0768/65 if condition (a)
or (b) is detected once, but it does not light up CHK ENG.
After Engine & ECT ECU detects condition (a) or (b) continu-
ously 8 times or more in 1 trip, it causes the CHK ENG lights S Open or short in No. 4 solenoid valve circuit
P0768/65 up until condition (a) or (b) disappears. S No. 4 solenoid valve
After that, if the Engine & ECT ECU detects condition (a) or (b) S Engine & ECT ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
B+
No. 4 Solenoid
Valve
11 6
V Y S4
E1 E4
D01773

DI−256
1 Check resistance between terminals S4 of Engine & ECT ECU and body ground.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminals S4 and body ground.
OK:
S4 Resistance: 11 − 15 W at 20 ˚C (68 ˚F)
D01796

(See page IN−30).
NG
2 Check No. 4 solenoid valve.
PREPARATION:
(b) Remove the No. 4 solenoid valve.
(+) CHECK:
(a) Measure resistance between terminal and solenoid body.
(−) (b) Connect positive (+) lead to terminal of solenoid connec-
tor and negative (−) lead to solenoid body.
OK:
D01784 D01785 D01789 (a) Resistance: 11 − 15 W at 20 ˚C (68 ˚F)
NG Replace No. 4 solenoid valve.
OK

DI−257
PREPARATION:
mission.
CHECK:
Check the harness and connector between terminal S4 of En-
Solenoid Connector
gine & ECT ECU and terminal S4 solenoid connector.
S4 S4 OK:
There is open and no short circuit.
D01797
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown in problem symptoms table (See page DI−240). Howev-
er, when DTC P0768/65 is displayed, check and replace Engine & ECT ECU (See page IN−20).

DI−258
DI87S−01
DTC P0770 Shift Solenoid ”E” Malfunction

(SLU Shift SOlenoid Valve)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Engine & ECT ECU uses the signals from the Throttle Posi-
tion Sensor and Air−flow Meter to monitor the engagement
condition of the lock−up clutch.
Then the Engine & ECT ECU compares the engagement condi-
tion of the lock−up clutch with the lock−up schedule in the En-
gine & ECT ECU memory to detect mechanical trouble of the
SLU solenoid valve SLU, valve body, torque converter and au-
D01769 tomatic transmission assembly (clutch, brake or gear etc.).

Lock−up does not occur when driving in the lock−up range S SLU solenoid valve is stuck open or closed
(normal driving at 80 km/h [50 mph]), or lock−up remains ON S Valve body blocked up or stuck
P0770
in the lock−up OFF range. S Lock−up clutch
(2−trip detection logic) S Automatic transmission assembly
HINT:
In case of using hand−held tester, start the inspection from step 1 and in case of not using the hand−held
tester, start from step 2.
1 Active test.
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the DLC3 cover.
(b) Connect a hand−held tester.
(c) Turn the ignition switch ON and hand−held tester main switch ON.
CHECK:
Using active test, check the lock−shift operation.
OK:
Lock−up ON
NG Replace the torque converter.
OK

DI−259
2 Check SLU solenoid valve resistance.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the solenoid wire connector.
4 CHECK:
Measure the resistance between terminals 4 and 10 of solenoid
connector.
OK:
Resistance: 5.0 − 5.6 W at 20 ˚C (68 ˚F)
10
D01877
NG Replace the SLU solenoid valve.
OK
3 Check SLU solenoid valve operation.
PREPARATION:
(b) Remove the SLU solenoid valve.
CHECK:
Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 2 and
the negative (−) lead to terminal 1.
OK:


1 in illustration on the left.
(−) (+)
D01769
D01885 D02231 NG Replace the SLU solenoid valve.
OK

DI−260
OK
Replace the torque converter

(See Pub. No. RM588E on page AT−28).

DI−261
DI87T−01
DTC P1780/97 Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit

(Neutral Start Switch)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The neutral start switch detects the shift lever range and sends signals to the Engine & ECT ECU.
The Engine & ECT ECU receives signals (P, R, N, D, 4, 3, 2 and L) from the neutral start switch. When the
signal is not sent to the Engine & ECT ECU from the neutral start switch, the Engine & ECT ECU judges that
the shift lever is in D range.
2 or more switches are ON simultaneously for P, R, N, D, 4, 3,
2 and L ranges.
(2−trip detection logic)
S Short
Sh t in
i neutral
t l start
t t switch
it h circuit
i it
P1780/97 When driving under conditions (a) and (b) for 30 seconds or
S Neutral start switch
more, the neutral start switch is ON (N position).
S Engine & ECT ECU
(2 t i detection
(2−trip d t ti logic)
l i )
(a) Vehicle speed: 70 km/h (44 mph) or more
(b) Engine speed: 1,500 − 2,500 rpm

DI−262
WIRING DIAGRAM
Neutral Start Switch Engine & ECT ECU
(*1) J3, (*2) J27 J/C
2 26
PL R−W R−W A A R−W
EA2 E5 P
1
6 16
RL R EA1
R−B D D R−B R
E5
2
13
NL 5 G−R
E3 N
R−L 3C (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)
E J/C E
3 E E 17
Y−B Y−B Y−B D
B EA3 J3 J27 J3 J27 E5
(*1) J1, DL 7
(*2) J25 E E
Y−B
J/C J4 J28
B R−L (*1) G
(*1) (*2) 20
2L 4 (*2) G−R
E3 3
9 EA3
(*1) J1, (*2) J25 J/C
21
LL 8 G−B G−B
B R−L E3 2
(*1) J18
D D
(*2) J35
D
14
J/C G−B R−Y
B E2 L
R−L
(*1) 10 EA2 EA2 (*1) 3
Driver Side J/B (*2) 7 EA4 EA4 (*2) 9
1 GAUGE 4 R−Y
1J 1H G−B
S5 5 S5 9
AM1 ALT NSSL

B−Y 3 1 1 10 2 7
1J Y−G
1A 1K S5 S5 E5 4
2 1 NSSD AT4
(*2) (*1)
W Shift Lock Control ECU
Driver Side J/B
4 1 22 5 13
R−L W−B
1D C11 C11 1D 1F
Combination 6
W−L Meter 1G
I12 1
Ignition Switch (*1) W−B
W−B (*2) W−B
2
Engine Room (*2) W−B
4 IG1 AM1 2 ALT No. 1 R/B B B
A A J37 J/C A
1 (*1) J8 J18
J32
1 (*2) J42 J/C J/C
Battery J/C A
B−L (*1) W−B
IF (*1)
IF II
II (*2)
(*1): LHD
(*2): RHD D10068

DI−263
HINT:
In case of using the hand−held tester, start the inspection from step 1 and in case of not using the hand−held
1 Read PNP, REVERSE, DRIVE, 4TH, 3RD, 2ND and LOW signals.
PREPARATION:
(b) Connect a hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(c) Turn the ignition switch ON and hand−held tester main
switch ON.
CHECK:
Shift lever into the P, R, N, D, M, 3, 2 and L ranges, and read
the PNP, REVERSE, DRIVE, 4TH, 3RD, 2ND and LOW signals
on the hand−held tester.
OK:
Shift range Signal
P, N PNP: OFF ® ON
R REVERSE: OFF ® ON
D DRIVE: OFF ® ON
M 4TH: OFF ® ON
3 3RD: OFF ® ON
2 2ND: OFF ® ON
L LOW: OFF ® ON

(See page IN−30).
NG
Go to step 3.

DI−264
2 Measure voltage between each terminals of P, R, N, D, 4, 3, 2, and L of Engine &

ECT ECU and body ground.
4 PREPARATION:
ON N
L D R CHECK:
Measure voltage between each terminals P, R, N, D, 4, 3, 2 and
L of Engine & ECT ECU and body ground when the shift lever
is shifted to the following positions.
2 3 P
D10085
OK:
Tester connection Condition Specified condition
P− Body ground Shift lever range: P Battery voltage
R − Body ground Shift lever range: R Battery voltage*
N − Body ground Shift lever range: N Battery voltage
Shift lever range: D
D − Body ground Battery voltage
Transmission control SW (for D and 4) : OFF
Shift lever range: M

4 − Body ground Battery voltage
Transmission control SW (for D and 4) : ON
3 − Body ground Shift lever range: 3 Battery voltage
Shift lever range: 2
Transmission control SW (for 2 and L) : OFF
Shift lever range: L
L − Body ground Battery voltage
Transmission control SW (for 2 and L) : ON
HINT:
*: The voltage will drop slightly due to lighting up of the back up
light.

(See page IN−30).
NG

DI−265
3 Check neutral start switch.
PREPARATION:
(a) Jack up the vehicle.
(b) Remove the neutral start switch connector.
CHECK:
Check continuity between each terminal shown below when the
shift lever is moved to each range.
OK:
Shift range Terminal No. to continuity Terminal No. to continuity
F13412
P 1−3 6−9
R 2−3 −
N 3−5 6−9
D, M 3−7 −
3 3−4 −
2, L 3−8 −
NG Replace the neutral start switch.
OK
Repair or replace harness and connector between battery and neutral start switch, neutral start
switch and Engine & ECT ECU (See page IN−30).

DI−266
DI0I7−15
Stop Light Switch Signal Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The object of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling, while driving in lock−up condition, when brakes
are suddenly applied.
When the brake pedal is operated, this switch sends a signal to Engine & ECT ECU. Then the Engine & ECT
ECU cancels operation of the lock−up clutch while braking is in progress.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine & ECT ECU

Driver Side J/B
Stop Light Switch (*1) J7, (*2) J39 J/C
1 STOP 8 6
W G−W G−W STP
1K 1H E5
2 1 A (*1) A (*1)
B (*2) B (*2)
W A (*1)
B (*2)
G−W
1
2 Engine Room No. 1 R/B

ALT
1 G−W IC3 9
1
B Light Failure Sensor
(*1) J20, G
B−L
(*2) J43 B 10
B To
J/C Stop Light
G−W
Battery 9
(*1): LHD
(*2): RHD
D10479

DI−267
CHECK:
Check if the stop lights go on and off normally when the brake
pedal is operated and released.
OK
2 Check STP signal.

PREPARATION:
Brake Pedal Brake Pedal (a) Connect the hand−held tester to the DLC3.
Depressed Released
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the hand−held tester
main switch ON.
CHECK:
OK:
ON Brake pedal is depressed: STP....ON
Brake pedal is released: STP....OFF
When not using hand −held tester:
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Check voltage between terminal STP of Engine & ECT ECU
STP
(−) (+) and body ground.
OK:
Brake pedal Voltage
D00886

NG

DI−268
3 Check harness and connector between Engine & ECT ECU and stop light switch
(See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace Engine & ECT ECU

(See page IN−30).

DI−269
DI7W2−02
E−shift Main Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the shift lever is in the M range (with E−shift main switch for D and M pressed), ”M” in the shift position
indicator light will come on and when the shift lever is in the D position (with E−shift main switch for D and
M released), ”D” in the shift position indicator light will come on.
When the shift lever is in the L position (with E−shift main switch for 2 and L pressed), ”L” in the shift position
indicator light will come on and when the shift lever is in the 2 position (with E−shift main switch for 2 and
L released), ”2” in the shift position indicator light will come on.
When the shift lever is in M range, the Engine & ECT ECU prohibits shifting to 5th.
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−261.
1 Check operation of E−shift main switch.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Check the shift indicator light when the shift lever is in the each
position.
OK:
Shift Lever Position Specified Condition
D ”D” indicator light comes on
Except D ”D” indicator light goes off
M ”M” indicator light comes on
Except M ”M” indicator light goes off
2 ”2” indicator light comes on
Except 2 ”2” indicator light goes off
L ”L” indicator light comes on
Except L ”L” indicator light goes off
NG Go to step 4.
OK

DI−270
2 Check voltage between each terminals of D, 4, 2 and L of Engine & ECT ECU and
body ground.
PREPARATION:
ON
4 Remove the Engine & ECT ECU with connectors still con-
L 2
D nected.
CHECK:
(a) Turn ignition switch ON.
(b) Check voltage between each of terminals of D, 4, 2,and
(+) (−) L of Engine & ECT ECU and body ground.
OK:
D10087 Tester connection Shift lever position Specified condition
D or M 7.5 − 14 V
D − Body
B d ground
d
Except D and M Below 1.5 V
M 7.5 − 14 V
4 − Body
B d ground
d
Except M Below 1.5 V
2 or L 7.5 − 14 V
2 − Body
B d ground
d
Except 2 and L Below 1.5 V
L 7.5 − 14 V
L − Body
B d ground
d
Except L Below 1.5 V
OK Proceed to next circuit inspection shown in

problem symptom table (See page DI−240).
NG
3 Check harness and connector between battery and Engine & ECT ECU, Engine &
ECT ECU and shift indicator light (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace Engine & ECT ECU (See

page IN−30).

DI−271
4 Check E−shift main switch.
CHECK:
AT4 (a) Disconnect the transmission control switch connector.
(b) Check continuity between each terminal of transmission
NSSD control switch connector.
OK:
Shift position Tester connection Specified value
D N continuity
No ti it
2 − 10 (AT4 − NSSD)
NSSL ATL M Continuity
D02221
2 No continuity
5 − 9 (ATL − NSSL)
L Continuity
NG Replace E−shift main switch.
OK
Check and replace combination meter (See

combination meter troubleshooting section
on page BE−11).

DI−272
DI25Z−05
Transmission Shift Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When shifting the shift lever in M range, using the transmission shift switch, it is possible to shift in 2 − 5
ranges.
Pressing ”Up switch” once shifts up 1 range, ”Down switch” once shifts down 1 range respectively.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine & ECT ECU

Transmission Shift Switch
(Combination Switch)
2 4 6 4
L−Y L−Y
SFTU C15 II1 ID1 E5 SFTU
(RHD) (LHD)
1 5 7 14
R−G R−G
SFTD C15 II1 ID1 E5 SFTD
(RHD) (LHD)
D10074

DI−273
1 Check the shift lock control unit assembly (See page AT−9).
NG Replace the shift lock control unit assembly.
OK
2 Check operation of transmission shift switch.
PREPARATION:
(a) Turn the ignition switch ON.
(b) Shift the shift lever into the M range.
CHECK:
Check the odo trip display panel when the transmission shift
switch is pressed.
OK:
Switch condition Odo trip display panel
”Up” switch press Shift up
”Down” switch press Shift down
NG Go to step 5.
OK

DI−274
3 Check voltage between each of terminals SFTU and SFTD of Engine & ECT ECU
and body ground.
PREPARATION:
ON (a) Turn ignition switch ON.
SFTU
SFTD (b) Remove the Engine & ECT ECU with connectors still con-
nected.
CHECK:
Check voltage between each terminals of SFTU and SFTD of
(−) (+) ECM and body ground.
OK:
D10086 Switch condition Tester connection Specified condition
”Up” switch held pressing 7 − 12 V
SFTU − Body
B d ground
d
”Up” switch released Below 3 V
”Down” switch held
7 − 12 V
pressing SFTD − Body ground
”Down” switch released Below 3 V

NG
ECT ECU and odo trip display panel (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace Engine & ECT ECU (See

page IN−30).

DI−275
5 Check transmission shift switch.
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove the steering wheel pad.
4
(b) Disconnect the transmission shift switch connector.
CHECK:
3
2 Check continuity between each terminal of transmission shift
1 switch connector.
OK:
Switch condition Tester connection Specified value
D02185
”Up” switch pressed No continuity
1−4
”Up” switch released Continuity
”Down” switch pressed No continuity
2−3
”Down” switch released Continuity
NG Replace the steering wheel.
OK

on page BE−11).

DI−276
DIAGNOSTICS − AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (3UZ−FE)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (3UZ−FE)

DI87U−01
Vehicle Brought to Workshop Items inside are titles of pages in this manual, with the
page number indicated in the bottom portion. See the indicated
P. DI−277
2 Connect an OBD scan tool or hand−held tester to DLC3.

If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the
OBD scan tool/hand−held tester, inspect DLC3 P. DI−278
3 Check DTC and Freeze Frame Data (Precheck)

Record or Print DTC and Freeze Frame Data P. DI−278
4 Clear DTC and Freeze Frame Data P. DI−278
5 Visual Inspection
6 Setting the Check Mode Diagnosis P. DI−278

Symptom occurs P.IN−30
9 DTC Check OK Code 11 Basic Inspection NG

P. DI−278 P. DI−278
OK
P. DI−289 P. DI−278
OK
NG 13 NG
P. DI−278
14 Problem Symptoms Table− P. DI−294
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 NG

OK OK
P. DI−294 P. DI−294 P. DI−294
NG NG
15 Circuit S Pattern Select Switch Circuit Check 16 Parts Inspection

Inspection S Kick−down Switch Circuit
P. DI−338 to DI−343
17 18

DI−277
DI87V−01

Transmission Control Inspector’s
System Check Sheet Name :
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date Vehicle Odometer Reading km
Brought In / / mile
Date Problem / /
Occurred
How Often Does
Continuous Intermittent ( times a day)
Problem Occur?
Vehicle does not move ( Any range Particular range)

No up−shift ( 1st ® 2nd 2nd ® 3rd 3rd ® 4th 4th ® O/D)
No down−shift ( O/D ® 4th 4th ® 3rd 3rd ® 2nd 2nd ® 1st)
Lock−up malfunction
Symptoms
Harsh engagement ( N®D Lock−up Any drive range)
Slip or shudder
No kick−down
Others
Check Engine
Check Item Warning Light Normal Remains ON
(CHK ENG)
1st Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC )

DTC Check
2nd Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC )

DI−278
DI87W−01
PRE−CHECK
1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
(a) Description
FI6907
warning ignition the instrument panel when the
control system/components or in the power−train
ISO1 5031−6 ar e r ecor ded in t he engine ECU
not repaired in 3 consecutive trips, the (CHK ENG)
Hand−held Tester S To check the DTCs, connect the OBD scan tool or
gine data (For operating instructions, see the OBD
scan tool’s instruction book.).
DLC3 D10071 turer controlled codes. ISO controlled codes must
page DI−84).

DI−279

step 2).
memory. (1st trip) If the same malfunction is de-
cond detection causes the (CHK ENG) to light up
(2nd trip).
(However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF
between the 1st trip and the 2nd trip.)
(b) Check the DLC3.
The vehicle’s engine ECU uses the ISO 9141−2 commu-
nication protocol. The terminal arrangement of DLC3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 complies with ISO 15031−3 and matches the ISO 9141−2
9 10 1112 1314 15 16 format.
DLC3
A04550
Terminal No. Connection/Voltage or Resistance Condition

7 Bus Line/Pulse generation During transmission
4 Chassis Ground « Body Ground/1 W or less Always
16 Battery Positive « Body Ground/9 − 14 V Always
HINT:
If your display shows UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE
hand−held tester to the DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON
side or tool side.

DI−280

(a) Check the DTC using hand−held tester.
NOTICE:
to check mode, it erases all DTCs and freezed frame data
recorded in normal mode. So before switching modes, al-
ways check the DTCs and freezed frame data, and note
them down.
freezed frame data, note them down. (For operating
book.)
(5) See page BE−11 to confirm the details of the
DTCs.
NOTICE:
S When simulating symptoms with out a hand−held tes-
ter to check the DTCs, use normal mode. For code on
the DTC chart subject to ”2 trip detection logic”, turn
the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simu-
lated the first time. Then repeat the simulation pro-
cess again. When the problem has been simulated
twice, the CHK ENG is indicated on the instrument
panel and the DTCs are recorded in the engine ECU.
S Check the 1st trip DTC using Mode 7 for ISO 15031
(Continuous Test Results of Euro−OBD function in
hand−held tester).
3. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (Check (Test) Mode)
HINT:
(a) Check the DTC.
S Battery voltage 11 V or more
S Transmission in P or N range
S A/C switched OFF

DI−281
(6) Switch the hand−held tester from the normal mode

to the check (test) mode.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the
DTCs, etc.
HINT:
cuit.
(b) Clear the DTC.
actions.
(1) Operating the hand−held tester to erase the codes.
(See the hand−held tester’s instruction book for op-
erating instructions.)
(2) Disconnecting the battery terminals of EFI fuse for
10 seconds or more.
NOTICE:
Interface Vehicle (c) Engine ECU Terminal Values Measurement Using

Box Harness Break−Out−Box and Hand−Held Tester
to the vehicle.
(2) Read the engine ECU input/output values by follow-
Engine & ing the prompts on the tester screen.
ECT ECU HINT:
S Hand−held tester has a ”Snapshot” function.
Break−Out−Box N09348 This records the measured values and is effective in the
diagnosis of intermittent problems.
DI−282

Taking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms of the
trouble. If the problem is that the transmission does not shift up, shift down, or the shift point is too high or
too low conduct the following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem
symptoms.
5. ROAD TEST
NOTICE:
Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 − 80 ˚C (122 − 176 ˚F).
(a) D range test (NORM and PWR pattern):
Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.
Check to see that 1 ® 2, 2 ® 3, 3 ® 4 and 4 ® 5 up−shift takes place, and that the shift points
conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page SS−29).
HINT:
S 5th Gear Up−shift Prohibition Control (1. Coolant temp. is 55 ˚C (128 ˚F) or less. 2. Vehicle speed is
51 km/h (32 mph) or less.)
S 5th Gear Lock−up Prohibition Control (1. Brake pedal is depressed. 2. Coolant temp. is 55 ˚C (128
˚F) or less.)
(2) Check for shift shock and slip.
Check for shock and slip at the 1 ® 2, 2 ® 3, 3 ® 4 and 4 ® 5 up−shifts.
(3) Check for abnormal noises and vibration.
Run at the D range lock−up or 5th gear and check for abnormal noises and vibration.
HINT:
The check for the cause of abnormal noises and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be
due to loss of balance in the differential, torque converter, etc.
(4) Check kick−down operation.
While running in the D range, 2nd, 3rd and 5th gears, check to see that the possible kick−down
vehicle speed limits for 2 ® 1, 3 ® 2, 4 ® 3 and 5 ® 4 kick−downs conform to those indicated
in the automatic shift schedule (See page SS−29).
(5) Check abnormal shock and slip at kick−down.
(6) Check the lock−up mechanism.
S Drive in D range, 5th gear, at a steady speed (lock−up ON) of about 70 km/h (43 mph).
S Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change
abruptly.
If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock−up.
(b) 4 range test:
Check to see that the 1 ® 2, 2 ® 3 and 3 ® 4 up−shift takes place and that the shift point con-
forms to the automatic shift schedule (See page SS−29).
HINT:
There is no 5th up−shift in the 4 range.
While running in the 4 range and 4th gear, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine
braking effect.
down−shift.

DI−283
(c) 3 range test:

Check to see that the 1 ® 2 and 2 ® 3up−shift takes place and that the shift point conforms to
the automatic shift schedule (See page SS−29).
While running in the 3 range and 3rd gear, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine
braking effect.
down−shift.
(d) 2 range test:
shift schedule (See page SS−29).
While running in the 2 range and 2nd gear, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine
braking effect.
down−shift.
(e) L range test:
Shift into the L range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points.
(1) Check no up−shift.
While running in the L range, check that there is no up−shift to 2nd gear.
While running in the L range, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine braking effect.
(3) Check for abnormal noises during acceleration and deceleration.
(f) R range test:
Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping.
CAUTION:
Before conducting this test ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction.
(g) P range test:
Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5˚) and after shifting into the P range, release the parking
brake. Then, check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.
6. ACTIVE TEST
You are able to set the A/T gear position as you like by operating each solenoid valve forcibly using hand−
held tester.
However, the condition that you can set the gear position differs in the setting gear position, so conduct the
ACTIVE TEST following the table below.
No. Indication Gear Condition Starting Condition Canceling Condition
1 1st, 2nd Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 mph) Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 mph)
Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 mph) or vehicle
2 3rd Vehicle speed: less than 50 km/h (31 mph)
running at 4th or 5th gear
S Vehicle running at 3rd or 5th gear

3 4th Vehicle speed: less than 50 km/h (31 mph)
S Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 mph)
S Vehicle speed:
more than 60 km/h (37 mph) S Vehicle speed: less than 60 km/h (37 mph)
4 5th S Vehicle running at 4th gear S Throttle valve opening angle:
S Throttle valve opening angle: more than 50 %
less than 50 %

DI−284
7. BASIC INSPECTION
(a) Check the fluid level.
HINT:
Drive the vehicle so that the engine and transmission are at nor-
mal operating temperature.
Fluid temperature: 70 − 80 ˚C (158 − 176 ˚F)
Brake Pedal
Parking Brake D01835
(1) Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the park-
OK if hot ing brake.
Add if hot (2) With the engine idling and the brake pedal de-
pressed, shift the shift lever into all ranges from P
to L range and return to P range.
(3) Pull out the dipstick and wipe it clean.
(4) Push it back fully into the pipe.
(5) Pull it out and check that the fluid level is in the HOT
D10484 range.
If the level is not within the range, add new fluid.
NOTICE:
Do not overfill.
(b) Check the fluid condition.
If the fluid smells burnt or is black, replace it.
(c) Replace the ATF.

(1) Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
(2) Reinstall the drain plug securely.
(3) With the engine OFF add new fluid through the oil
filler pipe.
Capacity: 1.8 liters (1.9 US qts, 1.6 Imp.qts)
(4) Start the engine and shift the shift lever into all
AT5143 ranges from P to L range and then shift into P range.
(5) With the engine idling, check the fluid level. Add
OK if hot fluid up to the COOL level on the dipstick.
Add if hot (6) Check the fluid level at the normal operating tem-
perature, 70 − 80 ˚C (158 − 176 ˚F), and add as
necessary.
NOTICE:
Do not overfill.
(d) Check the fluid leaks.
D10484 Check for leaks in the transmission.

DI−285
If there are leaks, it is necessary to repair or replace O−rings,

FIPGs, oil seals, plugs or other parts.
Neutral Position (e) Inspect and adjust the shift lever position.
S When shifting the shift lever from the N range to oth-
er ranges, check that the lever can be shifted
smoothly and accurately to each range and that the
position indicator is not aligned with the correct
position.
If the indicator is not aligned with the correct position, carry out
Loosen this nut the following adjustment procedures.
D02224 S Loosen the nut on the shift lever.
S Push the control shaft fully rearward.
S Return the control shaft lever 2 notches to N range.
S Set the shift lever to N range.
S While holding the shift lever lightly toward the R
range side, tighten the shift lever nut.
S Start the engine and make sure that the vehicle
moves forward when shifting the lever from the N to
D range and reverses when shifting it to the R
range.
(f) Inspect and adjust the neutral start switch.
Neutral Basic Line Check that the engine can be started with the shift lever
only in the N or P range, but not in other ranges.
Bolt
If it is not as stated above, carry out the following adjustment
procedures.
S Loosen the neutral start switch bolt and set the shift
Groove
lever to the N range.
S Align the groove and neutral basic line.
D07987 S Hold the switch in position and tighten the bolt.
S For continuity inspection of the neutral start switch,
see page DI−333.
8. MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS
(a) Measure the stall speed.
The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transmission and engine by measuring
the stall speeds in the D range.
NOTICE:
S Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds.
S To ensure safety, do this test in a wide, clear level area which provides good traction.

DI−286
S The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the condi-
tions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.
TAC SChock the 2 wheels.

SConnect a hand−held tester to DLC3 or
SST.
SST 09843−18030
S Fully apply the parking brake.
DLC3 S Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the
brake pedal.
N09214 S Start the engine.
S Shift into the D range. Press all the way down
on the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
Quickly read the stall speed at this time.
Stall speed: 2,450 ± 150 rpm (In D range)
Evaluation:
S Engine output may be insufficient
S Stator one−way clutch is operating properly
(a) Stall speed low in D range
HINT: If more than 600 rpm below the specified value, the torque
converter could be faulty.

S Forward clutch slipping
(b) Stall speed high in D range
S No.2 one−way clutch not operating properly
(b) Measure the time lag.

When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling, there will be a certain time lapse or lag before
the shock can be felt. This is used for checking the condition of the O/D direct clutch, forward clutch,
and 1st & reverse brake.
NOTICE:
S Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests.
S Take 3 measurements and take the average value.

DI−287
TAC Chock the 4 wheels.

S
Connect a hand−held tester to DLC3 or
S
SST.
SST 09843−18030
S Start engine and check idle speed.
DLC3 Idle speed: 750 ± 50 rpm (In N range and A/C OFF)
S Shift the lever from N to D range. Using a stop
N09214 watch, measure the time from when the lever
is shifted until the shock is felt.
Time lag: N ® D less than 1.2 seconds
S In the same way, measure the time lag for N
® R.
Time lag: N ® R less than 1.5 seconds
Evaluation (If N ® D or N ® R time lag is longer than the specified):
N ® D time lag is longer S Forward clutch worn
S Direct clutch worn
N ® R time lag is longer
S 1st & reverse brake worn
9. HYDRAULIC TEST
Measure the line pressure.
NOTICE:
S Do the test at normal operation ATF temperature 50 − 80 ˚C (122 − 176 ˚F).
S The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe
the conditions of wheels or wheel stopper outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.
S Be careful to prevent SST’s hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe.
(1) Warm up the ATF.
(2) Remove the test plug on the right side of the transmission case and connect SST.
(See page AT−25 for the location to connect SST)
SST 09992−00095 (09992−00231, 09992−00271)
(3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels.
(4) Connect a hand−held tester to DLC3.
(5) Start the engine and check idling speed.
(6) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal and shift into D range.
(7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling.
(8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when
engine speed reaches stall speed.
(9) In the same way, do the test in R range.
Specified line pressure:
Condition D range kPa (kgf / cm2, psi) R range kPa (kgf / cm2, psi)
Idling 395 − 455 (4.0 − 4.6, 57 − 65) 0
Stall 1,200 − 1,360 (12.2 − 13.8, 174 − 196) 1,655 − 1,960 (16.9 − 20.0, 240 − 282)
If the measured pressure is not up to the specified value, recheck the throttle cable adjustment and retest.

DI−288
Evaluation
S SLT solenoid valve defective
If the measured values at all ranges are higher
S Regulator valve detective
S SLT solenoid valve defective
S Regulator valve defect
If the measured values at all ranges are lower
S Oil pump defect
S O/D direct clutch defect
S D range circuit fluid leakage

If pressure is low in the D range only
S Forward clutch defect
S R range circuit fluid leakage
If pressure is low in the R range only S Direct clutch defect
S 1st & reverse brake defect
10. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST

HINT:
By this test, it can be determined whether the trouble is within
the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transmis-
sion.
(a) Disconnect the solenoid wire.
(b) Inspect the manual driving operation.
Check that the shift and gear positions correspond to the
D01880 table below.
While driving, shift through the L, 2, 3, 4 and D ranges.
Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift
range.
Shift range Gear position
D 5th
4 5th
3 4th
2 3rd
L 3rd
R Reverse
P Pawl Lock
HINT:
If the L, 2, 3, 4 and D range gear positions are difficult to distin-
guish, do the following read test.
If any abnormality is found in the above test, the problem is in
the transmission itself.
(c) Connect the solenoid wire.
(d) Cancel out DTC.

DI−289
DI25J−04

If a DTC is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed in the table below and proceed to the
page given.
DTC No. *2Memory
Detection Item Trouble Area *1CHK ENG
(See Page)

S Combination meter F f
(DI−299) tion
S Engine & ECT ECU
P0710
Sensor Circuit Malfunction S ATF temperature sensor F f
(DI−303)
Transmission Fluid Temperature S Open in ATF temperature sensor
P0711
Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- S ATF temperature sensor circuit F f
(DI−305)
mance problem S Engine & ECT ECU
P0715 S O/D direct clutch speed sensor
(DI−306) S Engine & ECT ECU

P0750 Shift Solenoid ”A” Malfunction
Shift Solenoid ”A” Electrical Mal- S Open or short in No. 1 solenoid valve circuit
P0753
(DI−312)
P0755 Shift Solenoid ”B” Malfunction
Shift Solenoid ”B” Electrical Mal- S Open or short in No. 2 solenoid valve circuit
P0758
(DI−312)
P0760 Shift Solenoid ”C” Malfunction
Shift Solenoid ”C” Electrical Mal- S Open or short in No. 3 solenoid valve circuit
P0763
(DI−312)
Shift Solenoid ”D” Electrical Mal- S Open or short in No. 4 solenoid valve circuit
P0768
(DI−318)
S SLU solenoid valve is stuck open or closed
P0770 Shift Solenoid ”E” Malfunction S Valve body is blocked up or stuck
F f
(DI−321) (SLU Solenoid Valve) S Lock−up clutch
S Open or short in stop light switch signal circuit

P1520
Stop Light Switch Malfunction S Stop light switch F f
(DI−324)
S Engine & ECT ECU
Linear Solenoid for Lock−up
P1755 S SLU solenoid valve
Control Circuit Malfunction F f
(DI−325) S Engine & ECT ECU
(SLU Solenoid Valve)

DI−290
P1760
sure Control Circuit Malfunction S SLT solenoid valve F f
(DI−327)
P1765 Pressure Control Circuit Mal-
S SLN solenoid valve F f
(DI−330) function
S Engine & ECT ECU
(SLN Solenoid Valve)

P1780 Park/Neutral Position Switch
S Neutral start switch F f
S Engine & ECT ECU
*1: ”F” mark means check engine waning light (CHK ENG) blinks once every 2 seconds.
*2: ”f” mark means Engine & ECT ECU memorizes the malfunction code if the Engine & ECT ECU detects
the DTC detection condition.
HINT:
are damaged.

DI−291
DI2LK−02
PARTS LOCATION
Check Engine Warning Light (CHK ENG)
SNOW Indicator Light

Shift Position Indicator Light
Stop Light Switch
DLC3
Pattern Select Switch Shift Lock Control ECU and

Transmission Control Switch

Engine & ECT
ECU
SLN Solenoid Valve

SLU Solenoid Valve
ATF Temperature Sensor SLT Solenoid Valve

O/D Direct Clutch Speed Sensor
D10069

DI−292
DI2LL−03
TERMINALS OF ECU
E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
A14471

IG ON Below 1.5
S1 « E1 (E3
(E3−19
19 « E3
E3−7)
7) R « BR 3rd, 4th or 5th gear Below 1.5
1st or 2nd gear 9 − 14
IG ON Below 1.5
S2 « E1 (E3
(E3−18
18 « E3
E3−7)
7) W « BR 1st, 4th or 5th gear Below 1.5
2nd or 3rd gear 9 − 14
IG ON Below 1.5
S3 « E1 (E3
(E3−17
17 « E3
E3−7)
7) G « BR 1st, 2nd, 3rd or 5th gear Below 1.5
4th gear 9 − 14
IG ON Below 1.5
S4 « E1 (E3
(E3−16
16 « E3
E3−7)
7) G−R
G R « BR 1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear Below 1.5
5th gear 9 − 14
IG ON Below 3
SLU+ « SLU−
L−Y « L−R Pulse signal is output
below 1.5 « 9 − 14
IG ON Below 3
SLN+ « SLN−
Y«L Pulse signal is output
below 1.5 « 9 − 14
IG ON Below 3
SLT+ « SLT−
B « G−B Pulse signal is output
below 1.5 « 9 − 14
SP2+ « SP2− Pulse signal is output
G«R Engine is idling
(E3−23 « E3−22) below 1.5 « 4 − 6
NCO+ « NCO− Pulse signal is output

Y«L Engine is idling
(E3−21 « E3−20) below 1.5 « 4 − 6

DI−293
OIL « EOIL
G−Y « BR IG ON and ATF temperature 110 ˚C (176 ˚F) Below 1
(E3−27 « E3−26)
IG ON and shift lever P range 7.5 − 14
P « E1 (E3
(E3−6
6 « E3
E3−7)
7) W « BR
IG ON and shift lever other than P range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever R range 7.5 − 14
R « E1 (E3
(E3−5
5 « E3
E3−7)
7) G « BR
IG ON and shift lever other than R range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever N range 7.5 − 14
N « E1 (E3
(E3−3
3 « E3
E3−7)
7) G R « BR
G−R
IG ON and shift lever other than N range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever D or 4 range 7.5 − 14
D « E1 (E5
(E5−13
13 « E3
E3−7)
7) Y B « BR
Y−B
IG ON and shift lever other than D or 4 range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever 4 range 7.5 − 14
4 « E1 (E5
(E5−14
14 « E3
E3−7)
7) Y G « BR
Y−G
IG ON and shift lever other than 4 range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever 3 range 7.5 − 14
3 « E1 (E3
(E3−4
4 « E3
E3−7)
7) G « BR
IG ON and shift lever other than 3 range Below 1.5
*1G
G−B
B « BR IG ON and shift lever 2 or L range 7.5 − 14
2 « E1 (E5
(E5−12
12 « E3
E3−7)
7) *2W−B « BR IG ON and shift lever other than 2 or L range Below 1.5
IG ON and shift lever L range 7.5 − 14
L « E1 (E5
(E5−15
15 « E3
E3−7)
7) R Y « BR
R−Y
IG ON and shift lever other than L range Below 1.5
IG ON and brake pedal depressed 9 − 14
STP « E1 (E5
(E5−4
4 « E3
E3−7)
7) G W « BR
G−W
IG ON and brake pedal released Below 1.5
IG ON and accelerator pedal depressed 9 − 14
KD « E1 (E6
(E6−9
9 « E3
E3−7)
7) Y R « BR
Y−R
IG ON and accelerator pedal released Below 1.5
*1: LHD
*2: RHD

DI−294
DI2L7−03

HINT:
If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the trouble still occurs, check the circuits for each
symptom in the order given in the charts on the following pages and proceed to the page given for trouble-
shooting.
The Matrix Chart is divided into 3 chapters.
S If the instruction ”Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart” is given in the flow chart
for each circuit, proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check.
S If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits, then check
and replace the Engine & ECT ECU.
1. CHAPTER 1: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT MATRIX CHART
No up−shift
1. Transmission control switch circuit DI−340

No down−shift
No lock−up Engine & ECT ECU IN−30

No lock−up off Engine & ECT ECU IN−30
1. Pattern select switch circuit DI−338
Up−shift to 5th from 4th while engine is cold Engine & ECT ECU IN−30
1. Kick−down switch circuit DI−343
No kick−down

No pattern select
Engine stalls when starting off or stopping Engine & ECT ECU IN−30
No 2nd start
No steering shift system 2. Pattern select switch circuit DI−338

DI−295
2. CHAPTER 2: ON−VEHICLE REPAIR

2. Manual valve L
3. Parking lock pawl L
1. Reverse control valve L

Vehicle does not move in particular range or ranges
Off−vehicle repair matrix chart −
(Except R range)

No up−shift (1st ® 2nd)

No up−shift (3rd ® 4th)

No down−shift (4th ® 3rd)

No down−shift (3rd ® 2nd)
No down−shift (2nd ® 1st)

No lock−up or No lock−up off 2. Lock−up relay valve L
Harsh engagement (N ® D) 3. C1 accumulator L
4. Orifice control valve L
2. Lock−up relay valve L
Harsh engagement (Lock−up)

2. C2 accumulator L
Harsh engagement (N ® R)
Harsh engagement (2 ® L) Coast brake control valve L

Harsh engagement (2nd ® 3rd ® 4th ® 5th)

2. B3 control valve L
Harsh engagement (1st ® 2nd) 3. B2 release control valve L

DI−296

3. B2 accumulator L
Harsh engagement (2nd ® 3rd) 4. B3 control valve L
5. B2 release control valve L
Harsh engagement (3rd ® 4th)
3. C2 accumulator L

3. B0 accumulator L

3. C0 accumulator L

2. Oil strainer L
Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse)
3. Pressure relief valve L

Slip or shudder (Particular range)

No engine braking (1st: L range) 2. B−4 relay valve L
No engine braking (2nd: 2 range)

No kick−down 2. 2−3 shift valve L

DI−297
3. CHAPTER 3: OFF−VEHICLE REPAIR

1. O/D one−way clutch (F0) L
1. Center and rear planetary gear unit L

4. O/D brake (B0) L
No up−shift (1st ® 2nd) 2nd brake (B3) L

1. 3rd brake (B2) L
2. One−way clutch No.1 (F1) L
No up−shift (3rd ® 4th) Direct clutch L
No up−shift (4th ® 5th) O/D brake (B0) L
No lock−up or No lock−up off Torque converter *
Harsh engagement (N ® D) 2. O/D one−way clutch (F0) L
Harsh engagement (N ® R) 2. O/D brake (B0) L
Harsh engagement (1st ® 2nd) 2nd brake (B3) L
1. 3rd brake (B2) L
Harsh engagement (2nd ® 3rd) 2. 2nd brake (B3) L
Harsh engagement (3rd ® 4th) Direct clutch (C2) L
1. O/D brake (B0) L
Harsh engagement (Lock−up) Torque converter *

Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse: After warm−up) 2. O/D one−way clutch (F0) L
Slip or shudder (Particular range: Just after engine starts) Torque converter *
Slip or shudder (R range) 2. O/D brake (B0) L
Slip or shudder (1st)
2. No. 2 one−way clutch (F2) L
Slip or shudder (2nd) 2nd brake (B3) L
1. 3rd coast brake (B1) L
Slip or shudder (3rd) 2. 3rd brake (B2) L
Slip or shudder (4th) Direct clutch L
Slip or shudder (5th) O/D brake (B0) L
No engine braking (1st − 4th: D range) O/C direct clutch (C0) L
No engine braking (1st: L range) 1st & reverse brake (B4) L
No engine braking (2nd: 2 range) 2nd brake (B3) L
No engine braking (3rd: 3 range) 3rd coast brake (B1) L

DI−298
Poor acceleration (All ranges) Torque converter *

1. O/D brake (B0) L
Poor acceleration (5th)
Engine stalls when starting off or stopping Torque converter *


DI−299
DI2L8−03
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The vehicle speed sensor detects the rotation speed of the transmission output shaft and sends signals to
the Engine & ECT ECU. The Engine & ECT ECU determines the vehicle speed based on these signals. An
AC voltage is generated in the vehicle speed sensor coil as the rotor mounted on the output shaft rotates,
and this voltage is sent to the Engine & ECT ECU.

+V
Generated
Wave form
Output
0
Voltage

−V
D02337 D02507

No vehicle speed sensor signal to Engine & ECT ECU under
conditions (a) and (b): S Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit
(a) Neutral start switch is OFF S Vehicle speed sensor
P0500
(b) Vehicle is being driven S Engine & ECT ECU
S Automatic
A t ti transmission
t i i assemblybl
Clutch or brake slips or gear broken
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine & ECT ECU

5V
Vehicle Speed Sensor 23
1 G SP2+
E3
22
2 R SP2−
E3
P21898

DI−300
HINT:
the malfunction is detected, when troubleshooting it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was run-
ning or stopped, the engine warmed up or not, the air−fuel ratio lean or rich, etc. at the time of the malfunction.
1 Connect hand−held tester and read value of vehicle speed value.
PREPARATION:
(b) Start the engine and the hand−held tester main switch ON.
CHECK:
Drive the vehicle and read vehicle speed value.
OK:
Vehicle speed matches tester speed value
NG Check and replace Engine & ECT ECU

(See page IN−30).
OK
2 Check speedometer circuit (See page BE−6).
NG Repair or replace speedometer circuit.
OK

DI−301
3 Check resistance between terminals SP2+ and SP2− of Engine & ECT ECU con-
nector.
PREPARATION:
SP2+ SP2− (a) Remove the instrument panel under cover.
(b) Disconnect the connector of the Engine & ECT ECU.
CHECK:
Check resistance between terminals SP2+ and SP2− of the En-
gine & ECT ECU connector.
OK:
D10076
OK Check and replace Engine & ECT ECU

(See page IN−30).
NG
4 Check vehicle speed sensor.
PREPARATION:
Remove the vehicle speed sensor from the transmission.
CHECK:
2 1 Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed
sensor.
OK:
Reference:
Check vehicle speed sensor’s function
Magnet CHECK:
Check voltage between terminals 1 and 2 of the vehicle speed
sensor when a magnet is put close to front end of the vehicle
speed sensor then taken away quickly.
OK:
Voltage is generated intermittently
HINT:
The generated voltage is extremely low.
A00828

DI−302

Refer to the chart for wave form between terminals SP2+ and
SP2− When the vehicle speed is approx. 60 km/h (37 mph).
0V
AT8761
NG Replace vehicle speed sensor.
OK
5 Check and repair harness and connector between Engine & ECT ECU and ve-
hicle speed sensor (See page IN−30).
NG Replace or repair wire harness or connector.
OK
Check and repair the transmission (clutch,

brake or gear etc.).

DI−303
DI2L9−02
DTC P0710 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor

Malfunction (ATF Temperature Sensor)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The ATF temperature sensor converts fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the Engine
& ECT ECU.
Either (a) or (b) is detected for 0.5 sec. or more.
(2−trip detection logic) S Open or short in ATF temperature sensor
P0710 (a) Temperature sensor resistance is less than 79 W S ATF temperature sensor
(b) After the engine has been operating for 15 minutes or S Engine & ECT ECU
more, the resistance at the temp. sensor is more than 156 kW
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine & ECT ECU

4 − 6V
Transmission
1 27
O G−Y OIL
E1 E3
ATF Temperature
Sensor
7 26
BR EOIL
O
E1 E3
Q08641

DI−304
1 Check ATF temperature sensor.
PREPARATION:
1
(a) Disconnect the solenoid wire connector.
(b) Remove the oil pan.
(c) Disconnect all solenoid valve connectors.
7 (d) Remove transmission wire harness.
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 7 of solenoid con-
nector at 25 ˚C (77 ˚F) and 110 ˚C (230 ˚F).
D01786 OK:
Resistance (Approx.):
25 ˚C (77 ˚F): 3.5 kW
110 ˚C (230 ˚F): 231 − 263 W
NG Replace the ATF temperature sensor (transmis-

sion wire).
OK
2 Check harness and connector between ATF temperature sensor and Engine &
ECT ECU (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace the Engine & ECT ECU

(See page IN−30).

DI−305
DI2C9−07
DTC P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature sensor

Circuit Range / Performance
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Both (a) and (b) is detected.
(a) After 12 seconds of the engine start, the temp., of the atmo- S Open in ATF temperature sensor circuit
P0711 sphere and that of the engine coolant is more than −10 ˚C. S ATF temperature sensor
(b) After a normal driving for over 20 minutes and 6.2 miles S Engine & ECT ECU
(10km), the ATF temp. is less than 10 ˚C.
HINT:
NO
Replace ATF temperature sensor.

DI−306
DI2LA−02
DTC P0715 Input/Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunc-

tion (O/D Direct Clutch Speed Sensor)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
O/D Direct Clutch Drum This sensor detects the rotation speed of the O/D input shaft
from the rotation of the O/D direct clutch drum.
Its construction is the same as that of the vehicle speed sensor
By comparing the O/D direct clutch speed signal and vehicle
speed sensor signal, the Engine & ECT ECU detects the shift
timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque
O/D Direct Clutch
Speed Sensor
and hydraulic pressure in response to various conditions, thus
AT5609 doing smooth gear shift.

All conditions below are detected for 5 secs. or more
(a) Gear change not being performed
(b) Gear position: 1st, 2nd 3rd or 4th
S O/D direct clutch speed sensor
P0715 (c) T/M input shaft rpm: 300 rpm or less
S Engine & ECT ECU
(d) T/M output shaft rpm: 1,000 rpm or more
(e) Neutral start switch: OFF
(f) No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, No. 4, SLU solenoid valves and vehicle
speed sensor are in normal operation
Refer to the chart for the wave form between terminals NCO+
and NCO− during engine idling.
1 V / Div.
GND
2 msec. / Div.
AT8763

DI−307
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine & ECT ECU
21
Y NCO+
E3
2 O1
O/D Direct Clutch
Speed Sensor
1 O1
20
L NCO−
E3
Q06858
HINT:
1 Using hand−held tester, check O/D direct clutch speed signal.
PREPARATION:
(c) Start the engine (Shift range: P).
(d) Turn the hand−held tester main switch ON.
CHECK:
Read O/D direct clutch speed at engine idling.
OK:
750 ± 50 rpm at engine idling
NG Go to step 2.
OK
er, when DTC P0715/67 is displayed, check and replace Engine & ECT ECU (See page IN−30).

DI−308
2 Check O/D direct clutch speed sensor.
PREPARATION:
Remove the O/D direct clutch speed sensor from the transmis-
sion.
2 1 CHECK:
(a) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of O/D di-
rect clutch speed sensor.
Magnet
(b) Check voltage between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed
(−) (+) sensor when a magnet is put close to the front end of the
speed sensor then kept away quickly.
OK:
(a): Voltage is generated intermittently
(b): Resistance: 560 − 680 W 20 ˚C (68 ˚F)
HINT:
Q08218
Q08292 D02420 The generated voltage is extremely low.
NG Replace the O/D direct clutch speed sensor.
OK
Check and repair harness and connector be-

tween Engine & ECT ECU and O/D direct
clutch speed sensor (See page IN−30).

DI−309
DI25O−03
DTC P0750 Shift Solenoid ”A” Malfunction

DTC P0755 Shift Solenoid ”B” Malfunction

DTC P0760 Shift Solenoid ”C” Malfunction

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Engine & ECT ECU uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor and input/turbine speed sensor to detect
the actual gear position (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th or 5th gear). The Engine & ECT ECU then compares the actual
gear with the shift schedule in the Engine & ECT ECU memory to detect mechanical trouble of the solenoid
valves, valve body and automatic transmission (clutch, brake or gear etc.).
P0750 During normal driving, the gear required by the Engine & ECT S No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 solenoid valve is stuck open or closed
P0755 ECU does not match the actual gear S Valve body is blocked up or stuck
P0760 (2−trip detection logic) S Automatic transmission assembly
HINT:
Check the No. 1 solenoid valve when DTC P0750 is output, check No. 2 solenoid valve when DTC P0755

DI−310
1 Check No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3 solenoid valve operation.
PREPARATION:
No. 2 Solenoid Valve (a) Remove the oil pan.
CHECK:
No. 2 solenoid valve:
(+) (−) (a) Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) of compressed air,
noid valves, check that the solenoid valves are open.
(+) (−) No. 1 and No. 3 solenoid valve:
Connect the positive (+) lead with 8 − 10 W bulb to terminal 2
No. 1 Solenoid Valve and the negative (−) lead to terminal 1, then check the move-
ment of the valve.
OK:
(+)

(−) in illustration on the left.
(+)
(−)
D10482
NG Replace the No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3 solenoid valve.
OK

DI−311
OK
Replace the transmission (See page

AT−26).

DI−312
DI2LB−03
DTC P0753 Shift Solenoid A Electrical Malfunction

DTC P0758 Shift Solenoid B Electrical Malfunction

DTC P0763 Shift Solenoid C Electrical Malfunction

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Shifting from 1st to 5th is performed in combination with ON and OFF of the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 solenoid
valves controlled by Engine & ECT ECU. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the solenoid valves,
the Engine & ECT ECU controls the remaining normal solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated
smoothly (Fail safe function).
HINT:
Check the No. 1 solenoid valve when DTC P0753 is output, check the No. 2 solenoid valve when DTC P0758
the No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3 solenoid valve circuit when it
changes.
The Engine & ECT ECU records DTC P0753, P0758 or P0763
if condition (a) or (b) is detected once, but it does not light up
CHK ENG.
P0753 After Engine & ECT ECU detects condition (a) or (b) continu- S Open or short in No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 solenoid valve circuit
P0758 ously 8 times or more in 1 trip, it causes the CHK ENG lights S No. 1/No. 2/No. 3 solenoid valve
P0763 up until condition (a) or (b) disappears. S Engine & ECT ECU
After that, if the Engine & ECT ECU detects condition (a) or (b)

DI−313
Fail Safe Function:

If either of the shift solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short, the Engine & ECT ECU turns the other
solenoid valve ON and OFF to shift to the gear positions shown in the table below. The Engine & ECT ECU
also turns the SLU solenoid valve OFF at the same time. If both solenoids are malfunctioning, hydraulic con-
trol cannot be performed electronically and must be done manually.
Manual shifting as shown in the following table must be done (In the case of a short circuit, the Engine &
ECT ECU stops sending current to the short circuited solenoid).
No. 1 Solenoid Valve No. 2 Solenoid Valve No. 3 Solenoid Valve
Normal
Malfunction Malfunction Malfunction
Range Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve
Gear Gear Gear Gear
ON OFF ON 1 X OFF®ON ON®OFF 4®3 ON X OFF 1 ON OFF X 1
OFF ON OFF 3 X ON OFF 3 OFF X OFF®ON 5®4 OFF ON X 3
D
OFF OFF OFF 5 X OFF OFF 5 OFF X OFF 5 OFF OFF X 5
ON OFF ON 1 X OFF®ON ON®OFF 4®3 ON X OFF 1 ON OFF X 1
4 OFF ON OFF 3 X ON OFF 3 OFF X OFF®ON 5®4 OFF ON X 3
ON OFF ON 1 X OFF®ON ON 4®3 ON X OFF 1 ON OFF X 1
3 OFF ON ON 3 X ON ON 3 OFF X ON 4 OFF ON X 3
ON OFF ON 1 X OFF®ON ON 3 ON X ON 1 ON OFF X 1
2
OFF ON ON 3 X ON ON 3 OFF X ON 3 OFF ON X 3
L ON OFF OFF 1 X OFF®ON OFF®ON 3 ON X OFF 1 ON OFF X 1
No. 1 and No. 2 Sole- No. 1 and No. 3 Sole- No. 2 and No. 3 Sole- No. 1, No. 2, No. 3 Sole-
noid Valve Malfunction noid Valve Malfunction noid Valve Malfunction noid Valve Malfunction
Range
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve
Gear Gear Gear Gear
X X ON 4 X OFF®ON X 5®3 ON X X 1 X X X 5
X X OFF®ON 5®4 X ON X 3 OFF X X 5 X X X 5
D
X X OFF 5 X OFF X 5 OFF X X 5 X X X 5
4 X X OFF®ON 5®4 X ON X 3 OFF X X 5 X X X 5
3 X X ON 4 X ON X 3 OFF X X 4 X X X 4
X X ON 3 X OFF®ON X 3 ON X X 1 X X X 3
2
X X ON 3 X ON X 3 OFF X X 3 X X X 3
L X X OFF®ON 3 X OFF®ON X 3 ON X X 1 X X X 3

DI−314
WIRING DIAGRAM
No. 1 Solenoid Valve B+

6 19
W R S1
E1 E3
B+
12 18
B W S2
E1 E3
B+
5 G 17
Y S3
E1 E3
D01788

DI−315
1 Measure resistance between terminal S1, S2 or S3 of Engine & ECT ECU and
body ground.
S3
PREPARATION:
S1 S2
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminal S1, S2 or S3 of Engine
& ECT ECU and body ground.
OK:
D10077

(See page IN−30).
NG
PREPARATION:
S2 Disconnect the solenoid connector from the automatic trans-
mission.
CHECK:
Check the harness and connector between terminal S1, S2 or
S3 of Engine & ECT ECU and terminal S1, S2 or S3 of solenoid
connector.
S3
S1 S1 OK:
There is no open and no short circuit.
Solenoid Connector
S3 S2
D10084
OK

DI−316
3 Check No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3 solenoid valve.
Electrical Check:
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
(a) Measure resistance between solenoid connector and
body ground.
(b) Connect positive lead to terminal of solenoid connec-
tor, negative lead to solenoid body.
OK:
No. 2 Solenoid Valve (a) Resistance: 11 − 15 W at 20 ˚C (68 ˚F)
D10483

DI−317
Mechanical Check:
PREPARATION:
(+) (a) Remove the oil pan.
CHECK:
(−) No. 2 solenoid valve:
(+)
(a) Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) of compressed air,
(−) noid valves, check that the solenoid valves open.
No. 1 and No. 3 solenoid valves:
No. 1 Solenoid Valve Connect the positive (+) lead with 8 − 10 W bulb to terminal 2
and the negative (−) lead to terminal 1, then check the move-
(+) ment of the valve.
OK:

(−) Valve moves in direction
When B+ is cut off.

(+)
(−)
D10482
NG Replace the solenoid valve.
OK
Repair or replace the solenoid wire.

DI−318
DI2LC−03
DTC P0768 Shift Solenoid D Electrical Malfunction

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
No. 4 solenoid valve is controlled by Engine & ECT ECU and it switches ON and OFF of the O/D direct switch.
the No. 4 solenoid valve circuit when it changes.
The Engine & ECT ECU records DTC P0768 if condition (a) or
(b) is detected once, but it does not light up CHK ENG.
After Engine & ECT ECU detects condition (a) or (b) continu-
ously 8 times or more in 1 trip, it causes the CHK ENG lights S Open or short in No. 4 solenoid valve circuit
P0768 up until condition (a) or (b) disappears. S No. 4 solenoid valve
After that, if the Engine & ECT ECU detects condition (a) or (b) S Engine & ECT ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
B+
No. 4 Solenoid
Valve
11 16
V G−R S4
E1 E3
D01773

DI−319
1 Check resistance between terminals S4 of Engine & ECT ECU and body ground.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminals S4 and body ground.
OK:
S4
D10078

(See page IN−30).
NG
2 Check No. 4 solenoid valve.
PREPARATION:
(b) Remove the No. 4 solenoid valve.
(+) CHECK:
(a) Measure resistance between terminal and solenoid body.
(−) (b) Connect positive (+) lead to terminal of solenoid connec-
tor and negative (−) lead to solenoid body.
OK:
D01784 D01785 D01789 (a) Resistance: 11 − 15 W at 20 ˚C (68 ˚F)
NG Replace No. 4 solenoid valve.
OK

DI−320
PREPARATION:
mission.
CHECK:
Check the harness and connector between terminal S4 of En-
Solenoid Connector gine & ECT ECU and terminal S4 solenoid connector.
OK:
S4
S4 There is open and no short circuit.
D10079
OK
er, when DTC P0768 is displayed, check and replace Engine & ECT ECU (See page IN−30).

DI−321
DI25R−03
DTC P0770 Shift Solenoid ”E” Malfunction

(SLU Shift Solenoid Valve)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Engine & ECT ECU uses the signals from the Throttle Posi-
tion Sensor and Air−flow Meter to monitor the engagement
condition of the lock−up clutch.
Then the Engine & ECT ECU compares the engagement condi-
tion of the lock−up clutch with the lock−up schedule in the En-
gine & ECT ECU memory to detect mechanical trouble of the
SLU solenoid valve SLU, valve body, torque converter and au-
D01769 tomatic transmission assembly (clutch, brake or gear etc.).

Lock−up does not occur when driving in the lock−up range S SLU solenoid valve is stuck open or closed
(normal driving at 80 km/h [50 mph]), or lock−up remains ON S Valve body blocked up or stuck
P0770
in the lock−up OFF range. S Lock−up clutch
(2−trip detection logic) S Automatic transmission assembly
HINT:
In case of using hand−held tester, start the inspection from step 1 and in case of not using the hand−held
1 Active test.
PREPARATION:
(b) Connect a hand−held tester.
(c) Turn the ignition switch ON and hand−held tester main switch ON.
CHECK:
Using active test, check the lock−shift operation.
OK:
Lock−up ON
NG Replace the torque converter.
OK

DI−322
2 Check SLU solenoid valve resistance.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the solenoid wire connector.
4 CHECK:
Measure the resistance between terminals 4 and 10 of solenoid
connector.
OK:
10
D01877
NG Replace the SLU solenoid valve.
OK
3 Check SLU solenoid valve operation.
PREPARATION:
(b) Remove the SLU solenoid valve.
CHECK:
the negative (−) lead to terminal 1.
OK:


1 in illustration on the left.
(−) (+)
D01769
D01885 D02231 NG Replace the SLU solenoid valve.
OK

DI−323
OK
Replace the torque converter

(See page AT−26).

DI−324
DI25S−03
DTC P1520 Stop Light Switch Signal Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling, while driving in lock−up condition, when
brakes are suddenly applied.
When the brake pedal is depressed, this switch sends a signal to Engine & ECT ECU. Then the Engine &
ECT ECU cancels operation of the lock−up clutch while braking is in progress.

The stop light switch does not turn off even once the vehicle is S Short in stop light switch signal circuit
P1520 driven. S Stop light switch
(2−trip detection logic) S Engine & ECT ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−189.
See page DI−189.

DI−325
DI2LD−02
DTC P1755 Linear Solenoid for Lock−up Control Circuit

Malfunction (SLU Solenoid Valve)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The amount of current flow to the solenoid is controlled by the
Lock−up (*) duty ratio of the Engine & ECT ECU output signal. The higher
Operation the duty ratio becomes, the higher the lock−up hydraulic pres-
Pressure sure becomes during the lock−up operation.
(*) Duty Ratio
The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle.
For example, if A is the period of continuity in one cycle, and B
Current flow to solenoid
is the period of non−continuity, then
(*)
ON
A
Duty Ratio = ´ 100 (%)
A+B
OFF
1 cycle
BE4056 D00160
DTC No. DTC detection condition Trouble Area

The following condition is detected. (2−trip detection logic)
S SLU solenoid valve
P1755 Signal output from SLU is ON for 3.3 msecs. or more and duty
S Engine & ECT ECU
ratio is at least 95 % for 1 second.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine & ECT ECU
Transmission
4 11
LG L−Y
E1 E3 SLU+
SLU Solenoid
Valve
10 10
BR L−R
E1 E3 SLU−
LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E) D01772

DI−326
1 Check SLU solenoid valve.
1
PREPARATION:
2
(c) Disconnect the solenoid connector.
CHECK:
Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
OK:
5.0 − 5.6 W at 20 ˚C (68 ˚F)
Check solenoid operation:
PREPARATION:
(c) Remove the SLU solenoid valve.
CHECK:
1
negative (−) lead to terminal 1.
OK:
(−) (+)
2 When B+ is cut off. Valve moves in direction
D01886
D01769
D01885 D02421 NG Replace SLU solenoid valve.
OK
2 Check harness and connector between SLU solenoid valve and Engine & ECT
OK
Check and replace the Engine & ECT ECU

(See page IN−30).

DI−327
DI2LE−04
DTC P1760 Linear Solenoid for Line Pressure Control

Circuit Malfunction (SLT Solenoid Valve)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The throttle pressure that is applied to the primary regulator
valve (which modulates line pressure) causes the SLT solenoid
Line Pressure Con- valve, under electronic control, to precisely and minutely modu-
trol Pressure
lates and generates line pressure according to the accelerator
pedal effort, or engine power output detected.
This reduces the function of line pressure and provides smooth
shifting characteristics.
Current Flow to Solenoid D02635 Upon receiving the throttle valve opening angle signal, Engine
& ECT ECU controls the line pressure by sending a predeter-
mined (*) duty ratio to the solenoid valve, modulating the line
pressure, generating throttle pressure.
ON (*) Duty Ratio
For example, if A is the period of continuity in one cycle, and B
OFF is the period of non−continuity, then
1 cycle
A
Duty Ratio = x 100 (%)
BE4056 A+B

(a) or (b) condition below is detected for 1 second or more. S Open or short in SLT solenoid valve circuit
P1760 (a) SLT− terminal: 0 V S SLT solenoid valve
(b) SLT− terminal: 12 V S Engine & ECT ECU
Reference:
Refer to the chart for the wave form between terminals SLT+
and SLT−during engine idling.
5 V / Div.
GND
1 msec. / Div. D01875

DI−328
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine & ECT ECU
Transmission
2 35
G B
E1 E3 SLT+
SLT Solenoid
Valve
8 34
GR G−B
E1 E3 SLT−
D01772

DI−329
1 Check SLT solenoid valve.
PREPARATION:
2 1 (a) Jack up the vehicle.
Check solenoid resistance:
CHECK:
nector.
OK:
Resistance: 5.0 − 5.6 W at 20 ˚C (68˚F)
CHECK:
Connect positive (+) lead with an 8 − 10 W bulb to terminal 1 of
1 solenoid connector and negative (−) lead to terminal 2, then
(+) (−) check the movement of the valve.
OK:
2
Valve moves in direction
Whenbattery positive voltage isapplied. intheillustrationontheleft.
D01888
D01889
D01887 D02235 Valve moves in direction
When battery positive voltage is cut off.
intheillustrationontheleft.
NG Replace SLT solenoid valve.
OK
2 Check harness and connector between SLT solenoid valve and Engine & ECT
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−330
DI2LF−02
DTC P1765 Linear Solenoid for Accumulator Pressure

Control Circuit Malfunction (SLN Solenoid)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The SLN solenoid valve controls the hydraulic pressure acting on the accumulator control valve when gears
are shifted and performs smooth gear shifting. The Engine & ECT ECU determines optimum operating pres-
sure according to the signals from the throttle position sensor, vehicle speed sensor and O/D direct clutch
speed sensor and controls the volume of current flow to the solenoid valve. The amount of current to the
solenoid is controlled by the (*) duty ratio of Engine & ECT ECU output signals, causing a momentary charge
to the hydraulic pressure acting on the clutches during gear shifting.
When the duty ratio is high, the hydraulic pressure acting on the clutches is low.
Accumulator Control
Pressure
Current Flow to Solenoid D02636
(*) Duty Ratio

For example, if A is the period of continuity in one cycle, and B is the period of non−continuity, then
ON
A
Duty Ratio = x 100 (%)
A+B
OFF
1 cycle
BE4056 D02292
DTC No DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area

All conditions below are detected for 1 second or more.
(2−trip detection logic) S Open or short in SLN solenoid valve circuit
P1765 (a) Engine & ECT ECU outputs duty signal to SLN solenoid S SLN solenoid valve
valve at 90 % or higher duty ratio S Engine & ECT ECU
(b) Current to SLN solenoid valve: 230 − 430 mA or less

DI−331
Reference:
S Refer to the chart for the wave form between terminals
SLN− and E1 when engine is idling.
5 V / Div.
GND
1 msec. / Div. D01867
S Refer to the chart for the wave form between terminals

SLN− and E1 during shift change.
5 V / Div.
GND
1 msec. / Div. D01868
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine & ECT ECU
Transmission
3 13
R Y
E1 E3 SLN+
SLN Solenoid
Valve
9 12
L L
E1 E3 SLN−
D01772

DI−332
1 Check SLN solenoid valve.
PREPARATION:
2 1
Check solenoid resistance:
CHECK:
nector.
OK:
CHECK:
Connect positive (+) lead with an 8 − 10 W bulb to terminal 1 of
1
solenoid connector and negative (−) lead to terminal 2, then
check the movement of the valve.
OK:
2
Valve moves in direction
When battery voltage is applied. in the illustration on the left.
D01888
D01768
D01887 D02232 Valve moves in direction
When battery voltage is cut off. in the illustration on the left.
NG Replace SLN solenoid valve.
OK
2 Check harness and connector between SLN solenoid valve and Engine & ECT
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−333
DI87X−01
DTC P1780 Park/Neutral Position Switch Circuit

(Neutral Start Switch)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The neutral start switch detects the shift lever range and sends signals to the Engine & ECT ECU.
The Engine & ECT ECU receives signals (P, R, N, D, 4, 3, 2 and L) from the neutral start switch. When the
signal is not sent to the Engine & ECT ECU from the neutral start switch, the Engine & ECT ECU judges that
the shift lever is in D range.
2 or more switches are ON simultaneously for P, R, N, D, 4, 3,
2 and L ranges.
S Short
Sh t in
i neutral
t l start
t t switch
it h circuit
i it
P1780 When driving under conditions (a) and (b) for 30 seconds or
S Neutral start switch
more, the neutral start switch is ON (N position).
S Engine & ECT ECU
(2 t i detection
(2−trip d t ti logic)
l i )
(a) Vehicle speed: 70 km/h (44 mph) or more
(b) Engine speed: 1,500 − 2,500 rpm

DI−334
WIRING DIAGRAM
(*1) J3, (*2) J27 Engine & ECT ECU
Neutral Start Switch J/C
2 6 6
PL 1 W R−W A A R−W W
EA2 EA2 E3 P
3 9 5
RL 2 G EA2 R−B D D R−B G
EA2 E3 R
13
NL 5 G−R
E3 N
R 3 C (*2) (*1) (*1) (*2)
4 E E J/C E E 13
7 Y−B Y−B
EA2 J27 J3 J3 J27 E5 D
DL G−Y
E E
Y−B
EA3 6 J28 J4
(*2) (*1) 4
2L 4 G
E3 3
R−L (*1) J9, (*2) J31
B (*1) B J/C
10 (*1) G−B 12
(*1) J18 (*2) A
LL 8 G−B (*2) W−B
E5
(*2) J35 EA2 2
G−B (*1) B
B J/C
(*1) B (*2) A
R−L (*2) A 15
R−Y
E5 L
Driver Side J/B
GAUGE G−B
1 4
B−Y
1J 1H
S5 5 S5 9
ALT NSSL
3 AM1 1 1 10 2 14
Y−G
1J 1A 1K S5 S5 E5 4
2 1 NSSD AT4
(*2) (*1)
Shift Lock Control ECU
W Driver Side J/B
4 1 22 5 13
R−L C11 W−B (*1) W−B
1D C11 1D 1F
Combination
Meter
W−L
1 (*2) W−B
(*2) W−B
2 B B
4 2 J37 J/C A
A
IG1 AM1 ALT Engine Room
No. 1 R/B J32 J/C J18 J/C
I12 Ignition Switch
1 A
1 (*1) W−B
Battery
B−L IF II
(*1) : LHD
(*2) : RHD D10067

DI−335
HINT:
1 Read PNP, REVERSE, DRIVE, 4TH, 3RD, 2ND and LOW signals.
PREPARATION:
(c) Turn the ignition switch ON and hand−held tester main
switch ON.
CHECK:
Shift lever into the P, R, N, D, 4, 3, 2 and L ranges, and read the
PNP, REVERSE, DRIVE, 4TH, 3RD, 2ND and LOW signals on
the hand−held tester.
OK:
Shift range Signal
P, N PNP: OFF ® ON
R REVERSE: OFF ® ON
D DRIVE: OFF ® ON
4 4TH: OFF ® ON
3 3RD: OFF ® ON
2 2ND: OFF ® ON
L LOW: OFF ® ON

(See page IN−30).
NG
Go to step 3.

DI−336
2 Measure voltage between each terminals of P, R, N, D, 4, 3, 2, and L of Engine &

ECT ECU and body ground.
ON PREPARATION:
P R N L 4 D 3 CHECK:
Measure voltage between each terminals P, R, N, D, 4, 3, 2 and
L of Engine & ECT ECU and body ground when the shift lever
is shifted to the following positions.
2
(−)
(+)
D10080
OK:
Tester connection Condition Specified condition
P− Body ground Shift lever range: P Battery voltage
R − Body ground Shift lever range: R Battery voltage*
N − Body ground Shift lever range: N Battery voltage
Shift lever range : D
D − Body ground Battery voltage
Transmission control SW (for D and 4) : OFF

Transmission control SW (for D and 4) : ON
3 − Body ground Shift lever range: 3 Battery voltage
Transmission control SW (for 2 and L) : OFF
Shift lever range: L
L − Body ground Battery voltage
Transmission control SW (for 2 and L) : ON
HINT:
*: The voltage will drop slightly due to lighting up of the back up
light.

(See page IN−30).
NG

DI−337
3 Check neutral start switch.
PREPARATION:
(b) Remove the neutral start switch connector.
CHECK:
shift lever is moved to each range.
OK:
Shift range Terminal No. to continuity Terminal No. to continuity
F13412
P 1−3 6−9
R 2−3 −
N 3−5 6−9
D, 4 3−7 −
3 3−4 −
2, L 3−8 −
NG Replace the neutral start switch.
OK
Repair or replace harness and connector between battery and neutral start switch, neutral start
switch and Engine & ECT ECU (See page IN−30).

DI−338
DI87Y−01
Pattern Select Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The Engine & ECT ECU memory contains the shift programs for the NORMAL, POWER and SNOW pat-
terns, 2 range, L range and the lock−up patterns. By following the programs corresponding to the signals
from the pattern select switch, the neutral start and other various sensors, the Engine & ECT ECU switches
the solenoid valves ON and OFF, and controls the transmission gear change and the lock−up clutch opera-
tion.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Body No. 1 ECU Engine & ECT ECU

Pattern Select Switch
23 19 21
7 G−W W E5
B5 PWR MPX1 B5 MPX1
24
W−B (LHD) 3 1 G−R B5 SNOW
(RHD)
W−B
A A
J18 J32 J/C
J/C
A
W−B
II IF
D10070

DI−339
1 Check pattern select switch.
7 PREPARATION:
Disconnect the pattern select switch connector.
CHECK:
Check continuity between each terminal of pattern select switch
connector when the select switch is set to PWR, NORM or
3
SNOW positions.
1
OK:
Switch condition Tester connection Specified condition
D02422
PWR 3−7 Continuity
NORM 1 − 3, 3 − 7 No continuity
SNOW 1−3 Continuity
If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

DI−340
DI2LG−02
Transmission Control Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the shift lever is in the 4 range (with transmission control switch for D and 4 pressed), ”4” in the shift
position indicator light will come on and when the shift lever is in the D range (with transmission control switch
for D and 4 released), ”D” in the shift position indicator light will come on.
When the shift lever is in the L range (with transmission control switch for 2 and L pressed), ”L” in the shift
position indicator light will come on and when the shift lever is in the 2 range (with transmission control switch
for 2 and L released), ”2” in the shift position indicator light will come on.
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−333.
1 Check operation of transmission control switch.
PREPARATION:
Turn ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
Check shift indicator light when the shift lever is in the each
range.
OK:
Shift lever range Specified condition
D ”D” indicator light comes on
Except D ”D” indicator light goes off
L ”L” indicator light comes on
Except L ”L” indicator light goes off
OK Go to step 4.
NG

DI−341
2 Check voltage between each terminals of D, 4, 2 and L of Engine & ECT ECU and
body ground.
PREPARATION:
ON
L 4 D Remove the Engine & ECT ECU with connectors still con-
2
nected.
CHECK:
(b) Check voltage between each terminals of D, 4, 2 and L of
Engine & ECT ECU and body ground.
(−) (+)
OK:
D10081 Tester connection Shift lever range Specified condition
D or 4 9 − 14 V
D − body
b d ground
d
Except D and 4 Below 1.5 V
4 9 − 14 V
4 − Body
B d ground
d
Except 4 Below 1.5 V
2 or L 9 − 14 V
2 − Body
B d ground
d
Except 2 and L Below 1.5 V
L 9 − 14 V
L − Body
B d ground
d
Except L Below 1.5 V

NG
ECT ECU and shift indicator light (See page IN−30).
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−342
4 Check transmission control switch.
CHECK:
AT4 (a) Disconnect the shift lock control unit assembly.
(b) Check continuity between each terminal of shift lock con-
trol unit connector.
OK:
Shift position Tester connection Specified value
D No continuity
ATL 2 − 10 (AT4 − NSSD)
NSSD NSSL 4 Continuity
D02221
2 No continuity
5 − 9 (ATL − NSSL)
L Continuity
NG Replace shift lock control unit assembly.
OK

on page IN−30).

DI−343
DI2LH−02
Kick−down Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The kick−down switch is turned ON when the accelerator pedal
is depressed to the full throttle and sends signals to Engine &
ECT ECU.
When the kick−down switch is turned ON, the Engine & ECT
ECU controls gear shifting according to the programmed shift
diagrams.
If a short circuit develops in the kick−down switch, the Engine
& ECT ECU disregards the kick−down signals and controls
Q07041 shifting at the normal shift points.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine & ECT ECU
Kick−down Switch
1 2 9 KD
W−B Y−R
K3 K3 E6
A
*1 J10 Junction Connector
A
W−B
A
*1 J 8 Junction Connector
(*2)
(*1)
IF II
(*1): LHD
(*2): RHD
LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E) D02351

DI−344
1 Check voltage between terminal KD of Engine & ECT ECU and body ground.
PREPARATION:
ON
KD Turn the ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal KD of Engine & ECT ECU
and body ground when accelerator pedal is fully depressed or
not.
(−) (+) OK:
Accelerator pedal Voltage
D10082
Fully depressed
Below 1 V
(Kick−down switch is ON)
Released
10 − 14 V
(Kick−down switch is OFF)

NG
2 Check kick−down switch.
PREPARATION:
2 1
Disconnect the kick−down switch connector.
CHECK:
Measure continuity between terminals 1 and 2 of the kick−down
switch connector when kick−down switch is ON and OFF.
OK:
Kick−down switch Continuity
ON Continuity
D02350
OFF No continuity
NG Replace the kick−down switch.
OK

DI−345
3 Check harness and connector between Engine & ECT ECU and kick−down
switch, kick−down switch and body ground (See page IN−30).
OK

(See page IN−30).

DI−346 DIAGNOSTICS − ABS & HYDRAULIC BRAKE BOOSTER POWER
SUPPLY SYSTEM
ABS & HYDRAULIC BRAKE BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY

SYSTEM
DI284−13

Troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure on the following pages.
Vehicle Brought to Workshop

Items inside are titles of pages in this manual,
with the page number in the bottom portion. See
1 Customer Problem Analysis the pages for detailed explanations.
L
2 Check and Clear DTC (Precheck)

L
Symptom
does not occur
3 4 Symptom Simulation
Problem Symptom Confirmation
P. IN−20
Symptom
occurs
5 DTC Check Normal code

L
Malfunction code
6 DTC Chart 7 Problem Symptoms Table

P. DI−347 L
9
8 Circuit Inspection Sensor Check
Check for Fluid Leakage
P DI−349, DI−352 and L L
10
Repair
11
Confirmation Test
Step 2, 5, 8, 9, 11: Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the hand−held

tester or break−out−box.
End
L: Refer GS300 Repair Manual Pub. No. RM588E.

DIAGNOSTICS − ABS & HYDRAULIC BRAKE BOOSTER POWER DI−347
SUPPLY SYSTEM
DI28U−12

NOTICE:
When removing the part, turn the ignition switch OFF.
HINT:
S Using SST 09843−18020, connect the terminals Tc and E1 of check connector and remove the short
pin.
S If any abnormality is not found when inspecting parts, inspect the ECU.
S If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed that code. For details
of each code, turn to the page referred to under the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No.” in the DTC
chart.
DTC No.
Detection Item Trouble Area
(See Page)
C0278 / 11*1
Open or short circuit in ABS solenoid relay circuit
( L ) S ABS solenoid relay
C0279 /12*1 S ABS solenoid relay circuit
B+ short circuit in ABS solenoid relay circuit
( L )
C0226 / 21*1 Open or short circuit in hydraulic brake booster solenoid circuit S Hydraulic brake booster
( L ) (SFR circuit) S SFRR or SFRH circuit
( L ) (SFL circuit) S SFLR or SFLH circuit
( L ) (SRR circuit) S SRRR or SRRH circuit
( L ) (SRL circuit) S SRLR or SRLH circuit
( L ) (SA1 circuit) S SA1 circuit
( L ) (SA2 circuit) S SA2 circuit
C1227 / 27*1 Open or short circuit in hydraulic brake booster S Hydraulic brake booster
( L ) solenoid circuit (SA3 circuit) S SA3 circuit
( L ) (STR circuit) S STR circuit
C0200 / 31*1
Right front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction
( L )
C0205 / 32*1
Left front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction S Right front, left front, right rear and left rear speed sensor
( L )
S Each
E h speed d sensor circuit
i it
C0210 / 33*1
Right rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction S Sensor rotor
( L )
C0215 / 34*1
Left rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction
( L )
S Battery
C1241 / 41
Low battery voltage or abnormally high battery voltage S IC regulator
( L )
S Power source circuit
S Battery
C1242 / 42*1
Open circuit in IG2 circuit S IC regulator
( L )
S Power source circuit
C1243 / 43*1 S Deceleration sensor
Malfunction in deceleration sensor (constant output)
( L ) S Wire harness for deceleration sensor system
Open or short circuit in deceleration sensor circuit
( L ) S Deceleration sensor circuit

SUPPLY SYSTEM

Malfunction in deceleration sensor
( L ) S Wire harness for deceleration sensor sytem
C1246 / 46*1 S Master cylinder pressure sensor
Malfunction in master cylinder pressure sensor
(DI−349) S Master cylinder pressure sensor circuit
C1249 / 49*1
Open circuit in stop light switch circuit Stop light switch circuit
( L )
C1251 / 51*2 Pump motor is locked
Hydraulic brake booster pump motor
( L ) Open circuit in pump motor ground
S Hydraulic brake booster pump motor

C1252 / 52*2
Hydraulic brake booster pump motor malfunction S Hydraulic brake booster pump motor circuit
( L )
S Pressure switch (PH or PL)
S ABS or TRC motor relay
C1253 / 53*2
Hydraulic brake booster pump motor relay malfunction S ABS or TRC motor relay circuit
( L )
S Hydraulic brake booster pump motor circuit
C1254 / 54*2 S Pressure switch (PH or PL)
Pressure switch malfunction
( L ) S Pressure switch circuit
S Accumulator
C1256 / 56*2
Accumulator low pressure malfunction S Pressure switch (PH or PL)
( L )
S Hydraulic brake booster pump motor
S Battery
C1257 / 57*2
Power supply drive circuit malfunction S Power Source circuit
( L )
S ABS & TRC & VSC ECU
S Battery
Always ON S IC regulator
Malfunction in ABS & TRC & VSC ECU
( L ) S Power source circuit
S ABS & TRC & VSC ECU

*1: As the DTC cannot be erased by replacing parts alone, clear DTC (See Pub. No. RM588E on page
DI−210).
*2: Using the following table, troubled parts can be specified. When replacing parts, clear DTCs.
DTC C1242/42 C1251/51 C1252/52 C1253/53 C1254/54 C1256/56 C1257/57
BRAKE warning light and buzzer Light Buzzer Light Buzzer Light Buzzer Light Buzzer Light Buzzer Light Buzzer Light Buzzer
PH f f f f f
Pressure switch
PL f f f f f
Pump motor f f f f f f
MTT wire harness f f f
Pump motor circuit
MT+ wire harness f
MT− wire harness f
Accumulator malfanction f f
MR1 open circuit f
MR2 open circuit f

Motor relay circuit f f f
MR1 welded contact
f f f
MR2 welded contact
Hydraulic brake booster Pressure leaks f f f f
Power souce* IG2 open circuit f
ECU Power supply circuit f
*: When IG1 circuit is open, ABS warning light and BRAKE warning light come on.
SUPPLY SYSTEM
DI296−07
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC C1246 / 46 Master Cylinder Pressure Sensor

Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Either of the following 1., 2., 3., 4. or 5. is detected:
23.At the vehicle speed of 7 km/h (4 mph) or more, ECU
terminal PMC voltage becomes more than 0.86 V and
the condition that 0.01 V or less does not change con-
tinues for 30 secs.
24.Interference occurs to ECU terminal PMC 7 times or
more for 5 sec.
25.ECU terminal STP is OFF, and the condition that termi- S Master cylinder pressure sensor
C1246 / 46
nal PMC voltage becomes more than 0.86 V or less than S Master cylinder pressure sensor circuit
0.3 V continues for 5 secs. or more.
26.The condition that ECU terminal IG1 voltage is 9.5 V to
17.0 V, and terminal VCM voltage other than the range
from 4.4 V to 5.6 V continues for 1.2 secs. or more.
27.The condition that ECU terminal VCM voltage is 4.4 V to
5.6 V, and terminal PMC voltage other than the range
from 0.14 V to 4.85 V continues for 1.2 secs. or more.
Fail safe function:

If trouble occurs in the master cylinder pressure sensor circuit, the ECU cuts off current to the ABS solenoid
relay and prohibits ABS & TRC & VSC controls and the brake system becomes normal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
M1
Master Cylinder ABS & TRC &
Pressure Sensor (Shielded) VSC ECU
10
B A22 VCM
VCM
1
22
R
PMC A22 PMC
2
23
W
E2 A22 E2
3
24
A22 FSS
F02870

SUPPLY SYSTEM
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 in case of using the hand−held tester and start from step 2 in case of not
using the hand−held tester.
1 Check output value of the master cylinder pressure sensor.
PREPARATION:
(c) Select the DATALIST mode on the hand−held tester.
CHECK:
Check that the brake fluid pressure value of the master cylinder pressure sensor displayed on the hand−held
tester is changing when depressing the brake pedal.
OK:
Brake fluid pressure value must be changing.
OK Go to step 4.
NG
2 Check master cylinder pressure sensor.
PREPARATION:
(a) Install LSPV gauge to the front caliper bleeder plug por-
tion, and bleed LSPV gauge.
PMC
SST 09709−29018
(b) Remove air cleaner inlet and battery clamp cover.
CHECK:
Start the engine and depress the brake pedal, then check the
E2
relation between the fluid pressure and voltage of PMC and E2
F12700 terminals of the master cylinder pressure sensor with connector
still connected.
OK:
Front brake caliper fluid pressure Voltage
0 kPa (0 Kgf/cm2, 0 psi) 0.37 − 0.63 V
5,883 kPa (60 kgf/cm2, 853 psi) 1.57 − 1.83 V
11,768 kPa (120 kgf/cm2, 1,706 psi) 2.77 − 3.03 V
HINT:
Voltage of between terminals VCM and E2: 4.7 − 5.3 V.
NG Replace master cylinder pressure sensor.
OK

SUPPLY SYSTEM
3 Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between master cyl-
inder pressure sensor and ABS & TRC & VSC ECU (See page IN−30).
OK
4 Check whether or not the ECU terminal STP input voltage is changed when the
stop light switch is turned on and off.
NO Check the stop light switch circuit (See Pub. No.

RM588E on page BE−3).
YES
Check and replace ABS & TRC & VSC ECU.

SUPPLY SYSTEM
DI29I−15
Tc Terminal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Connecting terminals Tc and E1 of the check connector or (Tc and CG of DLC3) causes the ECU to display
the DTC by flashing the ABS warning light.
WIRING DIAGRAM
ABS & TRC &
LHD: Passenger Side J/B VSC ECU
J10 J9
J/C DLC3 J/C
6 13 3
W−B W−B W−B P−B P−B
2G 2F CG Tc A23 Tc
A A 4 13 (*2) D D
J8 A W−B D
A
(*2) Check Connector
12
J/C P P−B
II IF Tc EA1
*1: 3UZ−FE (*2) (*2)
*2: 2JZ−GE 11 P−B (*1)
ABS & TRC &
J9 VSC ECU
DLC3 J/C 3
RHD:
W−B P−B P−B
CG Tc A23 Tc
A 4 13 C C
J42 C
P−B (*1)
J/C J31 P−B
Check Connector J/C
12
II P P−B
Tc EA1
*1: 3UZ−FE 11 (*2) (*2) D D
*2: 2JZ−GE
J4 (*1) J9 (*1)
J49 J28 (*2) J36 (*2) Check Connector
3UZ−FE: 3
BR BR BR BR BR
EA3 E1
B B D D E (*1) E (*1) 3
W−B J/C J/C C (*2) J/C C (*2)
ED EC *1: LHD J2 (*1)

*2: RHD J26 (*2) Check Connector
BR BR
E1
2JZ−GE: BR A A 3
(*2)(*3) J/C
BR
ED EC *1: LHD
*2: RHD
*3: Except G.C.C.
F13738

SUPPLY SYSTEM
1 Check voltage between terminals Tc and E1 of check connector (or Tc and CG of

DLC3).
PREPARATION:
ON
Check Connector Turn ignition switch ON.
(−) (+) CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal Tc and E1 of check connec-
E1
tor (or Tc and CG of DLC3).
OK:
Voltage: 10 − 14 V
Tc
DLC3
(+) (−)
Tc
CG
F05490
OK If ABS warning light does not blink even after Tc

and E1 (or Tc and CG) are connected, the ECU
may be defective.
NG
2 Turn the IG switch OFF, and check for open and short circuit in harness and con-
nector between ABS & TRC & VSC ECU and check connector (or DLC3), check
connector (or DLC3) and body ground (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace ABS & TRC & VSC ECU.

DI−354
DIAGNOSTICS − VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL (VSC) SYSTEM
VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL (VSC) SYSTEM

DI285−05

Troubleshooot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages.

L

P. DI−355
Symptom
does not occur
P. IN−20
Symptom
occurs

P. DI−355
Malfunction code

P. DI−362 L
9
8 Circuit Inspection Sensor Check Check for Fluid Leakage
P. DI−363, DI−365 and L L
10
Repair
11
Confirmation Test
Step 2, 5, 8, 9, 11: Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the hand−held

tester or break−out−box.
End

DI−355
DI87N−01
LHD:
PRE−CHECK
1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
(a) Check the indicator.
When the ignition switch is turned ON, check that the VSC
warning light, VSC OFF indicator light and SLIP indicator
light goes ON for 3 seconds.
HINT:
S If the ECU stores DTC, VSC warning light and VSC OFF
indicator light is ON.
RHD: S If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to trou-
bleshooting for the VSC warning light circuit, VSC OFF in-
dicator light circuit, and SLIP indicator light circuit (See
Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−342, DI−344 and DI−347).
F02853
F04710 F04717
(b) In case of not using hand−held tester:

Check Connector
E1 Check the DTC.
(1) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and E1 of check
connector.
SST 09843−18020
(3) Read the DTC from the VSC warning light on the
combination meter.
Tc
F02201 HINT:
S If no code appears, inspect the diagnostic circuit or VSC
warning light circuit (See page DI−352 or See Pub. No.

DI−356
S As an example, the blinking patterns for normal code and

code 31 and 32 are shown on the left.
Normal Code (4) Codes are explained in the code table on page
2 sec. 0.25 sec. DI−362.
0.25 sec. (5) After completing the check, disconnect terminals Tc
and E1 of check connector, and turn OFF the dis-
ON play.
If 2 or more malfunctions are indicated at the same time, the
OFF lowest numbered DTC will be displayed 1st.
Code 31 and 32
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
1.5 sec.
4 sec. 2.5 sec.
ON
OFF
Code 31 Code 32
F04712
(c) In case of using hand−held tester :

Check the DTC.
(1) Hook up the hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tes-
ter screen.
Hand−held HINT:
Tester Please refer to the hand−held tester operator ’s manual for fur-
DLC3 D10066 ther details.
(d) In case of not using hand−held tester:

Clear the DTC.
connector.
SST 09843−18020
(3) Clear the DTC stored in ECU by depressing the
brake pedal 8 or more times within 5 seconds.
BR3890 (4) Check that the warning light shows the normal
code.
(5) Remove the SST from the terminals of check con-
nector.
SST 09843−18020

DI−357
(e) In case of using hand−held tester:

Clear the DTC.
(3) Operate the hand−held tester to erase the codes
(See hand−held tester operator’s manual.).
Hand−held
Tester
DLC3 D10066
(f) Reference:
Hand−held Tester Using break−out−box and hand−held tester, measure the
ECU terminal values.
ECU
to the vehicle.
(4) Read the ECU input/output values by following the
Break−out−box prompts on the tester screen.
N09348
HINT:
S Hand−held tester has a ”Snapshot” function. This records
the measured values and is effective in the diagnosis of
intermittent problems.
2. VSC SENSOR CHECK (TEST MODE)
NOTICE:
When having replaced the yaw rate sensor, deceleration
sensor and/or ECU, perform zero point calibration of the
yaw rate and deceleration sensors (See step 3.).
HINT:
If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during
test mode, DTC will be erased.
(a) In case of not using hand−held tester:
Check the VSC sensor signal.
(2) Check that the shift lever position is at P range, turn
the steering wheel to the neutral position.
(3) Using SST, connect terminals Ts and E1 of check

Check Connector
E1 connector.
SST 09843−18020
Ts Tc
F02201

DI−358
(5) Check that the VSC warning light blinks.

HINT:
0.13 sec. 0.13 sec. If the VSC warning light does not blink, inspect the VSC warning
light circuit and Ts terminal circuit (See Pub. No. RM588E on
ON
page DI−303 and DI−342).
(6) Check the steering angle sensor.
Turn the steering wheel either to left or right for 450˚
OFF or more from the vehicle stationary condition, and
BR3904 turn back the steering wheel to the straight ahead
position.
Start Position (7) Check the yaw rate sensor.
Shift the shift lever to the D range and drive the ve-
hicle at the vehicle speed of approx. 5 km/h (3 mph),
turn the steering wheel either to left or right for 90˚
or more, and maintain 180˚ circular drive for the ve-
Within ± 5˚ hicle.
Stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the P
range, check that the VSC buzzer sounds for 3 sec.
End Position F02135 If the VSC buzzer sounded, the sensor check is in normal
completion.
If the VSC buzzer does not sound, do the sensor check again.
If the VSC buzzer still won’t sound, there is malfunction in the
VSC sensor, so check the DTC.
HINT:
S Drive the vehicle circularly by 180˚. At the end of the turn,
the direction of the vehicle should be within 180˚± 5˚ of
its start position.
S Do not spin the rear wheels.
connector.
SST 09843−18020
(9) Read the number of blinks of the VSC warning light.
HINT:
S See the list of DTC shown on step the next page.
S If every sensor is normal, a normal code is output. (A cycle
of 0.25 sec. ON and 0.25 sec. OFF is repeated.)
S If 2 or more malfunctions are indicated at the same time,
the lowest numbered code will be displayed 1st.
Malfunction Code (Example Code 71, 72)
71 72
0.5 sec. 2.5 sec.
ON
OFF
4 sec.
Repeat
0.5 sec. 1.5 sec.

DI−359
(10) After doing the check, disconnect the SST from ter-
minals of check connector, and turn ignition switch
OFF.
SST 09843−18020
(b) In case of using hand−held tester:

Check the VSC sensor signal.
(2) Do steps (a)−(2) and (4) − (7) (See 2 pages before).
(3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tes-
ter screen.
Hand−held HINT:
Tester Please refer to the hand−held tester operator’s manual for fur-
DLC3 D10066 ther details.
DTC of the VSC sensor check function:

Code No. Diagnosis Trouble Area
S Yaw rate sensor
C0371 / 71 Yaw rate sensor output signal malfunction
S Yaw rate sensor circuit
S Steering position sensor
C1208 / 72 Steering position sensor output signal malfunction
S Steering position sensor circuit
3. IF NECESSARY, PERFORM ZERO POINT CALIBRA-

TION OF YAW RATE AND DECELERATION SENSORS
HINT:
S When having replaced the yaw rate sensor, deceleration
sensor or the ECU, make sure to perform yaw rate and de-
celeration sensors’ zero point calibration. Be sure to com-
plete this step 3. once it is started.
S During step 3., a not−replaced sensor also requires zero
point calibration.
NOTICE:
S While obtaining the zero point, do not give any vibra-
tion to the vehicle by tilting, moving or shaking it and
keep it in a stationary condition. (Do not start the en-
gine.)
S Be sure to do this on a level surface (within an inclina-
tion of 1 %).
(a) Clear the zero points of the yaw rate and deceleration
sensors.
(1) Shift the shift lever to P range.
(2) Turn the ignition switch ON in a stationary condition.

DI−360
(3) With the lit switch ON, using SST, repeat a cycle of
Check Connector
E1 short and open between terminals Ts and E1 of
check connector 4 times or more within 8 sec.
Check that the VSC warning light is lit indicating the
recorded zero point is erased.
SST 09843−18020
(b) Obtain zero point of the yaw rate sensor.
Ts
F02201 (1) Make the terminals Ts and E1 of check connector
disconnected.
HINT:
The vehicle should be in a stationary condition with the shift le-
ver in P range.
(3) Check that the lit VSC warning light goes off about
15 sec. after the ignition switch is turned ON.
HINT:
Even if the ignition is not turned OFF in step (a)−(4) and remains
ON, the yaw rate sensor zero point calibration can be com-
pleted. In this case, the VSC warning light is lit for about 15 sec.
and then starts blinking. (Normal code)
(4) After ensuring that the VSC warning light remains
OFF for 2 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF.
HINT:
If the ignition switch is not turned OFF in step (a)−(4), make sure
that the VSC warning light blinks for 2 sec. Then turn the ignition
switch OFF.
(c) Perform deceleration sensor zero point calibration.
NOTICE:
After step (b) (the yaw rate sensor zero point calibration),
the VSC warning light goes off. At this time, if the vehicle
is driven without performing step (c) (deceleration sensor
zero point calibration), deceleration sensor zero point cal-
ibration malfunction will be detected and the VSC warning
light will light up. Therefore, perform step (c) right after step
(b).
(1) Using SST, connect the terminals Ts and E1 of

Check Connector
E1 check connector.
SST 09843−18020
HINT:
Place the vehicle in a stationary condition with the shift lever in
P range.
Ts
F02201

DI−361
(3) After turning the ignition switch ON, check that the
VSC warning light is lit for about 4 sec. and then
0.13 sec. 0.13 sec. starts quick blinking at 0.13 sec. intervals.
(4) After ensuring the blinking of the VSC warning light
ON
for 2 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF.
(5) Remove the SST and make the terminals Ts and E1
of check connector disconnected.
OFF SST 09843−18020
BR3904

DI−362
DI288−05

NOTICE:
When removing the part, turn the ignition switch OFF.
HINT:
S Using SST 09843−18020, connect the terminals Tc and E1 of check connector.
S If any abnormality is not found when inspecting parts, inspect the ECU.
S If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code. For de-
tails of each code, turn to the page referred to under the ”See page” for the respective ”DTC No.” in
the DTC chart.
DTC No.
(See Page)
C1201 / 51
ECM system malfunction Engine control system
( L )
S TRC+ or TRC− circuit
C1203 / 53
ECM communication circuit malfunction S ENG+ or ENG− circuit
( L )
S Engine and ECT ECU
C1207 / 37 S P/R range switch
Malfunction in P/R range switch
(DI−363) S P/R range switch circuit
S Yaw rate sensor
C1210 / 36
Zero point calibration of yaw rate sensor undone S Yaw rate sensor circuit
( L )
S P range switch circuit
C1223 / 43
Malfunction in ABS control system ABS control system
( L )
S NEO circuit
C1224 / 44
Open or short circuit in NE signal circuit S Engine and ECT ECU
( L )
S ABS & BA & TRC & VSC ECU
C1231 / 31 S Steering angle sensor
Malfunction in steering angle sensor
( L ) S Steering angle sensor circuit
C1232 / 32 S Deceleration sensor
Malfunction in deceleration sensor
( L ) S Deceleration sensor circuit
C1233 / 33 S Yaw rate sensor

Open or short circuit in yaw rate sensor circuit
( L ) S Yaw rate sensor circuit
C1234 / 34 S Yaw rate sensor
Malfunction in yaw rate sensor
( L ) S Yaw rate sensor circuit
S Deceleration sensor
C1336 / 39
Zero point calibration of deceleration sensor S Deceleration sensor circuit
(DI−365)
S Zero point calibration not done
Always ON Malfunction in ABS & BA & TRC & VSC ECU S Power source circuit
( L ) Open circuit in VSC warning indicator circuit S VSC warning light circuit

HINT:
There is a case that hand−held tester cannot be used when VSC warning light is always on.

DI−363
DI28E−06
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC C1207 / 37 P/R Range Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When any of the following 1. through 3. is detected:
1. At vehicle speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) or less and the
conditions that open circuit signal of P signal circuit of
park/neutral position switch is ON and the voltage of IG1
terminal is 9.5 to17 V continue for 5 sec. or more.
2. At vehicle speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) or more, and when
the condition that P signal from park/neutral position S P/R range switch
C1207 / 37
switch is ON, and the the shift lever position information S P/R range switch circuit
from the ECM is other than in P or N range continues for
60 sec. or more.
3. At vehicle speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) or less and the
conditions that open circuit signal of R signal circuit of
park/neutral position switch is ON and the voltage of IG1
terminal is 9.5 to 17 V continue for 2 sec. or more.
WIRING DIAGRAM
ABS & TRC
& VSC ECU
PNP Junction Connector
J1 (*1) Switch R (*3)
J25 (*2) 6 3 D D F F 15
G (*4) R−B R−B
J/C R−L (*3) RL EA1 EA2 J3 J27 J4 J28 A24 R
2
B R (*4) (*3) (*4) (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)
C
R−L 3 R−W (*3) 2 A A C C 24
B W (*4) R−W R−W
EA2 J3 J27 J4 J28 A24 P
(*3) R−L PL 1
(*1) (*2) (*1) (*2)
R (*4) D J3 J3 (*1)
9 EA3 A
D J27 J27 (*2)
A
6 EA3
R−B
(*3) R−L R−B
R−L (*4) Driver Side J/B Ignition (*4)
B 4 GAUGE 1 Switch
R−L B−Y W−L
1H 1J Engine and
B B 4 2 9 EA2
J18 (*1) ECT ECU
(*3) R−B
J35 (*2)
J/C (*4) G 16 5
E5 E3 R
Engine Room No.1 R/B Driver Side J/B
R−W (*3) (*4)
ALT 1 1 AM1 3
W
1 1 1K 1A 1J
26 6
1 2 (*1) (*2) 1 2 R−W (*3)
E5 E3 P
B−L (*4) R−W (*3) (*4)
6 W
(*4)
*1: LHD EA2
Battery *2: RHD
*3: 2JZ−GE
LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP *4: 3UZ−FE
(RM786E)
F13737
DI−364
1 Check park/neutral position switch (P/R range switch).
PREPARATION:
3 1 (b) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector.
CHECK:
shift lever is moved to each position.
2 OK:
P range switch Terminals 3 − 1 Continuity
F13411
R range switch Terminals 3 − 2 Continuity
NG Replace park/neutral position switch (P/R range

switch).
OK
2 Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between terminals P
and R of ABS & TRC & VSC ECU and battery (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace ABS & TRC & VSC ECU or

engine and ECT ECU.

DI−365
DI87O−01
DTC C1336 / 39 Zero Point Calibration of Deceleration

Sensor Undone
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
At the initial time after replacing the computer, or after eras-
ing the deceleration sensor memory by operating the termi- S Deceleration sensor
C1336 / 39 nals Ts and E1 of check connector, the ignition is turned ON S Deceleration sensor circuit
and the vehicle is driven in any mode except for the test S Zero point calibration not done
mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM
ABS & BA & TRAC &

A26 (Shielded) VSC ECU
Deceleration Sensor
1
B
VGS A23 VGS
3
2
W
GL1 1 A23 GL1
9
R
GL2 A23 GL2
5
10
G
GGND A23 GGND
2
18
A23 GSS
F09628

DI−366
1 Carry out deceleration sensor zero point calibration and confirm it by VSC warn-
ing light (See page DI−355).
OK:
VSC warning light blinks
OK No problem.
NG
2 Check DTC for the VSC (See page DI−355).
*1: Other than DTC C1336 / 39 is output.

*2: DTC C1336 / 39 only is output.
*1 Repair ABS control system according to the

code output.
*2
3 Check for open and short circuit in harness and connector between deceleration
sensor and ABS & BA & TRC & VSC ECU (See page IN−30).
OK
4 Check deceleration sensor (See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−215).
NG Replace deceleration sensor.
OK
Check and replace ABS & BA & TRC & VSC

ECU.

DI−367
DIAGNOSTICS − SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

DI6OW−09
Vehicle Brought to Workshop Items inside are titles of pages in this manual,
with the page number in the bottom portion. See the
P. DI−368
2 Warning Light Check NG 3 Problem Symptoms Table

P. DI−369 P. DI−381
OK
Past Code
4 DTC Check (Read Present DTC) Memorized 5 DTC Check (Read Past DTC)
P. DI−369 P. DI−369
Normal & Malfunction Code
6 DTC Chart
P. DI−375
7 Circuit Inspection
P. DI−382 to DI−547
Repair
8 Clear DTC
P. DI−369
9 Warning Light Check

P. DI−369
10 DTC Check Malfunction Code

P. DI−369
Normal Code
Confirmation Test Step 4, 5, 7, 8, 10 : Diagnostic steps permitting the use
of the hand−held tester.
END

DI−368
DI6OX−01

Supplemental Restraint System Check Sheet Inspector’s
Name
Registration No.
Frame No.
km
Date Vehicle Brought In / / Odometer Reading
Miles
Date Problem Occurred / /
Weather Fine Cloudy Rainy Snowy Other
Temperature Approx.
Starting Idling
Vehicle Operation Driving [ Constant speed Acceleration Deceleration
Other ]
Road Conditions
Details Of Problem
Vehicle Inspection, Repair Histo-

ry Prior to Occurrence of Mal-
function (Including Supplemen-
tal Restraint System)
Diagnosis System Inspection
1st Time Remains ON Sometimes Lights Up Does Not Light Up

SRS Warning Light
Inspection
2nd Time Remains ON Sometimes Lights Up Does Not Light Up
1st Time Normal Code Malfunction Code [ Code. ]

DTC Inspection
2nd Time Normal Code Malfunction Code [ Code. ]

DI−369
DI6OY−09
PRE−CHECK
1. SRS WARNING LIGHT CHECK
(a) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check that
the SRS warning light lights up.
(b) Check that the SRS warning light goes out after approx.
6 seconds.
HINT:
S When the ignition switch is at ON and the SRS warning
H02575
light remains on or flashes, the airbag sensor assembly
has detected a malfunction code.
S If, after approx. 6 seconds have elapsed, the SRS warn-
ing light sometimes lights up or the SRS warning light
lights up even when the ignition switch is OFF, a short in
the SRS warning light circuit can be considered likely.
Proceed to ”SRS warning light circuit malfunction” on
page DI−543.
2. DTC CHECK (Using diagnosis check wire)

DLC3
(a) Present troubles codes:
Output the DTC.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for approx. 20 seconds.
(2) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and CG of the
DLC3.
CG Tc SST 09843−18040
H10658 NOTICE:
Pay due attention to the terminal connecting position to
avoid a malfunction.
(b) Past troubles codes:
Output the DTC.
(1) Using service wire, connect terminals Tc and CG of
the DLC3.
SST 09843−18040
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for approx. 20 seconds.
NOTICE:
Pay due attention to the terminal connecting position to
avoid a malfunction.

DI−370
(c) Read the DTC.

Normal Code (w/o Past Trouble Code)
Read the 2−digit DTC as indicated by the number of times
0.25 the SRS warning light blinks. As an example, the blinking
ON patterns, normal, 11 and 31 are shown in the illustration.
S Nor m al c ode indicat ion ( w/ o past t r ouble
OFF code)
The light will blink 2 times per second.
0.25
S Normal code indication (w/ past trouble code)
Normal Code (w/ Past Trouble Code)
When the past troubles code is stored in the
0.75
airbag sensor assembly, the light blinks only
ON ones a second.
S Malfunction code indication
OFF The first blinking output indicates the first digit
0.25 of a 2−digit DTC. After a 1.5−second pause,
Malfunction Code the second blinking output will indicate the
(Example Code 11 and 13) second digit.
0.5 2.5 4.0
If there are 2 or more codes, there will be a 2.5−second pause
between each code. After all the codes have been output, there
will be a 4.0−second pause and they will all be repeated.
HINT:
1.5 0.5 Repeat
S In the event of a number of trouble codes, indication will
DTC 11 DTC 31 start from the smallest numbered code.
S If a DTC is not output or a DTC is output without terminal
H13050 connection, proceed to the Tc terminal circuit inspection
on page DI−547.
Hand−held Tester 3. DTC CHECK (Using hand−held tester)

(a) Hook up the hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(b) Read the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester
screen.
HINT:
Please refer to the hand−held tester operator ’s manual for fur-
ther details.
4. DTC CLEARANCE (Not using service wire)
DLC3 F13542 When the ignition switch is turned off, the diagnostic trouble
code is cleared.
HINT:
DTC might not be cleared by turning the ignition switch OFF.
In this case, proceed to the next step.
5. DTC CLEARANCE (Using service wire)
(a) Connect the service wire to terminals Tc of the DLC3.
(b) Ground terminal Tc of the DLC3.
(c) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
(d) Within 3 to 10 sec. after DTC is started to be output, re-
lease ground from terminal Tc of the DLC3.

DI−371
(e) The SRS warning light lights up 2 to 4 sec. later. Within 1

to 5 sec. after that, ground terminal Tc of the DLC3.
(f) The SRS warning light goes off 2 to 4 sec. after grounding
terminal Tc. Within 1 to 5 sec. after that, release ground
from terminal Tc again.
(g) The SRS warning light lights up again 2 to 4 sec. later.
Within 1 to 5 sec. after that, ground terminal Tc of the
DLC3 again.
(h) The SRS warning light goes off 2 to 4 sec. later. Within 1
sec. after that, normal code is output indicating that DTC
deletion is completed.
If DTCs are not cleared, repeat the above procedure until the
codes are cleared.
IG S/W
ON
OFF
DLC3
Open
Short
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.25 sec. 0.25 sec.
SRS Warning
Light (*)
ON
OFF
1.5 sec.
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T7
T1: 0 − ¥ second
T2: approx. 6 second
T3: 3 − 5 second
T4: within 10 second
T5: 2 − 4 second
T6: 2 − 4 second
T7: within 1 second
*: The past trouble code in the illustration shows DTC 21 as an example.
H13049

DI−372
Hand−held Tester
6. DTC CLEARANCE (Using hand−held tester)
(a) Hook up the hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(b) Clear the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester
screen.
HINT:
Please refer to the hand−held tester operation’s manual for fur-
ther details.
7. RELEASE METHOD OF AIRBAG ACTIVATION PRE-
DLC3 F13542 VENTION MECHANISM
An airbag activation prevention mechanism is built into the con-
nector for the squib circuit of the SRS.
When release of the airbag activation prevention mechanism is
directed in the troubleshooting procedure, as shown in the il-
lustration of the connectors on the next pages, insert paper
which has the same thickness as the male terminal between the
terminal and the short spring.
CAUTION:
Never release the airbag activation prevention mechanism
on the squib connector.
NOTICE:
S Do not release the airbag activation prevention mech-
anism unless specifically directed by the trouble-
shooting procedure.
S If the inserted paper is too thick the terminal and short
spring may be damaged, so always use paper with
the same thickness as the male terminal.

DI−373
7 Side and Curtain Shield

Airbag Sensor Assembly
(RH)
8 Side Airbag Assembly
(RH) (Squib)
9 Seat Belt Pretensioner

(RH)
10
Curtain Shield Airbag
Assembly (RH) (Squib)
11 12
Front Airbag Sensor (RH)
2 6 Front Passenger Airbag

1 Assembly (Squib)
Airbag Sensor Spiral Cable
Assembly 5
3 4 Steering Wheel
Pad (Squib)
13 14
Front Airbag Sensor (LH)
15 Curtain Shield Airbag

Assembly (LH) (Squib)
16 Seat Belt Pretensioner

(LH)
17
Side Airbag Assembly (LH)
(Squib)
18 Side and Curtain Shield

(LH)
H13015

DI−374
Airbag Sensor Assembly Connector

2 1 3
Short Spring Short Spring Short Spring
Before Release After Release
Paper
Connector 4 5 6 10 15
Before Release After Release
Paper
Short Spring
Connector 8 17
Paper
Short Spring
H09607
H01233
H02248 H02249
H09672 H09658 H13716

DI−375
DI6OZ−19

If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the table
below (Proceed to the page given for that circuit.).
DTC No. SRS
(See Page) Warning Light
S Short in D squib circuit S Steering wheel pad (squib)

B0100/13 S Spiral cable
ON
(DI−382) S Airbag sensor assembly
S Wire harness
S Open in D squib circuit S Steering wheel pad (squib)

ON
S Wire harness
S Short in D squib circuit (to ground) S Steering wheel pad (squib)

ON
S Wire harness
S Short in D squib circuit (to B+) S Steering wheel pad (squib)

ON
S Wire harness
S Short in P squib circuit S Front passenger airbag assembly (squib)

B0105/53
S Airbag sensor assembly ON
(DI−399)
S Wire harness
S Open in P squib circuit S Front passenger airbag assembly (squib)
B0106/54
(DI−403)
S Wire harness
S Short in P squib circuit (to ground) S Front passenger airbag assembly (squib)
B0107/51
(DI−406)
S Wire harness
S Short in P squib circuit (to B+) S Front passenger airbag assembly (squib)
B0108/52
(DI−409)
S Wire harness
S Short in side squib (RH) circuit S Side airbag assembly RH (squib)
B0110/43
S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−412)
S Wire harness
S Open in side squib (RH) circuit S Side airbag assembly RH (squib)
B0111/44
(DI−416)
S Wire harness
B0112/41
(to ground) S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−419)
S Wire harness
B0113/42
(to B+) S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−422)
S Wire harness
S Short in side squib (LH) circuit S Side airbag assembly LH (squib)
B0115/47
(DI−425)
S Wire harness
S Open in side squib (LH) circuit S Side airbag assembly LH (squib)
B0116/48
(DI−429)
S Wire harness

DI−376
DTC No. SRS

B0117/45
(DI−432)
S Wire harness
B0118/46
(DI−435)
S Wire harness
B0121/B0122/ S Seat belt buckle switch (RH) S Seat belt buckle switch (RH)
26 malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly ON
(DI−438) S Wire harness
B0126/B0127/ S Seat belt buckle switch (LH) S Seat belt buckle switch (LH)
27 malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly ON
(DI−442) S Wire harness
S Short in P/T squib (RH) circuit S Seat belt pretensioner RH (squib)
B0130/63
(DI−446)
S Wire harness
S Open in P/T squib (RH) circuit S Seat belt pretensioner RH (squib)
B0131/64
(DI−450)
S Wire harness
B0132/61
(DI−453)
S Wire harness
B0133/62
(DI−456)
S Wire harness
S Short in P/T squib (LH) circuit S Seat belt pretensioner LH (squib)
B0135/73
(DI−459)
S Wire harness
S Open in P/T squib (LH) circuit S Seat belt pretensioner LH (squib)
B0136/74
(DI−463)
S Wire harness
B0137/71
(DI−466)
S Wire harness
B0138/72
(DI−469)
S Wire harness
B1100/31 S Airbag sensor assembly malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
ON
(DI−472)
B1135/24 S Half connection in airbag sensor S Airbag sensor assembly

Blink
(DI−474) assembly malfunction S Wire harness
S Side airbag sensor assembly (RH) S Side airbag sensor assembly (RH)
B1140/32
malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−478)
S Wire harness
S Side airbag sensor assembly (LH) S Side airbag sensor assembly (LH)
B1141/33
malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−486)
S Wire harness
S Occupant detection malfunction S Occupant detection sensor
B1150/23
(DI−494)
S Wire harness

DI−377
DTC No. SRS

S Front airbag sensor (RH) malfunction S Front airbag sensor (RH)
B1156/B1157/
S Airbag sensor assembly
15 ON
S Instrument panel wire harness
(DI−498)
S Engine room main wire harness
S Front airbag sensor (LH) malfunction S Front airbag sensor (LH)

B1158/B1159/
16 ON
S Instrument panel wire harness
(DI−506)
S Short in curtain shield airbag (RH) S Curtain shield airbag (RH) (squib)
B1160/83
squib circuit S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−514)
S Wire harness
S Open in curtain shield airbag (RH) S Curtain shield airbag (RH) (squib)
B1161/84
(DI−518)
S Wire harness
B1162/81
circuit (to ground) S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−521)
S Wire harness
B1163/82
circuit circuit (to B+) S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−524)
S Wire harness
S Short in curtain shield airbag (LH) S Curtain shield airbag (LH) (squib)
B1165/87
(DI−527)
S Wire harness
S Open in curtain shield airbag (LH) S Curtain shield airbag (LH) (squib)
B1166/88
(DI−531)
S Wire harness
B1167/85
circuit (to ground) S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−534)
S Wire harness
B1168/86
circuit circuit (to B+) S Airbag sensor assembly Blink
(DI−537)
S Wire harness
S System normal − OFF
Normall
N
S Voltage source drop S Battery
(DI−540) ON
HINT:
S When the SRS warning light remains lit up and the DTC is the normal code, this means a voltage source
drops.
This malfunction is not stored in memory by the airbag sensor assembly and if the power source volt-
age returns to normal, the SRS warning light will automatically go out.
S When 2 or more codes are indicated, the codes will be displayed in numeral order starting from the
lowest numbered code.
S If a code not listed on the chart is displayed, the airbag sensor assembly is faulty.

DI−378
DI6P0−08
PARTS LOCATION
Steering Wheel Pad

(with Airbag)
Curtain Shield Airbag
Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly (RH)
Assembly (LH) Front Passenger
Airbag Assembly
Front Airbag
Combination Meter
Assemly (RH)
(Warning Light)
Side Airbag Assembly (RH)
Front Airbag
Sensor (LH) Seat Belt Pretensioner (RH)
Spiral Cable
Side Airbag
Assembly (LH)
Seat Belt
Pretensioner (LH)
Side and Curtain
Shield Airbag Sensor
Assembly (LH)
Airbag Sensor Side and Curtain Shield

Assembly Airbag Sensor Assembly (RH)
Occupant Detection Sensor (RH)
Seat Belt Buckle Switch (RH)
*All components for RHD vehicle are minor image of LHD vehicle.
H16449

DI−379
DI6P1−09
TERMINALS OF ECU
C6 C7 C8
B A 6 5 4 B A 3 2 1 B A
6 5 4 3 2 1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 12 11 10 9 8 7
H01357
No. Symbol Terminal Name

A − Electrical Connector Check Mechanism
B − Electrical Connector Check Mechanism
C7 − 5 IG2 Power Source
C7 − 6 IG1 Power Source
C7 − 9 +SR Front Airbag Sensor (RH)
C7 − 10 P+ Squib (Passenger)
C7 − 11 P− Squib (Passenger)
C7 − 12 SIL Diagnosis
C7 − 13 D− Squib (Driver)
C7 − 14 D+ Squib (Driver)
C7 − 15 +SL Front Airbag Sensor (LH)
C7 − 20 −SR Front Airbag Sensor (RH)
C7 − 21 FSR− (LHD), FSL− (RHD) Occupant Detection Sensor
C7 − 22 MPX2 Instrument Panel Integration ECU
C7 − 24 MPX1 Engine ECU
C7 − 25 FSR+ (LHD), FSL+ (RHD) Occupant Detection Sensor
C7 − 26 −SL Front Airbag Sensor (LH)
C7 − 27 E1 Ground
C7 − 28 E2 Ground
C6 − 1 PL− Squib (Seat Belt Pretensioner, LH)
C6 − 2 PL+ Squib (Seat Belt Pretensioner, LH)
C6 − 3 ICL− Squib (Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly (LH))
C6 − 4 ICL+ Squib (Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly (LH))
C6 − 5 SFL− Squib (Side, LH)
C6 − 6 SFL+ Squib (Side, LH)
DI−380
No. Symbol Terminal Name

C6 − 7 VUPL Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
C6 − 9 ESL Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
C6 − 10 SSL+ Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
C6 − 11 LBE+ Seat Belt Buckle Switch (LH)
C6 − 12 SSL− Side Airbag Sensor (LH)
C8 − 1 SFR+ Squib (Side, RH)
C8 − 2 SFR− Squib (Side, RH)
C8 − 3 ICR+ Squib (Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly (RH))
C8 − 4 ICR− Squib (Curtain Shield Airbag Assembly (RH))
C8 − 5 PR+ Squib (Pretensioner, RH)
C8 − 6 PR− Squib (Pretensioner, RH)
C8 − 7 SSR− Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
C8 − 8 RBE+ Seat Belt Buckle Switch (RH)
C8 − 9 SSR+ Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
C8 − 10 ESR Side Airbag Sensor (RH)
C8 − 12 VUPR Side Airbag Sensor (RH)

DI−381
DI6P2−02

Proceed with troubleshooting of each circuit in the table below.
S With the ignition switch in ON position, the SRS warning light
sometimes lights up after approx. 6 seconds have elapsed.
S SRS warning light is always lit up even when ignition switch is in
S SRS warning light circuit DI−543
the LOCK position.
S With the ignition switch in ON position, the SRS warning light
does not light up.
S DTC is not displayed.
S SRS warning light is always lit up at the time of DTC check pro-
S Tc terminal circuit DI−547
cedure.
S DTC is displayed without Tc and CG terminal connection.

DI−382
DI6P3−08
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC B0100/13 Short in D Squib Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The D squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly, spiral cable and steering wheel pad.
It causes the airbag to deploy when the airbag deployment conditions are satisfied.
For details of the function of each component, see OPERATION on page RS−2.
DTC B0100/13 is recorded when a short is detected in the D squib circuit.
S Short circuit between D+ wire harness and D− wire har-
S Steering wheel pad (D squib)
ness of squib
S Spiral cable
B0100/13 S D squib malfunction
S Spiral cable malfunction
S Wire harness
S Airbag sensor assembly malfunction
WIRING DIAGRAM
D Squib
14
1 Y−B
C7 D+
13
2 Y
C7 D−
Spiral
Cable
H01451

DI−383
1 Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on page DI−540).
2 Check D squib circuit.
PREPARATION:
Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of the
Spiral Airbag connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between the
Sensor
Cable airbag sensor assembly and the spiral cable (See page
Assembly
D Squib DI−369).
CHECK:
For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the spiral
cable and the steering wheel pad, measure the resistance be-
D− D+ tween D+ and D−.
OK:
Resistance: 1 MW or Higher
(−) (+)
H01001
H02142 H02193
NG Go to step 5.
OK

DI−384
3 Check airbag sensor assembly.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.
(b) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
Airbag
Spiral wait at least for 2 seconds.
Sensor
Cable
Assembly
CHECK:
D Squib (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
®¬
(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI−369).
ON (c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0100/13 (e) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
OK:
DTC B0100/13 is not output.
HINT:
Codes other than code B0100/13 may be output at this time, but
CG Tc
H01002
they are not relevant to this check.
AB0119
H10600 FI1390 H10598
NG Replace airbag sensor assembly.
OK

DI−385
4 Check D squib.
PREPARATION:
(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
®¬
(b) Disconnect negative (−) terminal cable from the battery,
Spiral Airbag and wait at least for 90 seconds.
Cable Sensor
Assembly (c) Connect the steering wheel pad connector.
D Squib (d) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
wait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:
ON
(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
DTC B0100/13
conds.
DLC3
(c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI−369).
(d) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
CG Tc conds.
H01003
(f) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
AB0119
H10600 FI1390 H10599 OK:
HINT:
NG Replace steering wheel pad.
OK
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.
To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.

DI−386
5 Check spiral cable.
PREPARATION:
(a) Disconnect the connector between the airbag sensor as-
Spiral
Airbag sembly and the spiral cable.
Sensor (b) Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of
Cable
Assembly
D Squib ¬® the spiral cable connector on the airbag sensor assembly
side (See page DI−369).
CHECK:
D− D+
tween D+ and D−.
OK:
(−) (+)
H01000
H02142 H02195
NG Repair or replace spiral cable.
OK
6 Check harness between airbag sensor assembly and spiral cable.
PREPARATION:
connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between the
Airbag airbag sensor assembly and the spiral cable (See page
Spiral Sensor
Cable Assembly
DI−369).
CHECK:
D Squib
For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the airbag
sensor assembly and the spiral cable, measure the resistance
between D+ and D−.
D+ OK:
D−
(−) (+) NG Repair or replace harness or connector be-

H01004 tween airbag sensor assembly and spiral cable.
H02142 H10601
OK

DI−387
DI6P4−01
DTC B0101/14 Open in D Squib Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
It causes the airbag to deploy when the airbag deployment conditions are satisfied.
DTC B0101/14 is recorded when an open is detected in the D squib circuit.
S Open circuit in D+ wire harness or D− wire harness of
S Steering wheel pad (D squib)
squib
S Spiral cable
B0101/14 S D squib malfunction
S Spiral cable malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−382.
CHECK:
Airbag
Spiral
Sensor tween D+ and D−.
Cable
D Squib
Assembly OK:
¬® Resistance: Below 1 W
D− D+
(−) (+)
H01001
H02196
NG Go to step 5.
H02142
OK

DI−388
PREPARATION:
Spiral
Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect D+ and D− of the connector
Sensor (on the spiral cable side) between the spiral cable and the
Cable
Assembly
D Squib steering wheel pad.
®¬ (c) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
CHECK:
ON
(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
D− D+
conds.
(c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
DLC3 DTC B0101/14
conds.
(e) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
OK:
CG Tc
H01002
H02144 AB0119
H10600 W02044 H10602 HINT:
OK

DI−389
4 Check D squib.
PREPARATION:
D Squib Airbag
Spiral Sensor
and wait at least for 90 seconds.
Cable Assembly (c) Connect the steering wheel pad connector.
®¬ (d) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
CHECK:
ON (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0101/14 seconds.
conds.
OK:
CG Tc
H01003 DTC B0101/14 is not output.
AB0119
H10600 W02044 H10603 HINT:
OK

DI−390
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the connector between the airbag sensor assembly
Spiral Airbag and the spiral cable.
Cable Sensor CHECK:
¬® Assembly
D Squib For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the spiral
tween D+ and D−.
OK:
D− D+
Resistance: Below 1 W
(−) (+)
H01000
H02195
H02142
OK
CHECK:
Airbag For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the airbag
Spiral Sensor sensor assembly and the spiral cable, measure the resistance
Cable Assembly
between D+ and D−.
D Squib
OK:
D− D+

tween airbag sensor assembly and spiral cable.
H01004
H02142 H10604
OK

DI−391
DI6P5−01
DTC B0102/11 Short in D Squib Circuit (to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
It causes the SRS to deploy when the SRS deployment conditions are satisfied.
DTC B0102/11 is recorded when a ground short is detected in the D squib circuit.
S Short circuit in D squib wire harness (to ground) S Steering wheel pad (D squib)
S D squib malfunction S Spiral cable
B0102/11
S Spiral cable malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
S Airbag sensor assembly malfunction S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−382.
CHECK:
Airbag cable and the steering wheel pad, measure the resistance be-
Spiral
Cable Sensor tween D+ and body ground.
Assembly
D Squib OK:
D+
(−) (+)
H01001 H02198
H02145
NG Go to step 5.
OK
DI−392
PREPARATION:
Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect D+ and D− of the connector
Spiral (on the spiral cable side) between the spiral cable and the
Sensor
Cable
D Squib
Assembly steering wheel pad.
(c) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
®¬
CHECK:
D− D+ ON (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
(b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See step 5 on page
DI−369).
DLC3 DTC B0102/11 (c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
H01002 OK:
H02144 AB0118
H10600 W02042 H10605 DTC B0102/11 is not output.
HINT:
OK

DI−393
4 Check D squib.
PREPARATION:
®¬
Airbag
Spiral Sensor and wait at least for 90 seconds.
D Squib
(d) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
ON CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0102/11 DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
H01003 OK:
AB0119
HINT:
OK
To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. If the malfunctioning part can not be
detected by the simulation method, replace all SRS components including the wire harness.

DI−394
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the connector between the airbag sensor assembly
Airbag and the spiral cable.
Spiral Sensor CHECK:
Cable Assembly
D Squib For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the steer-
¬®
ing wheel pad and the spiral cable, measure the resistance be-
tween D+ and body ground.
OK:
D+
(−) (+)
H01000
H02200
H02145
OK
CHECK:
cable and the airbag sensor assembly, measure the resistance
Spiral Airbag between D+ and body ground.
Sensor
Cable Assembly
OK:
D Squib Resistance: 1 MW or Higher
D+
(−) (+)
H01004
H02145 H10607
NG Repair or replace harness between airbag sen-
sor assembly and spiral cable.
OK

DI−395
DI6P6−07
DTC B0103/12 Short in D Squib Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0103/12 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the D squib circuit.
S Short circuit in D squib wire harness (to B+) S Steering wheel pad (D squib)
S D squib malfunction S Spiral cable
B0103/12
S Spiral cable malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−382.
ON CHECK:
(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(b) For the connector (on the spiral cable side) between the
Spiral
Airbag spiral cable and the steering wheel pad, measure the volt-
Sensor
Cable age between D+ and body ground.
Assembly
D Squib OK:
Voltage: 0 V
D+
(−) (+)
AB0119
H01001
NG Go to step 5.
H02146 H11570
OK

DI−396
®¬ PREPARATION:
D Squib (a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.
Airbag
Spiral Sensor
(b) Using a service wire, connect D+ and D− of the connector
Cable Assembly (on the spiral cable side) between the spiral cable and the
steering wheel pad.
CHECK:
D− D+
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc OK:
H01002
H02144 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−397
4 Check D squib.
PREPARATION:
®¬ (b) Disconnect negative (−) terminal cable from the battery,
Airbag
Spiral and wait at least for 90 seconds.
Sensor
D Squib (d) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
DTC B0103/12 (c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
DLC3
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc (e) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
H01003
OK:
AB0019
HINT:
OK

DI−398
PREPARATION:
Spiral
Airbag (b) Disconnect the connector between the airbag sensor as-
Sensor sembly and the spiral cable.
Cable
Assembly
D Squib
¬®
CHECK:
ON
spiral cable and the steering wheel pad, measure the volt-
age between D+ and body ground.
D+
OK:
Voltage: 0 V
(−) (+)
H01000
AB0119
H02202
H02146
OK
ON CHECK:
Spiral Airbag spiral cable and airbag sensor assembly, measure the
Sensor
Cable Assembly
voltage between D+ and body ground.
D Squib OK:
Voltage: 0 V
D+
NG Repair or replace harness between airbag sen-

(−) (+) sor assembly and spiral cable.
AB0119
H01004
H02146 H10610
OK

DI−399
DI6P7−08
DTC B0105/53 Short in P Squib Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The P squib circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and front passenger airbag assembly.
DTC B0105/53 is recorded when a short is detected in the P squib circuit.
S Short circuit in P squib wire harness S Front passenger airbag assembly (P squib)
B0105/53 S P squib malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
P Squib
10
1 Y−R
C7 P+
11
2 Y−G
C7 P−
H01454

DI−400
2 Check P squib circuit.
PREPARATION:
P Squib Release the airbag activation prevention mechanism of the
Airbag connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between the
Sensor front passenger airbag assembly and the airbag sensor assem-
Assembly bly (See page DI−369).
CHECK:
For the connector (on the front passenger airbag assembly
side) between the front passenger airbag assembly and the air-
P− P+
bag sensor assembly, measure the resistance between P+ and
P−.
OK:
(−) (+) Resistance: 1 MW or Higher
R14286
H02142 H02251 NG Repair or replace harness or connector be-
tween front passenger airbag assembly and air-
bag sensor assembly.
OK

DI−401
PREPARATION:
P Squib (a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.
Airbag (b) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
Sensor wait at least for 2 seconds.
Assembly CHECK:
(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
®¬ conds.
seconds.
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0105/53
OK:
HINT:
CG Tc Codes other than code B0105/53 may be output at this time, but
H01023 they are not relevant to this check.
AB0119
H10600 H01077 H10611
OK

DI−402
4 Check P squib.
PREPARATION:
P Squib (b) Disconnect negative (−) terminal cable from the battery,
Airbag
Sensor and wait at least for 90 seconds.
Assembly (c) Connect the front passenger airbag assembly connector.
®¬
CHECK:
ON
(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOOK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0105/53 (c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01024 (f) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
AB0119
H10600 H01077 H10612 OK:
HINT:
NG Replace front passenger airbag assembly.
OK

DI−403
DI6P8−04
DTC B0106/54 Open in P Squib Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0106/54 is recorded when an open is detected in the P squib circuit.
S Open circuit in P+ wire harness or P− wire harness of
S Front passenger airbag assembly (P squib)
squib
B0106/54 S Airbag sensor assembly
S P squib malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−399.
CHECK:
For the connector (on the front passenger airbag assembly
P Squib
Airbag side) between the front passenger airbag assembly and the air-
Sensor bag sensor assembly, measure the resistance between P+ and
Assembly P−.
OK:
P− P+

R14286
tween front passenger airbag assembly and air-
H02142 H02251 bag sensor assembly.
OK

DI−404
PREPARATION:
Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect P+ and P− of the connector
Sensor (on the front passenger airbag assembly side) between
Assembly the front passenger airbag assembly and the airbag sen-
sor assembly.
ON
P− P+ CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 (c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
DTC B0106/54
seconds.
conds.
H01023
OK:
H02144 AB0119
H10600 H01078 H10613 DTC B0106/54 is not output.
HINT:
OK

DI−405
4 Check P squib.
PREPARATION:
P Squib
Airbag (b) Disconnect negative (−) terminal cable from the battery,
®¬
CHECK:
conds.
DTC B0106/54 seconds.
DLC3
conds.
CG
OK:
Tc
H01024
AB0119
H10600 H01078 H10614 HINT:
OK

DI−406
DI6P9−04
DTC B0107/51 Short in P Squib Circuit (to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0107/51 is recorded when ground short is detected in the P squib circuit.
S Short circuit in P squib wire harness (to ground) S Front passenger airbag assembly (P squib)
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−399.
CHECK:
P Squib For the connector (on the front passenger airbag assembly
Airbag side) between the front passenger airbag assembly and the air-
Sensor
Assembly
bag sensor assembly, measure the resistance between P+ and
body ground.
OK:
P+
(−) (+)
H01227
NG Repair or replace harness or connector be-
H02145 H02254 tween front passenger airbag assembly and air-
OK

DI−407
PREPARATION:
(b) Using a service wire, connect P+ and P− of the connector
P Squib Airbag (on the front passenger airbag assembly side) between
Sensor
the front passenger airbag assembly and the airbag sen-
Assembly
sor assembly.
®¬
ON CHECK:
P− P+ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
DTC B0107/51 DI−369).
DLC3
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
H01023 (e) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
H02144 AB0118
H10600 H01075 H10615 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−408
4 Check P squib.
PREPARATION:
P Squib (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
®¬ Assembly
(c) Connect the front passenger airbag assembly connector.
CHECK:
ON
conds.
DTC B0107/51
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
H01024 OK:
AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−409
DI6PA−01
DTC B0108/52 Short in P Squib Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0108/52 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the P squib circuit.
S Short circuit in P squib wire harness (to B+) S Front passenger airbag assembly (P squib)
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−399.
CHECK:
Airbag (b) For the connector (on the front passenger airbag assem-
Sensor bly side) between the front passenger airbag assembly
Assembly and the airbag sensor assembly, measure the voltage be-
P Squib
tween the P+ and body ground.
OK:
ON Voltage: 0 V
P+
(−) (+)
H01022
AB0119 NG Repair or replace harness or connector be-
H02146 H04524 tween front passenger airbag assembly and air-
OK

DI−410
PREPARATION:
Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect P+ and P− of the connector
Sensor (on the front passenger airbag assembly side) between
Assembly
the front passenger airbag assembly and the airbag sen-
sor assembly.
®¬
ON
CHECK:
P− P+
conds.
DTC B0108/52 DI−369).
DLC3
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01023
H02144 AB0118
H10600 H01076 H10617 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−411
4 Check P squib.
PREPARATION:
P Squib (b) Disconnect negative (−) terminal cable from the battery,
Airbag
®¬
CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
H01024
OK:
AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−412
DI6PB−06
DTC B0110/43 Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The side squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (RH).
DTC B0110/43 is recorded when a short is detected in the side squib (RH) circuit.
S Short circuit between SFR+ wire harness and SFR− wire
S Side airbag assembly (RH)
harness of squib
S Side squib (RH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Side Squib (RH)
1
1 Y−R C8 SFR+
2
2 Y−G
C8 SFR−
H01454

DI−413
2 Check side squib (RH) circuit.
PREPARATION:
Sensor
Squib (RH) airbag sensor assembly and the side airbag assembly (RH)
Assembly
CHECK:
For the connector (on the side airbag assembly side) between
the side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensor assembly,
SFR− SFR+ measure the resistance between SFR+ and SFR−.
OK:
(−) (+)
H01019
H09668 H12946

tween side airbag assembly (RH) and airbag
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−414
PREPARATION:
Squib (RH)
Assembly
CHECK:
®¬ conds.
seconds.
(d) Turn the ignition switch or ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
OK:
HINT:
CG Tc they are not relevant to this check.
H01020 AB0119
H10600 H01069 H12017
OK

DI−415
4 Check side squib (RH).
PREPARATION:
Squib (RH)
Assembly
(c) Connect the side airbag assembly (RH) connector.
®¬ wait at least for 2 seconds.
CHECK:
ON (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOOK, and wait at least for 20
second.
conds.
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc (f) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
H01020 AB0119
H10600 H01069 H12018 OK:
HINT:
NG Replace side airbag assembly (RH).
OK

DI−416
DI6PC−04
DTC B0111/44 Open in Side Squib (RH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0111/44 is recorded when an open is detected in the side squib (RH) circuit.
S Open circuit in SFR+ wire harness or SFR− wire harness
S Side airbag assembly (RH)
of squib
S Side squib (RH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−412.
2 Check front side squib (RH) circuit.
CHECK:
For the connector (on the front side airbag assembly side) be-
Airbag tween the front side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sen-
Squib (RH) Sensor
sor assembly, measure the resistance between SFR+ and
Assembly
SFR−.
OK:
SFR− SFR+
(−) (+)
H01019 NG Repair or replace harness or connector be-
H09668 H12947
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−417
PREPARATION:
Airbag
(b) Using a service wire, connect SFR+ and SFR− of the con-
Sensor nector (on the side airbag assembly side) between the
Squib (RH)
Assembly side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-
bly.
ON CHECK:
SFR− SFR+ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0111/44
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc OK:
H01020
H09671 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−418
PREPARATION:
Airbag
Squib (RH) Sensor (c) Connect the front side airbag assembly (RH) connector.
Assembly (d) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
®¬ CHECK:
ON
conds.
DTC B0111/44 seconds.
DLC3
(d) Turn the ignition switch to or ON, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
OK:
CG Tc DTC B0111/44 is not output.
H01021 AB0119
H10600 H01070 H12020 HINT:
OK

DI−419
DI6PD−04
DTC B0112/41 Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit

(to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0112/41 is recorded when ground short is detected in the side squib (RH) circuit.
S Short circuit in side squib (RH) wire harness (to ground) S Side airbag assembly (RH)
B0112/41 S Side squib (RH) malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−412.
CHECK:
Airbag the side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensor assembly,
Squib (RH) Sensor measure the resistance between SFR+ and body ground.
Assembly OK:
SFR+
(−) (+)
H01019
H09669 H12949
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−420
PREPARATION:
Airbag
Squib (RH) Sensor nector (on the side airbag assembly side) between the
Assembly side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-
bly.
ON
CHECK:
SFR− SFR+ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
DTC B0112/41 DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
H01020
H09671 AB0119
H10600 H01067 H16796 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−421
PREPARATION:
Airbag and wait at least for 90 seconds.
Sensor
Squib (RH) (c) Connect the side airbag assembly (RH) connector.
Assembly
CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
DLC3
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc OK:
H01021 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−422
DI6PE−04
DTC B0113/42 Short in Side Squib (RH) Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0113/42 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the side squib (RH) circuit.
S Short circuit in side squib (RH) wire harness (to B+) S Side airbag assembly (RH)
B0113/42 S Side squib (RH) malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−412.
ON CHECK:
(b) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)
Airbag
between the side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag
Sensor
Squib (RH) sensor assembly, measure the voltage between SFR+
Assembly
and body ground.
OK:
Voltage: 0 V
SFR+
(−) (+)
AB0119
H09670 H12951 tween side airbag assembly (RH) and airbag
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−423
PREPARATION:
Airbag nector (on the front side airbag assembly side) between
Squib (RH) Sensor
the front side airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag sensor
Assembly
assembly.
ON CHECK:
SFR+ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
SFR−
conds.
DTC B0113/42 DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
CG
Tc (e) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
H01020
H09671 AB0119
H10600 H01068 H13041 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−424
PREPARATION:
Squib (RH) Sensor (c) Connect the front side airbag assembly (RH) connector.
Assembly
CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
DLC3 DTC B0113/42
seconds.
conds.
OK:
H01021 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−425
DI6PF−06
DTC B0115/47 Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The side squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and side airbag assembly (LH).
DTC B0115/47 is recorded when a short is detected in the side squib (LH) circuit.
S Short circuit between SFL+ wire harness and SFL− wire
S Side airbag assembly (LH)
harness of squib
S Side squib (LH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Side Squib (LH)
6
1 Y−R C6 SFL+
5
2 Y−G
C6 SFL−
H01454

DI−426
2 Check side squib (LH) circuit.
PREPARATION:
Airbag
Squib (LH) Sensor
Assembly airbag sensor assembly and the side airbag assembly (LH)
CHECK:
the side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,
SFL− SFL+ measure the resistance between SFL+ and SFL−.
OK:
(−) (+)
H01019
H09668 H12953

tween side airbag assembly (LH) and airbag
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−427
PREPARATION:
®¬
Airbag wait at least for 2 seconds.
Squib (LH) Sensor
Assembly
CHECK:
conds.
seconds.
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0115/47 OK:
HINT:
H01017 AB0119
H10600 H01073 H12025
OK

DI−428
4 Check side squib (LH).
PREPARATION:
Squib (LH) (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
®¬ Sensor
Assembly (c) Connect the front side airbag assembly (LH) connector.
CHECK:
ON (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOOK, and wait at least for 20
second.
conds.
DLC3 (c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI−369).
DTC B0115/47 (d) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc (f) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
H01018 AB0119
H10600 H01073 H12026 OK:
HINT:
NG Replace side airbag assembly (LH).
OK

DI−429
DI6PG−04
DTC B0116/48 Open in Side Squib (LH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0116/48 is recorded when an open is detected in the side squib (LH) circuit.
S Open circuit in SFL+ wire harness or SFL− wire harness
S Side airbag assembly (LH)
of squib
S Side squib (LH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−425.
CHECK:
For the connector (on the front side airbag assembly side) be-
Airbag tween the front side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sen-
Squib (LH) Sensor
sor assembly, measure the resistance between SFL+ and
Assembly
SFL−.
OK:
SFL− SFL+
(−) (+)
H09668 H12954
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−430
PREPARATION:
Squib (LH) ®¬
(b) Using a service wire, connect SFL+ and SFL− of the con-
Airbag
nector (on the side airbag assembly side) between the
Sensor
Assembly side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assem-
bly.
wait at least 2 seconds.
ON CHECK:
SFL− SFL+ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
conds.
CG Tc
H01017 OK:
H09671 AB0119
HINT:
NG Replace side airbag sensor assembly.
OK

DI−431
PREPARATION:
®¬ Sensor and wait at least for 90 seconds.
Assembly (c) Connect the side airbag assembly (LH) connector.
CHECK:
ON
conds.
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc OK:
H01018 AB0119
H10600 H01074 H12028 HINT:
OK

DI−432
DI6PH−04
DTC B0117/45 Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit

(to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0117/45 is recorded when ground short is detected in the side squib (LH) circuit.
S Short circuit in side squib (LH) wire harness (to ground) S Side airbag assembly (LH)
B0117/45 S Side squib (LH) malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−425.
CHECK:
Squib (LH) For the connector (on the side airbag assembly side) between
Airbag the side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,
Sensor measure the resistance between SFL+ and body ground.
Assembly OK:
SFL+
(−) (+)
H01016
H09669 H12956
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−433
PREPARATION:
Squib (LH) ®¬ (a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.
Airbag
Sensor
nector (on the side airbag assembly side) between the
Assembly side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assem-
bly.
ON wait at least for 2 seconds.
SFL− SFL+ CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0117/45 DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01017
H09671 AB0119
H10600 H01071 H13043 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−434
PREPARATION:
®¬ Airbag and wait at least for 90 seconds.
Sensor (c) Connect the front side airbag assembly (LH) connector.
Assembly
CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
OK:
H01018 AB0119
HINT:
NG Replace front side airbag assembly (LH).
OK

DI−435
DI6PI−04
DTC B0118/46 Short in Side Squib (LH) Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0118/46 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the side squib (LH) circuit.
S Short circuit in side squib (LH) wire harness (to B+) S Side airbag assembly (LH)
B0118/46 S Side squib (LH) malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−425.
ON CHECK:
(b) For the connector (on the side airbag assembly side) be-
Airbag tween the side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sen-
Squib (LH) Sensor
Assembly sor assembly, measure the voltage between SFL+ and
body ground.
OK:
Voltage: 0 V
SFL+
(−) (+)
AB0119
H09670 H12958 tween side airbag assembly (LH) and airbag
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−436
PREPARATION:
®¬ (a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.
Squib (LH)
Airbag nector (on the side airbag assembly side) between the
Sensor side airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assem-
Assembly bly.
SFL+ CHECK:
SFL−
conds.
DLC3
DI−369).
DTC B0118/46
seconds.
conds.
H01017
H09671
H10600
AB0119
H01072 H13044 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−437
PREPARATION:
®¬ Sensor
Assembly (c) Connect the side airbag assembly (LH) connector.
ON CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
OK:
H01018 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−438
DI85V−01
DTC B0121/B0122/26 Seat Belt Buckle Switch (RH) Malfunc-

tion (LHD Only)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The seat belt buckle switch (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt buckle switch
(RH).
DTC B0121/B0122/26 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the seat belt buckle switch (RH) circuit.
S Seat belt buckle switch (RH)
B0121/B0122/26 S Seat belt buckle switch (RH) circuit S Airbag sensor assembly
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Seat Belt
Buckle Switch (RH) Airbag Sensor Assembly
8
5 B
RBE+ C8 RBE+
H16798

DI−439
2 Check wire harness (to ground).
CHECK:
Seat Belt Buckle For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-
Switch (RH) Airbag tween the seat belt buckle switch (RH) and the airbag sensor
Sensor
Assembly assembly, measure the resistance between RBE+ and body
ground.
OK:
Airbag Sensor Assembly Resistance: 1 MW or Higher
RBE+
(−) (+)
NG Repair or replace wire harness.
H01013
H16801 H16805
OK
3 Check wire harness (to B+).
CHECK:
ON Seat Belt Buckle
Switch (RH) Airbag
Sensor (b) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)
Assembly between the seat belt, buckle switch (RH) and the airbag
sensor assembly, measure the voltage between RBE+
and body ground.
Airbag Sensor Assembly OK:
Resistance: Below 1 V
(−) (+) RBE+

AB0119 NG Repair or replace wire harness.
H01013
H16802 H16806
OK

DI−440
4 Check seat belt buckle switch (RH).
PREPARATION:
Seat Belt Buckle (a) Connect the connector of the seat belt buckle switch
Switch (RH) Airbag
Sensor
(RH).
Assembly (b) Unlock the seat belt for the front passenger’s seat.
CHECK:
For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side), mea-
sure the resistance between RBE+ and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 1.0 kW − 1.6 kW
(−) (+)
H16827
RBE+
H16801 H17213
NG Replace front seat inner belt (RH).
OK
5 Check seat belt buckle switch (RH).
PREPARATION:
Seat Belt Buckle Lock the seat belt for the front passenger’s seat.
Switch (RH) Airbag
Sensor CHECK:
Assembly For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side), mea-
sure the resistance between RBE+ and body ground.
Resistance: 100 W − 500 W
(−) (+)
H16827
RBE+
H16801 H17213
NG Replace front seat inner belt (RH).
OK

DI−441
PREPARATION:
Seat Belt Buckle
Switch(RH)
Sensor (c) Connect the connector to the airbag assembly.
Assembly
CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0121/B0122/26 seconds.
conds.
CG TC OK:
H01012
AB0119
DTC B0121/B0122/26 is not output.
H10600 H16822 H16807 HINT:
Codes other than code B0121/B0122/26 may be output at this
time, but they are not relevant to this check.
OK

DI−442
DI85W−01
DTC B0126/B0127/27 Seat Belt Buckle Switch (LH) Malfunc-

tion (RHD Only)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The seat belt buckle switch (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt buckle switch
(LH).
DTC B0126/B0127/27 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the seat belt buckle switch (LH) circuit.
S Seat belt buckle switch (LH)
B0126/B0127/27 S Seat belt buckle switch (LH) circuit S Airbag sensor assembly
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Seat Belt
Buckle Switch (LH) Airbag Sensor Assembly
11
5 G−Y
LBE+ C6 LBE+
H16798

DI−443
CHECK:
Seat Belt Buckle Switch (RH) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-
tween the seat belt buckle switch (LH) and the airbag sensor as-
Airbag sembly, measure the resistance between LBE+ and body
Sensor ground.
Assembly OK:
LBE+
(+) (−)
H01008
H01052 H16808
OK
ON Seat Belt CHECK:

Buckle Switch (RH) (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Airbag
between the seat belt, buckle switch (LH) and the airbag
Sensor sensor assembly, measure the voltage between LBE+
Assembly and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: Below 1 V
LBE+
(+) (−)
H01008 NG Repair or replace wire harness.
AB0119
H01053 H16809
OK

DI−444
4 Check seat belt buckle switch (LH).
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the connector of the seat belt buckle switch (LH).
Airbag (b) Unlock the seat belt for the front passenger’s seat.
Seat Belt ®¬ Sensor CHECK:
Buckle Switch (LH) Assembly
For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side), mea-
sure the resistance between LBE+ and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 1.0 kW − 1.6 kW
LBE+ (+) (−)
H16810
H16804 H17214
NG Replace front seat inner belt (LH).
OK
5 Check seat belt buckle switch (LH).
PREPARATION:
Lock the seat belt for the front passenger’s seat.
Airbag CHECK:
Sensor For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side), mea-
Seat Belt Assembly
Buckle Switch (LH) sure the resistance between LBE+ and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 100 W − 500 W
LBE+
(+) (−)
H16810
H16804 H17214
NG Replace front seat inner belt (LH).
OK

DI−445
PREPARATION:
Seat Belt Buckle Switch(LH)
Airbag (c) Connect the connector to the airbag assembly.
Sensor
Assembly (d) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
®¬ CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0126/B0127/27 seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
OK:
H01007 DTC B0126/B0127/27 is not output.
AB0119
H10600 H16823 H16812 HINT:
OK

DI−446
DI6PJ−08
DTC B0130/63 Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The P/T squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (RH).
DTC B0130/63 is recorded when a short is detected in the P/T squib (RH) circuit.
S Short circuit between PR+ wire harness and PR− wire
S Seat belt pretensioner (RH)
harness of squib
S P/T squib (RH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
P/T Squib (RH)
5
1 Y−B
C8 PR+
2 6
Y
C8 PR−
H01454

DI−447
2 Check P/T squib (RH) circuit.
PREPARATION:
Airbag
P/T Squib (RH) Sensor connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between the
Assembly airbag sensor assembly and the seat belt pretensioner (RH)
CHECK:
For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between
PR+ PR−
the seat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-
bly, measure the resistance between PR+ and PR−.
OK:
(+) (−)
H01019 H02203
H02141

tween seat belt pretensioner (RH) and airbag
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−448
PREPARATION:
P/T Squib (RH) Sensor
Assembly
CHECK:
®¬ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
ON (b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
OK:
HINT:
H01020
AB0119
H10600 H01082 H10619
OK

DI−449
4 Check P/T squib (RH).
PREPARATION:
Assembly and wait at least for 90 seconds.
(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (RH) connector.
®¬
ON
CHECK:
second.
DLC3 DTC B0130/63 conds.
seconds.
CG Tc
conds.
H01021
AB0119
H10600 H01082 H10620 OK:
HINT:
NG Replace seat belt pretensioner (RH).
OK

DI−450
DI6PK−01
DTC B0131/64 Open in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The P/T squib circuit (RH) consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (RH).
DTC B0131/64 is recorded when an open is detected in the P/T squib (RH) circuit.
S Open circuit in PR+ wire harness or PR− wire harness of
squib
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−446.
CHECK:
Airbag
Assembly bly, measure the resistance between PR+ and PR−.
OK:
PR+ PR−
(+) (−) NG Repair or replace harness or connector be-

H01019
H02141 H02205 sensor assembly.
OK

DI−451
PREPARATION:
Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect PR+ and PR− of the con-
P/T Squib (RH) Sensor nector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between the
Assembly
seat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sensor assem-
bly.
®¬
PR+ PR−
ON CHECK:
conds.
conds.
CG Tc
H01020
OK:
H02139 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−452
PREPARATION:
Airbag
Sensor
P/T Squib (RH)
Assembly (c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (RH) connector.
®¬
CHECK:
conds.
conds.
CG Tc
OK:
H01021
AB0119
H10600 H01083 H10622 HINT:
OK

DI−453
DI6PL−01
DTC B0132/61 Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit

(to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0132/61 is recorded when a ground short is detected in the P/T squib (RH) circuit.
S Short circuit in P/T squib (RH) wire harness (to ground) S Seat belt pretensioner (RH)
B0132/61 S P/T squib (RH) malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−446.
CHECK:
Airbag
bly, measure the resistance between PR+ and body ground.
Assembly OK:
PR+
(−) (+)

H01019 sensor assembly.
H08392 H08393
OK

DI−454
PREPARATION:
P/T Squib (RH) Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect PR+ and PR− of the con-
Sensor
Assembly
nector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between the
®¬ bly.
PR+
PR− ON
CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
CG
conds.
Tc
H01020
H02139
AB0118 AB0119
H10600 H01079 H10623 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−455
PREPARATION:
Airbag
CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
OK:
H01021
AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−456
DI6PM−01
DTC B0133/62 Short in P/T Squib (RH) Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0133/62 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the P/T squib (RH) circuit.
S Short circuit in seat belt pretensioner (RH) wire harness
(to B+)
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−446.
ON CHECK:
(b) For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) be-
Airbag
tween the seat belt pretensioner (RH) and the airbag sen-
Assembly sor assembly, measure the voltage between PR+ and
body ground.
OK:
Voltage: 0 V
PR+
(−) (+)

H01019
AB0119
OK

DI−457
PREPARATION:
P/T Squib (RH) Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect PR+ and PR− of the con-
Sensor
Assembly
nector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between the
®¬ bly.
PR+ PR− wait at least for 2 seconds.
ON CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B0133/62 DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01020
H02139 AB0119
H10600 H01081 H10625 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−458
PREPARATION:
(a) Turn ignition switch to LOCK.
P/T Squib (RH)
Sensor
CHECK:
ON
conds.
DI−369).
DTC B0133/62
seconds.
conds.
H01021
OK:
AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−459
DI6PN−08
DTC B0135/73 Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The P/T squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (LH).
DTC B0135/73 is recorded when a short is detected in the P/T squib (LH) circuit.
S Short circuit between PL+ wire harness and PL− wire har-
S Seat belt pretensioner (LH)
ness of squib
S P/T squib (LH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
P/T Squib (LH)
2
1 Y−B
C6 PL+
2 1
Y
C6 PL−
H01454

DI−460
2 Check P/T squib (LH) circuit.
PREPARATION:
Airbag
P/T Squib (LH) Sensor
Assembly airbag sensor assembly and the seat belt pretensioner (LH)
CHECK:
PL+ PL− the seat belt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,
measure the resistance between PL+ and PL−.
OK:
(+) (−)
H01016
H02141 H02211

tween seat belt pretensioner (LH) and airbag
sensor assembly.
OK

DI−461
P/T Squib (LH) PREPARATION:

Assembly CHECK:
conds.
ON
seconds.
conds.
OK:
HINT:
H01017
AB0119
H10600 H01086 H10627
OK

DI−462
4 Check P/T squib (LH).
PREPARATION:
®¬
P/T Squib (LH) Sensor and wait at least for 90 seconds.
Assembly
(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (LH) connector.
ON CHECK:
second.
conds.
seconds.
CG Tc
conds.
H01018 (f) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
AB0119
H10600 H01086 H10628 OK:
HINT:
NG Replace seat belt pretensioner (LH).
OK

DI−463
DI6PO−01
DTC B0136/74 Open in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The P/T squib circuit (LH) consists of the airbag sensor assembly and seat belt pretensioner (LH).
DTC B0136/74 is recorded when an open is detected in the P/T squib (LH) circuit.
S Open circuit in PL+ wire harness or PL− wire harness of
squib
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−459.
CHECK:
Airbag
Sensor the seat belt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,
P/T Squib (LH)
Assembly measure the resistance between PL+ and PL−.
OK:
PL+ PL−
(+) (−) NG Repair or replace harness or connector be-

H01016
OK

DI−464
P/T Squib (LH) PREPARATION:

Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect PL+ and PL− of the connec-
Sensor
tor (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between the seat
Assembly
belt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly.
PL+ PL− CHECK:
ON (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
seconds.
DLC3 (d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
DTC B0136/74
conds.
OK:
CG Tc DTC B0136/74 is not output.
H01017
H02139 AB0119
H10600 H01087 H10629 HINT:
OK

DI−465
PREPARATION:
P/T Squib (LH) (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
Airbag
Assembly (c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (LH) connector.
CHECK:
conds.
conds.
CG Tc OK:
H01018
AB0119
H10600 H01087 H10630 HINT:
OK

DI−466
DI6PP−01
DTC B0137/71 Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit

(to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0137/71 is recorded when a ground short is detected in the P/T squib (LH) circuit.
S Short circuit in P/T squib (LH) wire harness (to ground) S Seat belt pretensioner (LH)
B0137/71 S P/T squib (LH) malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−459.
CHECK:
P/T Squib (LH)
the seat belt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly,
Airbag
Sensor measure the resistance between PL+ and body ground.
Assembly OK:
PL+
(−) (+)

H01016
H08396
sensor assembly.
H08392
OK

DI−467
®¬ PREPARATION:
Airbag
(b) Using a service wire, connect PL+ and PL− of the connec-
Assembly tor (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between the seat
PL+ PL−
ON CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
DLC3
seconds.
conds.
H01017
OK:
H02139 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−468
®¬ PREPARATION:
Assembly
(c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (LH) connector.
ON CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
H01018
OK:
AB0118 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−469
DI6PQ−01
DTC B0138/72 Short in P/T Squib (LH) Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC B0138/72 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the P/T squib (LH) circuit.
S Short circuit in seat belt pretensioner (LH) wire harness
(to B+)
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−459.
ON CHECK:
(b) For the connector (on the seat belt pretensioner side) be-
Airbag tween the seat belt pretensioner (LH) and the airbag sen-
P/T Squib (LH) Sensor sor assembly, measure the voltage between PL+ and
Assembly body ground.
OK:
Voltage: 0 V
PL+
(−) (+)

AB0119 tween seat belt pretensioner (LH) and airbag
H01016
OK

DI−470
P/T Squib (LH) ®¬ PREPARATION:

Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect PL+ and PL− of the connec-
Sensor
tor (on the seat belt pretensioner side) between the seat
Assembly
PL+ PL−
ON CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
H01017 OK:
H02139 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−471
PREPARATION:
P/T Squib (LH) (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
Airbag
Assembly (c) Connect the seat belt pretensioner (LH) connector.
CHECK:
ON
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
H01018 OK:
AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−472
DI6PR−01
DTC B1100/31 Airbag Sensor Assembly Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a airbag sensor, safing sensor, drive circuit, diagnosis circuit and
ignition control, etc.
It receives signals from the airbag sensor, judges whether or not the SRS must be activated, and detects
diagnosis system malfunction.
DTC B1100/31 is recorded when occurrence of a malfunction in the airbag sensor assembly is detected.
B1100/31 S Airbag sensor assembly malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
HINT:
When a malfunction code other than code B1100/31 is displayed at the same time, first repair the malfunction
indicated by the malfunction code other than code B1100/31.
2 Check voltage at IG1 and IG2 of airbag sensor assembly.
Airbag Sensor Assembly CHECK:

ON
(b) Measure the voltage between body ground and each of
terminals IG1 and IG2 of the airbag sensor assembly con-
IG1 IG2 nector.
(−) (+) OK:
AB0119
H01298 H01299 NG Check that an abnormality occurs on the battery
and charging system.
OK

DI−473
3 Is DTC B1100/31 output again?
PREPARATION:
ON Clear the DTC (See step 5 on page DI−369).
CHECK:
(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1100/31 (c) Repeat operation in step (a) and (b) at least 5 times.
(d) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
HINT:
AB0119
H10600 FI1394 H10635 NO Using simulation method, reproduce malfunc-
tion symptoms (See page IN−20).
YES
Replace airbag sensor assembly.

DI−474
DI7IA−02
DTC B1135/24 Harf Connection in Airbag Sensor

Assembly Connector
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The airbag sensor assembly detects partial connection of connector.
DTC B1135/24 is recorded when the airbag sensor assembly detects an open in the electrical connection
chech mechanism of the airbag sensor connector or in the airbag sensor assembly circuit.
S Malfunction of electrical connection check mechanism of
S Electrical connection check mechanism
B1135/24 airbag sensor assembly connector
1 Are connector of the airbag sensor assembly properly connected?
NG Connect connectors.
OK

DI−475
PREPARATION:
ON (a) Connect the connectors to the airbag sensor assembly.
Airbag CHECK:
Sensor (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
Assembly
seconds.
®¬ conds.
seconds.
DTC B1135/24 (e) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
DLC3 conds.
OK:
CG Tc HINT:
H16800 Codes other than code B1135/24 may be output at this time, but
NG Go to the next step.
OK
From the results of the inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.

DI−476
4 Check disconnection detection pin in the airbag sensor assembly

connector.
CHECK:
With 3 connectors connected to the airbag sensor assembly,
place tester leads onto any 2 of 3 disconnection detection pins
and check for continuity.
OK:
Continuity
H14983
NG Go to the next step.
OK
From the results of the inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal.

DI−477
5 Perform a visual check of the disconnection detection pin.
OK:
No deformation is identified.
HINT:
Compare it with the other 2 connector pins.
H15243
NG Repair or replace airbag sensor assembly

connector.
OK

DI−478
DI6PS−05
DTC B1140/32 Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (RH)

Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The side airbag sensor assembly (RH) consists of the safing sensor, diagnosis circuit and lateral decelera-
tion sensor, etc.
It receives signals from the lateral deceleration sensor, judges whether or not the SRS must be activated,
and detects diagnosis system malfunction.
DTC B1140/32 is recorded when occurrence of a malfunction in the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) is
detected.
S Side airbag sensor assembly (RH)
B1140/32 S Side airbag sensor assembly (RH) malfunction S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (RH) Airbag Sensor Assembly
4 10
GR
ESR C8 ESR
7
3 LG
FSR C8 SSR−
9
2 L−Y
SSR C8 SSR+
12
1 P
VUPR C8 VUPR
H01450

DI−479
1 Is DTC B1140/32 out put?
CHECK:
ON conds.
seconds.
DLC3 (d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
DTC B1140/32 conds.
HINT:
AB0119
H10600 H09528 H12032 YES The malfunctioning part can now be considered
normal. To make sure of this, use the simulation
method to check.
NO
2 Is connector of side airbag sensor assembly (RH) properly connected?
3 Prepare for inspection (See step 1 on DI−540).

DI−480
4 Check wire harness.
PREPARATION:
Side Airbag Sensor (a) Disconnect the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) con-
Assembly (RH) nector.
¬® Airbag (b) Using a service wire, connect SSR+ and ESR of the con-
Sensor nector (on the side airbag sensor assembly side) between
Assembly the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and airbag sensor
assembly.
CHECK:
For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-
Airbag Sensor tween the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and the airbag
Assembly sensor assembly, measure the resistance between SSR+ and
SSR+
ESR.
OK:
ESR
(+)
SSR+
ESR
(−)
H01015
H16301
H16250 H01036
tween side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and
airbag sensor assembly.
OK

DI−481
PREPARATION:
Side Airbag Sensor
Assembly (RH)
Using a service wire, connect VUPR and FSR of the connector
Airbag (on the side airbag sensor assembly side) between the side air-
Sensor bag sensor assembly (RH) and airbag sensor assembly.
Assembly CHECK:
tween the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and the airbag
sensor assembly, measure the resistance between VUPR and
FSR.
Airbag Sensor
Assembly OK:
VUPR Resistance: Below 1 W
FSR
VUPR FSR
(+)
(−)
H01015
H16249
H16302
H01037
OK

DI−482
CHECK:
Side Airbag Sensor
Assembly (RH) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-
Airbag tween the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and the airbag
Sensor
sensor assembly, measure the resistance between body
Assembly
ground and each of SSR+, VUPR and FSR.
OK:
VUPR
FSR
(−) (+)
H01013 SSR+ H01162
H01038
OK
ON CHECK:
Side Airbag Sensor (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Assembly (RH) Airbag (b) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)
Sensor between the side airbag sensor assembly (RH) and the
Assembly airbag sensor assembly, measure the voltage between
the body ground and each of SSR+, VUPR, ESR and
FSR.
Voltage: 0 V
SSR+ FSR
VUPR
AB0119
(−) (+) ESR NG Repair or replace harness or connector be-
H01013
H01039 H08270
OK

DI−483
8 Is DTC B1140/32 out put again?
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the connector to the side airbag sensor assem-
Side Airbag Sensor bly (RH).
Assembly (RH) Airbag
(b) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.
Sensor
Assembly (c) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
®¬ CHECK:
®¬
ON conds.
DI−369).
conds.
CG Tc OK:
H01012
AB0119
H10600 H01065 H13119 HINT:
NG Go to step 9.
OK

DI−484
PREPARATION:
Side Airbag Sensor (b) Disconnect negative (−) terminal cable from the battery,
Assembly (RH) Airbag
Sensor
Assembly (c) Disconnect the side airbag sensor (RH) from the connec-
tor and connect the side airbag sensor (LH) to the con-
nector.
®¬
CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1140/32 (b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See step 5 on page
DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc (d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
H01012
conds.
AB0119
H10600 H01065 H13119 (e) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−485
10 Check side airbag sensor assembly (RH).
®¬ PREPARATION:
Sensor (c) Connect the side airbag sensor (RH) to the connector that
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly
the side airbag sensor (LH) was connected to.
Assembly (RH)
CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1141/33 (b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See step 5 on page
DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01007
AB0119
H10600 H01066 H12033 OK:
HINT:
NG Replace side airbag sensor assembly (RH).
OK

DI−486
DI6PT−05
DTC B1141/33 Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (LH)

Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The side airbag sensor assembly (LH) consists of the safing sensor, diagnosis circuit and lateral deceleration
sensor, etc.
It receives signals from the lateral deceleration sensor, judges whether or not the SRS must be activated,
and detects diagnosis system malfunction.
DTC B1141/33 is recorded when occurrence of a malfunction in the side airbag sensor assembly (LH) is
detected.
S Side airbag sensor assembly (LH)
B1141/33 S Side airbag sensor assembly (LH) malfunction S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (LH) Airbag Sensor Assembly
9
4 GR−L
ESL C6 ESL
12
3 LG−B
FSL C6 SSL−
10
2 L−W
SSL C6 SSL+
7
1 P−L
VUPL C6 VUPL
H01450

DI−487
1 Is DTC B1141/33 out put?
CHECK:
conds.
ON
DI−369).
seconds.
DLC3 DTC B1141/33 conds.
HINT:
AB0119
H10600 H09530 H12034
YES The malfunctioning part can now be considered

normal. To make sure of this, use the simulation
method to check.
NO
2 Is connector of side airbag sensor assembly (LH) properly connected?

DI−488
PREPARATION:
¬® (a) Disconnect the side airbag sensor assembly (LH).
(b) Using a service wire, connect SSL+ and ESL of the con-
nector (on the side airbag sensor assembly side) between
Airbag
the side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and the airbag sen-
Sensor
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly sor assembly.
Assembly (LH) CHECK:
tween the side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and the airbag
SSL+ sensor assembly, measure the resistance between SSL+ and
Airbag Sensor
Assembly ESL.
OK:
ESL Resistance: Below 1 W
ESL
(+) SSL+
H01010 (−)
H16250
H01050 H16303
tween side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and air-
OK

DI−489
Side Airbag Sensor PREPARATION:

Assembly (LH) Using a service wire, connect VUPL and FSL of the connector
(on the side airbag sensor assembly side) between the side air-
Airbag bag sensor assembly (LH) and the airbag sensor assembly.
Sensor CHECK:
Assembly For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-
sensor assembly, measure the resistance between VUPL and
FSL.
VUPL Airbag Sensor OK:
Assembly Resistance: Below 1 W
FSL
FSL
VUPL
(+)
H01010
(−)
H16249
H01051 H16304
OK

DI−490
CHECK:
SIde Airbag Sensor Assembly (LH)
Airbag sensor assembly, measure the resistance between body
Sensor ground and each of SSL+, VUPL and FSL.
Assembly
OK:
SSL+
VUPL
FSL (+) (−)
H01008
H01168
H01052
OK
ON Side Airbag Sensor CHECK:

Assembly (LH) (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
between the side airbag sensor assembly (LH) and the
Airbag
Sensor airbag sensor assembly, measure the voltage between
Assembly body ground and each of SSL+, ESL, VUPL and FSL.
Voltage: 0 V
FSL SSL+
ESL VUPL
H01008
AB0119
(+) (−)
H01053 H08271

OK

DI−491
8 Is DTC B1141/33 out put again?
Side Airbag Sensor Assembly (LH) PREPARATION:

(a) Connect the connector to the side airbag sensor assem-
bly (LH).
Airbag (b) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.
Sensor (c) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
®¬ Assembly
®¬ CHECK:
conds.
DI−369).
DLC3
DTC B1141/33
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc OK:
H01007
AB0119
H10600 H01066 H12033 HINT:
NO Go to step 9.
YES

DI−492
®¬ PREPARATION:
Airbag
Sensor
Assembly (c) Disconnect the side airbag sensor (LH) from the connec-
Side Airbag Sensor tor and connect the side airbag sensor (RH) to the con-
Assembly (RH)
nector.
ON (d) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery, and
CHECK:
DLC3
conds.
DTC B1141/33
DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc (d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 se-
H01007
conds.
AB0119
H10600 H01066 H12033 (e) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−493
10 Check side airbag sensor assembly (LH).
PREPARATION:
Side Airbag Sensor (b) Disconnect negative (−) terminal cable from the battery,
Assembly (LH) Airbag
Sensor
Assembly (c) Connect the side airbag sensor (LH) to the connector that
the side airbag sensor (RH) was connected to.
®¬
ON CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1140/32 DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01012
AB0119
H10600 H01065 H13119 OK:
HINT:
NG Replace side airbag sensor assembly (LH).
OK

DI−494
DI85X−01
DTC B1150/23 Occupant Detection Sensor Malfunc-

tion
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The occupant detection sensor circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and occupant detection sen-
sor.
For details of the function of each components, see OPERATION on page RS−2.
DTC B1150/23 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the occupant detection sensor circuit.
S Occupant detection sensor
B1150/23 S Occupant detection sensor malfunction S Airbag sensor assembly
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
2 2 G−W (*1) 25
FSR+ (*1) G−R O (*2)
IN1 IO1 C7 FSR+ (*1)
FSL+ (*2) 1 FSL+ (*2)
(*1) (*2)
1 1 R−B (*1) 21
FSR− (*1) R−G B (*2) FSR− (*1)
IN1 IO1 C7
FSL− (*2) 3 FSL− (*2)
(*1) (*2)
*1: LHD
*2: RHD
H16439

DI−495
CHECK:
tween the occupant detection sensor and the airbag sensor as-
sembly, measure the resistance between body ground and
each of FSL+ and FSL−.
Occupant Detection OK:
Sensor
FSL− NG Repair or replace wire harness.

(−) (+)
FSL+
H01370
H16816 H16818
OK
Occupant Detection CHECK:

Sensor (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
between the occupant detection sensor and the airbag
sensor assembly, measure the voltage between body
ON ground and each of FSL+ and FSL−.
Voltage: Below 1 V
FSL−
(−) (+)
H01370 FSL+
AB0119
H16817 H16819
OK

DI−496
4 Check occupant detection sensor.
Occupant Detection CHECK:

Sensor Without passenger on a passenger seat:
Airbag
For the connector of the occupant detection sensor, connect
Sensor the positive (+) lead from the ohmmeter to terminal FSL+ and
Assembly the negative (−) lead to terminal FSL−, measure the resistance
between FSL+ and FSL−.
OK:
Resistance: 50 kW or Higher
FSL− FSL+ CHECK:
With passenger on a passenger seat:
For the connector of the occupant detection sensor, connect
the positive (+) lead from the ohmmeter to terminal FSL+ and
(−) (+) the negative (−) lead to terminal FSL−, measure the resistance
H01371
H16825 H16820 between FSL+ and FSL−.
OK:
Resistance: Below 50 kW
NG Replace seat cushion cover.
OK

DI−497
PREPARATION:
Occupant Detection
Sensor (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
Sensor
Assembly (c) Connect the occupant detection sensor connector and
airbag sensor assembly connector.
®¬
ON CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1150/23 DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
AB0119
H10600 H16824 H16821 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−498
DI6PW−08
DTC B1156/B1157/15 Front Airbag Sensor (RH) Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The front airbag sensor (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and front airbag sensor (RH).
DTC B1156/B1157/15 is recorded when a malfunction is detected in the front airbag sensor (RH) circuit.
S Front airbag sensor (RH)
B1156/B1157/15 S Front airbag sensor (RH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Front Airbag Sensor Assembly (RH)
1 1 9
2 B−W B−W
+SR IK2 II3 C7 +SR
*2 *1
2 2 20
1 BR−W BR−W
−SR IK2 II3 C7 −SR
*2 *1
*1: LHD
*2: RHD
H04708

DI−499
CHECK:
Airbag (b) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side)
Sensor
between the front airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sen-
Assembly
sor assembly, measure the voltage between body ground
Front Airbag
Sensor (RH) and each of +SR and −SR.
Airbag Sensor
Assembly OK:
ON Voltage: Below 1 V
+SR
(+)
H03355
(−) −SR
AB0119
H03363 H03445 NG Go to step 8.
OK
CHECK:
Airbag tween the front airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sensor as-
Sensor sembly, measure the resistance between body ground and
Assembly
each of +SR and −SR.
Front Airbag OK:
Sensor (RH) Airbag Sensor
Assembly Resistance: 1 MW or Higher
+SR
(+)
(−) −SR
H03353
H03443
NG Go to step 9.
H03361
OK

DI−500
Front Airbag CHECK:

Sensor (RH) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-
Airbag tween the front airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sensor as-
Sensor sembly, measure the resistance between +SR and −SR.
Assembly
OK:
Airbag Sensor
Assembly
(+) +SR
(−)
−SR
H03355
H03356 H09518
NG Go to step 10.
OK
Front Airbag PREPARATION:

Sensor (RH)
Using a service wire, connect +SR and −SR of the connector
Airbag (on the front airbag sensor (RH) side) between the airbag sen-
Sensor
sor assembly and the front airbag sensor (RH).
Assembly
CHECK:
−SR Airbag Sensor
+SR
Assembly
tween the front airbag sensor (RH) and the airbag sensor as-
sembly, measure the resistance between +SR and −SR.
OK:
(+) +SR Resistance: Below 1 W
(−)
−SR
H03353
H03360 H03356 H16296
NG Go to step 11.
OK

DI−501
6 Check front airbag sensor (RH).
Front Airbag CHECK:

Sensor (RH) For the connector of the front airbag sensor (RH), measure the
Airbag
resistance between +SR and −SR.
Sensor OK:
Assembly Resistance: 300 − 1500 W
+SR −SR
(+) (−)
H04504
H01062 H08346
NG Replace front airbag sensor (RH).
OK

DI−502
PREPARATION:
Front Airbag
Sensor (RH) (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
Airbag
Sensor
Assembly (c) Connect the front airbag sensor (RH) connector and air-
bag sensor assembly connector.
®¬
ON CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1156/B1157/15 (c) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
conds.
H02757
OK:
AB0119
H10600 H01063 H10638 DTC B1156/B1157/15 is not output.
HINT:
OK

DI−503
8 Check engine room main wire harness (to B+).

Sensor (RH) Disconnect the engine room main wire harness connector on
¬® Airbag the airbag sensor assembly side.
Sensor CHECK:
Assembly (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Engine Room Main (b) For the connector (on the RH front door wire harness
Wire Harness
ON side) between the airbag sensor assembly and the en-
gine room main wire harness, measure the voltage be-
+SR −SR tween body ground and each of +SR and −SR.
OK:
(−) (+) Voltage: Below 1 V
H03354
NG Repair or replace engine room main wire har-
AB0119
H08272
ness.
H06141
OK
Repair or replace harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and engine room main
wire harness.
9 Check engine room main wire harness (to ground).

Airbag the airbag sensor assembly side.
Sensor CHECK:
Assembly For the connector (on the engine room main wire harness side)
between the airbag sensor assembly and the engine room main
Engine Room Main wire harness, measure the resistance between body ground
Wire Harness and each of +SR and −SR.
+SR −SR
OK:
(−) (+)

H03354
ness.
H06140 H08258
OK
wire harness.

DI−504
10 Check engine room main wire harness.
Front Airbag Engine Room Main PREPARATION:

Wire Harness
Sensor CHECK:
wire harness, measure the resistance between +SR and −SR.
OK:
−SR Resistance: 1 MW or Higher
+SR
(+) (−)
H03354
H09519 H09520
ness.
OK
wire harness.

DI−505
Engine Room Main PREPARATION:

Front Airbag
Sensor (RH)
Wire Harness (a) Disconnect the engine room main wire harness connector
on the airbag sensor assembly side.
Airbag
Sensor (b) Using a service wire, connect +SR and −SR of the con-
Assembly nector (on the engine room main wire harness side) be-
¬®
tween the engine room main wire harness and the front
airbag sensor (RH).
CHECK:
+SR −SR +SR −SR For the connector (on the engine room main wire harness side)
wire harness, measure the resistance between +SR and −SR.
(+) (−) OK:
H03352
H03360 H16251 H16300

ness.
OK
wire harness.

DI−506
DI6PX−07
DTC B1158/B1159/16 Front Airbag Sensor (LH) Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The front airbag sensor (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and front airbag sensor (LH).
DTC B1158/B1159/16 is recorded when malfunction is detected in the front airbag sensor (LH) circuit.
S Front airbag sensor (LH)
B1158/B1159/16 S Front airbag sensor (LH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Front Airbag Sensor Assembly (LH)
1 1 15
2 W−R W−R
+SL IH1 IF1 C7 +SL
*2 *1
2 2 26
1 BR BR
−SL IH1 IF1 C7 −SL
*2 *1
*1: LHD
*2: RHD
H04708

DI−507
CHECK:
Sensor
between the front airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sen-
Assembly
sor assembly, measure the voltage between body ground
Front Airbag and each of +SL and −SL.
Sensor (LH) Airbag Sensor
Assembly OK:
ON Voltage: Below 1 V
(+) +SL
H03355
(−) NG Go to step 8.
AB0119 −SL
H08065 H10972
OK
CHECK:
tween the front airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sensor as-
Airbag
Sensor sembly, measure the resistance between body ground and
Assembly each of +SL and −SL.
Front Airbag OK:
Sensor (LH) Airbag Sensor Resistance: 1 MW or Higher
Assembly
+SL
(+)
(−) NG Go to step 9.
H03355 −SL
H08399 H10973
OK

DI−508
Front Airbag CHECK:

Sensor (LH) For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-
Airbag tween the front airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sensor as-
Sensor sembly, measure the resistance between +SL and −SL.
Assembly
OK:
Airbag Sensor
Assembly
(+) +SL
(−) −SL
H03355
H08058 H10974
NG Go to step 10.
OK

Sensor (LH)
Using a service wire, connect +SL and −SL of the connector (on
Airbag the front airbag sensor (LH) side) between the airbag sensor
Sensor
assembly and the front airbag sensor (LH).
Assembly
CHECK:
Airbag Sensor For the connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) be-
Assembly tween the front airbag sensor (LH) and the airbag sensor as-
+SL −SL sembly, measure the resistance between +SL and −SL.
OK:
+SL Resistance: Below 1 W
(+)
(−) −SL
H03353
H03360 H08058 H17210
NG Go to step 11.
OK

DI−509
6 Check front airbag sensor (LH).
CHECK:
For the connector (on the front airbag sensor (LH)), measure
Airbag the resistance between +SL and −SL.
Sensor OK:
Assembly Resistance: 300 − 1500 W
Front Airbag
Sensor (LH)
+SL −SL
H04504 (+) (−) NG Replace front airbag sensor (LH).

H01062 H08346
OK

DI−510
PREPARATION:
Front Airbag
Sensor (LH) (a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
Airbag
Sensor
Assembly (c) Connect the front airbag sensor (LH) connector and air-
bag sensor assembly connector.
®¬
ON CHECK:
conds.
DTC B1158/B1159/16
seconds.
conds.
H02757
OK:
AB0119
H10600 H01064 H10647 DTC B1158/B1159/16 is not output.
HINT:
OK

DI−511
8 Check engine room main wire harness (to B+).

Sensor (LH) Disconnect the engine room main wire harness connector on
Sensor CHECK:
Assembly (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Engine Room Main (b) For the connector (on the LH front door wire harness side)
Wire Harness
between the airbag sensor assembly and the engine
ON
room main wire harness, measure the voltage between
+SL −SL body ground and each of +SL and −SL.
OK:
Voltage: Below 1 V
(−) (+)
H03354
AB0119
H08272
ness.
H06141
OK
wire harness.
9 Check engine room main wire harness (to ground).

Airbag the airbag sensor assembly side.
Sensor CHECK:
Engine Room Main wire harness, measure the resistance between body ground
Wire Harness and each of +SL and −SL.
+SL −SL OK:
(−) (+)
H03354
ness.
H06140 H08258
OK
wire harness.

DI−512
Front Airbag Engine Room Main PREPARATION:

Wire Harness
Sensor CHECK:
wire harness, measure the resistance between +SL and −SL.
OK:
+SL −SL Resistance: 1 MW or Higher
H03354
(+) (−)
H09519 H09520

ness.
OK
wire harness.

DI−513
Engine Room Main PREPARATION:

Front Airbag
Sensor (LH)
Wire Harness (a) Disconnect the engine room main wire harness connector
on the airbag sensor assembly side.
Airbag
Sensor (b) Using a service wire, connect +SL and −SL of the connec-
Assembly tor (on the engine room main wire harness side) between
¬®
the engine room main wire harness and the front airbag
sensor (LH).
CHECK:
+SL −SL +SL −SL For the connector (on the engine room main wire harness side)
wire harness, measure the resistance between +SL and −SL.
(+) (−)
OK:
H03352
H03360 H16251 H16300

ness.
OK
wire harness.

DI−514
DI6PB−07
DTC B1160/83 Short in Curtain Shield Squib (RH)

Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The curtain shield squib (RH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and curtain shield airbag assem-
bly (RH).
DTC B1160/83 is recorded when a short is detected in the curtain shield squib (RH) circuit.
S Short circuit between ICR+ wire harness and ICR− wire
S Curtain shield airbag assembly (RH)
harness of squib
S Curtain shield squib (RH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Curtain Shield Squib (RH)
1 3
1 Y Y−V
IQ1 C8 ICR+
2 4
2 Y Y−O
IQ1 C8 ICR−
H16799

DI−515
2 Check curtain shield squib (RH) circuit.
PREPARATION:
Squib (RH) Sensor airbag sensor assembly and the curtain shield airbag assembly
Assembly
(RH) (See page DI−369).
CHECK:
For the connector (on the curtain shield airbag assembly side)
between the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag
sensor assembly, measure the resistance between ICR+ and
ICR− ICR+ ICR−.
OK:
(−) (+)
H01019
H02142 H04618

tween curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and
OK

DI−516
PREPARATION:
Squib (RH)
Assembly
CHECK:
®¬ conds.
seconds.
conds.
DLC3 (e) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
DTC B1160/83
OK:
HINT:
H01020 AB0119
H10600 H11644 H13056
OK

DI−517
4 Check curtain shield squib (RH).
PREPARATION:
Squib (RH)
Assembly
(c) Connect the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) connec-
tor.
ON CHECK:
second.
DLC3 DTC B1160/83
conds.
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01020 AB0119
H10600 H11644 H13057 (f) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
OK:
HINT:
NG Replace curtain shield airbag assembly (RH).
OK

DI−518
DI6PC−02
DTC B1161/84 Open in Curtain Shield Squib (RH)

Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
bly (RH).
DTC B1161/84 is recorded when an open is detected in the curtain shield squib (RH) circuit.
S Open circuit in ICR+ wire harness or ICR− wire harness of
squib
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−514.
CHECK:
Airbag between the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag
Squib (RH) Sensor sensor assembly, measure the resistance between ICR+ and
Assembly
ICR−.
OK:
ICR− ICR+
(−) (+)

H02142 H04618
tween curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and
OK
DI−519
PREPARATION:
Airbag
(b) Using a service wire, connect ICR+ and ICR− of the con-
Sensor nector (on the curtain shield airbag assembly side) be-
Squib (RH)
Assembly tween the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and the
ON CHECK:
ICR− ICR+ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1161/84
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc OK:
H01020
H02144 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−520
PREPARATION:
Airbag
Squib (RH) Sensor (c) Connect the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) connec-
Assembly tor.
CHECK:
ON
conds.
DLC3
seconds.
(d) Turn the ignition switch to or ON, and wait at least for 20
seconds.
CG Tc OK:
H01021 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−521
DI6PD−02
DTC B1162/81 Short in Curtain Shield Squib (RH) Cir-

cuit (to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
bly (RH).
DTC B1162/81 is recorded when ground short is detected in the curtain shield squib (RH) circuit.
S Short circuit in curtain shield squib (RH) wire harness (to
ground)
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−514.
CHECK:
Airbag between the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and the airbag
Squib (RH) Sensor sensor assembly, measure the resistance between ICR+ and
Assembly
body ground.
OK:
ICR+

(−) (+) tween curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and
H01019
H02145 H04609
OK

DI−522
PREPARATION:
Airbag
Squib (RH) Sensor nector (on the curtain shield airbag assembly side) be-
Assembly tween the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and the
ON
CHECK:
ICR− ICR+ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
DI−369).
DLC3 DTC B1162/81
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
H01020
H02144 AB0119
H10600 H11642 H13060 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−523
PREPARATION:
Sensor
Squib (RH) (c) Connect the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) connec-
Assembly
tor.
ON CHECK:
conds.
DTC B1162/81 DI−369).
DLC3
seconds.
conds.
H01021 AB0119
H10600 H11642 H13061 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−524
DI6PE−02
DTC B1163/82 Short in curtain shield Squib (RH)

Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
bly (RH).
DTC B1163/82 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the curtain shield squib (RH) circuit.
S Short circuit in curtain shield squib (RH) wire harness (to
B+)
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−514.
CHECK:
Squib (RH) Sensor between the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and the
Assembly
airbag sensor assembly, measure the voltage between
ICR+ and body ground.
ON OK:
Voltage: 0 V
ICR+

(−) (+) tween curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and
H01019
AB0119
H02146 H04624
OK

DI−525
PREPARATION:
Airbag nector (on the curtain shield airbag assembly side) be-
Squib (RH) Sensor
tween the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) and the
Assembly
ON CHECK:
ICR+ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
ICR−
conds.
DI−369).
seconds.
conds.
CG
Tc (e) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
H01020
H02144 AB0119
H10600 H11643 H13062 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−526
PREPARATION:
Squib (RH) Sensor (c) Connect the curtain shield airbag assembly (RH) connec-
Assembly
tor.
ON CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1163/82 DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01021 AB0119
H10600 H11643 H13063 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−527
DI6PF−07
DTC B1165/87 Short in Curtain Shield Squib (LH)

Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The curtain shield squib (LH) circuit consists of the airbag sensor assembly and curtain shield airbag assem-
bly (LH).
DTC B1165/87 is recorded when a short is detected in the curtain shield squib (LH) circuit.
S Short circuit between ICL+ wire harness and ICL− wire
S Curtain shield airbag assembly (LH)
harness of squib
S Curtain shield squib (LH) malfunction
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Curtain Shield Squib (LH)
1 4
1 Y Y−V
IP1 C6 ICL+
2 3
2 Y Y−O
IP1 C6 ICL−
H16799

DI−528
2 Check curtain shield squib (LH) circuit.
PREPARATION:
Squib (LH) connector (on the airbag sensor assembly side) between the
Airbag
Sensor airbag sensor assembly and the curtain shield airbag assembly
Assembly (LH) (See page DI−369).
CHECK:
between the curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag
sensor assembly, measure the resistance between ICL+ and
ICL− ICL+ ICL−.
OK:
(−) (+)
H01016
H02142 H04606

tween curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and
OK

DI−529
PREPARATION:
®¬
Airbag wait at least for 2 seconds.
Squib (LH) Sensor
Assembly
CHECK:
conds.
seconds.
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1165/87 OK:
HINT:
CG Tc
H01017 AB0119
H10600 H11648 H13064
OK

DI−530
4 Check curtain shield squib (LH).
PREPARATION:
®¬ Sensor
Assembly (c) Connect the curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) connec-
tor.
ON CHECK:
second.
DLC3 conds.
DTC B1165/87 (c) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc
conds.
H01018 AB0119
H10600 H11648 H13065 (f) Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
OK:
HINT:
NG Replace curtain shield airbag assembly (LH).
OK

DI−531
DI6PG−02
DTC B1166/88 Open in Curtain Shield Squib (LH)

Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
bly (LH).
DTC B1166/88 is recorded when an open is detected in the curtain shield squib (LH) circuit.
S Open circuit in ICL+ wire harness or ICL− wire harness of
squib
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−527.
1 Prepare for inspection. (See step 1 on page DI−540)
CHECK:
Squib (LH) For the connector (on the front curtain shield airbag assembly
side) between the front curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and
Airbag
Sensor the airbag sensor assembly, measure the resistance between
Assembly ICL+ and ICL−.
OK:
ICL− ICL+

(−) (+) tween curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and
H01016 airbag sensor assembly.
H02142 H04606
OK

DI−532
PREPARATION:
Squib (LH) ®¬
(b) Using a service wire, connect ICL+ and ICL− of the con-
Airbag
nector (on the curtain shield airbag assembly side) be-
Sensor
Assembly tween the curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and the air-
wait at least 2 seconds.
ON CHECK:
ICL− ICL+ (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least for 20 se-
conds.
conds.
CG Tc
H01017 OK:
H02144 AB0119
HINT:
NG Replace curtain shield airbag sensor assembly.
OK

DI−533
PREPARATION:
tor.
ON
CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 (b) Clear the DTC stored in memory (See page DI−369).
DTC B1166/88
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
OK:
H01018 AB0119
HINT:
OK

DI−534
DI6PH−02

Circuit (to Ground)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
bly (LH).
DTC B1167/85 is recorded when ground short is detected in the curtain shield squib (LH) circuit.
S Short circuit in curtain shield squib (LH) wire harness (to
ground)
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−527.
CHECK:
Squib (LH) For the connector (on the curtain shield airbag assembly side)
between the curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and the airbag
Airbag
Sensor sensor assembly, measure the resistance between ICL+ and
Assembly body ground.
OK:
ICL+

tween curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and
H01016
H02145 H04612
OK

DI−535
PREPARATION:
Squib (LH) ®¬ (a) Connect the connector to the airbag sensor assembly.
Sensor tween the curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and the air-
Assembly
ICL− ICL+ CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1167/85 DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01017
H02144 AB0119
H10600 H11646 H13068 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−536
PREPARATION:
®¬ Airbag and wait at least for 90 seconds.
Sensor (c) Connect the curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) connec-
Assembly
tor.
ON CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1167/85 DI−369).
seconds.
Tc conds.
CG
H01018 AB0119
H10600 H11646 H13069 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−537
DI6PI−02

Circuit (to B+)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
bly (LH).
DTC B1168/86 is recorded when a B+ short is detected in the curtain shield squib (LH) circuit.
S Short circuit in curtain shield squib (LH) wire harness (to
B+)
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−527.
CHECK:
(b) For the connector (on the curtain shield airbag assembly
Airbag
Squib (LH)
Sensor side) between the curtain shield airbag assembly (LH)
Assembly and the airbag sensor assembly, measure the voltage be-
tween ICL+ and body ground.
OK:
ON Voltage: 0 V
ICL+

(−) (+) tween curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and
H01016
AB0119
H02146 H04615
OK

DI−538
PREPARATION:
Squib (LH)
Sensor tween the curtain shield airbag assembly (LH) and the air-
Assembly bag sensor assembly.
CHECK:
ICL− ICL+
conds.
DTC B1168/86 DI−369).
DLC3
seconds.
conds.
CG Tc
H02144 AB0119
H10600 H11647 H13070 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−539
PREPARATION:
®¬ Sensor
tor.
CHECK:
conds.
DLC3 DTC B1168/86 DI−369).
seconds.
CG Tc conds.
H01018 AB0119
H10600 H11647 H13071 OK:
HINT:
OK

DI−540
DI6PY−10
DTC Normal Source Voltage Drop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The SRS is equipped with a voltage−increase circuit (DC−DC converter) in the airbag sensor assembly in
case the source voltage drops.
When the battery voltage drops, the voltage−increase circuit (DC−DC converter) functions to increase the
voltage of the SRS to normal voltage.
The diagnosis system malfunction display for this circuit is different from other circuits that is when the SRS
warning light remains lit up and the DTC is a normal code, source voltage drop is indicated.
Malfunction in this circuit is not recorded in the airbag sensor assembly, and the source voltage returns to
normal, the SRS warning light automatically goes off.
DTC No. Diagnosis
(Normal) Source voltage drop
WIRING DIAGRAM
Driver Side J/B (*1) J18 (*2) J35 Airbag Sensor
I12 Ignition Switch J/C Assembly
1 GAUGE 4 (*1) J18 6
AM1 IG1 B−Y V−W (*2) J35
1J 1H C7 IG1
2 4 (*1) J16 B B
(*2) J39
J/C
6 IGN 4 5
AM2 IG2 B−W B−W B−O
1J 1N C7 IG2
7 6
A A
(*1) 9 (*2) 7 AM2
W−R W−R
IA1 IK1 1
2 1
Engine
W−L
Driver Side J/B Room
No.1J/B
3 AM1 1 1 ALT
1A W
1J 1K 1 1
2 1 (*1)
2 1
(*2)
Battery
B−L
(*1): LHD
(*2): RHD
H16284

DI−541
1 Prepare for inspection.
PREPARATION:
LOCK Airbag
Sensor
(a) Disconnect negative (−) terminal cable from the battery,
Assembly and wait at least for 90 seconds.
(b) Remove the steering wheel pad (See page SR−9).
P/T Squib (LH)
(c) Disconnect the connector of the front passenger airbag
Side Airbag assembly (See Pub.No. RM588E on page RS−28).
Sensor (LH) (d) Disconnect the connector of the side airbag assembly RH
and LH (See Pub. No. RM588E on page RS−40).
Side Squib (LH) (e) Disconnect the connector of the curtain shield airbag as-
Curtain Shield sembly RH and LH (See page RS−13).
Airbag Assembly (f) Disconnect the connector of the seat belt pretensioner
(LH)
RH and LH (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BO−124).
Front Airbag
Sensor (RH) (g) Disconnect the connectors of the airbag sensor assembly
(See Pub. No. RM588E on page RS−53).
Spiral
Cable (h) Disconnect the connector of the front airbag sensor RH
D Squib and LH (See Pub. No. RM588E on page RS−58).
P Squib (i) Disconnect the connector of the side and curtain shield
airbag sensor assembly RH and LH (See page RS−13).
Front Airbag
CAUTION:
Sensor (LH)
Store the steering wheel pad, front passenger airbag as-
Curtain Shield
Airbag Assembly
sembly, side airbag assembly and curtain shield airbag as-
(RH) sembly with the front surface facing upward.
P/T Squib (RH)
Side Airbag
Sensor (RH)
Side Squib (RH)

AB0117
H13465 H13471

DI−542
2 Check source voltage.
Airbag Sensor Assembly PREPARATION:

ON Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery.
CHECK:
IG1 IG2 (b) Measure the voltage between body ground and each of
(−) (+) IG1 and IG2 on the sensor and operate electric system
(defogger, wiper, headlight, heater blower, etc.).
OK:
AB0119
H01298 H01299 Voltage: 10 − 14 V
NG Check harness between battery and airbag sen-

sor assembly, and check battery and charging
system.
OK
3 Does SRS warning light turn off?
PREPARATION:
ON
(b) Connect the steering wheel pad connector.
(c) Connect the front passenger airbag assembly connector.
(d) Connect the side airbag assembly connectors.
(e) Connect the seat belt pretensioner connectors.
(f) Connect the airbag sensor assembly connectors.
(g) Connect the front airbag sensor connectors.
H01249 (h) Connect the side and curtain shield airbag sensor assem-
bly connectors.
(i) Connect the curtain shield airbag assembly connectors.
(j) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
CHECK:
Operate electric system (defogger, wiper, headlight, heater
blower, etc.) and check that SRS warning light goes off.
NO Check for DTCs. If a DTC is output, perform trou-

bleshooting for the DTC. If a normal code is out-
put, replace airbag sensor assembly.
YES

DI−543
DI71G−02
SRS Warning Light Circuit Malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The SRS warning light is located on the combination meter.
When the SRS is normal, the SRS warning light lights up for approx. 6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned from the LOCK position to ON position, and then turns off automatically.
If there is a malfunction in the SRS, the SRS warning light lights up to inform the driver of the abnormality.
When terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 are connected, the DTC is displayed by blinking the SRS warning
light.
The signal to make the SRS warning light light up is transmitted from the airbag sensor assembly to the com-
bination meter through multiplex communication system.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Combination Meter Airbag Sensor Assembly
2 17 17 22
W R−L
C12 IJ1 IE1 C7 MPX2
(RHD) (LHD)
H16285

DI−544
Always lights up, when ignition switch is in LOCK position
2 Does SRS warning light turn off?
LOCK Airbag Sensor Assembly PREPARATION:

(c) Disconnect the airbag sensor assembly connector.
(d) Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery.
CHECK:
Check operation of SRS warning light.
AB0117 H01293 H01295
NO Check combination mater (See page BE−1).
YES

DI−545
Does not light up, when ignition switch is turned to ON
1 Check combination meter (See page BE−1).
2 Check source voltage.

ON Connect negative (−) terminal cable to the battery.
CHECK:
IG1 IG2 (b) Measure the voltage between body ground and each of
(−) (+) IG1 and IG2 on the sensor.
OK:
AB0119
H01298 H01299
NG Check harness between battery and airbag sen-

sor assembly, and check battery and charging
system.
OK

DI−546
4 Does SRS warning light come on?
PREPARATION:
(a) Disconnect negative (−) terminal cable from the battery.
P/T Squib (LH) (b) Connect the airbag sensor assembly connector.
Side Airbag wait at least for 2 seconds.
Sensor (LH)
(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
CHECK:
Side Squib (LH)
Check operation of the SRS warning light.
Curtain Shield
Airbag
Assembly (LH)
Front Airbag
Sensor (LH)
Spiral
Cable
D Squib
P Squib
Front Airbag
Sensor (RH)
Curtain Shield
Airbag
Assembly (RH)
P/T Squib (RH)
Side Airbag
Sensor (RH)
Side Squib (RH)
ON Airbag
Sensor
Assembly
H13466
AB0119
H02575 H16282
NO Replace airbag sensor assembly.
YES
To make sure of this, use simulation method to check.

DI−547
DI71H−02
Tc Terminal Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
By connecting terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 the airbag sensor assembly is set in the DTC output mode.
The DTCs are displayed by blinking the SRS warning light.
The signal passes the engine ECU and is input to the airbag sensor assembly via multiplex communication
system.
WIRING DIAGRAM
A16 A/C Control T5 Tilt and Airbag

Assembly Telescopic ECU Sensor Assembly
3 3 10 10
L W W R−L
ID1 IJ1 MPX+ MPX− ID1 IJ1 MPX1 MPX2 MPX1
5 16 7 6 24
(RHD) (LHD) (RHD) (LHD)
L D2
DLC3
27 20 5 3
P−B (*3)
E5 E5 MPX2 Tc E5 E5 Tc
(*2) (*1) (*2) (*1)
J38 J/C J31 J/C
P−B
(*1, 2) P−B P−B
(*1, 2)
C C D D
*1: 3UZ−FE
*2: 2JZ−GE
*3: Except RHD 2JZ−GE
H16438

DI−548
If the DTC is not displayed, do the following troubleshooting.
1 Does SRS warning light light up for approx. 6 seconds?
PREPARATION:
LOCK ON Check operation of the SRS warning light after ignition switch
is turned from LOCK position to ON position.
AB0117 AB0119
H02575 H16283
NO Check SRS warning light system (See page

DI−543).
YES
2 Check voltage between terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.
PREPARATION:
ON
Turn the ignition switch to ON.
CG CHECK:
Measure the voltage between terminals Tc and CG of DLC3.
OK:
Tc
(−) (+)
AB0119
H10688 H10654
OK Go to step 4.
NG

DI−549
3 Check voltage between terminal Tc of DLC3 and body ground.
CHECK:
ON
Measure the voltage between terminal Tc of DLC3 and body
Tc
ground.
OK:
(−) (+)
OK Check or repair harness between terminal CG of

AB0119
H10656
DLC3 and body ground.
H10689
NG
4 Check multiplex communication system (See page BE−1).
CHECK:
Check the DTC (See page DI−369).
OK:
DTC is output.
OK

DI−550
If the DTC is displayed without a DTC check procedure, perform the following
troubleshooting.
1 Check and repair wire harness between the engine ECU and DLC3 (See page
DI−90).
2 Is DTC output again?
CHECK:
(a) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, and wait at least for 20 seconds.
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and wait at least for 20 seconds.
(c) Check SRS warning light.
YES Replace airbag sensor assembly.
NO

DI−551
DIAGNOSTICS − CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

DI26R−17

Troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following page.

Items inside are titles of pages in this
manual with the page number indicated in the
1 Customer Problem Analysis bottom portion. See the indicated pages
for detailed explanations.
P. DI−552
P. DI−553
Symptom does not occur 4

3 Symptom Simulation
P. IN−20
Symptom occurs

P. DI−553
Malfunction code
6 7
DTC Chart Problem Symptom Table
P. DI−558 P. DI−562
9
8 Input Signal Check
Circuit Inspection
Parts Inspection
P. DI−563 − DI−581
Repair
NG
Step 2, 5, 8, 10: Diagnostic steps permitting the use
OK of the TOYOTA hand−held tester or
TOYOTA break−out−box.
End

DI−552
DI26S−03
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s name:
Registration No.
Customer’s Name Registration Year
Frame No.
Date of Vehicle / / km
Odometer Reading
Brought in Mile
Date of Problem
Occurrence / /
Condition of Frequency
Problem Occurrence Problem Occurs? □ Continuous □ Intermittent ( Times a day)
Vehicle Speed when km

Problem Occurred Mile
□ Auto cancel D Driving condition

occurs j City driving j Freeway j Up hill j Down hill
D After cancel occurred, did the driver activate cruise control
again?
j Yes j No
j Cancel does not j With brake ON
occur j Except D position shift
j When control SW turns to CANCEL position
j Cruise control j Slip to acceleration side
Symptoms
malfunction j Slip to deceleration side
j Hunting occurs
j O/D cut off does not occur
j O/D does not return
j Switch
j SET j ACCEL j COAST j RESUME j CANCEL
malfunction
j
j Remains ON j Does not light up j Blinks
1st Time j Normal Code j Malfunction Code (Code )

DTC Check
2nd Time j Normal Code j Malfunction Code (Code )

DI−553
DI2V2−02
PRE−CHECK
1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
(a) Check the indicator.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(2) Check that the CRUISE MAIN indicator light comes
”CRUISE
MAIN” on when the cruise control main switch is turned
Indicator ON, and that the indicator light goes off when the
light main switch is turned OFF.
I04207
HINT:
If the indicator check result is not normal, proceed to trouble-
shooting (See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−584) for the com-
bination meter section.
(b) Check the DTC.

Indicator Light
HINT:
0.5 sec.
If a malfunction occurs in the speed sensor or actuator, etc. dur-
1.5 sec.
ing cruise control driving, the ECU actuates AUTO CANCEL of
the cruise control and turns ON and OFF the CRUISE MAIN in-
ON
dicator light to inform the driver of a malfunction. At the same
time, the malfunction is stored in memory as a diagnostic
OFF trouble code.
BE4034
(c) Output DTC using diagnosis check wire.

(2) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and E1 of DLC3.
SST 09843−18020
(3) Read the DTC on the CRUISE MAIN indicator light.
DLC3
N09214

DI−554
HINT:
Normal Code
If the DTC is not output, inspect the diagnosis circuit.
0.25 sec. As an example, the blinking patterns for codes; normal 52 are
0.25 sec. shown in the illustration.
ON
OFF
Malfunction codes 52
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
2.5 sec.
1.5 sec.
ON
OFF
Code 52 I03610
LEXUS hand−held tester 2. ECU TERMINAL VALUES MEASUREMENT BY USING

LEXUS BREAK−OUT−BOX AND LEXUS HAND−HELD
TESTER
(a) Hook up the LEXUS break−out−box and LEXUS hand−
held tester to the vehicle.
(b) Read the ECU input/output values by following the
prompts on the tester screen.
(c) Please refer to the LEXUS hand−held tester has a ”Snap-
LEXUS Break−out−box N09348 shot” function. This records the measured data and is ef-
fective in the diagnosis of intermittent problems.
3. USING LEXUS HAND−HELD TESTER
(a) Hook up the LEXUS hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(b) Monitor the ECU data by following the prompts on the tes-
ter screen.
HINT:
LEXUS hand−held tester has a ”Snapshot” function which re-
cords the monitored data.
LEXUS hand
−held tester Please refer to the LEXUS hand−held tester operator’s manual
DLC3 F13542 for further details.

DI−555
4. DTC CLEARANCE
(a) The following actions will erase the DTCs and freeze
frame data.
(1) Operating the OBD ll scan tool (complying with
SAEJ1978) or LEXUS hand−held tester to erase
the codes. (See the OBD ll scan tool’s instruction
book for operating instructions.)
(2) Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI fuse.
(b) After completing repairs, the DTC retained in memory can
be cleared by removing the ECU−B fuse for 10 seconds
or more with the ignition switch off.
(c) Check that the normal code is displayed after connecting
the fuse.

(ROAD TEST)
(a) Inspect the SET switch.
(1) Push the main switch ON.
(2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or high-
er).
(3) Press the control switch to the SET/COAST.
(4) After releasing the switch, check that the vehicle
N17520 cruises at the desired speed.
(b) Inspect the ACCEL switch.

er).
(3) Check that the vehicle speed increases while the
control switch is turned to RES/ACC, and that the
vehicle cruises at the set speed when the switch is
released.
N17520 (4) Momentarily press the control switch upward in the
RES/ACC and then immediately release it. Check
that the vehicle speed increases by about 1.5 km/h
(Tap−up function).

DI−556
(c) Inspect the COAST switch.

er).
(3) Check that the vehicle speed decreases while the
control switch is turned to SET/COAST, and the ve-
hicle cruises at the set speed when the switch is re-
leased.
N17520 (4) Momentarily press the control switch is turned to
SET/COAST, and then immediately release it.
Check that the vehicle speed decreases by about
1.5 km/h (Tap−down function).
(d) Inspect the CANCEL switch.

er).
(3) When operating one of the followings, check that
the cruise control system is cancelled and that the
normal driving mode is reset.
S Depress the brake pedal
N17520 S Shift to except D range (A/T)
S Push the main switch OFF
S Pull the cruise control switch to CANCEL

DI−557
(e) Inspect the RESUME switch.

er).
(3) When operating one of the followings, check that
the cruise control system is cancelled and that the
normal driving mode is reset.
S Depress the brake pedal
N17520 S Shift to except D range (A/T)
S Pull the cruise control switch to CANCEL
(4) After the control switch is turned to RES/ACC at the
driving speed of more than 40 km/h (25 mph), check
that the vehicle restores the speed prior to the can-
cellation.
6. INPUT SIGNAL CHECK

(Using LEXUS hand−held tester)
(a) Connect the LEXUS hand−held tester to DLC3
(b) Check the control switch (MAIN, CANCEL, SET/COAST,
RES/ACC)
N17520

DI−558
DI26U−17

below and proceed to the appropriate page.
DTC No.
Circuit Inspection Trouble Area
(See Page)
S Harness or connector between engine and ECT ECU and

P0500/ 21, 23
vehicle speed sensor
(*1) Vehicle Speed Signal Abnormal
(DI−558)

P0501/ 21, 23
(*2) Vehicle Speed Signal Abnormal
(DI−563)
S Stop light switch

P1520/ 52 S Harness or connector between engine and ECT ECU and
Short in Stop Light Switch Circuit
(DI−564) stop light switch circuit
P1566/ 54
Input Signal Circuit S Engine and ECT ECU
(DI−569)
(*1): 2JZ−GE engine

(*2): 3UZ−FE engine

DI−559
DI26V−05
PARTS LOCATION
DLC1
Cruise Control Switch

Engine and
ECT ECU
Cruise Control MAIN Indicator
Driver Side Junction Block

D IGN Fuse
D STOP Fuse
Stop Light Switch
I05326

DI−560
DI867−01
TERMINALS OF ECU
2JZ−GE Engine:
E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7
E2 E3 E4
E5 E6 E7
6
11
23
A01888

Ignition switch ON and
10 − 16 V
STP « E1 Depress brake pedal
G W « BR
G−W
(E5 − 6 « E3 − 17) Ignition switch OFF or
Below 1 V
Release brake pedal
ST1 « E1
ST1− Ignition switch ON and release brake pedal 10 − 16 V
B L « BR
B−L
(E5 − 11 « E3 − 17) Ignition switch OFF or depress brake pedal Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON 10 − 16 V
Ignition switch ON
6.9 − 9.8 V
CANCEL switch held ON
CCS « E1
R−L « BR Ignition switch ON
(E5 − 23 « E3 − 17) 4.7 − 6.9 V
SET/COAST switch held ON
Ignition switch ON
2.4 − 3.8 V
RES/ACC switch held ON

DI−561
3UZ−FE Engine:
E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
A14471

Ignition switch ON and
10 − 16 V
STP « E1 Depress brake pedal
G W « BR
G−W
(E5 − 4 « E5 − 7) Ignition switch OFF or
Below 1 V
Release brake pedal
ST1 « E1
ST1− Ignition switch ON and release brake pedal 10 − 16 V
B L « BR
B−L
(E5 − 8 « E5 − 7) Ignition switch OFF or depress brake pedal Below 1 V
Ignition switch ON 10 − 16 V
Ignition switch ON
6.9 − 9.8 V
CANCEL switch held ON
CCS « E1
R−Y « BR Ignition switch ON
(E5 − 31 « E5 − 7) 4.7 − 6.9 V
SET/COAST switch held ON
Ignition switch ON
2.4 − 3.8 V
RES/ACC switch held ON

DI−562
DI26X−17

1. Input Signal Circuit DI−569
2. Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit DI−563
SET not occurring or CANCEL occurring. 3. Stop Light Switch Circuit DI−564
(DTC is Normal) 4. Neutral Start Switch Circuit DI−261 (*1),
DI−333 (*2)
5. Engine and ECT ECU IN−30
SET not occurring or CANCEL occurring.

(DTC is not output)
Actual vehicle speed deviates above or below the set speed.
Gear shifting occurs frequently between 3rd and O/D when driving
on uphill road. (Hurting)
Cruise control not cancelled, even when brake pedal is de- 1. Stop Light Switch Circuit DI−564
pressed. 2. Engine and ECT ECU IN−30
1. Neutral Start Switch Circuit DI−261 (*1),

Cruise control not cancelled, even when transmission is shifted to
DI−333 (*2)
”N” position.
Cruise control not cancelled, even when clutch pedal is de-
pressed.
Control switch does not operate. 1. Input Signal Circuit DI−569

(SET/COAST, ACC/RES, CANCEL not possible) 2. Engine and ECT ECU IN−30
1. Throttle Cable
SET possible at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less, or CANCEL does not
operate at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less.
Poor response is ACCEL and RESUME modes. 1. Engine and ECT ECU IN−30
O/D does not resume, even though the road is not uphill. 1. Engine and ECT ECU IN−30
DTC memory is erased. 1. Engine and ECT ECU IN−30
1. Diagnosis Circuit
DTC is not output, or is output when should not be.
Cruise MAIN indicator light remains ON or falls to light up.


DI−563
DI26Y−06
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC P0500/21,23 Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit (2JZ−GE)
DTC P0501/21,23 Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit (3UZ−FE)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
2JZ−GE engine: See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−72.
3UZ−FE engine: See page DI−157.
S Combination meter
S Harness or connector between Engine and ECT ECU and
P0500/21, 23 Speed signal is not input to the Engine and ECT ECU while
P0501/21, 23 cruise control is set.
WIRING DIAGRAM

DI−564
DI868−01
DTC P1520/52 Stop light switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the brake pedal is depressed, the stop light switch sends a signal to the Engine and ECT ECU. When
the Engine and ECT ECU receives this signal, it cancels the cruise control.
A fail−safe function is provided so that the cancel functions normally, even if there is a malfunction in the stop
light signal circuit.
The cancel condition is that battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal STP.
When the brake is on, battery positive voltage is normally applied through the STOP fuse and stop light
switch to terminal STP of the Engine and ECT ECU, and the Engine and ECT ECU turns the cruise control
OFF.
If the harness connected to terminal STP has an open circuit, terminal STP will have battery positive voltage
and the cruise control will be turned OFF.
S Stop light switch
S Harness or connector between Engine and ECT ECU and
52 Stop light switch circuit.
stop light switch circuit

DI−565
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine and
J16 (*1) J15 (*1)
ECT ECU
J39 (*2) Driver Side J/B J36 (*2) (*3) 8
J/C J/C Stop Light Switch E6
6 IGN 7
A A 1J 1G E E 3 4
E5 ST1−
B−W B−O B−O B−L
(*4) 11
B−W Ignition Switch J7

Stop Light Switch (*3) 4
J/C
9 (*1) 7 (*2) (*4) 6
6 IG2 AM2 7 2 1 A A
IA1 IK1 E5 STP
G−W G−W
W−R
W−R W
Engine Room No.1 R/B Driver Side J/B
AM2 8 STOP 1
1 2
1 1 1H
B−L
ALT 1K (*1)
1 2 1A (*2)
1
W
Battery
(*1) : LHD Models

(*2) : RHD Models
(*3) : 3UZ−FE engine
(*4) : 2JZ−GE engine
I05639

DI−566
HINT:
In case of using the LEXUS hand−held tester, start the inspection from step 1 and in case of not using the
LEXUS hand−held tester, start from step 2.
1 Check stop light switch using LEXUS hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
Connect the LEXUS hand−held tester to the DLC3.
CHECK:
Check the stop light switch using DATALIST.
OK:
Condition Stop light switch 1 (Sub CPU) Stop light switch 2 (Sub CPU) Stop light switch 2 (Main CPU)
Depressed ON ON ON
Released OFF OFF OFF
HINT:
S Stop light SW 1 has a function to disconnect the connection (OFF) when depressing the pedal, howev-
er, engine and ECT ECU controls by the logic reverse, so with the LEXUS hand−held tester, it displays
ON.
S Stop light SW 1 indicates the input of ST1−terminal and Stop light SW 2 indicates the input of STP
terminal.

problem symptom table (See page DI−562).
NG
CHECK:
Check that stop light comes on when brake pedal is depressed, and turns off when brake pedal is released.
NG Check stop light system (See Pub. No. RM588E

on page BE−76).
OK

DI−567
3 Check voltage between terminal STP of engine and ECT ECU connector and
body ground.
2JZ−GE engine: PREPARATION:

(a) Remove the engine and ECT ECU with connectors still
connected.
ON
(b) Turn ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal STP of engine and ECT
ECU connector and body ground, when the brake pedal is de-
pressed and released.
(+) (−) OK:
Depressed 10 − 14 V
Released Below 1 V
STP
I04209
3UZ−FE engine:
ON
(+) (−) OK Proceed to next circuit inspection shown in

STP problem symptom table (See page DI−562).
I21104
NG

DI−568
4 Check wire harness and connector between terminal STP of engine and ECT
ECU and stop light switch, and terminal ST1−of engine and ECT ECU and stop
light switch (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace engine and ECT ECU (See

page IN−30).

DI−569
DI869−01
DTC P1566/ 54 Input signal circuit abnormal
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit carries the SET/COAST, RESUME/ACCEL and CANCEL signals (each voltage) to the engine
and ECT ECU.
S Stop light switch input signal abnormal.
P1566/ 54 S Engine and ECT ECU
S Cruise control switch input signal abnormal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
2JZ−GE engine:
Engine and
C15
ECT ECU
8 1 R−Y 23
CCS 4 R−Y
ID1 II1 E5 CCS
(*2) (*1)
9 2
ECC 5 BR
ID1 II1
CANCEL SET/COAST RES/ACC CRUISE (*2) (*1)
J4 (*1) BR
J28 (*2) J/C BR
E A A E
A A
J36 J9 J36 J9
BR
(*2) (*1) (*2) (*1)
J2
BR
J/C
7
BR (*3)
EA3
BR (*4) BR (*4)
BR (*3) BR
(*1): LHD Models ED EC

(*2): RHD Models
(*3): G.C.C. Contries
(*4): Ex. G.C.C. Contries
I21084

DI−570
3UZ−FE engine:
Engine and
C15
ECT ECU
8 1 R−Y 31
CCS 4 R−Y
ID1 II1 E5 CCS
(*1) (*2)
9 2
ECC 5 BR
ID1 II1
J4 J9 BR
J/C J/C
D D E E
BR
J49
BR J/C
7
BR B
EA3
B
BR
BR
ED EC
(*1): LHD Models
(*2): RHD Models
I21085

DI−571
1 Check voltage between terminal ST1− of engine and ECT ECU connector and
body ground.
2JZ−GE engine: PREPARATION:

(a) Remove the engine and ECT ECU with connectors still
connected.
ON (b) Turn ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal ST1− of engine and ECT
ST1−
ECU connector and body ground, when the brake pedal is de-
pressed and released.
(+) (−) OK:
Released 10 − 14 V
Depressed Below 1 V
I04212
3UZ−FE engine:
ON

ST1−
I21631
NG
2 Check for open in harness and connectors between terminal ST1− of engine and
ECT ECU and stop light switch (See page IN−30).
OK

DI−572
3 Check voltage between terminals CCS of engine and ECT ECU connector and
body ground.
PREPARATION:
2JZ−GE engine:
(a) Remove the engine and ECT ECU with connector still
connected.
ON
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals CCS of ECU connector
and body ground, when each of the SET/COAST, RESUME/
ACCEL and CANCEL is turned ON.
(+) (−) Switch position Resistance (V)
Neutral 10 − 16 V
RES/ACC 2.4 − 4.4 V
CCS SET/COAST 4.7 − 7.6 V

CANCEL 6.9 − 11.2 V
I04211
3UZ−FE engine:
ON
NG Proceed to next circuit inspection shown in

CCS problem symptoms table (See page DI−562)
I21632
OK

DI−573
4 Check control switch continuity.
PREPARATION:
RES/ACC (a) Remove steering wheel pad (See page SR−9).
(b) Disconnect the control switch connector.
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminals 4 and 5 of control switch
connector when control switch is operated.
Switch position Resistance (W)
Neutral ¥ (No continuity)
CANCEL
SET/COAST RES/ACC 220 − 260
4 5 SET/COAST 600 − 660
CANCEL 1,500 − 1,600
I05156
NG Replace control switch.
OK

DI−574
5 Check main switch continuity.
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove steering wheel pad (See page SR−9).
CRUISE MAIN
Switch (b) Disconnect the control switch connector.
CHECK:
Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5 of control switch
connector when main switch is held ON and OFF.
OK:
Switch position Tester connection Specified condition
OFF − No continuity
4 5
Hold ON 4−5 Continuity
I05126
OK
6 Check harness and connector between engine and ECT ECU and cruise control
switch, cruise control switch and body ground (See page IN−30).
OK

DI−575
7 Check cruise control indicator light (See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−584).
NG Replace combination meter.
OK

page IN−30).

DI−576
DI86A−01
Control switch circuit (Cruise control switch)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit carries the SET/COAST, RESUME/ACCEL and CANCEL signals (each voltage) to the engine
and ECT ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
2JZ−GE engine:
Engine and
C15
ECT ECU
8 1 R−Y 23
CCS 4 R−Y
ID1 II1 E5 CCS
(*2) (*1)
9 2
ECC 5 BR
ID1 II1
J4 (*1) BR
J28 (*2) J/C BR
E A A E
A A
J36 J9 J36 J9
BR
(*2) (*1) (*2) (*1)
J2
BR
J/C
7
BR (*3)
EA3
BR (*4) BR (*4)
BR (*3) BR
(*1): LHD Models ED EC

(*2): RHD Models
(*3): G.C.C. Contries
(*4): Ex. G.C.C. Contries
I21084

DI−577
3UZ−FE engine:
Engine and
C15
ECT ECU
8 1 R−Y 31
CCS 4 R−Y
ID1 II1 E5 CCS
(*1) (*2)
9 2
ECC 5 BR
ID1 II1
J4 J9 BR
J/C J/C
D D E E
BR
J49
BR J/C
7
BR B
EA3
B
BR
BR
ED EC
(*1): LHD Models
(*2): RHD Models
I21085

DI−578
1 Check voltage between terminals CCS of engine and ECT ECU connector and
body ground.
PREPARATION:
2JZ−GE engine:
(a) Remove the engine and ECT ECU with connector still
connected.
ON
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals CCS of Engine and ECT
ECU connector and body ground, when each of the SET/
COAST, RESUME/ACCEL and CANCEL is turned ON.
(+) (−) Switch position Resistance (V)
Neutral 10 − 16 V
RES/ACC 0.6 − 2.3 V
CCS SET/COAST 1.9 − 4.7 V

CANCEL 3.4 − 7.2 V
I04211
3UZ−FE engine:
ON
CCS I21632
NG Proceed to next circuit inspection shown in

problem symptoms table (See page DI−562)
OK

DI−579
2 Check control switch continuity.
PREPARATION:
RES/ACC (a) Remove steering wheel pad (See page SR−9).
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminals 4 and 5 of control switch
connector when control switch is operated.
Switch position Resistance (W)
Neutral ¥ (No continuity)
CANCEL
SET/COAST RES/ACC 60 − 70
4 5 SET/COAST 180 − 220
CANCEL 380 − 460
I05156
OK

DI−580
3 Check main switch continuity.
PREPARATION:
(a) Remove steering wheel center pad (See page SR−9).
CRUISE MAIN
Switch
CHECK:
Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5 of control switch
connector when main switch is held ON and OFF.
OK:
Switch position Tester connection Specified condition
OFF − No continuity
4 5
Hold ON 4−5 Continuity
I05126
OK
4 Check harness and connector between engine and ECT ECU and cruise control
switch, cruise control switch and body ground (See page IN−30).
OK
5 Check cruise control indicator light (See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−584).
OK

page IN−30).

DI−581
DI271−08
CRUISE MAIN Indicator Light Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the cruise control main switch is turned ON, CRUISE MAIN indicator light lights up.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Cruise Control Indicator J18 (*1)

(in Combination Meter) Driver Side J/B J37 (*2)
J/C
5 13
1 22
1D 1F
(*1) A A(*1)
W−B W−B (*2) B B (*2)
R−L
Driver Side J/B Ignition Switch (*2) (*1)
4 GAUGE 1
4 IG1 AM1 2
1D 1J
B−Y
A
J37
W−L J/C
A
Engine Room No.1 RIB Driver Side J/B
AM1 1 AM1 3 W−B
1 2 1 2
1 1 1J
B−L W
1K (*1)
1A (*2)
Battery IF II
(*1): LHD models

(*2): RHD models
I05641

DI−582
1 Check combination meter (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−105).
OK

page IN−30).

DI−583
DIAGNOSTICS − ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM
ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM

DI1AJ−24

Troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages.

P. DI−584
2 Check and Clear DTC (Pre check)

P. DI−585
Symptom
does not occur
P. IN−20
Symptom
occurs

P. DI−585
Malfunction code

P. DI−588 P. DI−592
8 Circuit Inspection and Part Inspection

P. DI−593 − DI−598
9
Repair
10
Confirmation Test
Step 2, 5 : Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the

LEXUS hand−held tester or LEXUS
End break−out−box.

DI−584
DI1AK−05

ENGINE IMMOBLISER Check Sheet
Inspector’s
:
Name
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date Vehicle Odometer Reading km

/ / miles
Brought In
Date Problem First Occurred / /
Frequency Problem Occurs Continuous Intermittent ( times a day)
Immobiliser is not set.

(Engine starts with key codes other than the registered key code.)
Symptoms
Engine does not start.
Malfunction
Check Item Normal Remains ON Does not Light Up
Indicator Lamp
1st Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code )

DTC Check
2nd Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code )

DI−585
DI2SY−02
PRE−CHECK
1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
(a) Description
Engine and ECT ECU controls the function of immobiliser
on this vehicle.
Data of the immobiliser or DTC can be read form DLC3 of
LEXUS hand the vehicle. When a trouble occurs on immobiliser, MIL
−held tester does not light up but DTC inspection is performed.
DLC3 F13542
Therefore when there seems to be a trouble on immobilis-
er, use LEXUS hand−held tester or SST to check and
troubleshoot it.
(b) Inspect the DLC3.

The vehicle’s engine and ECT ECU uses ISO 9141−2 for
communication.
The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with
SAEJ1962 and matches the ISO 9141−2 format.
DLC3
N09214
Tester connection condition Specified condition

7 (Bus Line) − 5 (Signal ground) During communication Pulse generation
4 (chassis Ground) − Body Always 1 W or less
5 (Signal Ground) − Body Always 1 W or less
16 (B+) − Body Always 9 − 14 V
HINT:
when you have connected the cable of OBD ll scan tool or LEX-
US hand−held tester to DLC3, turned the ignition switch ON
side or tool side.
S If communication is normal when the tool is
connected to another vehicle, inspect DLC3
on the original vehicle.
S If communication is still not possible when the
tool is connected to another vehicle, the prob-
lem is probably in the tool itself, so consult the
Service Department listed in the tool’s
instruction manual.
DI−586
2. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS
(a) Check the DTC (Using LEXUS hand−held tester).
(1) Prepare the OBD ll scan tool (complying with SAEJ
1978) or LEXUS hand−held tester.
(2) Connect the OBD ll scan tool or LEXUS hand−held
tester to DLC3 under the instrument panel lower
pad.
(3) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the OBD ll scan
tool or LEXUS hand−held tester switch ON.
(4) Use the OBD ll scan tool or LEXUS hand−held tes-
ter to check the DTCs and freeze frame data; note
them down. (For operating instructions, see the
OBD ll scan tool’s instruction book.)
DTCs.
(b) Check the DTC (Using diagnosis check wire)

(1) Turn ignition switch ON.
(2) Using SST, connect between terminals 13 (TC) and
4 (CG) of DLC 3.
SST 09843−18040
(3) Read the diagnostic trouble code from malfunction
indicator lamp.
DLC3 HINT:
N09214 S If a diagnostic trouble code is not output, check the TC ter-
minal circuit.
S Engine and ECT ECU controls the immobiliser function
on this vehicle, DTC is out put with engine data.
Normal code S As an example, the blinking patterns for codes; normal,

12 and 99 are shown in the charts.
0.25 Sec. 0.25 Sec.
BR3904

DI−587
0.5 Sec. 0.5 Sec. Malfunction Code (Example Code 12, 99)
4.5 Sec.
1.5 Sec. 2.5 Sec. One Cycle
I02680
(4) When DTC ”99” is output, there is a trouble of

immobiliser. Start troubleshooting referring to
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE.
HINT:
from the smaller numbered code and continue in order to the
larger.
(c) Clear the DTC.
The following operations will erase the DTCs and freeze
frame data.
S Operating the OBD ll scam tool (complying
with SAEJ1978) or LEXUS hand−held tester
to erase the codes. (See the OBD ll scan
tool’s instruction book for operating instruc-
tions.)
S Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI
fuse.

DI−588
DI1AM−21

DTC No.
(See page)
B2795 S Key
Unmatched key code
(DI−593) S Unregistered key inserted before
S Key
B2796
No communication in immobiliser system S Amplifier
(DI−594)
S Wirehaness
B2797 S Communication contents
Communication malfunction No.1
(DI−596) S Unregistered key inserted before
S Key
B2798
Communication malfunction No.2 S Amplifier
(DI−598)
S Wire haness
HINT:
To reduce the unnecessary exchange of engine and ECT ECU, check that a trouble occurs with the original
engine and ECT ECU at the time of exchanging engine and ECT ECU and the trouble will disappear with
a new engine and ECT ECU.

DI−589
DI26P−04
PARTS LOCATION
S The vehicle shown in this illustration is ”GS430”.
S All components of ”GS300” other than the ones used for engine are same as ”GS430”.
Engine and ECT ECU
Transponder Key Amplifier
Transponder Key Coil

D IGN Fuse
I01376

DI−590
DI86B−01
TERMINALS OF ECU
GS300
E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7
E2 E3 E4
17
E5 E6 E7
10 9
23 22 21
A01888

CODE − E1
G−B « BR Ignition Switch ON 10 − 14
(E7 − 23 « E3 − 17)
TXCT − E1
L−R « BR Ignition Switch ON 10 − 14
(E7 − 21 « E3 − 17)
RXCK − E1
B−W « BR Ignition Switch ON 10 − 14
(E7 − 22 « E3 − 17)

DI−591
GS430
E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
A14471

CODE − E1
G−B « BR Ignition Switch ON 10 − 14
(E6 − 31 « E3 − 7)
TXCT − E1
L−R « BR Ignition Switch ON 10 − 14
(E5 − 23 « E3 − 7)
RXCK − E1
B−W « BR Ignition Switch ON 10 − 14
(E5 − 24 « E13 − 7)

DI−592
DI1AP−24

Immobiliser is not set.
(Engine starts with key codes other than the registered key code.)
1. Key *1
2. Wire harness IN−30
Engine does not start. 3. Transponder key coil L BE−253
4. Amplifier
1. Security indicator *2
Security indicator is always ON. 2. Wire harness IN−30
Security indicator is always ON.
2 Transponder key coil L BE−253
(Although code has been registered in the automatic registration
3. Amplifier
mode, indicator is not OFF.)

Security indicator is OFF. 2 Transponder key coil L BE−253
(When DTC of immobiliser is output) 3. Amplifier
Security indicator is OFF. 1. Wire harness IN−30

(When DTC of immobiliser is not output) 2. Engine and ECT ECU IN−30
Security indicator is abnormally blinking.
*1 : Check that the key which did not start the engine has been registered and that it is possible to start with
other already registered key.
*2 : Finish the automatic registration mode because the mode might still remain.
L: LEXUS GS300 Repair Manual Pub. No. RM588E

DI−593
DI1AS−23
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC B2795/99 Unmatched Key Code

This DTC is output when an unregistered key is inserted. When this DTC is output, delete DTC and insert
the key that a customer keeps to check that B2795 is output.
When a key that outputs B2795 is found, register this key. when B2795 is not output, there is a possibility
that the unregistered key has been inserted before. (Engine and ECT ECU is normal.)
Inquire a customer the condition of using the system to find the cause of the trouble.
(Example: Another key has been inserted, etc..)

DI−594
DI1AT−25
DTC B2796/99 No Communication in Immobiliser system
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
S Key
S Transponder Key Coil
B2796/99 No communication S Transponder Key Amplifier
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine and
Transponder Key ECT ECU
Amplifier
23 (*1)
31 (*2)
2 G−B
CODE
E7 (*1)
E6 (*2)
22 (*1)
23 (*2)
3 B−W
RXCK
E7 (*1)
E5 (*2)
21 (*1)
24 (*2)
4 L−R
TXCT
E7 (*1)
E5 (*2)
(*2): 3UZ−FE engine I03114

DI−595
1 Check transponder key coil (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−253).
NG Replace transponder key coil.
OK
2 Check harness and connector between transponder key amplifier and ECU.
NG Repair or replace harness and connector.
OK
3 Does it operate normally after replacement of transponder key amplifier?
Yes Replace transponder key amplifier.
No
Replace ECU.

DI−596
DI1AU−17
DTC B2797/99 Communication Malfunction No.1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This code is detected when although the communication has been performed normally, an error occurs.
(Example. Some noise is included in communication line.)
S Wire Harness
B2797/99 Communication error S Transponder Key Amplifier
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine and
Amplifier
23 (*1)
31 (*2)
2 G−B
CODE
E7 (*1)
E6 (*2)
22 (*1)
23 (*2)
3 B−W
RXCK
E7 (*1)
E5 (*2)
21 (*1)
24 (*2)
4 L−R
TXCT
E7 (*1)
E5 (*2)
(*2): 3UZ−FE engine I03114

DI−597
1 Noise check
PREPARATION:
Insert the already registered master key in the key cylinder.
CHECK:
Using an oscilloscope or LEXUS hand−held tester, check that
noise is included in the signals sent to the CODE terminal of
ECM.
OK:
Noise No noise is detected.
I02681
NG Try to find the cause of the noise and remove it.
OK
2 Does the system operate normally after replacement of transponder key amplifi-
er?
No
Replace ECU.

DI−598
DI1AV−17
DTC B2798/99 Communication malfunction No.2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
S Key
S Transponder Key Coil
B2798/99 Communication error S Transponder Key Amplifier
S Wire harness
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine and
Amplifier
23 (*1)
31 (*2)
2 G−B
CODE
E7 (*1)
E6 (*2)
22 (*1)
23 (*2)
3 B−W
RXCK
E7 (*1)
E5 (*2)
21 (*1)
24 (*2)
4 L−R
TXCT
E7 (*1)
E5 (*2)
I03114

DI−599
1 Check transponder key coil (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−253).
NG Replace transponder key coil.
OK
2 Check harness and connector between transponder key amplifier and ECU.
NG Repair or replace harness and connector.
OK
3 Does the system operate normally after replacement of transponder key amplifi-
er?
No
Replace ECU.

DI−600
DIAGNOSTICS − BODY NO.1 CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY NO.1 CONTROL SYSTEM

DI29N−02

HINT:
This ECU is connected to the multiplex communication system. Therefore, be sure to check that there is no
troubles in the multiplex communication system before performing the troubleshooting.
Titles inside are titles of pages in this
Vehicle Brought to Workshop manual, with the page number indicated in
the bottom portion. See the indicated pages
1
Customer Problem Analysis
P. DI−601
Symptom does not

3
2 occur
Symptom Simulation
P. IN−20
Symptom
occur
4
Multiplex communication system inspection *
P. DI−734
*: Confirm that there is no trouble by
basic inspection and DTC check.
5
Problem Symptoms Table
P. DI−604
6
Circuit Inspection
P. DI−605
7
Repair
8
Confirmation Test
End
LEXUS hand−held tester.

DI−601
DI29O−04
BODY NO.1 CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet
Inspector’s name:
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date Vehicle / / km
Odometer Reading
Brought in Mile

□ Constant □ Sometimes ( times per day, month)
Frequency Problem Occurs □ Once only
□ Fine □ Cloudy □ Rainy □ Snowy
Weather Conditions Weather □ Various/ Others
When Problem
Occurred □ Hot □ Warm □ Cool
Outdoor Temperature
□ Cold (Approx. ˚F ( ˚C))
□ Seat Belt Warning
□ Power Window Control System
□ Power Door Lock Control System

Malfunction □ Double Locking System (Europe)
System
□ Theft Deterrent System
□ Wireless Door Lock Control System
□ Luggage compartment door opener system
□ Others

DI−602
DI29Q−05
TERMINALS OF ECU
BODY ECU No. 1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
25 15 14
I05039

ACC « GND
GR « W−B Ignition switch position is ACC. 10 − 14 V
(B5−15 « B5−11)
TR+ « GND 10 − 14 V
L « W−B Luggage compartment door opener switch ON.
(B5−2 « B5−11) (for 250 ms)
Theft Deterrent System is set, luggage compartment door key Voltage change
HORN « GND
G B«W
G−B W−B
B l k and
lock d unlock
l k switch
it h OFF.
OFF 10 − 14 V
(B5−1 « B5−11)
Luggage compartment door open. « Below 1 V
Security indicator light lights up.
(Only for 30 secs. in arming mode. (When the indicator light 3−6V
IND « GND flashes, engine immobilizer system operates.))
V«W
W−B
B
(B5−22 « B5−11) Security indicator light does not light up.
(Only for 30 secs. in arming mode. (When the indicator light Below 1 V
flashes, engine immobilizer system operates.))
HDCY « GND Hood is open. Below 1 V

V G«W
V−G W−B
B
(B5−9 « B5−11) Hood is closed. 10 − 14 V
LGCY « GND Luggage door is open. Below 1 V

R W«W
R−W W−B
B
(B5−10 « B5−11) Luggage door is closed. 10 − 14 V
TKUL « GND Luggage door unlock switch is turned. Below 1 V

LG B « W
LG−B W−B
B
(B5−16 « B5−11) Luggage door unlock switch is not turned. 10 − 14 V
TSW « GND Luggage opener S/W is operated. Below 1 V

V Y«W
V−Y W−B
B
(B5−17 « B5−11) Luggage opener S/W is not operated. 10 − 14 V
B2R « B2R2
P−B « W−B When buzzer is not sounded. Below 1 V
(B5−12 « B5−13)
SNOW « GND Snow switch (ECT pattern select switch) is SNOW. Below 1 V
G R « W−B
G−R W B
(B5−24 « B5−11) Snow switch (ECT pattern select switch ) is NORM. 10 − 14 V
PWR « GND PWR switch (ECT pattern select switch ) is PWR. Below 1 V
G W«W
G−W W−B
B
(B5−23 « B5−11) PWR switch (ECT pattern select switch ) is NORM. 10 − 14 V
RET « GND ((*)) Retract switch ON Below 1V

P G«W
P−G W−B
B
(B5−7 « B5−11) Retract switch ON 10 − 14 V
RSSI (B5−4) LG Wireless door lock ECU communication circuit −
RCO (B5−5) LG−R Wireless door lock ECU communication circuit −

DI−603
RDA (B5−6) P Wireless door lock ECU communication circuit −

MPX1 (B5−19) W Multiplex communication circuit −
(*): G.C.C. countries only

DI−604
DI29R−04

DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM
1. Double locking switch circuit DI−660
DI−690
DI−708
DI−728
2. Double locking motor circuit DI−658
Double locking system does not operate DI−688
DI−710
DI−730
3. Double locking system BE−18
4. Each door ECU IN−30
5. Body ECU No. 1 IN−30
OTHERS
1. Electrical retract switch circuit DI−605
2. Retract motor circuit DI−656
Mirror retract system does not operate
DI−686
1. Diagnosis circuit DI−617

DTC is not output, or is output when should not be.
1. Supplemental restraint system DI−605

Unlock cannot be operated when impact sensing
2. Body No.1 ECU IN−30

DI−605
DI86C−01
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Power source circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit provides power to operate the body ECU No. 1.
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models:
Driver Side J/B J13
Ignition Switch J/C
4 10
ACC 3 1J
RAD No.2
1H
GR D D GR
L−Y
2 AM1 1 5
IG1 4 ECU−IG
1J 1H 15 B5
W−L B−Y B−R ACC
Driver Side J/B
J7 J16
1 3 11
1 2 B B B B 1
1K 1J 2F IG
AM1 B−R
J/C J/C 1
B 4
2A BSUB
PFR DOOR
MPX−B 8
W R−L G−W 8 BECU
1 1 2B
1 2
Engine Room No.1 R/B 6
11
ECU−B1 2G GND
1 13
2 1 A A
2F
1 W−B
A
W−B J10
2 1 J8 J/C
1 1
ALT J/C
B−L
Body ECU No.1
Battery II IF
Passenger Side Junction Block

I21024

DI−606
RHD models: J38 J38

Driver Side J/B
J/C J/C
Ignition Switch
4 RADIO No.2 10
ACC 3 1J 1H
A A B B
L−Y GR GR GR
2 AM1 1 5
IG1 4 ECU−IG
1J 1H 15 B5
W−L B−Y B−R ACC
Driver Side J/B
J41 J31
1 3 11
1 2 E E C C 1
1A 1J 2F IG
AM1 B−R
J/C J/C 1
B 4
2A BSUB
PFR DOOR
MPX−B 8
W R−L G−W 8 BECU
1 1 2B
1 J32
2
J/C
A 11
ECU−B1 2G GND
1
2 1 13
A A 2F
1 W−B
2 1 A
J37
1 1 J42 J/C
ALT
J/C
B−L Body No.1
ECU
Battery IF II

I21026

DI−607
DI29U−04
Wireless door lock tuner circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The pressure of magnetic wave signals witchis sent from the taransmitter is checked in RSSI line.
The RCO line is used to transmit the signals which control power supply of the transmitter.
WIRING DIAGRAM
W6
Door Control Body ECU No. 1
(*2) Receiver
Passenger Side J/B L−Y 6 6 5
3
2 DOME 12 5 13 RCO B5 RCO
(*1) (*1) LG−R IM3 IL3 LG−R
2B 2H 2E IM3 +B (*2) (*1)
L−Y L−Y
(*2) (*1) 6
4 18 18
B−R Engine Room J/B No. 1
RDA IM3 IL3 B5 RDA
ECU−B1 P P
(*2) (*1)
1 1 17 17 4
5
RSSI IM3 IL3 B5 RSSI
LG LG
1 (*2) (*1)
B−L GND
A
W−B
J22 (*1)
J45 (*2)
Battery J/C
(*1): LHD models BM

(*2): RHD models
I21021

DI−608
DI29W−04
Luggage courtesy switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The luggage courtesy switch goes on when luggage compartment door is opened and goes off when lug-
gage compartment door is closed.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Luggage Opener Motor

and Luggage courtesy Body ECU No. 1
Switch
DIODE 3 10
2 GR R−W R−W
IC3 B5 LGCY
2 3
16 2
1 L L
IC1 B5 TR+
I21640

DI−609
DI29X−05
Luggage compartment door lock and unlock switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The luggage compartment door lock and unlock switch goes on when the luggage compartment door key
cylinder is turned to the unlock side with the key.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Body ECU No. 1

Luggage Compartment Door
Unlock Switch
7 16
W−B 1 2 LG−B LG−B
IC1 B5 TKUL
A
J21 (*1)
J44 (*2)
J/C
BK
*1: LHD Models

*2: RHD Models I21023

DI−610
DI29Y−07
Parking brake switch circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Body No.1 ECU

Parking Brake
Switch
21
1 Y−B Y−B
B5 PKB
Multi−Display
I21076

DI−611
DI29Z−06
Pattern select switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Body ECU No.1 detect the state of pattern select switch.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Pattern Select Body ECU No. 1

Switch
23
7 G−W
B5 PWR
W−B 24
3 (Except G.C.C.) 1 G−R
B5 SNOW
*1 5 (G.C.C.)
A
J18 *2
J/C
A *1: LHD Models
*2: RHD Models
A *3: 2JZ−GE engine
J32 (*3) *4: 3UZ−FE engine
W−B
J42 (*4)
J/C
II IF
I21077

DI−612
DI2A2−04
Theft deterrent horn circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
During warning of the theft deterrent system, the body ECU No.1 activates the theft deterrent horn.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Theft Deterrent Horn (*1)

9
1 P−B 2 SH
(*2) P
2B
Body ECU No.1
(*1): LHD models

(*2): RHD models
I05654

DI−613
DI2A8−05
Luggage opener switch circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Body ECU No. 1
J10
J/C Luggage Opener Switch
17
W−B *1 2 1 V−Y
B5 TSW
A A
W−B
*2
A
J8
J/C
W−B *1: LHD Models
*2: RHD Models
J32
J/C
IF IF
I21022

DI−614
DI2A9−05
PWS circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit is the power source of the master switch for the driver’s door and the door lock switch for the
passenger’s doors.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Master Switch
(*1) 9 (*2) 7
15 R−Y R−Y 5
PWS IB1 IL1 2G PWS
(*1)10 (*2) 13
4 R−Y R−Y
B IK1 IB1 2H
Body ECU No.1

Door Lock Control
Switch (P side)

(*1): LHD models
(*2): RHD models
I05661

DI−615
DI726−02
Mirror Retract Switch Circuit (G.C.C. countries only)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit detects the conditions of the mirror retract switch.
The operating condition of the mirror retract is input by the body ECU No. 1 and the input signals are sent
to the driver door ECU or the passenger door ECU.
Mirror retraction is controlled by the driver door ECU or the passenger door ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
M7 Body ECU No. 1

Mirror Retractor Switch
W−B P−G 7
4 3
B5 RET
A
J18
J/C
A
W−B
II
I21020

DI−616
HINT:
1 Check the mirror retract switch using hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
Connect the hand−held tester to the DLC3.
CHECK:
Check the mirror retract switch using DATA LIST.

NG
2 Check the mirror retract switch (See page BE−21).
NG Replace the mirror retract switch.
OK
3 Check wireharness and connector between body No. 1 ECU and mirror retract
switch (See page IN−30).
NG Repair or replace wireharness or connector.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on

problem symptoms table (See page
DI−604).

DI−617
DI72F−02
Diagnosis Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit sends a signal to the ECU that DTC output is required.
WIRING DIAGRAM
D2 J9 (*1)
DLC3 J38 (*2) Body ECU No. 1
J10 C(*1) J/C C(*1) 20
J/C 7 D (*2) D (*2)
SIL B5 OBD2
(*1) A A W−B (*1) 4 W−G
CG G (*4)
W−G (*5)
(*2)
W−B A
Passenger
Side J/B (*3) W−B
13 2F
W−B
A
J42
J/C
6 2G
J8
J/C
(*1): LHD models
II IF II (*2): RHD models
(*3): 2JZ−GE RHD models
(*4) 3UZ−FE LHD models
(*5): Except 3UZ−FE LHD models I21025

DI−618
1 Check voltage between terminals Tc and E1 of DLC3.
PREPARATION:
ON Turn ignition switch ON.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminals SIL(7) and CG(4) of DLC3.
OK:

DLC3
AB0119
N09214 I11292
NG
2 Check wireharness and connector between DLC3 and body ECU No. 1, DLC3 and
body ground (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace body ECU No. 1 (See page

DI−604).

DI−619
BODY NO.2 CONTROL SYSTEM

DI2AA−05

HINT:
1
P. See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−657
Symptom does not

3
2 occur
Symptom Simulation
P. IN−20
Symptom
occur
4
P. DI−734
5
P. See Pub No. RM588E on page DI−660
6
Circuit Inspection
P. DI−622
7
Repair
8
Confirmation Test
End

DI−620
DI2AD−05
TERMINALS OF ECU
BODY ECU No.2
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
25 15 14
I05039
TAIL « Body ground R−Y

R Y« Headlight control switch position is TAIL. Below 1 V
(B6−2 « Body ground) Body ground Headlight control switch position is except TAIL. 10 − 14 V
AUTO « Body ground Headlight control switch position is AUTO. Below 1 V

R«
(B6 3 « B
(B6−3 Body
d ground)
d)
Body ground Headlight control switch position is except AUTO. 10 − 14 V
LF « Body ground V−R

V R« Stop light, high mount stop light and taillight is normal. 10 − 14 V
(B6−4 « Body ground) Body ground Stop light, high mount stop light and taillight is wire break. Below 1 V
KSW « Body ground Y« Key, inserted. Below 1 V

(B6−5 « Body ground) Body ground Key, not inserted. 10 − 14 V
MIRS « Body ground V« Mirror Left/Right adjusting switch is operating to left 5V

(B6−7 « Body ground) Body ground Mirror Left/Right adjusting switch is not operating to right Below 1 V
MIRB « Body ground BR−B

BR B« Mirror switch is operating to to UP side 1.4 − 1.9 V
(B6−8 « Body ground) Body ground Mirror switch neutral position. 5V
Ignition switch position is ON.
Below 2 V
HRLY « Body ground R G«
R−G Light control switch HEAD position.
(B6−9 « Body ground) Body ground Ignition switch position is ON.
10 − 14 V
Light control switch OFF position.
MIRE « Body ground W«
Constant Below 1 V
(B6−6 « Body ground) Body ground
ALTL « Body ground Y R«

Y−R During engine is running. 10 − 14 V
(B6−10 « Body ground) Body ground Engine is stop Below 1 V
ACAN « Body ground LG−B « Taillight switch ON. Rheostat light control volume: dark opsition 10 − 14 V
(B6−11 « Body ground) Body ground Taillight switch ON. Rheostat light control volume: except dark
Below 1V
opsition
ILE « Body ground G« Each door is opened. Below 2 V

(B6−13 « Body ground) Body ground All doors are closed. 10 − 14 V
STP1 « Body ground G−W

G W« Brake is ON. Below 1 V
(B6−14 « Body ground) Body ground Brake is OFF. 10 − 14 V
RFOG « Body ground (*) R−W « Rear fog light switch is ON. Below 1 V
(B6 16 « Body
(B6−16 B d ground)
d) Body
B d ground
d
Rear fog light switch is OFF 10 − 14 V

DI−621
FFOG « Body ground G−W

G W« Front fog light switch is ON. Below 1 V
(B6−17 « Body ground) Body ground Front fog light switch is OFF. 10 − 14
MPX2
W Multiplex communication circuit. −
(B6−19)
RFGO « Body ground ((*)) G−Y

G Y « Body Light control switch is TAIL or HEAD and fog light switch ON. Below 1 V
(B16−25 « Body ground ground Light control switch is TAIL or HEAD and fog light switch OFF. 10 − 14
(*): Europe

DI−622
DI2AF−05
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit provides power to operate the Body ECU No. 2.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Ignition Switch
Driver Side J/B
1 ACC 3 1
AM1 3 ECU−IG
2 AM1 IG1 4
1A 1J 1J IG
W−L B−Y 1
Engine Room No.1 R/B Passenger Side J/B

W *1 9 4 6
MPX−B G−W 8
1 1 2B 2G 1H BECU
A *2 D G−W
R−L
A D
G−W
11 GND
ECU−B1
1G
1
13
*1
ALT J42 *1
J18 A W−B 1F
A
1 1 J/C J/C
*2
J8 *2 J32
J/C J/C A
B−L W−B Body ECU No. 2
W−B
*2 *1 *1 *2
Battery
II IF II IF
*1: LHD models

*2: RHD models
I05662

DI−623
DI2AG−05
Key unlock warning switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The key unlock warning switch goes on when the ignition key is inserted in the key cylinder and goes off when
the ignition key is removed.
The ECU operates the key confinement prevention function while the key unlock warning switch is on.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Body ECU No. 2

*1
J10 Key Unlock J9
J/C Warning Switch J/C
*1 *1 5
A A W−B Y A A Y
B6 KSW
*1 1 2 B B
*2 *2
J40
W−B *2 J/C
*2
A
J8
J/C
*1: LHD Models
*2: RHD Models
IF IG
I05663

DI−624
HINT:
In case of using the LEXUS hand−held tester, start the inspection from step 1 and incase of not using the
1 Check key unlock warning switch using LEXUS hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
Connect the LEXUS hand−held tester to the DLC 3.
CHECK:
Check the key unlock warning switch using DATA LIST.

problem symptoms table (See Pub. No. RM588E
on page DI−616).
NG
2 Check key unlock warning switch (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−31).
NG Replace the key unlock warning switch.
OK
3 Check wireharness and connector between key unlock warning switch and Body
ECU No. 2.
OK

problem symptoms table (See Pub. No.

DI−625
DI87M−01
Alternator L terminal circuit ( w/ DRL vehicle LHD models only)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Body No.2 ECU receives the alternator L signal from ECM through communication and outputs it to the Day
time running light relay.
Day time running light relay judjes whether the engine rotates or not with this alternator L signal and makes
the Day time running light turn ON and OFF.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Engine and Daytime Running

ECT ECU Body No.2 ECU Light Relay
26 10
Communication Y−R 8
E2 ALTL B6 CHG−
P−L
1
A15 L
Alternator
I05671

DI−626
HINT:
In case of using the LEXUS hand−held tester, start the inspection from step 1 and incase of not using the
1 Check generator L terminal output using LEXUS hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Check the generator L terminal output using DATA LIST.
Condition Generator L termnal

Engine running ON
Engine not running OFF

problem symptoms table (See Pub. No. RM588E
on page BE−3).
NG

DI−627
2 Check RL terminal of Engine and ECT ECU.
2JZ−GE engine: CHECK:

Check the voltage of RL terminal of Engine and ECT ECU.
OK:
Condition Voltage
Engine running 10 − 14V
RL Engine not running 0V
I04358
3UZ−FE engine:
RL
A14471
NG Replace the Body ECU No. 2.
OK
3 Check wireharness and connector between Engine and ECT ECU and generator.
OK
Repair or replace the alternator or regulater.

DI−628
DIAGNOSTICS − DRIVER DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM
DRIVER DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM

DI2BH−02

HINT:
1
P. DI−629
Symptom does not

3
2 occur
Symptom Simulation
P. IN−20
Symptom
occur
4
P. DI−734

5
P. DI−634
6
Circuit Inspection
P. DI−635
7
Repair
8
Confirmation Test
End

DI−629
DI2BI−10
DRIVER DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet
Inspector’s name:
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date Vehicle / / km
Odometer Reading
Brought in Mile

When Problem
Outdoor Temperature
□ Power Mirror Control System
Malfunction □ Power Door Lock Control System

System
□ Jam Protection System
□ Double Locking System (Europe)
□ Others

DI−630
DI2BJ−12
PARTS LOCATION
Power Window Master Switch

Memory Switch Driver Door ECU
Power Window Motor

Jam Protection Limit Switch Door Lock Assembly
Jam Protection Pulse Switch S Door Courtesy Switch
Courtesy Light S Door Unlock Detection Switch
S Door Lock Motor
S Europe models:
Double Lock Motor
S Europe models:
Double Lock Switch
I04587

DI−631
DI2BK−13
TERMINALS OF ECU
Driver Door ECU
D20 D19 D18
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
I03225

CPUB « GND
(D20−11 « D20−17) (*1) G−W « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
(D20−3 « D20−12) (*2)
BDR « GND
L−,B « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
(D18−1 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2))
CTYB « GND
R−Y « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
(D18−10 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2))
SIG « GND
B−R « W−B Ignition switch position is ON. 10 − 14 V
(D20−2 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2))
GND « Body Ground

W−B « Body
(D20−17 « Body Ground) (*1) Constant Below 1 V
Ground
(D20−12 « Body Ground) (*2)
MM « GND Set switch position is OFF. 10 − 14 V

GR « W
W−B
B
(D20−4 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) Set switch position is ON. Below 1 V
M1 « GND Memory Switch 1 position is OFF. 10 − 14 V

P«W
W−B
B
(D20−15 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) Memory Switch 1 position is ON. Below 1 V

P B«W
P−B W−B
B
(D20−14 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) Memory Switch 2 position is ON. Below 1 V
CTY « GND Driver door closed. 10 − 14 V

R G«W
R−G W−B
B
(D19−15 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) Driver door opened. Below 1 V
KL « GND Door key lock and unlock switch position is OFF. Below 1 V
(D18 4 « D20
(D18−4 D20−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2)) P B«W
P−B W−B
B
Door key lock and unlock switch position is LOCK. 10 − 14 V
KUL « GND Door key lock and unlock switch position is OFF. Below 1 V
(D18 5 « D20
(D18−5 D20−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2)) P G«W
P−G W−B
B
Door key lock and unlock switch position is UNLOCK. 10 − 14 V
CYL « GND
R−W « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
(D18−12 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2))

DI−632
Ignition switch position is ON. OFF Below 1 V

MUP « GND
L W«W
L−W W−B
B P
Power window
i d switch
it h (Driver
(D i side)*
id )* position
iti
(D19−5 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) UP 10 − 14 V
Ignition switch position is ON. OFF Below 1 V

MDN « GND
L B«W
L−B W−B
B P
Power window
i d switch
it h (Driver
(D i side)*
id )* position
iti
(D19−4 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) DOWN 10 − 14 V
ML « GND OFF 10 − 14 V
(D18 6 « D20
(D18−6 D20−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2)) LG B « W
LG−B W−B
B D
Door lock
l k control
t l switch*
it h* position
iti
LOCK Below 1 V
MUL « GND OFF 10 − 14 V

(D18 7 « D20
(D18−7 D20−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2)) LG R « W
LG−R W−B
B D
Door lock
l k control
t l switch*
it h* position
iti
UNLOCK Below 1 V
WLSW « GND UNLOCK Below 1 V

Y G«W
Y−G W−B
B Wi d
Window lock
l k switch*
it h* position
iti
(D19−7 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) LOCK 10 − 14 V
UP « GND Power window (Driver side)is not operating. Below 1 V

R«W
W−B
B
(D18−2 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) Power window (Driver side) is operating upward. 10 − 14 V
DN « GND Power window (Driver side) is not operating. Below 1 V

G«W
W−B
B
(D18−11 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) Power window (Driver side) is operating downward. 10 − 14 V
Outside rear view mirror (Driver side) is not operating.
B l
Below 1V
DMVR « GND Outside rear view mirror (Driver side) is operating to down or
LG−B « W−B
(D20−8
(D20 D20−17(*1),
8 « D20 12(*2))
17( 1), 12( 2)) right.
Outside rear view mirror (Driver side) is operating to up. 10 − 14 V
Outside rear view mirror (Driver side) is not operating.
B l
Below 1V
DM+R « GND Outside rear view mirror (Driver side) is operating to up or left.
LG R « W
LG−R W−B
B
(D20−7 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) Outside rear view mirror (Driver side) is operating to down or
10 − 14 V
right.
DMHR « GND Outside rear view mirror (Driver side) is not operating.
B l
Below 1V
(D20−16
(D20 16 « D20−17(*1),
D20 17( 1), LG « W
W−B
B Outside rear view mirror (Driver side) is operating to up or left.
12(*2)) Outside rear view mirror (Driver side) is operating to left. 10 − 14 V
Power door lock (Driver side) is not operating.
A+ « GND B l
Below 1V
G−R
G R « W−B
W B Power door lock (Driver side) is operating to unlock.
(D18 8 « D20
(D18−8 D20−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2)
Power door lock (Driver side) is operating to lock. 10 − 14 V
A− « GND Power door lock (Driver side) is not operating.

B l
Below 1V
(D18−17
(D18 17 « D20
D20−17(*1),
17( 1), G−B
G B«W
W−B
B Power door lock (Driver side) is operating to lock.
12(*2)) Power door lock (Driver side) is operating to lock. 10 − 14 V
LSW « GND Driver door is locked. 10 − 14 V

GR « W
W−B
B
(D18−3 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) Driver door is unlocked. Below 1 V
Ignition switch position is OFF.
DVC « GND Below 1 V
R«W
W−B
B After 30 seconds from door is closed.
(D19 8 « D20
(D19−8 D20−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2)
Ignition switch position is ON. 4−6V
OFF 10 − 14 V
Ignition switch position is ON. UP Below 1 V
DT1 « GND
GR G « W
GR−G W−B
B P
Power window
i d switch
it h (FrRH)
(F RH) position
iti
(D19−3 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) DOWN Below 1 V
AUTO Below 1 V
*: Power Window Master Switch

DI−633

OFF 10 − 14 V
DT2 « GND
GR R « W
GR−R W−B
B P
Power window
i d switch
it h (RrRH)
(R RH) position
iti
(D19−2 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) DOWN Below 1 V
AUTO Below 1 V
OFF 10 − 14 V
DT1 « GND
GR G « W
GR−G W−B
B P
Power window
i d switch
it h (RrDriver
(R D i side)
id ) position
iti
(D19−1 « D20−17(*1), 12(*2)) DOWN Below 1 V
AUTO Below 1 V
LMT « GND Window full−close position 10 − 14 V

(D19 12 « D20
(D19−12 D20−17(*1),
17(*1) W G«W
W−G W−B
B
12(*2)) Except window full−close position Below 1 V
PLS « GND During the power window is operation. Pulse Generation

(D19−13
(D19 13 « D20
D20−17(*1),
17( 1), W«W
W−B
B Power window is not operated. SW ON Below 1 V
12(*2)) SW OFF 10 − 14 V
Dirver side door double lock is not operating. Below 1 V
AI+ « GND
G−R
G R « W−B
W B Dirver side door double lock is not operating to set 10 − 14 V
(D18 9 « D20
(D18−9 D20−17)
17) (*1)
Dirver side door double lock is not operating to unset Below 1V
Dirver side door double lock is not operating Below 1 V
AI− « GND
G−B
G B«W
W−B
B Dirver side door double lock is not operating to set Below 1V
(D18 18 « D20
(D18−18 D20−17)
17) (*1)
Dirver side door double lock is not operating to unset 10 − 14 V
VSSR « DE2 G O « W−B

G−O W B ((*1)
1) Dirver side mirror moves upper most position Below 2 V
(D20−1 « D20−13) Y−R « W−B (*2) Dirver side mirror moves lower most position 4−6V
HSSR « DE2 Y−R

Y R«W W−B
B ((*1)
1) Dirver side mirror moves left most position Below 2 V
(D20−10 « D20−13) G−O « W−B (*2) Dirver side mirror moves right most position 4−6V
DBLS « GND Driver side door double lock is set Below 1V

W«W
W−B
B
(D20−5 « D20−17) (*1) Driver side door double lock is unset 10 − 14 V
MR « GND
MR− Outer rear view mirror retact switch OFF Below 1V
GR « W
W−B
B
(D18−9 « D20−12) (*3) Outer rear view mirror retact switch ON 10 − 14 V
MR+ « GND Outer rear view mirror retact switch OFF Below 1V
L R«W
L−R W−B
B
(D18−18 « D20−12) (*3) Outer rear view mirror retact switch ON 10 − 14 V
O (*1)
MPX1 (D20−9) Multiplex communication system −
L−O (*2)
L−O (*1)
MPX2 (D20−18) Multiplex communication system −
O (*2)
(*1): w/ Double locking system

(*2): w/o Double locking system
(*3): G.C.C. countries only

DI−634
DI2BL−11

Power Mirror Control System:
1. Mirror retract motor circuit DI−656
Mirror retract system does not operate (G.C.C countries)
2. Driver door ECU IN−30

DI−635
DI878−01
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit provides power to operate the driver door ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models:
Driver Door ECU
5 1
L−B L−B
IB1 D18 BDR
Driver Side J/B J7
J/C
1 ECU−IG 5 13 2
B B B−R
1J 1H IB1 D20 SIG
B−R B−R
(*1) 11
1 (*2) 3
G−W G−W
Ignition Switch B−Y IB1 D20 CPUB
3
W ACC
W−L 2 AM1
IG1 4
Driver Side J/B

3 AM1
2 1
1J
D FR 1
2 Passenger Side J/B
Door
1F 1A
4 9
Engine Room No.1 R/B 2G 2B
G−W
1 ALT 2 Engine Room No.1 R/B
1 1
ECU−B1 MPX−B
R−L
B−L 1 1 1
1 2 1 2
J8 J10
J/C J/C (*1) 17
4 (*2) 12
A A A W−B
W−B IB1 W−B D20 GND
W−B
Battery
IF

I21079

DI−636
RHD models:
Driver Door ECU
5 1
L−B
IL1 D18 BDR
J41 L−B
Driver Side J/B
J/C
1 ECU−IG 5 13 2
E E
1J 1H IL1 D20 SIG
B−R B−R B−R
(*1)11
1 (*2) 3
Ignition Switch IL1 D20 CPUB
B−Y G−W G−W
ACC 3 J41 J41
2 AM1 J/C
J/C
W−L
IG1 4 A A D D
W
Driver Side J/B G−W
3 AM1 1
2
1J G−W
D FR
2 Door 1 Passenger Side J/B
1F 1A
4 8
2G 2B
ALT 2 G−W
1
1 1 Engine Room No.1 R/B
ECU−B1 MPX−B
1 R−L 1 1
B−L 1 2
J32
J/C (*1) 11
4 (*2) 12
A
IL1 D20 GND
Battery W−B W−B
IF

I21078

DI−637
DI87A−01
Door lock motor circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models:
(*1) D16 Driver Door ECU

(*2) D22
Door Lock Motor
17
1 (*1) G−B A−
D18
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
2 (*1) G−R
D18 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 BR−B LSWE
D18
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
4 (*1) G (*1)
D18 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)
4
Lock 5 (*1) P−B KL
D18
Door Key Lock and 1 (*2)
Unlock Switch 5
6 (*1) P−G
D18 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)
(*1) : w/o Double locking system

(*2): w/ Double locking system I04890

DI−638
RHD models:

(*2) D23
Door Lock Motor
17
5 (*1) G−B A−
D18
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
6 (*1) G−R
D18 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 (*2) BR−B LSWE
D18
4 (*1)
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
3 (*1) G (*1)
D18 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)

D18
Unlock Switch 5
1 (*1) P−G
D18 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)

HINT:
1 Check door lock motor using LEXUS hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Check that the door lock motor can operate in an ACTIVE TEST.

problem symptom table. (See Pub. No. RM588E
on page DI−616)
NG

DI−639
2 Check door lock motor

(w/o double locking system: See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−148
w/ double locking system: See page BE−12).
NG Replace the door lock motor.
OK
3 Check wireharness and connector between door lock motor and driver door
ECU.
OK

problem symptom table. (See Pub. RM588E
on page DI−616).

DI−640
DI879−01
Door unlock detection switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The door unlock detection switch is built in the door lock motor assembly. This switch is ON when the door
lock knob is in the unlock position and OFF when the lock knob is in the lock position. The ECU detects the
door lock knob conditions is this circuit. It is used as one of the operating conditions for the key confinement
prevention function.
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models:

(*2) D22
Door Lock Motor
17
1 (*1) G−B A−
D18
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
2 (*1) G−R
D18 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 BR−B LSWE
D18
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
4 (*1) G (*1)
D18 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)
4
D18
Unlock Switch 5
6 (*1) P−G
D18 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)


DI−641
RHD models:

(*2) D23
Door Lock Motor
17
5 (*1) G−B A−
D18
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
6 (*1) G−R
D18 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 (*2) BR−B LSWE
D18
4 (*1)
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
3 (*1) G (*1)
D18 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)

D18
Unlock Switch 5
1 (*1) P−G
D18 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)

HINT:
1 Check door unlock detection switch using LEXUS hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Check the door unlock detection switch using DATA LIST.

on page DI−616)
NG

DI−642
2 Check door unlock detection switch.

w/ double locking system: See page BE−12)
OK
3 Check wireharness and connector between door unlock detection switch and
driver door ECU.
OK

problem symptom table. (See Pub. RM588E
on page DI−616)

DI−643
DI87B−01
Door key lock and unlock switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The door key lock and unlock switch is built in the door key cylinder. When the key is turned to the lock side,
terminal 3 of the switch is grounded and when the key is turned to the unlock side, terminal 2 of the switch
is grounded.
Door key lock and unlock switch can be checked using DTC check. (Refer to DI−769)
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models:

(*2) D22
Door Lock Motor
17
1 (*1) G−B A−
D18
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
2 (*1) G−R
D18 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 BR−B LSWE
D18
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
4 (*1) G (*1)
D18 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)
4
D18
Unlock Switch 5
6 (*1) P−G
D18 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)


DI−644
RHD models:

(*2) D23
Door Lock Motor
17
5 (*1) G−B A−
D18
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
6 (*1) G−R
D18 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 (*2) BR−B LSWE
D18
4 (*1)
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
3 (*1) G (*1)
D18 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)

D18
Unlock Switch 5
1 (*1) P−G
D18 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)

1 Check the door key lock and unlock switch using DTC check

problem symptom table (See Pub. No. RM588E
on page DI−616).
NG

DI−645
2 Check door key lock and unlock switch.

NG Replace the door key lock and unlock switch.
NG
3 Check wireharness and connector between door key lock and unlock switch and
driver door ECU.
OK

problem symptom table. (See Pub. No.
RM588E on page DI−616)

DI−646
DI2BR−13
Door courtesy light and courtesy switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The door courtesy switch goes on when the door is opened and goes off when door is closed.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Driver Door ECU
Door Courtesy Light +B

10
2 1 R−Y
D18
CTYB
12
R−W CYL
D18
Door Courtesy Switch

15
(*1) 1 (*1) 2 R−G
D19 CPU
(*2) 4 11 (*2) CTY
14
W−B CTYE
D19

(*2) w/ Double locking system
I03216

DI−647
1 Check operation of door courtesy light.
CHECK:
Check that door courtesy light comes on when door opened, and goes off when door is closed.
OK:
Must be operated normally.

on page DI−616).
NG
2 Check courtesy light (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−66).
NG Replace the courtesy light.
OK
3 Check courtesy switch

(w/o Double locking system: See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−66
w/ Double locking system: See page BE−3).
NG Replace the courtesy switch.
OK

DI−648
4 Check wireharness and connector between courtesy light and driver door ECU,
courtesy switch and driver door ECU.
OK

problem symptoms table.
(See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−616)

DI−649
DI2BS−13
Power window motor circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
( ): RHD Models
Power Window Motor Driver Door ECU
2
1 (2) R
D18 UP
Power WIndow
Motor 11
2 (1) G DN
D18
Pulse SW 13
3 W PLS
D19
Limit SW 12
4 W−G
D19 LMT
16
5 BR−B
D19 SGND
I03214

DI−650
DI2BT−12
Jam protection limit switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Jam protection limit switch is built−in the power window motor. This switch functions to turn ”OFF” before the
top dead center, and ECU reads this ”OFF” signal resulting in closing the window fully.
WIRING DIAGRAM
( ): RHD Models
2
1 (2) R
D18 UP
Power WIndow
Motor 11
2 (1) G DN
D18
Pulse SW 13
3 W PLS
D19
Limit SW 12
4 W−G
D19 LMT
16
5 BR−B
D19 SGND
I03214

DI−651
DI2BU−12
Jam protection pulse switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Jam protection pulse switch is built−in the power window motor. Pulse switch outputs ON/OFF pulse when
the motor rotates.
WIRING DIAGRAM
( ): RHD Models
2
1 (2) R
D18 UP
Power WIndow
Motor 11
2 (1) G DN
D18
Pulse SW 13
3 W PLS
D19
Limit SW 12
4 W−G
D19 LMT
16
5 BR−B
D19 SGND
I03214

DI−652
DI87C−01
Mirror motor circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models:
Mirror Motor Driver Door ECU
13
E1 11 BR (*3)
D20 DE2
PositionSensor(Horizontal)
Y−R (*1) 10
HSR 10 B−O (*2)
D20 HSSR
8
VC 8 R (*3)
D19 DVC
B−O (*1) 1
VSR 9 Y−R (*2), (*3)
D20 VSSR
7
Position Sensor (Vertical)
2 LG−R DM+R
D20
COM
8
MV 6 LG−B
D20 DMVR
16
MH 1 LG
D20 DMHR

(*2): w/o Double locking sytem
(*3): w/ Driving position memory I03219

DI−653
RHD models:
13
E1 11 BR (*1)
D20 DE2
10
HSR 10 Y−R (*1)
D20 HSSR
8
VC 8 O (*1)
D19 DVC
1
VSR 9 B−O (*1)
D20 VSSR
7
2 LG−R DM+R
D20
COM
8
MV 6 LG−B
D20 DMVR
16
MH 1 LG
D20 DMHR
(*1): w/ Driving position memory

I03219

DI−654
DI87E−01
Mirror position sensor circuit (W/ memory )
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This position detected by the mirror position sensor will be memorized in the seat ECU. This sensor is
equipped in the mirror in spite of the existence of the memory function.
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models:
13
E1 11 BR (*3)
D20 DE2
Y−R (*1) 10
HSR 10 B−O (*2)
D20 HSSR
8
VC 8 R (*3)
D19 DVC
B−O (*1) 1
VSR 9 Y−R (*2), (*3)
D20 VSSR
7
2 LG−R DM+R
D20
COM
8
MV 6 LG−B
D20 DMVR
16
MH 1 LG
D20 DMHR

(*2): w/o Double locking sytem
(*3): w/ Driving position memory I03219

DI−655
RHD models:
13
E1 11 BR (*1)
D20 DE2
10
HSR 10 Y−R (*1)
D20 HSSR
8
VC 8 O (*1)
D19 DVC
1
VSR 9 B−O (*1)
D20 VSSR
7
2 LG−R DM+R
D20
COM
8
MV 6 LG−B
D20 DMVR
16
MH 1 LG
D20 DMHR

I03219

DI−656
DI87D−01
Mirror retract motor circuit (G.C.C. Countries only)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Remote Control
Mirror LH Driver Door ECU
14 18
L−R
D18 MR+
9
15 G−B
D18 MR−
I21466
HINT:
1 Check mirror retract motor using hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
Connect the mirror retract hand−held tester to the DLC3.
CHECK:
Check the mirror retract motor can operate in an ACTIVE TEST.

problem symptoms table. (See page DI−668)
NG

DI−657
2 Check mirror retract motor. (See page BE−21)
OK
3 Check wireharness and connector between mirror retract motor and driver door
ECU.
OK

(See page DI−634)

DI−658
DI6UA−04
Double lock motor circuit (Europe)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Lock Motor and Switch LH Driver Door ECU
7 9
GR
D18 Al+
18
10 L−O
D18 Al−
5
W
D18 DBLS
9
15
BR−B
D18 LSWE
3 B
I21083

DI−659
1 Check double lock motor (See page BE−18).
NG Replace the double lock motor.
OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between double lock motor and driver door
ECU.
OK

problem symptoms table

DI−660
DI6R5−05
Double lock switch circuit (Europe)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Lock Motor and Switch LH BODY ECU
7 9
GR
D18 Al+
18
10 L−O
D18 Al−
5
W
D18 DBLS
9
15
BR−B
D18 LSWE
3
I21083

DI−661
1 Check double lock switch (See page BE−18).
OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between double lock switch and driver ECU.
OK

DI−634).

DI−662
DIAGNOSTICS − PASSENGER DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM
PASSENGER DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM

DI2ES−02

HINT:
1
P. DI−663
Symptom does not

3
2 occur
Symptom Simulation
P. IN−20
Symptom
occur
4
P. DI−734
basic inspection and DTC check
5
P. DI−668
6
Circuit Inspection
P. DI−669
7
Repair
8
Confirmation Test
End

DI−663
DI2ET−06
PASSENGER DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet
Inspector’s name:
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date Vehicle / / km
Odometer Reading
Brought in Mile

When Problem
Outdoor Temperature
□ Power Mirror Control System
Malfunction □ Power Door Lock Control System

System
□ Double Locking System
□ Others

DI−664
DI2FS−10
PARTS LOCATION
Door Lock Assembly

S Door Courtesy Switch
S Door Unlock Detection Switch
S Door Lock Motor
S Europe models:
Passenger Door ECU
Double Lock Motor
Power Window Switch S Europe models:
Double Lock Switch
Power WIndow Motor

Jam Protection Limit Switch
Jam Protection Pulse Switch
Courtesy Light
I04588

DI−665
DI2EV−11
TERMINALS OF ECU
PASSENGER DOOR ECU
F11 F12 F13
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
I03225

CPUB « GND
(F13−11 « F13−17) (*1) G−W « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
F13−12 « F13−12) (*2)
BDR « GND
L−,B « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
(F11−1 « F13−17 (*1), 12(*2))
CTYB « GND
R−Y « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
(F11−10 « F13−17(*1), 12 (*2))
SIG « GND
B−R « W−B Ignition switch position is ON. 10 − 14 V
(F13−2 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2))
GND « Body Ground

W−B « Body
(F13−17(*1), 12(*2) « Constant Below 1 V
Ground
Body Ground)
MM « GND Set switch position is OFF. 10 − 14 V

GR « W
W−B
B
(F13−4 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Set switch position is ON. Below 1 V

P«W
W−B
B
(F13−15 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Memory Switch 1 position is ON. Below 1 V

P B«W
P−B W−B
B
(F13−14 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Memory Switch 2 position is ON. Below 1 V

R G«W
R−G W−B
B
(F12−15 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Driver door opened. Below 1 V
KL « GND Door key lock and unlock switch position is OFF. Below 1 V
P B«W
P−B W−B
B
(F11−4 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Door key lock and unlock switch position is LOCK. 10 − 14 V
KUL « GND Door key lock and unlock switch position is OFF. Below 1 V
P G«W
P−G W−B
B
(F11−5 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Door key lock and unlock switch position is UNLOCK. 10 − 14 V
CYL « GND
R−W « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
(F11−12 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2))

DI−666

OFF Below 1 V
MUP « GND Power window switch (Front passenger side)
side)* posi-
L W«W
L−W W−B
B
(F12−5 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) tion
UP 10 − 14 V

OFF Below 1 V
MDN « GND Power window switch (Front passenger side)
side)* posi-
L B«W
L−B W−B
B
(F12−4 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) tion
DOWN 10 − 14 V
ML « GND OFF 10 − 14 V
(F11 6 « F13
(F11−6 F13−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2)) LG B « W
LG−B W−B
B D
Door lock
l k control
t l switch*
it h* position
iti
LOCK Below 1 V
MUL « GND OFF 10 − 14 V

LG R « W
LG−R W−B
B D
Door lock
l k control
t l switch*
it h* position
iti
(F11−7 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) UNLOCK Below 1 V
WLSW « GND UNLOCK Below 1 V

Y G«W
Y−G W−B
B Wi d
Window lock
l k switch*
it h* position
iti
(F12−7 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) LOCK 10 − 14 V
UP « GND Power window (Front passenger side) is not operating. Below 1 V

R«W
W−B
B
(F11−2 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Power window (Front passenger side) is operating upward. 10 − 14 V
DN « GND Power window (Front passenger side) is not operating. Below 1 V

G«W
W−B
B
(F11−11 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Power window (Front passenger side) is operating downward. 10 − 14 V
Outside rear view mirror (Front passenger side) is not operating.
B l
Below 1V
Outside rear view mirror (Front passenger side) is operating to
DMVR « GND
LG−B
LG B«W
W−B
B down or right.
(F13 8 « F13
(F13−8 F13−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2))
10 − 14 V
up.
Outside rear view mirror (Front passenger side) is operating to Below 1 V
DM+R « GND
LG−R
LG R«W
W−B
B up or left.
(F13 7 « F13
(F13−7 F13−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2))
10 − 14 V
down or right.
Outside rear view mirror (Front passenger side) is operating to Below 1 V
DMHR « GND
LG « W
W−B
B up or left.
(F13 16 « F13
(F13−16 F13−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2))
10 − 14 V
left.
Power door lock (Front passenger side) is not operating.
A+ « GND B l
Below 1V
G−R
G R « W−B
W B Power door lock (Front passenger side) is operating to unlock.
(F11 8 « F13
(F11−8 F13−17
17 (*1),
(*1) 12 (*2)
Power door lock (Front passenger side) is operating to lock. 10 − 14 V
Power door lock (Front passenger side) is not operating.
A− « GND B l
Below 1V
G−B
G B«W
W−B
B Power door lock (Front passenger side) is operating to lock.
(F11 17 « F13−17(*1),
(F11−17 F13 17(*1) 12(*2))
Power door lock (Front passenger side) is operating to lock. 10 − 14 V
LSW « GND Driver door is locked. 10 − 14 V

GR « W
W−B
B
(F11−3 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Driver door is unlocked. Below 1 V
Ignition switch position is OFF.
DVC « GND Below 1 V
R«W
W−B
B After 30 seconds from door is closed.
(F12 8 « F13
(F12−8 F13−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2)
Ignition switch position is ON. 4−6V
*: Power Window Master Switch

DI−667

OFF 10 − 14 V
DT1 « GND
GR G « W
GR−G W−B
B P
Power window
i d switch
it h (FrRH)
(F RH) position
iti
(F12−3 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) DOWN Below 1 V
AUTO Below 1 V
OFF 10 − 14 V
DT2 « GND
GR R « W
GR−R W−B
B P
Power window
i d switch
it h (RrRH)
(R RH) position
iti
(F12−2 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) DOWN Below 1 V
AUTO Below 1 V
OFF 10 − 14 V
ON
DT1 « GND Power window switch (RrFront passenger side) posi- UP Below 1 V
GR G « W
GR−G W−B
B
(F12−1 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) tion DOWN Below 1 V
AUTO Below 1 V

W G«W
W−G W−B
B
(F12−12 « F13−17(*1), 12(*2)) Except window full−close position Below 1 V
During the power window is operation. Pulse Generation
PLS « GND
W«W
W−B
B Power window is not operated. SW ON Below 1 V
(F12 13 « F13
(F12−13 F13−17(*1),
17(*1) 12(*2))
SW OFF 10 − 14 V
Front passenger side double lock is not operating Below 1 V
A1+ « GND
G−R
G R « W−B
W B Front passenger side double lock is operating to unset Below 1 V
(F13 9 « F13
(F13−9 F13−12)
12) (*2)
Front passenger side double lock is operating to set Below 1 V
Front passenger side double lock is not operating 10 − 14 V
A1− « GND
G−B«
G B WW−B
B Front passenger side double lock is operating to unset 10 − 14 V
(F13 18 « F13
(F13−18 F13−12)
12) (*2)
Front passenger side double lock is operating to set Below 1 V
Front passenger side outer rear view mirror moves upper most
Below 2 V
VSSR « PE2 Y R ((*1)
Y−R 1) « W
W−B
B position
(F11−1 « F13−13) B−O (*2) « W−B Front passenger side outer rear view mirror moves lower most
4−6V
position
Front passenger side outer rear view mirror moves left most
Below 2 V
HSSR « PE2 B O ((*1)
B−O 1) « W
W−B
B position
(F11−10 « F13−13) Y−R (*2) « W−B Front passenger side outer rear view mirror moves right most
4−6V
position
DBLS « GND Front passenger side door double lock is set 10 − 14 V

W«W
W−B
B
(F13−5 « F13−12) (*2) Front pasenger side door double lock is not unset 10 − 14 V
WR « GND ((*2)
WR− 2) Outer rear view mirror retact switch OFF Below 1V
GR « W
W−B
B
(F13−9 « F13−1) Outer rear view mirror retact switch ON 10 − 14 V
WR+ « GND ((*2)

2) Outer rear view mirror retact switch OFF Below 1V
Y«W
W−B
B
(F13−18 « F13−17) Outer rear view mirror retact switch ON 10 − 14 V
MPX1 (F13−9) O Multiplex communication system −
MPX2 (F13−18) L Multiplex communication system −
(*3): G.C.C. countries

DI−668
DI2EW−08

POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Retract motor circuit DI−686
Mirror retract system does not operate
2. Pssenger door ECU

DI−669
DI87F−01
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit provides power to operate the passenger door ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models:
Passenger Side J/B Front Passenger Door ECU
1 P FR DOOR 2 5 1
B
2A 2F IK1 F13 BDR
L−B L−B
J7 J16
J/C J/C
13 2
B B B B
IK1 F11 SIG
B−R B−R B−R
B−R
Ignition Switch
Driver Side J/B
ACC 3
2 AM1 1 ECU−IG 5
1 IG1
1J 1H
4 B−Y
(*1) 11
W−L Driver Side J/B (*2) 3
1
3 AM1 1 IK1 F11 CPUB
G−W G−W
1J 1F
2 1 W Passenger Side J/B
4 8
ALT
1 2 G−W
MPX−B
1
ECU−B1 1 1
2 1
B−L 1
1 2 R−L J18
(*1) 17
J/C
4 (*2) 12
A A
Battery IK1 F11 GND
W−B W−B W−B
II
*1: w/ Double locking system
*2: w/o Double locking system
I21018

DI−670
RHD models:
Passenger Side J/B Front Passenger Door ECU
1 P FR DOOR 2 5 1
2A 2F IB1 F13 BDR
B L−B L−B
J41 J31
J/C J/C
13 2
E E C C
IB1 F11 SIG
B−R B−R B−R
B−R
Ignition Switch
Driver Side J/B
ACC 3
2 AM1 1 ECU−IG 5
IG1 1J 1H
4 B−Y
(*1) 11
1
3 AM1 1 IB1 F11 CPUB
D G−W G−W
1J 1F J41
2 1 W
J/C Passenger Side J/B
4 9
D
ALT
G−W
1 2
MPX−B
1
ECU−B1 1 1
1 2
B−L 1
2 R−L J32
1 (*1)17
J/C
4 (*2)12
W−B A A F11 GND
Battery IB1
W−B W−B
IF
I21019

DI−671
DI87G−01
WIRING DIAGRAM
Front Passenger Door ECU

Door Lock Motor
17
1 (*1) G−B A−
F11
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
2 (*1) G−R
F11 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 BR−B LSWE
F11
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
4 (*1) G (*1)
F11 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)
4
F11
Unlock Switch 5
6 (*1) P−G
F11 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)


DI−672
RHD models:
Door Lock Motor
17
5 (*1) G−B A−
F11
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
6 (*1) G−R
F11 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 (*2) BR−B LSWE
F11
4 (*1)
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
3 (*1) G (*1)
F11 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)

F11
Unlock Switch 5
1 (*1) P−G
F11 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)


DI−673
HINT:
1 Check door lock motor using LEXUS hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Check that the door lock motor can operate in an ACTIVE TEST.

on page DI−616)
NG

OK
3 Check wireharness and connector between door lock motor and Front Passen-
ger Door ECU.
OK

problem symptom table (See Pub.No.

DI−674
DI87H−01
Door unlock detection switch
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Lock Motor
17
1 (*1) G−B A−
F11
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
2 (*1) G−R
F11 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 BR−B LSWE
F11
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
4 (*1) G (*1)
F11 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)
4
F11
Unlock Switch 5
6 (*1) P−G
F11 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)


DI−675
RHD models:
Door Lock Motor
17
5 (*1) G−B A−
F11
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
6 (*1) G−R
F11 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 (*2) BR−B LSWE
F11
4 (*1)
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
3 (*1) G (*1)
F11 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)

F11
Unlock Switch 5
1 (*1) P−G
F11 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)

HINT:
1 Check door unlock detection switch using LEXUS hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
Check the door unlock detection switch using DATA LIST.

on page Di−616)
NG

DI−676

OK
passenger door ECU.
OK


DI−677
DI87I−01
Door key lock and unlock switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The door key lock and unlock switch is built in the door key cylinder. When the key is turned to the lock side,
terminal 3 of the switch is grounded and when the key is turned to the unlock side, terminal 2 of the switch
is grounded.
Door key lock and unlock switch can be checked using DTC check. (Refer to DI−769)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Front Pasenger Door ECU

Door Lock Motor
17
1 (*1) G−B A−
F11
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
2 (*1) G−R
F11 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 BR−B LSWE
F11
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
4 (*1) G (*1)
F11 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)
4
F11
Unlock Switch 5
6 (*1) P−G
F11 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)


DI−678
RHD models:
Front Pasenger Door ECU
Door Lock Motor
17
5 (*1) G−B A−
F11
6 (*2)
Door Lock Motor
8
6 (*1) G−R
F11 A+
5 (*2)
15
3 (*2) BR−B LSWE
F11
4 (*1)
Door Unlock
Detection Switch 3
3 (*1) G (*1)
F11 LSW
8 (*2) GR (*2)

F11
Unlock Switch 5
1 (*1) P−G
F11 KUL
Unlock 2 (*2)

1 Check the door key lock and unlock switch using DTC check (See page
DI−769).

on page DI−616).
NG

DI−679
2 Check door key lock and unlock switch

NG Replace the door key lock and unlock switch.
NG
3 Check wireharness and connector between door key lock and unlock switch and
Front Pasenger Door ECU.
OK

problem symptom table (See Pub. No.

DI−680
DI2F2−10
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Courtesy Light +B

10
2 1 R−Y
F11
CTYB
12
R−W CYL
F11

15
(*1) 1 (*1) 2 R−G
F12 CPU
(*2) 4 11 (*2) CTY
14
W−B CTYE
F12

(*2) w/ Double locking system
I03216

DI−681
CHECK:
OK:

problem symptom table (See page Pub. No.
NG
2 Check courtesy light. (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−66)
OK
3 Check courtesy switch

(w/o Double locking system: See Pub, No. RM588E on page BE−66
w/ Double locking system: See page BE−3).
OK

DI−682
4 Check wireharness and connector between courtesy light and front passenger
door ECU, courtesy switch and front passenger door ECU.
OK

(See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−616.)

DI−683
DI2F4−10
Power window motor circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Power Window Motor Front Passenger Door ECU
2
2 R UP
F13
Power WIndow
Motor 11
1 G DN
F13
Pulse SW 13
3 W PLS
F12
Limit SW 12
4 W−G
F12 LMT
16
5 BR−W
F12 SGND
I03214

DI−684
DI2F7−05
Mirror motor circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Mirror Motor Front Passenger Door ECU
13
E1 11 BR (*)
F11 PE2
10
HSR 10 Y−R (*)
F11 HSSR
8
VC 8 O (*)
F12 PVC
1
VSR 9 B−O (*)
F11 VSSR
7
Position Sensor (Vertical) 2 LG−R
F11 PM+R
COM
8
MV 6 LG−B
F11 PMVR
16
MH 1 LG
F11 PMHR
(*): w/ Driving position memory

I03219

DI−685
DI2F8−05
Mirror position sensor circuit (W/memory)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This position detected by the mirror position sensor will be memorized in the seat ECU. This sensor is
equipped in the mirror in spite of the existence of the memory function.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Mirror Motor Front Passenger Door ECU
13
E1 11 BR (*)
F11 PE2
10
HSR 10 Y−R (*)
F11 HSSR
8
VC 8 O (*)
F12 PVC
1
VSR 9 B−O (*)
F11 VSSR
7
Position Sensor (Vertical) 2 LG−R
F11 PM+R
COM
8
MV 6 LG−B
F11 PMVR
16
MH 1 LG
F11 PMHR
(*): w/ Driving position memory

I03219

DI−686
DI87J−01
Mirror retract motor circuit (G.C.C. countries only)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Remote Control
Mirror LH Front Passenger Door ECU
14 18
L
F13 WR+
9
5 G−B
F13 WR−
I21466
HINT:
1 Check mirror retract motor using hand−held tester.
PREPARATION:
Connect the mirror retract hand−held tester to the DLC3.
CHECK:
Check the mirror retract motor can operate in an ACTIVE TEST.

problem symptoms table. (See page DI−668)
NG

DI−687
2 Check mirror retract motor. (See page BE−21)
OK
3 Check wireharness and connector between mirror retract motor and front pa-
senger door ECU.
OK

(See page DI−668)

DI−688
DI87K−01
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Lock Motor and Switch LH Front Passenger Door ECU
7 9
GR
F13 A1+
18
10 Y
F13 A1−
5
W
F11 DBLS
9
15
BR−B
F13 LSWE
3 B
I21083

DI−689
OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between double lock motor and passenger
door ECU.
OK


DI−690
DI87L−01
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Lock Motor and Switch LH Front Passenger Door ECU
7 9
GR
F13 A1+
18
10 Y
F13 A1−
5
W
F11 DBLS
9
15
BR−B
F13 LSWE
3 B
I21083

DI−691
OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between double lock motor and front paseng-
er door ECU.
OK


DI−692
DIAGNOSTICS − REAR LEFT DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM
REAR LEFT DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM

DI2F9−02

HINT:
1
P. DI−693
Symptom does not

3
2 occur
Symptom Simulation
P. IN−20
Symptom
occur
4
P. DI−734
5
P. DI−697
6
Circuit Inspection
P. DI−698
7
Repair
8
Confirmation Test
End

DI−693
DI2FB−07
REAR LEFT DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet
Inspector’s name:
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date Vehicle / / km
Odometer Reading
Brought in Mile

When Problem
Outdoor Temperature
Malfunction □ Theft Deterrent System

System
□ Others

DI−694
DI2FA−07
PARTS LOCATION
Rear Left Door ECU

Power Window Switch
Door Lock Assembly

Power WIndow Motor S Door Courtesy Switch
Jam Protection Limit Switch S Door Unlock Detection Switch
Jam Protection Pulse Switch S Door Lock Motor
Courtesy Light S Europe models:
Double Locking Switch
S Erope models:
Double Locking Motor
I06103

DI−695
DI2FH−09
TERMINALS OF ECU
REAR LEFT DOOR ECU
R13
28 27 26 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
33 32 31 30 29 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
I03226

CPUB « GND
*1(R13−15 « R13−25) G−W « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
*2(R13−4 « R13−15)
BDR « GND
*1(R13−14 « R13−25) L−R « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
*2(R13−2 « R13−15)
SIG « GND
*1(R13−9 « R13−25) B−R « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
*2(R13−8 « R13−15)
CTYB « GND
*2(R13−3 « R13−15)
GND « Body Ground
W−B «
*1(R13−25 « Body Ground) Constant Below 1 V
Body Ground
*2(R13−15 « Body Ground)

*1(R13−8
(R13 8 « R13
R13−25)
25) R W«W
R−W W−B
B
*2(R13−18 « R13−15) Driver door opened. Below 1 V
CYL « GND
*1(R13−7 « R13−25) R « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
*2(R13−5 « R13−15)
AUTO « GND Auto down switch position is OFF. Below 1 V

*1(R13−22 « R13−25) L−R « W−B Ignition switch position is ON.
10 − 14 V
*2(R13−17 « R13−15) Auto down switch position is ON.
MUP « GND * OFF Below 1 V

*1(R13−24
(R13 24 « R13
R13−25)
25) L W«W
L−W W−B
B
Power window switch position UP 10 − 14 V
*2(R13−10 « R13−15)
MDN « GND * OFF Below 1 V

*1(R13−23
(R13 23 « R13
R13−25)
25) L B«W
L−B W−B
B
Power window switch position Down 10 − 14 V
*2(R13−23 « R13−15)
UP « GND Power window (RrLH) is not operating. Below 1 V

*1(R13−28
(R13 28 « R13
R13−25)
25) R«W
W−B
B
*2(R13−28 « R13−15) Power window (RrLH) is operating upward. 10 − 14 V

DI−696
DN « GND Power window (RrLH) is not operating. Below 1 V

*1(R13−26
(R13 26 « R13
R13−25)
25) G«W
W−B
B
*2(R13−26 « R13−15) Power window (RrLH) is operating downward. 10 − 14 V
A+ « GND Power door lock (RrLH) is not operating.

B l
Below 1V
*1(R13
(R13−13
13 « R13
R13−25)
25) G−R
G R « W−B
W B Power door lock (RrLH) is operating to unlock.
*2(R13−1 « R13−15) Power door lock (RrLH) is operating to lock. 10 − 14 V
A− « GND Power door lock (FrLH) is not operating.

B l
Below 1V
*1(R13
(R13−1
1 « R13
R13−25)
25) G−B
G B«W
W−B
B Power door lock (FrLH) is operating to lock.
*2(R13−14 « R13−15) Power door lock (FrLH) is operating to unlock. 10 − 14 V

*1(R13−27
(R13 27 « R13
R13−25)
25) B W«W
B−W W−B
B
*2(R13−27 « R13−15) Except window full−close position Below 1 V

*1(R13
(R13−32
32 « R13
R13−25)
25) Y−B
Y B«W
W−B
B SW ON Below 1 V
*2(R13−32 « R13−15) P
Power window
i d is
i nott operated.
t d
SW OFF 10 − 14 V
PCTI « GND UNLOCK Below 1 V

*1(R13−11
(R13 11 « R13
R13−25)
25) Y B«W
Y−B W−B
B Wi d
Window lock
l k switch
it h position*
iti *
*2(R13−20 « R13−15) LOCK 10 −14 V
PCTO « GND UNLOCK Below 1 V

*1(R13−10
(R13 10 « R13
R13−25)
25) W G«W
W−G W−B
B Wi d
Window lock
l k switch
it h position*
iti *
*2(R13−10 « R13−15) LOCK 10 − 14 V
Rear RH door double lock is not operating. Below 1 V

*2 A1+ « GND
GR « W
W−B
B Rear RH door double lock is not operating to set 10 − 14 V
(R14 13 « R14
(R14−13 R14−15)
15)
Rear RH door double lock is not operating to unset Below 1V
Rear RH door double lock is not operating Below 1 V
*2 A1− « GND
G−B
G B«W
W−B
B Rear RH door double lock is not operating to set Below 1V
(R14 25 « R14
(R14−25 R14−15)
15)
Rear RH door double lock is not operating to unset 10 − 14 V
*2 DBLS « LSWE Rear RH door double lock is set Below 1 V

(R14 9 « R14
(R14−9 R14−24)
24) W « BR
BR−B
B
Rear RH door double lock is unset 10 − 14 V
MPX1
*1(R13−5) Multiplex communication circuit −
*2(R13−4)
MPX2
*2(R13−7)
*: Power window master switch
*1: w/o Double locking system
*2: w/ Double locking system

DI−697
DI2FI−05

1. Double locking switch circuit
Double locking system does not operate
3. Double locking system
4. Rear left door ECU

DI−698
DI2T4−02
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit provides power to operate the rear left door ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Rear Left (LHD)
Rear Left Door ECU

Passenger Side J/B (*1) 2
1 D RR DOOR 6 2 (*2) 14
1A 1E BA1 R13 BDR
W L−R L−R
(*1) 8
J16 J/C
11 (*2) 9
A A BA1 R13
SIG
B−R B−R
B−R
Ignition Switch
Driver Side J/B
ACC
2 AM2 1 ECU−IG 5
IG1 1J 1H
4 B−Y
(*1) 4
W−L 6 (*2) 15
Driver Side J/B
3 AM1 1 BA1 R13 CPUB
G−W G−W
1J 1A
Passenger Side J/B
1 9
Engine Room No.1 R/B W 2E 2B
ALT
G−W
1 1
1 MPX−B
ECU−B1 1 1
1
1 2 G−W (*1) 15
B−L
9 (*2) 25
BA1 R13 GND
Battery W−B W−B
BJ
(*1):w/ Double locking system

I21081

DI−699
Rear Left Door ECU

Rear Left (RHD) Passenger Side J/B
(*1) 2
1 P RR DOOR 6 2 (*2) 14
B L−R
2A 2E BA1 R13 BDR
J30 L−R
J/C
J31 Passenger Side J/B B−R A A B−R (*1) 8
J/C (*2) 9
11 2 11
C C
2F 2E BA1 R13 SIG
B B B−R B−R
J41 B−R
B−R J/C
E E
Ignition Switch
B−R
Driver Side J/B
1 ECU−IG 5
ACC B−Y
2 AM1 1J 1H
IG1 4
W−L
Driver Side J/B
3 AM1 1 (*1) 4
1J 1A (*2) 15
6
W BA1 R13 CPUB
G−W G−W
Passenger Side J/B
1 9
ALT 2E 2B
1 1
G−W
1 Engine Room No.1 R/B
B−L ECU−B1 MPX−B
1 1 1
Battery W−B 9 W−B

BA1 R13 GND
(*1) 15
BJ (*2) 25
(*1):w/ Double locking system
I21082

DI−700
DI2FD−07
WIRING DIAGRAM
Rear Left Door ECU
(*1) 24
(*2) 19
BR−B
R13 LSWE
(*1) 14
(*2) 1
G−B
R13 A−
(*1) 1
(*1) 5 (*2)13
(*2) 3 4 G−R A+
R13
(*1) 22
(*1) 3 (*1) 7 (*2) 17
(*2) 1 (*2) 2 G
R13 LSW
(*1) D14
Door Lock Motor and Switch
Rear LH
(*2) D24
Door Lock Motor and Door
Unlock Detection Switch (*2): w/o Double locking system
I03215

DI−701

OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between door lock motor and rear left door
ECU.
OK


DI−702
DI2FE−07
Door unlock detection switch
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Rear Left Door ECU
(*1) 24
(*2) 19
BR−B
R13 LSWE
(*1) 14
(*2) 1
G−B
R13 A−
(*1) 1
(*1) 5 (*2)13
(*2) 3 4 G−R A+
R13
(*1) 22
(*1) 3 (*1) 7 (*2) 17
(*2) 1 (*2) 2 G
R13 LSW
(*1) D14
Rear LH
(*2) D24
I03215

DI−703
1 Check door unlock detection switch

OK
driver door ECU.
OK


DI−704
DI2FF−07
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Rear Left Door ECU
+B
Door Courtesy Light (*1) 3
(*2) 2
L−W
R13
2 1 CTYB
(*1) 5
(*2) 7
R−W CYL
R13
(*1) 18
(*2) 8
R−Y
R13 CPU
1 2 CTY
(*1) 16
(*2) 18
W−B CTYE
R13

I03216

DI−705
CHECK:
OK:

on page DI−616).
NG
OK
3 Check courtesy switch. (See page BE−3)
OK

DI−706
4 Check wireharness and connector between courtesy light and rear left door
ECU, courtesy switch and rear left door ECU.
OK


DI−707
DI2FG−07
Power window switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Power window switch circuit can be checked using DTC check. (Refer to DI−769)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Power Window Switch Rear Left Door ECU
4 (*1) 21
DOWN (*2) 10
3 Y−R
R13 PCTO
6 UP
5 (*1) 12
(*2) 21
2 W−B
AUTO R13 PWE
(*1) 17
(*2) 22
L−R
R13 AUTO
(*1) 10
(*2) 24
L−W
R13 MUP
23
L−B
R13 MDN

I03223

DI−708
DI6UB−04
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The double lock detection switch is built in the door lock motor assembly. This switch is ON when the double
lock is in the unlock position and OFF when the double lock is in the double lock position. The ECU detects
the double lock conditions is this circuit.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Lock Motor and Switch Rear LH Rear Left Door ECU
6 13
W
R13 A1+
25
9 L−O
R13 A1−
9
GR
R13 DBLS
8
24
BR−B
R13 LSWE
3
I21083

DI−709
NG Replace the double lock switch.
OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between double lock switch and rear left door
ECU.
OK

DI−604).

DI−710
DI6UA−05
WIRING DIAGRAM
D6
BODY ECU
Double Locking Motor J19
RH J/C
1 13
9 D D
IH1 B6 ACTR
L−O L−O L−O
D
8
6
IH2
L−Y L−Y L−O
11
9
IA2
L−O L−O
B
8 25
6 B B ACTS
IA2 B6
L−Y L−Y L−Y
D5 J19 J/C
Double Locking Motor
LH
I14376

DI−711
OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between double lock motor and rear left door
OK


DI−712
DIAGNOSTICS − REAR RIGHT DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM
REAR RIGHT DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM

DI2FO−02

HINT:
1
P. DI−713
Symptom does not

3
2 occur
Symptom Simulation
P. IN−20
Symptom
occur
4
P. DI−734
5
P. DI−717
6
Circuit Inspection
P. DI−718
7
Repair
8
Confirmation Test
End

DI−713
DI2FQ−08
REAR RIGHT DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet
Inspector’s name:
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date Vehicle / / km
Odometer Reading
Brought in Mile

When Problem
Outdoor Temperature
Malfunction □ Theft Deterrent System

System □ Jam Protection System
□ Others

DI−714
DI2EU−07
PARTS LOCATION
Rear Right Door ECU

Power Window Switch
Power WIndow Motor Door Lock Assembly

Jam Protection Limit Switch S Door Courtesy Switch
Jam Protection Pulse Switch S Door Unlock Detection Switch
S Door Lock Motor
Courtesy Light S Europe models:
Double Locking Switch
S Europe models:
Double locking motor
I04590

DI−715
DI2FR−08
TERMINALS OF ECU
REAR RIGHT DOOR ECU
R14
28 27 26 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
33 32 31 30 29 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
I03226

CPUB « GND
*2(R14−4 « R14−15)
BDR « GND
*1(R14−14 « R14−25) L−R « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
*2(R14−2 « R14−15)
SIG « GND
*1(R14−9 « R14−25) B−R « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
*2(R14−8 « R14−15)
CTYB « GND
*1(R14−2 « R14−25) L−W « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
*2(R14−3 « R14−15)
GND « Body Ground
W−B «
*1(R14−25 « Body Ground) Constant Below 1 V
Body Ground
*2(R14−15 « Body Ground)
CTY « GND Rear right door closed. 10 − 14 V

*1(R14−8
(R14 8 « R14
R14−25)
25) R Y«W
R−Y W−B
B
*2(R14−18 « R14−15) Rear right door opened. Below 1 V
CYL « GND
*1(R14−7 « R14−25) R−W « W−B Constant 10 − 14 V
*2(R14−5 « R14−15)
AUTO « GND Auto down switch position is OFF. Below 1 V

*1(R14−22 « R14−25) L−R « W−B Ignition switch position is ON.
10 − 14 V
*2(R14−17 « R14−15) Auto down switch position is ON.
MUP « GND
OFF Below 1 V
*1(R14−24 « R14−25)
R14−25)* Ignition switch position is ON.
2(R14−10 « R14−15)
L W«W
L−W W−B
B
Power window switch position
UP 10 − 14 V
MDN « GND OFF Below 1 V

*1(R14−23
(R14 23 « R14
R14−25)
25) L B«W
L−B W−B
B
Power window switch position Down 10 − 14 V
*2(R14−23 « R14−15)
UP « GND Power window (FrRH) is not operating. Below 1 V

R«W
W−B
B
(R14−28 « R14−25) Power window (FrRH) is operating upward. 10 − 14 V
DI−716
DN « GND Power window (FrRH) is not operating. Below 1 V

*1(R14−26
(R14 26 « R14
R14−25)
25) G«W
W−B
B
*2(R14−26 « R14−15) Power window (FrRH) is operating downward. 10 − 14 V
A+ « GND Power door lock (FrRH) is not operating.

B l
Below 1V
*1(R14
(R14−13
13 « R14
R14−25)
25) G−R
G R « W−B
W B Power door lock (FrRH) is operating to unlock.
*2(R14−1 « R14−15) Power door lock (FrRH) is operating to lock. 10 − 14 V
A− « GND Power door lock (FrRH) is not operating.

B l
Below 1V
*1(R14
(R14−1
1 « R14
R14−25)
25) G−B
G B«W
W−B
B Power door lock (FrRH) is operating to lock.
*2(R14−14 « R14−15) Power door lock (FrRH) is operating to unlock. 10 − 14 V

*1(R14−27
(R14 27 « R14
R14−25)
25) B W«W
B−W W−B
B
*2(R14−27 « R14−15) Except window full−close position Below 1 V

*1(R14
(R14−32
32 « R14
R14−25)
25) Y−B
Y B«W
W−B
B SW ON Below 1 V
*2(R14−32 « R14−15) P
Power window
i d is
i nott operated.
t d
SW OFF 10 − 14 V
PCTI « GND UNLOCK Below 1 V

*1(R14−11
(R14 11 « R14
R14−25)
25) Y«W
W−B
B Wi d
Window lock
l k switch
it h position*
iti *
*2(R14−20 « R14−15) LOCK 10 −14 V
PCTO « GND UNLOCK Below 1 V

*1(R14−10
(R14 10 « R14
R14−25)
25) Y R«W
Y−R W−B
B Wi d
Window lock
l k switch
it h position*
iti *
*2(R14−10 « R14−15) LOCK 10 − 14 V
Rear RH door double lock is not operating. Below 1 V

*2 A1+ « GND
G−R
G R « W−B
W B Rear RH door double lock is not operating to set 10 − 14 V
(R14 13 « R14
(R14−13 R14−15)
15)
Rear RH door double lock is not operating to unset Below 1V
Rear RH door double lock is not operating Below 1 V
*2 A1− « GND
G−B
G B«W
W−B
B Rear RH door double lock is not operating to set Below 1V
(R14 25 « R14
(R14−25 R14−15)
15)
Rear RH door double lock is not operating to unset 10 − 14 V
*2 DBLS « LSWE Rear RH door double lock is set Below 1 V

(R14 9 « R14
(R14−9 R14−24)
24) W « BR
BR−B
B
Rear RH door double lock is unset 10 − 14 V
MPX1
*2(R14−5)
MPX2
*2(R14−4)
*: Power window master switch
(*1): w/o double locking
(*2): w/ double locking

DI−717
DI2FP−05

1. Double locking switch circuit DI−728
Double locking system does not operate
3. Double locking system BE−18
4. Rear left door ECU IN−30

DI−718
DI2T5−02
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit provides power to operate the rear right door ECU.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Rear Right (LHD)

Rear Right Door ECU
(*1) 2
2 (*2) 14
BB1 R14 BDR
L−R L−R
Driver Side J/B (*1) 8
1 ECU−IG 2 11 (*2) 9
1J 1E BB1 R14 SIG
B−R B−R
B−Y 6 (*1) 4
G−W BB1 R14 CPUB
G−W
Ignition Switch (*2) 15
Driver Side J/B
ACC 3 1 6
2 AM1
1E 1H
IG1 4
G−W
W−L J41 J/C J41 J/C
D D A A
3 AM1
2 1 G−W
1J
D RR 1 G−W Passenger Side J/B
6
DOOR 4
1E 1K 9
1 2 2G 2B
Engine Room No.1 R/B W G−W

ALT
1 1 MPX−B
1 1
ECU−B1
B−L 1
R−L
(*1) 15
9 (*2) 25
BB1 R14 GND
W−B W−B
Battery
BL
(*1): w/ Double locking sytem

I05627

DI−719
Rear Right (RHD) Rear Right Door ECU

(*1) 2
2 (*2) 14
L−R
BB1 R14 BDR
L−R
J31 J/C
J41 J31 Passenger Side J/B A A B−R
J/C J/C (*1) (*1) 8
11 2 11 (*2) 9
E E C C B−R
2F 2E BB1 R14 SIG
B−R B−R B−R (*2) B−R
B−R
Ignition Switch
Driver Side J/B
ACC 3
2 AM1 1 ECU−IG 2
1J 1E
IG1 4 B−Y
3 AM1 6 (*2) 15
2 1 BB1 R14 CPUB
1J G−W G−W
6 P RR DOOR 1
Passenger Side J/B
2E 2 1 2A
1 9
2E 2B
B G−W
ALT
1 1 MPX−B
1 1
ECU−B1
R−L
1
J45 J/C
10 20
B−L W−B W−B
BB1 R14 SEL1
A
(*1) 15
9 (*2) 25
W−B W−B
BB1 R14 GND
Battery
BM BL
(*1): w/ Double locking sytem

I21080

DI−720
DI2FK−07
WIRING DIAGRAM
Rear Right Door ECU
(*1) 24
(*2) 19
BR−B
R14 LSWE
(*1) 14
(*2) 1
G−B
R14 A−
(*1) 1
(*1) 5 (*2)13
(*2) 3 4 G−R A+
R14
(*1) 22
(*1) 3 (*1) 7 (*2) 17
(*2) 1 (*2) 2 G
R14 LSW
(*1) D25
Rear RH
(*2) D15
I03215

DI−721
1 Check door lock motor.

OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between door lock motor and rear right door
ECU.
OK


DI−722
DI2FL−07
Door unlock detectin switch
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Rear Right Door ECU
(*1) 24
(*2) 19
BR−B
R14 LSWE
(*1) 14
(*2) 1
G−B
R14 A−
(*1) 1
(*1) 5 (*2)13
(*2) 3 4 G−R A+
R14
(*1) 22
(*1) 3 (*1) 7 (*2) 17
(*2) 1 (*2) 2 G
R14 LSW
(*1) D25
Rear RH
(*2) D15
I03215

DI−723

(w/o Double locking system: See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−148
w/ Double locking system: See page BE−12)
OK
driver door ECU.
OK


DI−724
DI2FM−07
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Rear Right Door ECU
+B
Door Courtesy Light (*1) 3
(*2) 2
L−W
R14
2 1 CTYB
(*1) 5
(*2) 7
R−W CYL
R14
(*1) 18
(*2) 8
R−Y
R14 CPU
1 2 CTY
(*1) 16
(*2) 18
W−B CTYE
R14

(*2) w/o Double locking system
I03216

DI−725
CHECK:
OK:

on page DI−616).
NG
OK
3 Check courtesy switch. (See page BE−3)
OK

DI−726
4 Check wireharness and connector between courtesy light and rear right door
ECU, courtesy switch and rear right door ECU.
OK


DI−727
DI2FN−07
Power window switch circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Power window switch circuit can be checked using DTC check. (Refer to DI−769)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Power Window Switch Rear Right Door ECU
4
DOWN 10
3 Y−R
R14 PCTO
6 UP
5
21
2 W−B
AUTO R14 PWE
22
L−R
R14 AUTO
24
L−W
R14 MUP
23
L−B
R14 MDN
I03223

DI−728
DI6UB−03
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The double lock detection switch is built in the door lock motor assembly. This switch is ON when the double
lock is in the unlock position and OFF when the double lock is in the double lock position. The ECU detects
the double lock conditions is this circuit.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Lock Motor and Switch Rear RH Rear Right Door ECU
6 13
W (GR)
R14 A1+
25
9 L−O
R14 A1−
9
GR (W)
R14 DBLS
8
3
BR−B
R14 LSWE
3
( ): RHD models
I21083

DI−729
NG Replace the double lock switch.
OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between double lock switch and body ECU.
OK

DI−604).

DI−730
DI6UA−03
WIRING DIAGRAM
Door Lock Motor and Switch Rear RH Rear Right Door ECU
6 13
W (GR)
R14 A1+
25
9 L−O
R14 A1−
9
GR (W)
R14 DBLS
8
3
BR−B
R14 LSWE
3
( ): RHD models
I21083

DI−731
OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between double lock motor and body ECU .
OK


DI−732
DIAGNOSTICS − MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

DI2AT−12

Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure on the following page.

1
P.DI−733
Pr oblem does not

3
2 occur
Symptom Simulation
P. IN−20
Problem
occurs
4 5
Malfunction code
Check DTC (Pre−check) Circuit Inspection
P. DI−734 P. DI−747
Normal code
6
Problem Symptoms Table *
* System See page

2JZ−GE engine L DI−24
Engine
3UZ−FE engine DI−93
Body No.1 control system DI−604
Body No.2 control system L DI−660
Driver door system DI−634
7 Passenger door system DI−668
Repair Rear right door system DI−717
Rear left door system DI−697
Air conditioning system L DI−912
8
Power Tilt and Power L DI−356
Confirmation Test Telescopic Steering Column
Combination meter system L DI−584
Sliding roof system L DI−604
End Power seat system L DI−522
LEXUS navigation system DI−848
L : LEXUS GS300 Repair Mamual Pub. No. RM588E


DI−733
DI2AU−12
MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Check Sheet
Inspector’s name:
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date Vehicle / / km
Odometer Reading
Brought in Mile

When Problem
Outdoor Temperature
□ Engine
□ Body No.1 Control System
□ Body No.2 Control System
□ Driver Door System
□ Passenger Door System
Malfunction □ Rear Right Door System

System
□ Rear Left Door System
□ Air Conditioning System
□ T & T System
□ Combination Meter System
□ Sliding Roof System
□ Power Seat System
□ LEXUS Navigation System

DI−734
DI2AV−10
PRE−CHECK
1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
(a) As shown in the following illustration, each ECU of this ve-
hicle is connected by communication bus and it transmits
each signal by communication. This communication bus
is self−diagnosed by Body No.1 ECU and it memorizes
DTC when it detects communication stop to ECU or com-
munication bus +B short or GND short. There is a possibil-
ity that Body No.1 ECU cannot self−diagnose accurately
unless it doesn’t work normal. So, please note that the
troubleshooting of Body Electrical System should be
done after confirming if Body No.1 ECU and Open door
indicator works normal by 2 ”BASIC INSPECTION” de-
scribed later.
Instrument panel system communication bus

Engine and ECT
A/C Amplifier ECU
DLC3
Body No.2 ECU Body No.1 ECU
Bus cut Bus cut

relay relay
Combination Airbag Tilt and Gateway
Meter ECU Sensor Telescopic ECU
Assembly ECU
Steering Pad Switch
Accessory Bus Buffer
Sliding roof (OPT)

(*1)
(*2) (*2)
(*1): w/o Seat memory

Driver Door Rear Left Seat ECU Rear Right Passenger Door
ECU Door ECU Door ECU ECU (*2): w/ Seat memory
Door system communication bus
I19690

DI−735
(b) If DTC of ECU communication stop is output, there is a

ECU
possibility of connector disconnection or 2 communica-
tion buses open. It will not become abnormal with only 1
ECU communication bus open.
ECU
Disconnection (DTC is detected)
ECU
ECU
Open
Open
ECU
Open (DTC is detected)
ECU
ECU
Open
ECU
I03343
I03344
I03345
Open (DTC is not detected) I03977
(c) If 2 communication buses are open at the position as

Example
shown in the illustration, DTC of ECU communication stop
Body No.1 between those 2 buses is output.
ECU
Open
Open
Detect the DTC of commu-

nication stop of the 3 ECUs.
I03346

DI−736
2. BASIC INSPECTION
INSPECT BODY No.1 ECU
1 Check Body No.1 ECU operation.
HINT:
With this inspection Body No.1 ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normal or not.
CHECK:
Check if the luggage compartment door opener works normal.
OK Go to next step”OPEN DOOR INDICATOR LIGHT

INSPECTION”.
NG
2 Check luggage compartment door opener system (Except Body No.1 ECU).
(See page BE−12)
OK Replace the Body No.1 ECU.
NG
Repair of replace malfunction part.

DI−737
INSPECT OPEN DOOR INDICATOR LIGHT.
1 Check open door indicator light.
CHECK:
Check if open door Indicator light is turned on when either door
open.
HINT:
If open door Indicator light is not turned on, DTC will not be out-
put.
I05073
OK Go to step 3. ”DTC CHECK”.
NG
Repair the open door indicator light.

(See page BE−11)
3. DTC CHECK (Using diagnosis check wire)

E1 (a) Using SST, connect terminals Tc and E1 of DLC1.
SST 09843−18020
(c) Read the DTC on the open door indicator light.
Tc
F02201

DI−738
HINT:
As an example, the blinking patterns for codes; normal, 12, and
Normal Code 11 and 12 are shown in the illustration.
(d) Check for the problem using the DTC table on the next
page.
0.25 sec.
0.25 sec.
(e) After completing the check, turn the ignition switch off,
and disconnect terminals Tc and E1.
Malfunction Code 12
1.5 sec. 4.5 sec.
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
Malfunction Code 11 and 12

2.5 sec. 4.5 sec.
N13628
4. DTC CHECK (Using LEXUS hand−held tester)

(a) Prepare the hand−held tester.
(b) Connect the hand−held tester to DLC3.
(c) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand−held tes-
ter main switch ON.
(d) Use the hand−held tester to check the DTCs, note them
down. (For opening instructions, see the hand−held tes-
LEXUS hand
−held tester ter’s instruction book.)
DLC3 F13542 (e) See page DI−739 to confirm the details of the DTCs.
5. DTC CLEARANCE
DTC will be cleared when the troble output to DTC is recovered
normally.

DI−739
DI2AW−13

below (Proceed to the page given for that circuit).
DTC No.
(See Page)
B1211/11 S Wireharness
Driver door ECU communication stop
(DI−747) S Driver door ECU
Front passenger door ECU communication stop
(DI−751) S Passenger door ECU
Tilt and telescopic ECU communication stop
(DI−753) S Tilt and telescopic ECU
B1214/14 Door system communication bus malfunction (+B short)

S Wireharness
B1215/15
Door system communication bus malfunction (GND short) S ECU (Door system bus)
(DI−756)
Rear right door ECU communication stop
(DI−763) S Rear right door ECU
Rear left door ECU communication stop
(DI−765) S Rear left door ECU
Body No.2 ECU communication stop
(DI−767) S Body No.2 ECU
B1221/21 S Power window master switch

Power window switch circuit on driver door
(DI−769) S Wireharness
S Door lock control switch
B1222/22
Door lock switch circuit on driver door S Door key lock and unlock switch
(DI−769)
S Wireharness
B1223/23 S Power window switch
Power window switch circuit on passenger door
B1224/24
Door lock switch circuit on passenger door S Door key lock and unlock switch
(DI−769)
S Wireharness
Power window switch circuit on rear right door
Power window switch circuit on rear left door
B1231/31 S Power window motor

Jam protection limit switch circuit on driver door
B1232/32 S Power window motor

J
Jam protection
t ti pulse
l switch
it h circuit
i it on driver
di door
d
B1233/33
Jam protection limit switch circuit on passenger door
(DI−772) S Power window motor
Jam protection pulse switch circuit on passenger door
(DI−771)
B1235/35
Jam protection limit switch circuit on rear right door
Jam protection pulse switch circuit on rear right door
(DI−771)
B1237/37
Jam protection limit switch circuit on rear left door
Jam protection pulse switch circuit on rear left door
(DI−771)

DI−740
S Luggage compartment door opener switch

B1241/41
Body No.1 ECU switch circuit diagnosis S Luggage compartment door key lock and unlock switch
(DI−769)
S Wireharness
Wireless door lock tuner circuit malfunction
(DI−773) S Wireless door lock tuner
B1244/44 S Light sensor

Light sensor circuit malfunction
B1252/52 S Stop light switch
Body No.2 ECU switch circuit diagnosis
Engine and ECT ECU communication stop
(DI−777) S Engine and ECT ECU
A/C amplifier communication stop
(DI−779) S A/C amplifier
Instrument panel system communication bus malfunction
B1266/66 (+B short) S Wireharness
B1267/67
Instrument panel system communication bus malfunction S ECU (Instrument panel system bus)
(DI−782)
(GND short)
Combination meter ECU communication stop
(DI−795) S Combination meter ECU
B1272/72 Power seat ECU communication stop S Wireharness
(DI−797) (w/ Seat memory vehicle only) S Power seat ECU
B1273/73 Sliding roof ECU communication stop S Wireharness

(DI−799) (w/ Sliding roof vehicle only) S Sliding roof ECU
S Wireharness
B1275/75 Accessory bus buffer communication stop
S Accessory
Airbag sensor assembly communication stop
B1285/85(*) S Wireharness
Steering pad switch communication stop
(DI−803) S Steering pad switch
Gateway ECU (AVC−LAN adapter) communication stop
(DI−805) S Gateway ECU
(*): GS430 only
HINT:
S DTC 61, 66, 67 and 71 are not output through open door warning light on meter because of system
itself.
S DTC 21~26, 41 and 52 don’t mean switch abnormal but notify how switch works.
If DTC is not output when operating switch, it means failure of switch contact.
If DTC is output when not opening switch, it means stick of switch.
S When some of the DTC 14, 15, 66, 67 is output, the DTC of other ECU communication stop is also
output. In this case, please repair DTC 14, 15, 66, 67 first. The following shows DTCs which are output
when +B or GND short occurs on communication bus.

DI−741
Door system communication bus Instrument panel system communication bus

After 10 seconds from detecting fail, After 10 seconds from detecting fail,
Instrument panel system communication bus Door system communication bus is able
GND short is able to communicate by bus cut function. to communicate by bus cut function.
Communication Body No.1 ECU, Body No.2 ECU, A/C Driver door ECU, Passenger door ECU,
possible ECU ECU, Multi display, Tilt and telescopic Rear right door ECU, Rear left door ECU,
after bus is cut ECU, Combination Meter ECU, Engine Power seat ECU, Sliding roof ECU,
and ECT ECU Accessory bus buffer.
DTC(B12XX) 11, 12, 15, 16, 17, (72), (73), (75) 11, 12, 13, 16, 17, 18, 61, 62, 67, 71,
( ): Option (72), (73), (75) *
+B short (Same as GND short) (Same as GND short)
Communication
possible ECU (Same as GND short) (Same as GND short)
after bus is cut
DTC(B12XX) 11, 12, 14, 16, 17, (72), (73), (75) 11, 12, 13, 16, 17, 18, 61, 62, 66, 71,
( ): Option (72), (73), (75) *
*: Body No.1 ECU and Door system communication bus are cut off by bus cut relay, so it detects communication stop
of ECU connected to Door system communication bus.

DI−742
DI2AX−07
PARTS LOCATION
Engine and ECT ECU
w/ LEXUS navigation system:

A/C Amplifier
Gateway ECU w/o LEXUS navigation system:

A/C Control Assembly
Combination Meter ECU (Built into the A/C Amplifier)
Light Control Sensor

Tilt and Telescopic ECU
Body No.1 ECU
Body No.2 ECU

Airbag Sensor
Assembly
Seat ECU
Sliding Roof ECU 3UZ−FE Engine:
Steering Pad Switch
Passenger Door ECU
Wireless Door Lock Tuner
Driver Door ECU
Rear Left Door ECU Rear Right Door ECU

I19649

DI−743
DI85Z−01
TERMINALS OF ECU
Body NO.1 ECU and Body NO.2 ECU
B5
MPX2 (Body No.1 ECU)


I04354
Driver Door ECU and Passenger Door ECU
MPX1 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2
D18 F11 D19 F12 D20 F13
MPX2
*1: Driver door ECU
*2: Front passenger door ECU
I03225
T5
MPX1 MPX2
I04355

DI−744
Rear Right Door ECU and Rear Left Door ECU
MPX1(*3)
*1 *2
R13 R14 MPX1(*4)
(*1): Rear left door ECU

(*2): Rear right door ECU
MPX2(*3) MPX2(*4)
(*3): w/Double locking system
I03226
Engine and ECT ECU
2JZ−GE:
E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7
3UZ−FE: MPX1 MPX2

E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
MPX1 MPX2
I04347
A14471 I21072
A/C Amplifier
MPX+
A16
MPX−
I04359

DI−745
Combination Meter ECU
MPX+
C12
MPX−
I04357
Power Seat ECU
P19
MPX2 MPX1
I04356
Sliding Roof ECU MPX1

M4
I04348

DI−746
Gateway ECU
G3 MPD1
MPD2
I13684
Steering Pad Switch
C15
MPX1
I21108
C7
MPX1 MPX2
H01357

DI−747
DI860−01
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC B1211 / 11 Driver door ECU communication stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between driver door ECU and body No.1 ECU.
No communication from driver door ECU more than 10 se-

se S Driver door ECU
B1211/11
conds. S Wireharness
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models: Front Passenger Passenger Body No.1
Door ECU Side J/B ECU
3 16 6 9 18 7 11
O O O O MPX1 L−O L−O
IL1 IK1 F11 IK1 2H 5
BB1 MPX2 F11 9
MPX2
6
R14
Rear Door 2D
RH ECU
8 15 2 10 M4
L−O L−O O Moon Roof
MPX2 L−O L−Y
BB1 IL3 IC2 BC1
(*1) 7 MPX1 6 (*1) Control ECU
(*2) 4 5 (*2)
MPX1
Driver Body No.2 Power O 2
Side J/B ECU Seat ECU
11 R13
11
O (*3) Rear Door
1H MPX1 MPX2 P19 LH ECU
9
10 O (*4) 3 3
O (*3) L−O L−O
MPX1 P19 BC1 BA1 MPX2
(*1) 7
(*2) 4
L−O
Driver Door ECU
6 O (*1) 9 18 L−O (*1) 7 15 8
L−O (*2) MPX1 D20 O (*2) O O O
IB1 D20 MPX2 IB1 IC3 BA1 MPX1
(*1) 6
(*2) 5
(*1): w/ Double locking system (*3): w/ Driving position memory
(*2): w/o Double locking system (*4): w/o Driving positon memory
I21090

DI−748

RHD models:
Front Passenger Passenger Body No.1
Door ECU Side J/B ECU
2 6 9 18 7 11
(*5) L−O O MPX1 O O
IC2 IB1 F11 F11 IB1 2H MPX2
MPX2 9
L−Y (*6) 6
2D
10 BC1 8 15 16
6 (*1) O O O
BA1 IC3 IM1
L−O 5 (*2) M4
O O
R13 MPX1 Moon Roof Control ECU
Power O
3 BC1 Rear Door Seat ECU11
10
LH ECU MPX2 (*3) MPX1
L−O 3 MPX2 P19 BD1 2
7 (*1) O
BA1 (*4)
L−O 4 (*2) (*1) 7
10 O 3 3 (*2) 4
(*3)
MPX1 P19 BD1 BB1 O MPX2
O L−Y R14
Driver Door ECU
Rear Door
6 9 18 7 15 8
O MPX1 RH ECU
O D20 L−O MPX1
IL1 D20 IL1 IM3 BB1
MPX2 L−O L−O L−O
(*1) 6
(*2) 5
Driver Side J/B
11
9 Body No.2
1H MPX1 ECU (*1): w/ Double locking system
(*4): w/o Driving positon memory
(*5): Australia
(*6): Europe I21089

DI−749
1 Check driver door ECU.
CHECK:
Check if the driver door window glass auto up.
HINT:
With this inspection, the driver door ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normally or not.
NG Replace the driver ECU.
OK

DI−750
2 Check wireharness.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect connector of body No.2 ECU, ”D18” of driver door
ECU and ”R13” of rear left door ECU (or rear right door ECU).
Driver Door ECU Driver Side J/B ( ): RHD models
CHECK:
(a) ( ): RHD models:
”D18” Check continuity between terminals MPX1 of body No.2
MPX1 ECU and MPX1 of driver door ECU.
(b) ( ): RHD models:
MPX1
Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of driver door
ECU and MPX1 of rear left door ECU (or rear right door
Driver Door ECU Rear Left (or Right)
ECU).
Door ECU OK:
Continuity exists in wireharness of both (a) and (b). or either (a)
or (b).
”D18” ”R13” HINT:
MPX2 If there is OPEN in wireharness of either (a) or (b), please repair
it.
(*1) MPX1
(*2) MPX1

NG Repair or replace wireharness.
OK
Replace the driver door ECU.

DI−751
DI2B0−10
DTC B1212 / 12 Front passenger door ECU commu-

nication stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between front passenger door ECU and body No.1 ECU.
No communication from front passenger door ECU more than S Front passenger door ECU
B1212/12
10 seconds. S Wireharness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−747
1 Check front passenger door ECU.
CHECK:
Check if the front passenger door window glass auto up.
HINT:
With this inspection, the front passenger door ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normally or not.
NG Replace the front passenger door ECU.
OK

DI−752
2 Check wireharness
PREPARATION:
( )RHD models:
Disconnect connector of body No.1 ECU, ”F11” of front passen-
Passenger Door ECU Driver Side J/B ger door ECU and ”R14” of rear right (or left)door ECU.
CHECK:
(a) Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of body No.1
”F11” ECU and MPX2 of passenger door ECU.
MPX1 (b) ( ): RHD models:
Check continuity between terminals MPX1 of passenger
MPX1
door ECU and MPX2 of rear right (or left) door ECU.
OK:
Continuity exists in wireharness of both (a) and (b) or (a) or ei-
Passenger Door ECU Rear Right (or Left) ther (a) or (b).
Door ECU
HINT:
If there is OPEN in wireharness of either (a) or (b), please repair
”F11” ”R13” it.
MPX2
(*1) MPX2
(*2) MPX2
I19656
OK
Replace the passenger door ECU.

DI−753
DI2B1−07
DTC B1213 / 13 Tilt and telescopic ECU communica-

tion stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between tilt and telescopic ECU and Body No.1 ECU.
No communication from tilt and telescopic ECU more than 10 S Tilt and telescopic ECU
B1212/12
seconds. S Wireharness
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models: T5 A16
Tilt and Telescopic ECU A/C Cntrol Assembly
10
R−L MPX2 W W W W
MPX2 IJ1 MPX−
24 6 MPX1 7 16
C7 W G3
Airbag Sensor Gateway ECU
Assembly W 4 MPD1
W 11
MPD2
C15
Steering Pad Switch
W (*1) 1
MPX
RHD models:
C7
Airbag Sensor T5 A16
Assembly Tilt and Telescopic ECU A/C Cntrol Assembly
10
MPX2 W
MPX2 R−L W W ID1 W
MPX−
24 6 MPX1 7 16
G3
W
Gateway ECU
W 4 MPD1
W 11 MPD2
C15
Steering Pad Switch
5
IJ1 1
MPX
W (*1) W (*1)
(*1): 3UZ−FE engine only
I21088

DI−754
1 Check tilt and telescopic ECU.
CHECK:
Check the operation of the manual tilt and telescopic.
HINT:
With this inspection, the tile and telescopic ECM CPU can be diagnosed if it works normally or not.
NG Replace the tilt and telescopic ECU.
OK

DI−755
2 Check wireharness
Airbag Sensor Tilt and Telescopic

PREPARATION:
Assembly ECU Disconnect connector ”C7 of airbag sensor assembly, ”T5” of tilt
and telescopic ECU, ”C15” of steering pad switch, ”G3” of gate-
way ECU and ”A16” of A/C control assembly.
”C7” ”T5” CHECK:
MPX+ (a) Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of airbag sen-
sor assembly and MPX2 of tilt and telescopic ECU.
(b) Check continuity between terminals MPX1 of tilt and tele-
scopic ECU and MPD1, MPD2 of gateway ECU.
MPX2 (c) Check continuity between terminals MPX1 of tilt and tele-
Gateway
ECU Tilt and Telescopic ECU scopic ECU and MPX− of A/C amplifier.
(d) 3UZ−FE only:
Check continuity between terminals MPX of steering pad
switch and MPX2 of tilt and telescopic ECU.
”G3” ”T5”
OK:
MPD1
Continuity exists in wireharness.
HINT:
If there is OPEN in wireharness of either (a), (b), (c) or (d),
MPX1
MPD2 please repair it.
Tilt and Telescopic
ECU A/C Amplifier
”T5”
”A16”
MPX1 MPX−
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Pad Switch

ECU
”C15”
”T5”
MPX1 MPX
I19662
OK
Replace the tilt and telescopic ECU.

DI−756
DI861−01
DTC B1214 / 14 Door system communication bus mal-

function (+B short)
DTC B1215 / 15 Door system communication bus mal-

function (GND short)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when +B or GND short occurs on door system communication bus. If +B or GND short
is detected on door system communication bus, separate it by bus cut relay in Body ECU No. 1 and Body
ECU No. 2 to prevent while communication buses’ failure.

Engine and ECT
A/C Amplifier ECU
DLC3
Body ECU No. 2 Body ECU No. 1
Bus cut Bus cut

relay relay
Assembly ECU
Steering Pad Switch
(Example)
+B short Sliding roof (OPT)
(*1)
(*2) (*2)
(Example)
GND short
ECU Door ECU Door ECU ECU
Door system communication bus (*1): w/o Seat memory
(*2): w/ Seat memory
I19690

DI−757
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−747, DI−753
1 Check the communication circuit inside passenger door ECU.
Driver Door ECU PREPARATION:

Disconnect the connector ”D20” of driver door ECU.
”D20” CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:
MPX1
Code B1214/14 or B1215/15 is not output
MPX2
I03365
OK Replace the driver door ECU.
NG
2 Check the communication circuit inside rear left (or right) door ECU.
( ): RHD models
(*1) Rear Left Door ECU PREPARATION:

(*2) Rear right Door ECU (a) Connect the connector ”D24” of driver door ECU.
”R13” (*1) (b) ( ): RHD models:
”R14” (*2)
Disconnect the connector ”R13” (or ”R14”) of rear left (or
(*1): LHD MPX1 (*4) right) door ECU.
(*2): RHD
MPX2 (*4) CHECK:
(*3): w/o Double
locking system Check the DTC.
(*4): w/ Double OK:
locking system MPX1 (*3)
MPX2 (*3) I03366 Code B1214/14 or B1215/15 is not output
OK Replace the rear left (or right) door ECU.
NG
w/ Driving position memory seat: Proceed to step 3.

w/o Driving position memory seat: Proceed to step 4.

DI−758
3 Check the communication circuit inside seat ECU.
PREPARATION:
Power Seat ECU
”P19” Connect the connector ”R13” (or ”R14) of rear left (or
right) door ECU.
(b) Disconnect the connector ”P19” of power seat ECU.
MPX1 CHECK:
Check the DTC.
MPX2 OK:
I04361 Code B1214/14 or B1215/15 is not output
OK Replace the power seat ECU.
NG
4 Check the communication circuit inside rear right (or left) door ECU.
(*1) Rear right Door ECU PREPARATION:

(*2) Rear Left Door ECU (a) Connect the connector ”P19” of power seat ECU.
”R14” (*1) (b) ( ): RHD models:
”R13” (*2)
Disconnect the connector ”R14” (or ”R13”)of rear right (or
(*1): LHD MPX1 (*4) left) door ECU.
(*2): RHD
MPX2 (*4) CHECK:
(*3): w/o Double
(*4): w/ Double OK:
OK Replace the rear right (or left) door ECU.

( ): RHD models
NG

DI−759
5 Check the communication circuit inside passenger door ECU.
Passenger Door ECU PREPARATION:

”F11” Connect the connector ”R14” (”R13”) of rear right (or left)
door ECU.
(b) Disconnect the connector ”F11” of passenger door ECU.
MPX1 CHECK:
Check the DTC.
MPX2 OK:
OK Replace the passenger door ECU.
NG
6 Check for short circuit between passenger door ECU and rear right (or left) door
ECU. ( ): RHD models
(*1) Rear right Door ECU PREPARATION:

(*2) Rear Left Door ECU ( ): RHD models:
”R14” (*1) Disconnect the connector R14 (or ”R13”) of rear right (or left)
”R13” (*2)
door ECU.
(*1): LHD MPX1 (*4) CHECK:
(*2): RHD
MPX2 (*4) Check the DTC.
(*3): w/o Double
locking system OK:
(*4): w/ Double Code B1214/14 or B1215/15 is not output
MPX2 (*3) I03366
OK Repair or replace the wireharness between pas-

senger door ECU and rear right (or left) door
ECU. ( ): RHD models
NG
w/ Driving position memory seat: Proceed to step 7.

w/o Driving position memory seat: Proceed to step 9.

DI−760
7 Check for short circuit between rear right (or left) door ECU and power seat ECU.
( ): RHD models
PREPARATION:
Power Seat ECU
(a) Connect the connector ”F11” of passenger door ECU.
”P19” (b) Disconnect the connector ”P19” of power seat ECU.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
MPX1
OK:
MPX2
I04361
OK Repair or replace the wireharness between rear

right door ECU and power seat ECU.
NG
8 Check for short circuit between power seat ECU and rear left (or right) door ECU.
( ): RHD models

(*2) Rear right Door ECU (a) ( ): RHD models:
”R13” (*1) Connect the connector ”R14”(or ”R13”) of rear right (or
”R14” (*2)
left) door ECU.
(*1): LHD MPX1 (*4) (b) ( ):RHD models:
(*2): RHD
MPX2 (*4) Disconnect the connector ”R13” (or ”R14”) of rear left (or
(*3): w/o Double
locking system right) door ECU.
(*4): w/ Double CHECK:
MPX2 (*3) I03366 Check the DTC.
OK:
OK Repair or replace the wireharness between seat

ECU and rear left (or right) door ECU.
( ): RHD models
NG
Proceed to step 11

DI−761
9 Check for short circuit between rear left door ECU and rear right door ECU.

(*2) Rear right Door ECU (a) Connect the connector ”P19” of power seat ECU.
”R13” (*1) (b) ( ): RHD models:
”R14” (*2)
Disconnect the connector ”R14 (or ”R13”) rear right (or
(*1): LHD MPX1 (*4) left) door ECU.
(*2): RHD
MPX2 (*4) CHECK:
(*3): w/o Double
(*4): w/ Double OK:

left (or right) door ECU and rear right door ECU.
( ): RHD models
NG
10 Check for short circuit between rear left (or right) door ECU and driver door ECU.
( ): RHD models
PREPARATION:
Driver Door ECU
”D20” Connect the connector ”R13” (or ”R14”) of rear left (or
right) door ECU.
(b) Disconnect the connector ”D20” of driver door ECU.
MPX1 CHECK:
Check the DTC.
MPX2 OK:

left ECU and driver door ECU.
NG

DI−762
11 Check for short circuit between driver door ECU and Body ECU No. 2.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the connector ”R13” of rear left door ECU.
(b) Disconnect the connector of Body ECU No. 2.
Body ECU No. 2 HINT:
Connector is disconnected by removing Body ECU No. 2 from
driver side junction block.
CHECK:
Driver Side J/B Check the DTC.
I04360 OK:
OK Repair or replace the wireharness between driv-

er door ECU and Body ECU No. 2.
NG
12 Check for short circuit between passenger door ECU, sliding roof ECU and Body
ECU No. 1.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the connector ”D20” of driver door ECU.
(b) Install the Body ECU No. 2 to driver side junction block.
(c) Disconnect the connector of siding roof ECU and ”F11” of
passenger door ECU.
(d) Disconnect the connector of Body ECU No. 1.
HINT:
Connector is disconnected by removing Body ECU No. 1 from
passenger side junction block.
CHECK:
Check wireharness between passenger door ECU, sliding roof
ECU and Body ECU No. 1.
OK:
NG Repair or replace the wireharness between driv-

er door ECU, sliding roof ECU and Body ECU
No. 1.
OK
Replace the Body ECU No. 1.

DI−763
DI2B3−08
DTC B1216 / 16 Rear right door ECU communication

stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between rear right door ECU and body No.1 ECU.
No communication from rea

rearr rIght door ECU more than 10 S Rear rIght door ECU
B1216/16
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−747
1 Check rear right door ECU.
CHECK:
Check if the rear right door window glass auto up.
HINT:
With this inspection rear right door ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normal or not.
NG Replace the rear right door ECU.
OK

DI−764
PREPARATION:
( ): RHD models:
Passenger Door ECU Disconnect connector ”F11” of passenger door ECU, ”R14”
Rear Right Door ECU (*1)
Rear Left Door ECU (*2) (”R13”) of rear right door ECU and ”P19” of power seat ECU.
CHECK:
(a) Check continuity between terminals MPX1 of passenger
”D20”
”R14” (*1) door ECU and MPX2 of rear right door ECU.
”R13” (*2)
(b) W/ Driving position memory seat:
Check continuity between terminals MPX1 of rear right
door ECU and MPX2 of power seat ECU.
MPX2 (*4) (c) w/o Driving position memory seat:
MPX1
Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of rear right
(*3)
w/ Driving position memory seat: door ECU and MPX1 of rear left door ECU.
Power Seat ECU Rear Left Door ECU (*2) OK:
If there is OPEN in wireharness of either (a), (b) or (c), please
repair it.
”R14” (*1)
”P19” ”R13” (*2) Continuity exists in wireharness of both (a) and (b), or either (a)
or (b).
HINT:
MPX2 MPX1 (*3) it.
(*4)
w/o Driving position memory seat:

Rear Left Door ECU Rear Right Door ECU
”R14” (*1)
MPX1 ”R13” (*2)
”R13” (*1)
”R14” (*2)
(*4) (*3)
(*4) (*3)
(*1): LHD models MPX2

(*2): RHD models
(*4): w/ Double locking system I19657 NG Repair or replace wireharness.
OK
Replace the rear right door ECU.

DI−765
DI2B4−08
DTC B1217 / 17 Rear left door ECU communication

stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between rear left (or right) door ECU and body No.1 ECU.
No communication from rea

rearr left door ECU more than 10 se-
se S Rear left door ECU
B1217/17
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−747
1 Check rear left door ECU.
CHECK:
Check if the rear left door window glass auto up.
HINT:
With this inspection rear left door ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normal or not.
NG Replace the rear left door ECU.
OK

DI−766
2 Check wireharness
PREPARATION:
( ):RHD models:
Rear Left Door ECU (*1) Disconnect connector ”D20” of driver door ECU,”R14” (or
Driver Door ECU Rear Right Door ECU (*2) ”R13”) of rear left (or right) door ECU and ”P19” of power seat
ECU (or ”R14” (”R13”) of rear right (or left) door ECU).
”R13” (*1)
CHECK:
”D20” ”R14” (*2) (a) Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of driver door
ECU and MPX1 of rear left door ECU.
(b) w/Seat memory, ( ): RHD models
Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of rear left (or-
MPX1 (*3)
right) door ECU and MPX1 of power seat ECU.
(*4)
MPX2 (c) w/o Seat memory, ( ): RHD models
w/ Driving position memory seat: Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of rear left
Rear Left Door ECU (*1) Power Seat ECU door ECU and MPX1 of rear right (or left) door ECU.
OK:
Continuity exists in wireharness of both (a) and (b) or (a) and
”R13” (*1)
”R14” (*2) ”P19” (c), (a) or either (b) or (c).
HINT:
If there is OPEN in wireharness of either (a), (b) or (c), please
repair it.
(*3) MPX1
(*4)
MPX2
w/o Driving position memory seat:
Rear Left Door ECU (*1) Rear Right Door ECU (*1)
Rear Right Door ECU (*2) Rear Left Door ECU (*2)
”R14” (*1)
MPX2 ”R13” (*2)
”R13” (*1)
”R14” (*2)
(*4) (*3)
(*4) (*3)
(*1): LHD models

(*2): RHD models
(*3): w/o Double locking system MPX1
OK
Replace the rear left (or right) door ECU.

DI−767
DI2B5−04
DTC B1218 / 18 Body No.2 ECU communication stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between Body No.2 ECU and Body No.1 ECU.
No communication from Bod

Bodyy No.2 ECU more than 10 se-
se S Body No.2 ECU
B1218/18
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−747, DI−753
1 Check Body No.2 ECU.
CHECK:
Check that the headlight comes on when operating the light control switch with the ignition switch off.
HINT:
With this inspection rear left door ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normal or not.
NG Replace the Body No.2 ECU.
OK

DI−768
2 Check wireharness
PREPARATION:
Driver Door ECU Driver Side J/B (a) Disconnect connector of Body No.2 ECU, ”D20” of Driver
door ECU and ”C12” of Combination meter ECU.
(b) Remove the Body No.2 ECU from Driver side junction
”D20” block.
CHECK:
(a) Check continuity between terminals MPX1 of Body No.2
ECU and MPX1 of Driver door ECU.
MPX1
MPX1 (b) Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of Body No.2
ECU and MPX− of Combination meter ECU.
Body No.2 ECU Combination Meter ECU OK:
Continuity exists in wireharness of both (a) and (b), or either (a)
or (b).
”C12” HINT:
”B6”
it.
MPX−
MPX2
I04367
I04382 I04883
OK
Replace the Body No.2 ECU.

DI−769
DI2B6−04
DTC B1221 / 21 Power window switch circuit on driver

door
DTC B1222 / 22 Door lock switch circuit on driver door
DTC B1223 / 23 Power window switch circuit on pas-

senger door
DTC B1224 / 24 Door lock switch circuit on passenger

door
DTC B1225 / 25 Power window switch circuit on rear

right door
DTC B1226 / 26 Power window switch circuit on rear

left door
DTC B1241 / 41 Body No.1 ECU switch circuit diagno-

sis
DTC B1252 / 52 Body No.2 ECU switch circuit diagno-

sis
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
These DTC notify how switch works as follows:
If DTC is not output when operating switch, it means failure of switch contact. If DTC is output when not oper-
ating switch, it means stick of switch. When something wrong is found by this diagnosis, inspect each switch.
Then, replace the switch if there is a problem, or check the wireharness if there is no problem.
Stick of either of the power window master switch S Power window master switch
B1221/21
(except window lock switch) S Wireharness

DI−770

B1222/22 Stick of door key lock and unlock switch S Door key lock and unlock switch
S Wireharness
S Power window switch
B1223/23 Stick of power window switch or door lock control S Door lock control switch
S Wireharness
B1224/24 Stick of door key lock and unlock switch S Door key lock and unlock switch
S Wireharness
B1225/25 Stick of power window switch
S Wireharness

B1226/26 Stick of power window switch
S Wireharness
S Luggage compartment door opener switch
B1241/41 Stick of switch S Luggage compartment door lock and unlock switch
S Wireharness
S Step light switch
B1252/52 Stick of switch
S Wireharness
HINT:
Please refer to BE section for switch inspection, and to each door system of DI section for wireharness in-
spection.

DI−771
DI1SR−04
DTC B1232 / 32 Jam protection pulse switch circuit on

driver door

passenger door

rear right door

rear left door
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
These DTCs are output when a malfunction of pulse switch within power window motor is detected.
B1232/32
B1234/34 No change in pulse switch more than 2.0 seconds even if
S Jam protection pulse switch
opening
i glass
l down
d when
h limit
li it switch
it h is
i OFF
(window glass is fully closed).
closed)
B1238/38
HINT:
Please refer to power window control system of BE section for switch inspection, and to each door system
of DI section for wireharness inspection.

DI−772
DI862−01
DTC B1231 / 31 Jam protection limit switch circuit on

driver door

passenger door

rear right door

rear left door
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
These DTCs are output when a malfunction of limit switch within power wIndow motor is detected.
B1231/31
No change in limit switch more than 2.0 seconds even if oper-
B1233/33 S Jam protection limit switch
ating
ti glass
l down
d when
h limit
li it switch
it h is
i OFF
(window glass is fully closed)
B1237/37
HINT:
Please refer to power window control system of BE section for switch inspection, and to each door system
of DI section for wireharness inspection.

DI−773
DI2B7−10
DTC B1242 / 42 Wireless door lock tuner circuit mal-

function
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when GND short of RDA terminal is detected.
S Wireharness
B1242/42 GND short of RDA terminal S Wireless door lock tuner
S Body No.1 ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
Wireless Door Lock Tuner Body No.1 ECU
6 6 5
3 LG−R LG−R
IL3 IM3 B5 RCO
6
18 18
P P
4 IL3 IM3 B5 RDA
I21132

DI−774
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the connector of tuner and body No.1 ECU.
CHECK:
Check the continuity between wireharness and body ground.
RDA
Tuner Body No.1 OK:
ECU No continuity.
I03347
NG Repair or replace the wireharness.
OK
2 Check body No.1 ECU.
PREPARATION:
Connect the connector of body No.1 ECU.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:
B1242/42 is not output.
Tuner Body No.1
ECU
I03348
NG Replace the body No.1 ECU.
OK
Replace the tuner.

DI−775
DI2B9−10
DTC B1244 / 44 Light sensor circuit malfunction
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when failure of light sensor circuit is detected.
S Light sensor
S Malfunction of light sensor
S Open or short of light sensor circuit
S Body No.2 ECU
WIRING DIAGRAM
Body ECU
Light sensor No. 2
1
1 GR−R 2 CLTB
CLTB 1D
6
4 R−G 3
CLTS 1D CLTS
7
3 W−B 12
CLTE 1D CLTE
Driver Side J/B
I11623

DI−776
Using LEXUS hand −held tester:
1 Check light sensor.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the LEXUS hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(b) Turn ignition switch ON and LEXUS hand−held tester main switch ON.
CHECK:
The value of the illumination rate should change in the following range when the light sensor is put in the
light or covered by a hand
OK:
0.8 ms − 22.0 ms
HINT:
S This is the time to be taken for the light sensor to generate one circle of frequency according to the
brightness.
S When not using LEXUS hand−held tester (See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−38).
NG Replace the light sensor.
OK
2 Check wireharness and connector between light sensor and Body No.2 ECU.
OK
Replace the Body No.2 ECU.

DI−777
DI2BB−08
DTC B1261 / 61 Engine and ECT ECU communication

stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between engine and ECT ECU and Body No.1 ECU.
No communication from en
engine
gine and ECT ECU more than 10 S Engine and ECT ECU
B1261/61
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−753
1 Check engine and ECT ECU.
CHECK:
Check that the engine starts normally.
HINT:
With this inspection, engine and ECT ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normally or not.
NG Replace the engine and ECT ECU.
OK

DI−778
2 Check wireharness
3UZ−FE: Engine and ECT ECU PREPARATION:

Disconnect connector ”B5” of body No.1 ECU, E5 of engine and
Body No.1 ECT ECU, ”A16” of A/C amplifier.
ECU
”E5”
CHECK:
MPX1 ECU and MPX1 of engine and ECT ECU.
”B5”
(b) Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of engine and
ECT ECU and MPX+ of A/C amplifier.
MPX1 OK:
Engine and ECT ECU or (b).
HINT:
A/C Amplifier
it.
”E5”
MPX+
”A16”
MPX2
2JZ−GE:
Engine and ECT ECU
Body No.1 ECU
MPX1 ”E5”
”B5”
MPX1
A/C Amplifier Engine and ECT ECU
”E5”
”A16”
MPX+
MPX2
I19689
OK
Replace the engine and ECT ECU.

DI−779
DI2BC−09
DTC B1262 / 62 A/C amplifier communication stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between engine and ECT ECU and Body No.1 ECU.
S A/C amplifier
B1262/62 N communication
No i ti from
f ECU more than
th 10 seconds.
d
S Wireharness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−753

DI−780
1 Check wireharness
3UZ−FE: Engine and ECT ECU PREPARATION:

Disconnect the connector ”E5” of engine and ECT ECU, ”G3”
of gateway ECU, ”C15” of steering pad switch, T5 of tilt and tele-
A/C Amplifier scopic ECU and A/C amplifier.
MPX2 ”E5” CHECK:
MPX+
”A16” (a) Check continuity between terminals MPX+ of A/C amplifi-
er and MPX2 of engine and ECT ECU.
(b) Check continuity between terminals MPD1, MPD2 of
gateway ECU and MPX2 of A/C amplifier.
Engine and ECT ECU
(c) 3UZ−FE engine:
2JZ−FE:
Check eontinuity between terminals MPX of pad switch
A/C Amplifier
and MPX+ of A/C amplifier.
(d) Check continuity between MPX1 of tilt and telescopic
MPX2
”E5” ECU and MPX− of A/C amplifier.
”A16” OK:
MPX+
Gateway ECU A/C Amplifier
MPD1 ”A16”
MPX−
”G3”
MPD2
Steering Pad Switch A/C Amplifier
”C15” ”A16”
MPX−
MPX1
Tilt and Telescopic
ECU A/C Amplifier
”A16”
”T5”
MPX−
MPX1 I19688

DI−781
OK
Replace the A/C amplifier.

DI−782
DI863−01
DTC B1266 / 66 Instrument panel system communica-

tion bus malfunction (+B short)
DTC B1267 / 67 Instrument panel system communica-

tion bus malfunction (GND short)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when +B or GND short occurs on instrument panel system communication bus. If +B or
GND short is detected on instrument panel system communication bus, separate it by bus cut relay in Body
ECU No. 1 and Body ECU No. 2 to prevent while communication buses’ failure.

Emgine and ECT
A/C Amplifier ECU
(Example)
+B short
(Example)
GND short
DLC3
Body ECU No. 2 Body ECU No. 1
Bus cut Bus cut

relay relay
Assembly ECU
Steering Pad Switch
Sliding roof (OPT)

(*1)
(*2) (*2)
ECU Door ECU Door ECU ECU
(*1): w/o Seat memory
(*2): w/ Seat memory
I19690

DI−783
WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD models:
A16
A/C Cntrol Assembly Engine and ECT ECU Body ECU No. 1
10 3 20 (*1) 21 (*1) 19
16 MPX+ L L MPX2
ID1 IJ1 E5 E5 E5 E5 B5 MPX1
W MPX− 5 MPX1
C15 27 (*2) 28 (*2)
W
Steering Pad Switch
1
MPX MPX
(*1) 5
W Body ECU No. 2
W (*3) 4 (*3): Europe
W (*3)
MPD1
G3
W (*3) 11 Gateway ECU MPX2
MPD2
T5 19 B6
Tilt and Telescopic
ECU Combination Meter ECU
W
17 2 11 8
7 MPX1 6 24 MPX2 22 MPX+
IE1 C12 C12 IJ1
MPX2 R−L MPX1 R−L W MPX− W
C7
Airbag Sensor
RHD models: Assembly
A16
A/C Cntrol Assembly Engine and ECT ECU
Body ECU No. 1
10 3 (*1) (*1) 19
16 MPX+ 5 20 MPX2 21
ID1 ID1 B5 MPX1
W MPX− L (*2) MPX1 (*2)
L
27 28
W C15
Steering Pad Switch
5
1
II1 MPX
W (*1) W (*1)
Body ECU No. 2
W
4
MPD1
W (*3) W (*3) G3 (*1): 3UZ−FE engine
11 Gateway ECU MPX2
MPD2 (*2): 2JZ−GE engine
W (*3) (*3): Europe 19 B6
T5
Tilt and Telescopic C7
W
ECU Airbag Sensor Assembly Combination Meter ECU
24 MPX2 22 17 2 MPX+ 11 8
7 MPX1 6
MPX1 IJ1 C12 C12 IE1
MPX2 R−L R−L W MPX− W W
I21087

DI−784
HINT:
On the system structure point of view, this DTC cannot display meter. In case of checking DTC, please use
LEXUS hand held tester.
1 Check the communication circuit inside engine and ECT ECU.
PREPARATION:
3UZ−FE
Disconnect the connector ”E5” of engine ECT ECU.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
”E5” OK:
Code B1266 or B1267 is not output.
MPX1 MPX2
2JZ−GE
”E5”
MPX2
MPX1 I19683
OK Replace the engine ECT ECU.
NG

DI−785
2 Check the communication circuit inside A/C amplifier.
PREPARATION:
A/C amplifier
(a) Connect the connector ”C8” of aribag sensor assembly.
”A13” (b) Disconnect the connector ”A16” of A/C amplifier.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
MPX+ OK:
MPX−
I04363
OK Replace the A/C amplifier.
NG
3 Check the communication circuit inside steering pad switch.
Steering Pad Switch HINT:

Proceed to next step, when vehicle has no pad switch.
PREPARATION:
”C15”
(a) Connect the connector ”A16” of A/C amplifier.
(b) Disconnect the connector of ”C15” steering pad switch.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:
MPX1 I19664 Code B1266 or B1267 is not output.
OK Replace steering pad switch.
NG

DI−786
4 Check the communication circuit inside gateway ECU.
Gateway ECU PREPARATION:

(a) Connect the connector ”C15” of pad switch.
(b) Disconnect the connector ”G3” of gateway ECU.
CHECK:
”G3” Check the DTC.
MPD1 OK:
MPD2
I19665
OK Replace the gateway ECU.
NG
5 Check the communication circuit inside tilt and telescopic ECU.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the connector ”M3” of gateway ECU.
”T5” (b) Disconnect the connector ”T5” of tilt and telescopic ECU.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:
MPX2
MPX1
I04365
OK Replace the tilt and telescopic ECU.
NG

DI−787
6 Check the communication circuit inside airbag sensor assembly.

(a) Connect the connector ”T5” of tilt and telescopic ECU.
(b) Disconnect the connector ”C8” (or ”C7”) of airbag of sen-
”C8” sor assembly.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:
MPX1 MPX2
I14507
OK Replace airbag sensor assembly.
NG
7 Check the communication circuit inside combination meter ECU.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the connector airbag sensor assembly.
”C13” (b) Disconnect the connector ”C13” of combination meter
ECU.
MPX+ CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:
MPX− Code B1266 or B1267 is not output.
I04364
OK Replace the combination meter ECU.
NG

DI−788
8 Check the communication circuit inside Body ECU No. 2.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the connector ”C13” of combination meter ECU.
(b) Disconnect the connector ”B6” of Body ECU No. 2.
Body ECU No. 2 (c) Remove the Body ECU No. 2 from Driver side J/B.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
Driver Side J/B OK:
Body ECU No. 2
”B6”
MPX1
I04360
I04366 I04778
OK Replace the Body ECU No. 2.
NG
9 Check for short circuit between combination meter ECU and Body ECU No. 2.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the connector ”C12” of combination meter ECU.
”C13” CHECK:
Check the DTC.
MPX+ OK:
MPX−
I04364
OK Repair or replace the wireharness between

combination meter ECU and Body ECU No. 2.
NG

DI−789
10 Check short circuit between combination meter ECU and airbag sensor assem-
bly.

(a) Install the Body ECU No. 2 to driver side J/B.
(b) Connect the connector ”B6” of Body ECU No. 2.
”C8” (c) Disconnect the connector ”C8” of airbag sensor assem-
bly.
CHECK:
Check DTC.
OK:
MPX1 MPX2
I14507 Code B1266 or B1267 is not output.

combination meter ECU and airbag sensor as-
sembly.
NG
11 Check for short circuit between combination meter ECU and tilt and telescopic
ECU.
PREPARATION:
(a) Install the Body ECU No. 2 to driver side J/B.
”T5”
(b) Connect the connector ”B6” of Body ECU No. 2.
(c) Disconnect the connector ”T5” of tilt and telescopic ECU.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:
MPX2
Code B1266 or B1267 is not output
MPX1
I04365

combination meter ECU and tilt and telescopic
ECU.
NG

DI−790
12 Check for short circuit between tilt and telescopic ECU and gateway ECU.

(a) Connect the connector ”C12” of combination meter ECU.
CHECK:
”G3” Check the DTC.
MPD1 OK:
Code B1266 or B1267 is not output
MPD2
I19665
OK Repair or replace the wireharness between tilt

and telescopic ECU and gateway ECU.
NG
13 Check for short circuit between tilt and telescopic ECU and steering pad switch.
Steering Pad Switch PREPARATION:

HINT:
Proceed to next step, when vehicle has not steering pad switch.
”C15”
(a) Connect the connector ”G3” of gateway ECU.
(b) Disconnect the connector ”C15” of steering pad switch.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:

steering pad switch and tilt and telescopic ECU.
NG

DI−791
14 Check for short circuit between tilt and telescopic ECU and A/C amplifier.
PREPARATION:
A/C amplifier
(a) w/ Steering pad switch:
”A13” Connect the connector ”C15” of steering pad switch.
(b) w/o Steering pad switch:
Connect the connector ”G3” of gateway ECU.
MPX+ (c) Disconnect the connector ”A16” of A/C amplifier.
CHECK:
MPX− Check the DTC.
I04363 OK:
OK Repair or replace the wireharness between tilt

and telescopic ECU and A/C amplifier.
NG
15 Check for short circuit between gateway ECU and A/C amplifier.

(a) Connect the connector ”T5” of tilt and telescopic ECU.
CHECK:
”G3” \Check the DTC.
MPD1 OK:
MPD2
I19665 OK Repair or replace the wireharness between
gateway ECU and A/C amplifier.
NG

DI−792
16 Check for short circuit between gateway ECU and steering pad switch.
Steering Pad Switch PREPARATION:

HINT:
Proceed to next step, when vehicle has not steering pad switch.
”C15”
(b) Disconnect the connector ”C15” of steering pad switch.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:

gateway ECU and steering pad switch.
NG
17 Check short circuit between steering pad switch and A/C amplifier.
PREPARATION:
A/C amplifier
(a) Connect the connector ”G3” of gateway ECU.
”A13” (b) Disconnect the connector ”A16” of A/C amplifier.
CHECK:
Check the DTC.
MPX+ OK:
MPX−
I04363

steering pad switch and A/C amplifier.
NG

DI−793
18 Check for short circuit between airbag sensor assembly and engine and ECT
ECU.
PREPARATION:
(a) Connect the connector ” A16” of A/C amplifier.
(b) Disconnect the connector ”E5” of engine and ECT ECU.
”E5” CHECK:
Check the DTC.
OK:
MPX1 MPX2
I19684
OK Repair or replace the wireharness between air-
bag sensor assembly and engine and ECT ECU.
NG
19 Check for short circuit between A/C amplifier and engine and ECT ECU.
PREPARATION:
3UZ−FE
(a) Connect the connector ” C15” of pad switch.
(b) Disconnect the connector ” E5” of engine and ECT ECU.
CHECK:
”E5” Check the DTC.
OK:
MPX1 MPX2
2JZ−GE
”E5”
MPX2
MPX1 I19683
OK Repair or replace the wireharness between A/C
amplifier and engine and ECT ECU.
NG

DI−794
20 Check for short circuit between engine and ECT ECU and Body ECU No. 1.
PREPARATION:
(b) Disconnect the connector ”B5” of Body ECU No. 1.
CHECK:
Check wireharness between engine and ECT ECU and Body
ECU No. 1.
NG Repair or replace the wireharness between en-

gine and ECT ECU and Body ECU No. 1.
OK
Replace the Body ECU No. 1.

DI−795
DI2BE−07
DTC B1271 / 71 Combination meter ECU communica-

tion stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between combination meter ECU and body No.1 ECU.
No communication from Combination meter ECU more than 10 S Combination meter ECU
B1271/71
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−753
1 Check combination meter ECU.
CHECK:
Start the engine and check that the speed meter and tacometer operate normally.
HINT:
With this inspection, the combination meter ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normally or not.
NG Replace the combination meter ECU.
OK

DI−796
2 Check wireharness
PREPARATION:
Disconnect connector ”B6” of body No.2 ECU, ”C12” of com-
bination meter ECU, ”C8” of airbag sensor assembly.
CHECK:
ECU and MPX− of combination meter ECU.
(b) Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of airbag sen-
Body No.2 ECU Combination Meter ECU
sor assembly and MPX+ of combination meter ECU.
OK:
or (b).
”B6”
”C12” HINT:
If there is OPEN in wireharness of either (a), or (b), please re-
MPX− pair it.
MPX1
Airbag Sensor
Combination Meter Assembly
ECU
”C7”
”C12”
MPX+ MPX2
I19687
OK
Replace the combination meter ECU.

DI−797
DI2BF−09
DTC B1272 / 72 Power seat ECU communication stop

(w/ Seat memory vehicle only)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between power seat ECU and Body No.1 ECU.
S Power seat ECU

No i ti from
f seatt ECU more than
th 10 seconds.
d
S Wireharness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−747
1 Check power seat ECU.
CHECK:
Check that the operation of front vertical and rear vertical is normal.
HINT:
With this inspection, the power seat ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normally or not.
NG Replace the power seat ECU.
OK

DI−798
2 Check wireharness
PREPARATION:
( ): RHD models:
Rear Left Door ECU (*2) Disconnect connector ”R13” (or ”R14”) of rear right door ECU,
Power seat ECU ”P19” of power seat ECU and ”R14” (or ”R13”) of rear left door
”R13” (*1)
”R14” (*2) ECU.
CHECK:
”P19” (a) Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of rear right (or
left) door ECU and MPX1 of power seat ECU.
(b) Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of power seat
ECU and MPX1 of rear left (or right) door ECU.
MPX2 OK:
(*4)
(*3) MPX1
Rear Left Door ECU (*1) or (b).
Rear Right Door ECU (*2) Power seat ECU
HINT:
”R13” (*1) it.
”R14” (*2)
”P19”
(*3)
MPX1 MPX1
(*4)
(*1): LHD models
(*2): RHD models
OK
Replace power seat ECU.

DI−799
DI2BG−07
DTC B1273 / 73 Sliding roof ECU communication stop

(w/ Sliding roof vehicle only)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between sliding roof ECU and body No.1 ECU.
No communication from slidin

slidingg roof ECU more than 10 se-
se S Sliding roof ECU
B1273/73
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−747.
1 Check sliding roof ECU.
CHECK:
Check that the operation of the sliding roof function is normal.
HINT:
With this inspection, the sliding roof ECU CPU can be diag-
nosed if it works normally or not.
NG Replace the sliding roof ECU.
OK

DI−800
2 Check wireharness
PREPARATION:
Sliding Roof ECU Passenger Side J/B
Disconnect connector sliding roof ECU and body No.1 ECU.
HINT:
Connecter is disconnected by removing Body No.1 ECU from
passenger side junction block.
CHECK:
Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of body No.1 ECU
MPX1 MPX2 and MPX1 of sliding roof ECU.
I04383 OK:
OK
Replace the sliding roof ECU.

DI−801
DI864−01
DTC B1281 / 81 Airbag sensor assembly communica-

tion stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between airbag sensor assembly, combination meter ECU
and tilt and telescopic ECU.
No communication from airba

airbagg sensor assembl
assemblyy more than 10 S Airbag sensor assembl
assemblyy
B1281/81
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−801
CHECK:
Check whether or not DC is output when changing to other airbag sensor assembly.
OK:
DTC must not be output.
OK Replace the airbag sensor assembly. (Original

airbag sensor assembly is failure)
NG

DI−802
PREPARATION:
Airbag Sensor Disconnect connectors ” C12 ” of combination meter ECU,
Combination Meter Assembly ”T5 ” of tilt and telescopic ECU and ”C7 ” of airbag sensor as-
ECU
sembly.
CHECK:
(a) Check continuity between terminals MPX1 of airbag sen-
”C7” sor assembly and MPX2 of tilt and telescopic ECU.
MPX2 (b) Check continuity between terminals MPX2 of airbag sen-
”C12”
sor assembly and MPX+ of combination meter ECU.
OK:
MPX+ Continuity exists in wireharness of both (a) and (b), or either (a)
Airbag Sensor or (b).
Assembly Tilt and Telescopic
HINT:
ECU
it.
”C7”
MPX1 MPX2
I19685
OK
Replace the airbag sensor assembly.

DI−803
DI865−01
DTC B1285 / 85 Steering pad switch communication

stop (GS 430 only)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between steering pad switch and A/C amplifier, gateway
ECU, tilt and telescopic ECU.
No communication from steerin

steeringg pad switch more than 10 S Steering pad switch
B1285/85
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−753
1 Check steering pad switch.
CHECK:
Turn ignition switch ON and check that the steering pad switch operate normally.
NG Replace steering pad switch.
OK

DI−804
Steering Pad Switch

PREPARATION:
Gateway ECU
Disconnect connector ” G3” of gateway ECU ”A16” of A/C am-
plifier ECU, ”T5” of tilt and telescopic ECU and ” C15” of steering
”C15”
pad switch.
”G3” CHECK:
MPD1 (a) Check continuity between terminals MPX of steering pad
MPD2 switch and MPD1, MPD2 of gateway ECU.
(b) Check continuity between terminals MPX of steering pad
switch and MPX− of A/C amplifier.
MPX (c) Check continuty between terminals MPX of steering pad
Steering Pad Switch A/C Amplifier switch and MPX1 of tilt and telescopic ECU.
OK:
”C15”
There is a continuity in wireharness of both (a) and (b) or (a) and
(c), or either (b) or (c).
HINT:
”A16” If there is OPEN in wireharness of either (a) or (b), please repair
it.
MPX MPD−
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Pad Switch

ECU
”C15”
”T5”
MPX
MPD1 I19660
OK
Replace the steering pad switch.

DI−805
DI866−01
DTC B1293 / 93 Gateway ECU (AVC−LAN adapter) com-

munication stop
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This DTC is output when communication stops between tilt and telescopic ECU, A/C amplifier and gateway
ECU.
S Gateway ECU
No i ti from
f gateway
t ECU more than
th 10 seconds.
d
S Wireharness
WIRING DIAGRAM
See page DI−753
1 Check gateway ECU.
CHECK:
Check that the operation of is normal.
HINT:
With this inspection, the gateway ECU CPU can be diagnosed if it works normally or not.
NG Replace the gateway ECU.
OK

DI−806
PREPARATION:
Gateway ECU A/C Amplifier Disconnect connector ”T5 ” of tilt and telescopic ECU, ”A16 ” of
A/C amplifier ECU, steering pad switch and ”G3 ” of gateway
ECU.
”G3” CHECK:
”A16”
MPD1 (a) Check continuity between terminals MPD1, MPD2 of
MPD2 gateway ECU and MPX− of A/C amplifier.
(b) Check continuity between terminals MPD1, MPD2 of
gateway ECU and MPX1 of tilt and telescopic ECU.
MPX−
(c) Check continuity between terminal MPD1, MPD2 of gate-
Gateway ECU Tilt and Telescopic way ECU and MPX of steering pad switch.
ECU OK:
There is a continuity in wireharness of both (a) and (b) or (a) and
(c), or either (b) or (c).
”T5”
”G3” HINT:
MPD1
MPD2
it.
MPX1 NG Repair or replace wireharness.

Gateway ECU Steering Pad Switch
”C15”
”G3”
MPD1
MPD2
I19659
OK
Replace the gateway ECU.

DI−807
DIAGNOSTICS − LEXUS NAVIGATION SYSTEM
LEXUS NAVIGATION SYSTEM

DI27W−08

HINT:
The ECU of this system is connected to the multiplex communication system. Therefore, before starting trou-
bleshooting, make sure to check that there is no trouble in the multiplex communication system.

P. DI−808
2 Check and Clear DTC (Pre check)

P. DI−809
Symptom
does not occur
P. IN−20
Symptom
occurs

P. DI−809
Malfunction code

P. DI−826 P. DI−848
8 Terminal of ECU
P. DI−837
9
Repair
10
Confirmation Test
End

DI−808
DI27X−07

LEXUS NAVIGATION SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s name:
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date of Vehicle / / km
Odometer Reading
Brought in Mile
Frequency Problem Occurs j Constant j Intermittent ( Times a day)
j Cursor movement is defective.

j Cursor does not move.
Navigation
j GPS mark does not appear.
malfunction
j Map is not displayed.
j Others ( )
Problem Symptom
j Screen is dark.
j Screen is white.
Display j Color is not uniform.
malfunction
j Screen is in disorder.
j Others ( )
j Can not operate with panel switches.
Control
Switch j Can not operate with touch switches.
malfunction
j Others ( )
Parts name 1st time malfunction code. 2nd time malfunction code.
Navigation ECU
Multi − Display
DTC Check
Radio receiver assembly

Gateway ECU
Power amplifier
CD auto changer

DI−809
DI7OR−04
PRE−CHECK
1. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM MODE
HINT:
Diagnosis System Mode is operated as follows.
Navigation system normal operation
Diagnosis start−up. (refer to next page)
to 2. SYSTEM CHECK MODE SCREEN
HINT:
When Diagnosis Sys-
tem mode is started,
system check is per-
formed at first and the
check result is dis-
played.
to 3. NAVIGATION to 4. DISPLAY
CHECK MODE SCREEN CHECK MODE SCREEN
I17101

DI−810
(a) DIAGNOSIS START−UP

To start the diagnosis menu, there are 3 ways: using a
diagnosis check wire and using a switch.
(b) START−UP BY SWITCH OPERATION

(light control switch)
(1) Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 mph).
(2) Parking brake switch is pressed.
(3) While pressing ”INFO” switch, by turning the light
control switch to OFF, TAIL, OFF, TAIL, and OFF the
”INFO” Switch
system is started up.
(c) START−UP BY SWITCH OPERATION (touch panel)
I19648 (1) Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 mph).
(2) Parking brake switch is pressed.
(3) Press the ”INFO” switch to display the Screen Ad-
justment screen.
(4) Repeatedly touch the upper and lower bottom parts

Concealed of the left end of the screen 3 times.
touch
switch
I17110
(d) FINISHING DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM MODE

Turn the ignition switch from ACC to OFF to finish the
mode. If it is started by switch operation.

DI−811
2. SERVICE CHECK MODE

HINT:
Service Check Mode is operated as follows.
DTC memory and history clear
DTC memory clear
Recheck
to 1. Diagnosis
MENU screen
Yes
When there are individual DTC data.
No
DTC clear
I15446

DI−812
(a) SERVICE CHECK SCREEN
Diagnosis MENU
screen switch
Components name
Recheck
DTC clear switch

Check result Memory clear switch
I15447
(1) By performing system check and collecting data of diagnosis memory, this mode checks the cur-
rent and past condition of the vehicle.
(2) List of all components name or physical addresses.
It displays only the components that have been connected at least once.
(3) The check result is displayed for all components.
(4) The check result is displayed by 6 abbreviations: ”OK”, ”EXCH”, ”CHEK”, ”NCON”, ”NRES” and
”Old”. (”EXCH”, ”CHEK” and ”Old” have a function as switches.)
(5) Based on all information obtained from ”System Check Request”, ”Diagnosis Memory Request”
and ”Current Diagnosis Result” command, the following results are displayed:
OK: No error is identified.
EXCH: One or more error codes requesting for exchange are detected in any check result.
CHEK: Except the conditions for ”EXCH”, one or more error codes requesting for check are de-
tected in any check result.
(6) The other check results are as follows:
NCON: No response to ”Diagnosis ON Instruction” command and it is not connected when the
system is started.
Old: One or more error codes are detected when responding to ”Diagnosis ON Instruction” com-
mand because of the old version .
NRES: No response to all commands of ”System Check Request”, ”Diagnosis Memory Request”
and ”Current Diagnosis Result”. Or no error is detected by any one of ”System Check Request”
or ”Diagnosis Memory Request” when no response to the other command.
(7) ”EXCH”, ”CHEK” and ”Old” are functioned as switches any by pressing these, LAN Check Mode
and Unit Check Mode are activated.
(8) Memory Clear Switch
Pressing this switch for 3 sec. deletes all information about master component registration and
diagnosis memory of all components.
(9) DTC Clear Switch
Pressing this switch for 3 sec. deletes diagnosis memory of all components.
(10) Recheck Switch
Pressing this switch rechecks the system.
(11) Menu Switch
Pressing this switch activated the Diagnosis Menu Screen.

DI−813
(b) LAN CHECK MODE SCREEN
Components name
Service check mode

screen switch
Unit check mode

screen switch
Number of occurrence
DTC clear switch
Connection confirmation number

Segment DTC
Related components parts
I15448
(1) As a detailed screen in the System Check Mode, LAN Check Mode is displayed.
(2) Communication codes (logical address ”01”) are extracted from the diagnosis data obtained by
”Diagnosis Memory Request” and displayed.
(3) Component Name
Names of the components to be checked are displayed.
(4) Segment
Logical address codes corresponding to DTC are displayed.
(5) DTC
DTC displayed.
(6) Related components address
Physical address codes corresponding to DTC are displayed.
(7) Connection Confirmation Number
Connection confirmation numbers corresponding to DTC is displayed.
(8) Number of Occurrence
The number of occurrence of the same DTC is displayed.
Pressing this switch for 3 sec. deletes DTC memory of the selected diagnosis component. When
returning to the System Check Mode, the check result is shown as a blank.
(10) Unit Check Mode Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Unit Check Mode screen.
(11) System Check Mode Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates the System Check Mode screen.

DI−814
(c) UNIT CHECK MODE SCREEN

Components name
System check mode

screen switch
LAN check mode

screen switch
DTC clear switch

Segment
Segment Year/Month/Day
DTC
DTC Hour/Minute/Second
I15449
(1) As a detailed screen in the System Check Mode, the Unit Check Mode is displayed.
(2) Up to 6 error codes detected by ”The DTC obtained during the system check (including when
starting the diagnosis mode)” can be displayed as ”Current”.
(3) Up to 6 error codes detected by ”DTC stored in the past” can be displayed as ”Memory”.
(4) Component Name
Names of the components are displayed.
(5) Segment
Logical address numbers corresponding to DTC are displayed.
(6) DTC
DTC is displayed.
(7) Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second
The date and time stamped at the time of code occurrence is displayed in the order of year−
month−day−hour−minute−second. (Year is shown in 2−digit number.) If the date and time data
is invalid, it is displayed as a blank.
HINT:
Time data is obtained after turning the ignition from ACC to ON. Until the valid time data is obtained, the data
shown in the display shall be considered as invalid.
If stored before a valid time data is obtained, the data shall not be displayed.
Pressing this switch for 3 sec. deletes all diagnosis memory of the component. When returning
to the System Check Mode, the check result is displayed as a blank.
(9) Lan Check Mode Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates the LAN Check Mode screen.
(10) System Check Mode Screen .Switch
Pressing this switch activates the System Check Mode screen.

DI−815
3. NAVIGATION CHECK MODE

HINT:
Navigation Check Mode is operated as follows.
to 1. Diagnosis
MENU screen
I17108

DI−816
(a) NAVIGATION CHECK MODE SCREEN
Diagnosis MENU
GPS information screen switch
mode screen switch
Vehicle sensor mode
screen switch
Color bar check

mode screen switch
I17105
(1) Various check screens for the Navigation ECU can be started from this menu screen.
(2) GPS Information Mode Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates GPS Information Mode Screen.
(3) Vehicle Sensor Mode Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Vehicle Signal Mode screen.
(4) Color Bar Check Mode Screed Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Color Bar Check Mode screen.
(5) Diagnosis Menu Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Diagnosis Menu screen.

DI−817
(b) GPS INFORMATION MODE SCREEN
Navigation Check
screen switch
Time data
Satellite
Information
Measurement Status Position data

I17104
(1) This screen displays GPS related data.

HINT:
Data are updated every 1 sec.
(2) Satellite Information
The angle of elevation of relevant satellite, azimuth signal level, and receiving condition of sig-
nals are displayed.
HINT:
The reception status shows receiving.
”T”: means in operation but measurement is not being used for positioning.
”P”: means measurement is being used for positioning.
”−”: means no data can be received.
Display area for up to 8 satellites is ensured.
Data shall be updated corresponding to change of information.
(3) Time data: The time data obtained from a GPS receiver is displayed in month, day, year, hour
and minute.
(4) The displayed time is Greenwich Mean Time.
(5) Position Data: The latitude and longitude of the current location are displayed in degree and min-
ute.
(6) Measurement Status is displayed in the following 5 items.
2D: 2 dimensions.
3D: 3 dimensions.
NG: GPS information cannot be used.
error: Receiving error occurs.
−: Other than the above.
(7) Navigation Check Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Navigation Check screen.

DI−818
(c) VEHICLE SIGNAL CHECK MODE SCREEN
Navigation check
screen switch
I17106
(1) Status of the vehicle sensor which are input to the Navigation ECU is checked in this screen.
HINT:
Data are updated every 1 sec.
(2) ACC signal status: Displayed as ON/OFF.
(3) REV signal status: Displayed as ON/OFF.
(4) SPD signal status: The following is displayed:
S The cumulative value of the input pulse after displaying this screen. (shown in 5 digits)
S Vehicle speed (Unit: km/h, mph)
(5) Output condition of the gyro sensor: The following is displayed:
S Voltage (Unit: mV, LSB: 1mV)
S Relative azimuthal angle to the current point (0 degree).
Assuming the angle at a point when this screen is activated as 0 degree.
(6) Navigation Check Menu Screen Switch
Pressing this switch displays the Navigation Check screen.

DI−819
(d) COLOR BAR CHECK MODE SCREEN
Navigation check
screen switch
I17107
(1) Color display of the Navigation ECU is checked in this screen.

(2) Color Bars:
Five colors of ”BLACK”, ”RED”, ”GREEN”, ”BLUE” and ”WHITE” are displayed as bars.
(3) Navigation Check Screen Switch
Pressing this switch displays the Navigation Check screen.

DI−820
4. DISPLAY CHECK MODE

HINT:
Display Check Mode is operated as follows.
to 1. Diagnosis MENU
mode screen switch
I21097

DI−821
(a) DISPLAY CHECK MENU SCREEN
to 1. Diagnosis MENU
Color bar screen switch
check mode switch
Touch switch
check mode switch
Panel switch
check mode switch
Vehicle signal
check mode switch
I21099
(1) Various screens to check the display are started from this screen.
(2) Color Bar Check Mode Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Color Bar Check Mode screen.
(3) Touch Switch Check Mode Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Touch Switch Check Mode screen.
(4) Vehicle Signal Check Mode Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Vehicle Signal Check Mode screen.
(5) Diagnosis MENU Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Diagnosis MENU screen.
(6) Panel Switch Check Mode Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Panel Switch Check Mode screen.

DI−822
(b) TOUCH SWITCH CHECK MODE SCREEN

(1) Operating condition is checked line by line in the
Touch Switch Check Mode screen.
(2) Check Line:
Lines are displayed by using infrared beams in this
screen.
Once a beam is blocked off by touching the screen
with a fingertip, the blocked part of the line is de-
leted.
(3) Horizontal Line Check Screen Switch:
Pressing this switch activates a screen in which
beams of horizontal lines are checked.
(4) Display Check Mode Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Display Check
Mode screen.
I18203

DI−823
(c) COLOR BAR CHECK MODE SCREEN
to Display
check screen switch
I15456
(1) Color display is checked in this screen.

(2) Color Bar:
Black, Red, Green, Blue, White and Stripe is displayed in bars.
If a bar is touched, color or stripe of the bar is appeared all over the screen. When touched again, it returns
to the previous screen.
(3) Display Check Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Display Check Mode screen.

DI−824
(d) VEHICLE SIGNAL CHECK MODE SCREEN
Display
check screen switch
I21098
(1) Status of the Vehicle Signal which has been loaded into the display is checked in this screen.
(2) Signal Description
Battery: Displays battery voltage in V.
IG: Displays ON or OFF of the ignition switch.
PKB: Displays ON (applied) or OFF (released) of the parking brake.
SPEED: Displays the vehicle speed in km/h.
TAIL: Displays ON or OFF of the tail light switch.
ADIM/TCAN: Displays DIM r BRIGHT of the ADIM signal information
(3) Display Check Screen Switch
Pressing this switch activates the Display Check Mode screen.

DI−825
(e) PANEL SWITCH CHECK MODE SCREEN
(*1)
Display
check mode switch
(*2)
I15460
(1) Start the Diagnosis system.

(2) Select ”MENU”.
(3) Select ”Display Check”.
(4) Select ”Panel Switch Check”.
(5) Press each switch and make sure that it corresponds to the display on the screen.
Display Data Contents
Names of push−button switches pressed are displayed.
Pressing 2 or more push−button switches is displayed as ”Multi SW”. After that if
Names of push−button switches/*1
the number of push−button switches being pressed becomes 1, the name of the
push−button switch being pressed is displayed.
Direction of the rotation/*2 Direction of a rotary switch (Volume switch, etc.) is displayed as ”right” or ”left”.
Disp MENU Pressing this switch activates Display Check Menu.

DI−826
DI27Z−07

Terms Meaning
Three−digit code (shown in hexadecimal) which is given to each component com-
Physical address
prising the AVC−LAN.
Corresponding to the function, individual symbols are specified.
Logical address Two−digit code (shown in hexadecimal) which is given to each function comprising
the inner system of the AVC−LAN.
1. PHYSICAL ADDRESS: 110 MULTI DISPLAY

HINT:
S *1: Even if no failure is detected, it may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for
starting an engine.
S *2: It is stored when 180 sec. has passed after the power supply connector is pulled out after engine
start.
S *3: It may be stored when the engine key is turned again after engine start.
S *4: It may be stored when the engine key is turned 1 min. again after engine start.
(a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control)
DTC Diagnosis item diagnosis content Countermeasure and inspected parts
21 ROM Error Abnormal condition of ROM is detected. Replace multi−display assembly.
22 RAM Error Abnormal condition of RAM is detected. Replace multi−display assembly.
D5 Registered component disconnected Component shown by auxiliary code is or S Check harness for power supply of compo-
*1 was disconnected from system with ignition nent shown by auxiliary code.
switch in ACC or ON. S Check harness for communication system
Communication with component shown by of component shown by auxiliary code.
auxiliary code is not ensured when engine is
started.
D8 No response to connection check Component shown by auxiliary code is or S Check harness for power supply of compo-
*2 was disconnected from system after engine nent shown by auxiliary code.
is started. S Check harness for communication system
of component shown by auxiliary code.
D9 Last Mode Error Component operated (sound and/or image S Check harness for power supply of compo-
*1 was provided) before engine stop is or was nent shown by auxiliary code.
disconnected with ignition switch in ACC or S Check harness for communication system
ON. of component shown by auxiliary code.
DB Mode Status Error Dual alarm is detected. S Check harness for power supply system of
*1 component shown by auxiliary code.
S Check harness for communication system
DC Transmission Error Transmission to component shown by auxil- If same auxiliary code is recorded in order
*4 iary code has been failed. component(s), check harness for power
(This code does not necessarily mean actu- supply and communication system of all
al failure.) components shown by code.
DE Slave Reset (Momentary Interruption) After engine start, slave component has S Check harness for power supply system of
*3 been disconnected. component shown by auxiliary code.
DB S Check harness for communication system
E2 ON/OFF Instruction Parameter Error Error is detected in ON/OFF control com- Replace multi−display assembly.
mand from multi−display assembly.
E3 Registration Request Transmission S Registration Request command is output Since this DTC is provided for engineering,
*1 from slave component. it may be detected when no actual failure
S By reception of connection check instruc- exists.
tion, Registration Request command is out-
put from sub−master component.

DI−827
(b) Logical address: 21 (Switch)

10 Panel Switch Error Error in panel switch input part is detected. S Inspect all switches on panel switch test
(Error in switch control part, or internal com- screen in display check mode. If any of
munication error with switch control part is them does not function, replace multi−dis-
detected.) play assembly.
S If all switches function without problem, ob-
serve them for a while.
11 Touch Switch Error Error in touch switch sensor is detected. S Inspect all touch switches on touch switch
(Light level of LED is detected to be less test screen in display check mode. If any
than a fixed value.) of lines does not react, replace multi−dis-
play assembly.
S If all of vertical and horizontal lines react
normally, observe them for a while.
(c) Logical address: 34 (Front passenger monitor)

10 Error in Picture Circuit Error in power supply system for picture cir- Replace multi−display assembly.
cuit (abnormal voltage) is detected.
11 Back−light Error (No current) Decline in power output from inverter circuit Replace multi−display assembly.
for back−light.
12 Back−light Error (Excess current) Excess power output from inverter circuit for Replace multi−display assembly.
back−light.

DI−828
2. PHYSICAL ADDRESS: 178 NAVIGATION ECU

HINT:
starting an engine.
S *2: When 210 sec. has passed after pulling out the power supply connector of the master component
with the ignition switch in ACC or ON, this code is stored.
D6 Absence of Master Component in which this code is recorded S Check harness for power supply system of
*1 has been disconnected from system with multi−display.
ignition in ACC or ON. Or, when this code S Check harness for communication system
was recorded, multi−display assembly was of multi−display.
disconnected. S Check harness for power supply system of
navigation ECU.
of navigation ECU.
D7 Communication Check Error Component in which this code is recorded S Check harness for power supply system of
*2 has been disconnected from system after multi−display.
engine start. Or, when this code was re- S Check harness for communication system
corded, multi−display assembly was discon- of multi−display.
nected. S Check harness for power supply system of
D6 navigation ECU.
of navigation ECU.
DC Transmission Error Transmission to component shown by auxil- If same auxiliary code is recorded in other
*3 iary code has been failed. component(s), check harness for power
(This code does not necessarily mean actu- supply and communication system of all
al failure.) components shown by code.
DD Master Reset (Momentary Interruption) Component that is to be master has been S Check harness for power supply system of
*4 disconnected after engine start. multi−display assembly.
of multi−display assembly.
S If error occurs frequently, replace multi−
display assembly.
E0 Registration Completion Instruction Error ”Registration Completion Instruction” com- Since this DTC is provided for engineering,
*1 mand from master cannot be received. it may be detected when no actual failure
exists.
E2 ON/OFF Instruction Parameter Error Error is detected in ON/OFF control com- Replace multi−display assembly.
E3 Registration Request Transmission S Registration Request command is output Since this DTC is provided for engineering,
*1 from slave component. it may be detected when no actual failure
S Registration Request command is output exists.
from sub−master component.

DI−829
(b) Logical address: 58 (Navigation ECU)

10 Gyro Error Error in gyro sensor is detected. Replace navigation ECU.
(Abnormal value in voltage output from sen-
sor is detected for more than specified time.)
42 Map Disc Error Data cannot be read for a certain time due Inspect disc and replace if necessary.
to scratches or dirt on disc surface or inser- (Visually check disc surface and wipe it with
tion of disc. soft cloth.)
43 Vehicle Signal Error Input error of vehicle signal is detected. S Inspect wire harness.
(When no vehicle signal has been input for a S If wire harness is normal, replace naviga-
certain time.) tion ECU.
44 Player Error Malfunction of player continues for a certain S Check if disc can be inserted/taken out or
length of time. not. If not, replace navigation ECU.
S If it can be inserted/taken out and this code
is output, replace navigation ECU.
(c) Logical address: 80 (GPS receiver)

11 GPS Receiver Error Operation error of GPS receiver is detected. At an outdoor site with a clear view, operate
to display GPS data. If GPS mark is not
properly displayed after 15 min. or more,
replace navigation ECU.
40 GPS Antenna Error Open condition of GPS antenna is detected. Inspect antenna and replace if necessary.
(Open circuit, connection failure of connec-
tors, etc.)
41 Power Supply Error of GPS Antenna Abnormal voltage of GPS antenna cable or S Inspect GPS antenna and replace if neces-
short circuit is detected. sary. (When no continuity is identified be-
tween connector’s core and sealed part,
GPS antenna is normal.)
S If GPS antenna is normal, replace naviga-
tion ECU.
45 Player Temp. Too High Readout cannot be done because tempera- S With ignition switch OFF, leave vehicle in
ture around player’s pickup (reading part) is cool shaded place for a while and recheck.
too high. S If same code detected, replace navigation
ECU.

DI−830
3. PHYSICAL ADDRESS: 1C4 GATEWAY ECU

HINT:
*1: When 210 sec. has passed after pulling out the power supply connector of the master component with
the ignition switch in ACC or ON, this code is stored.
Logical address: 01 (Communication control)
D4 Regular Communication Error Component in which this code is recorded S Check harness for power supply system of
*1 has been disconnected after engine start. multi−display assembly.
Or, when this code was recorded, multi−dis- S Check harness for communication system
play was disconnected. of multi−display assembly.
S Check harness for power supply system of
gateway ECU.
of gateway ECU.

DI−831
4. PHYSICAL ADDRESS: 190 RADIO AND PLAYER

HINT:
starting an engine.
S *2: It is stored when 180 sec. has passed after the power supply connector is pulled out after engine
start.
D6 Absence of Master Component in which this code is recorded S Check harness for power supply system of
*1 has been disconnected from system with multi−display.
was recorded, multi−display assembly was of multi−display.
disconnected. S Check harness for power supply system of
radio and player.
of radio and player.
D8 No Response to Connection Check Component shown by auxiliary code is or S Check harness for power supply system of
*2 had been disconnected from system after component shown by auxiliary code.
engine is start. S Check harness for communication system
D9 of component shown by auxiliary code.
D9 Last Mode Error Component operated (sounds and/or S Check harness for power supply system of
*1 images were provided) before engine stop is component shown by auxiliary code.
or has been disconnected with ignition S Check harness for communication system
switch in ACC or ON. of component shown by auxiliary code.
DA No Response to ON/OFF Instruction No response is identified when changing S Check harness for power supply system of
mode (audio and visual mode change). component shown by auxiliary code.
Detected when sound and picture does not S Check harness for communication system
change by button operation. of component shown by auxiliary code.
S If error occurs again, replace component
shown by auxiliary code.
DB Mode Status Error Dual alarm is detected. S Check harness for power supply of compo-
*1 nent shown by auxiliary code.
*3 iary code has been failed. component, check harness for power supply
(Detecting this DTC does not necessarily and communication system of all compo-
mean actual failure.) nents shown by code.
DD Master Reset (Momentary Interruption) After engine is started, multi−display assem- S Check harness for power supply system of
*4 bly was disconnected from system. multi−display.
of multi−display.
radio and player.
S If this error occurs frequently, replace mul-
ti−display assembly.

DI−832
DE Slave Reset (Momentary Interruption) After engine is started, slave component S Check harness for power supply of compo-
*4 was disconnected from system. nent shown by auxiliary code.
DF Master Error Due to defective condition of component S Check harness for power supply of multi−
*5 with a display, master function is switched to display assembly.
audio equipment. S Check harness for communication system
Error occurs in communication between of multi−display assembly.
sub−master (audio) and master component. S Check harness for communication system
between multi−display assembly and sub−
master component.
E0 Registration Completion Instruction Error ”Registration Completion Instruction” com- Since this DTC is provided for engineering
*1 mand from master cannot be received. purpose, it may be detected when no actual
failure exists.
E1 Audio processor ON error While source equipment is operating, AMP S Check harness for power supply of multi−
*1 output is stopped. display assembly.
E2 ON/OFF Instruction Parameter Error Error occurs in ON/OFF controlling com- Replace multi−display assembly.
E3 Registration Request Transmission Registration Request command is output Since this DTC is provided for engineering
*1 from slave component. purpose, it may be detected when no actual
Receiving Connection Check Instruction, failure exists.
Registration Request command is output
E4 Multiple Frame Abort Multiple frame transmission is aborted. Since this DTC is provided for engineering
*1 purpose, it may be detected when no actual
failure exists.
(b) Logical address: 61 (Cassette switch)
40 Mechanical of Media Error Malfunction due to mechanical failure is S Inspect cassette tape.
identified. S Replace radio and player.
Or cassette tape is cut or entangled.
5. PHYSICAL ADDRESS: 440 STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER
HINT:
starting an engine.
D6 Absence of Master Component in which this code is recorded S Check harness for power supply of radio
*1 has been disconnected from system with and player.
was recorded, multi−display assembly was of radio and player.
disconnected. S Check harness for power supply of stereo
component amplifier.
of stereo component amplifier.

DI−833
D7 Communication Check Error Component in which this code is recorded is S Check harness for power supply of radio
or was disconnected from system after en- and player.
gine start. Or, when recording this code, S Check harness for communication system
multi−display assembly was disconnected. of radio and player.
S Check harness for power supply of stereo
DD Master Reset (Momentary Interruption) After engine is started, multi−display assem- S Check harness for power supply of radio
*3 bly was disconnected from system. and player.
S Check harness for power supply of stereo
master component.
E0 Registration Completion Instruction Error ”Registration Completion Instruction” com- Since this DTC is provided for engineering
*1 mand from master cannot be received. purpose, it may be detected when no actual
failure exists.
E1 Audio processor ON error While source equipment is operating, AMP S Check harness for power supply of multi−
*1 output is stopped. display assembly.
E3 Registration Request Transmission S Registration Request command is output Since this DTC is provided for engineering
S Registration Connection Check Instruction, failure exists.

DI−834
6. PHYSICAL ADDRESS: 240 CD AUTO CHANGER

HINT:
starting an engine.
21 ROM Error Abnormal condition of ROM is detected. Replace CD auto changer.
22 RAM Error Abnormal condition of ROM is detected. Replace CD auto changer.
D6 Absence of Master Component in which this code is recorded is S Check harness for power supply system of
*2 or was disconnected from system after en- multi−display.
gine start. Or, when recording this code, S Check harness for communication system
multi−display assembly was disconnected. of multi−display.
CD auto changer
CD auto changer
Component in which this code is recorded is S Check harness for power supply of multi−
or was disconnected from system after en- displaly.
D7 Connection check Error gine start. Or, when recording this code, S Check harness for communication system
*5 multi−display assembly was disconnected. of multi−display.
S Check harness for power supply of CD
auto changer.
of CD auto changer.

DI−835
DD Master Reset (Momentary Interruption) After engine is started, multi−display assem- S Check harness for power supply system of
*3 bly was disconnected from system. multi−display.
multi−display.
CD auto changer.
CD auto changer.
master component.
E0 Registration Completion Instruction Error ”Registration Completion Instruction” com- Since this DTC is provided for engineering,
*1 mand from master cannot be received. it may be detected when no actual failure
exists.
E3 Registration Request Transmission S Registration Request command is output Since this DTC is provided for engineering
S Receiving Connection Check Instruction, failure exists.
E4 Multiple Frame Abort Multiple frame transmission is aborted. Since this DTC is provided for engineering
*1 purpose, it may be detected when no actual
failure exists.

DI−836
DI7OS−04
PARTS LOCATION
Tweeter
Tweeter CD Auto Changer
Power Amplifier
Radio Receiver Assembly
Driver Side J/B

S RAD No. 2 Fuse
Front Speaker
GPS Antenna
Front Speaker
Woofer
Navigation ECU
Rear Speaker
Rear Speaker
I19650

DI−837
DI86D−01
TERMINALS OF ECU
MULTI DISPLAY
M3 M6 M2
I15528
Problem symptom when open cir-

Symbols cuit is detected.
C diti
Condition STD V
Voltage
lt (V)
(Terminal No.) Problem symptoms when short cir-
cuit is detected.
+B « GND1 Navigation system does not oper-
Constant 10−14
(M2−1 « M2−6) ate.
TX2 « GND1 Navigation system does not oper-
Ignition switch ON 10−14
(M2−2 « M2−6) ate.
ACC « GND1 Navigation system does not oper-

Ignition switch ACC 10−14
(M2−2 « M2−6) ate.
GND1 « Body ground
Constant Continuity Audio system is normal.
(M2−6 « Body ground)
TX1+ AVC−LAN Navigation system does not oper-

−
(M3−3) communication circuit ate.
SPD « GND1 Ignition switch ON, and driving Repeatedly changes from below 1 Fuel efficiency cannot be calcu-
(M3−5 « M2−6) wheel rotated smoothly to 9 V lated.
TX3+ « GND1
Ignition switch ACC or ON About 2.5 Screen is disorder.
(M3−4 « M2−6)
TX1− AVC−LAN Navigation system does not oper-
−
(M3−10) communication circuit ate.
TX3− « GND1
Ignition switch ACC or ON About 2.5 Screen is disorder.
(M3−11 « M2−6)
Ignition switch ON, and parking
PKB « GND1 The system cannot enter Diagnos-
brake switch ON (parking brake 5
(M3−13 « M2−6) tic system mode.
pedal released)
Ignition switch OFF and connect Navigation system is normal.

TC « GND1
terminals TC and E1 of check con- Continuity The system does not exit Service
(M3−14 « M2−6)
nector check mode.
VR « VG Screen noise or other types of
Constant Continuity
(M6−1 « M6−6) noise occur.
R « VG Diagnosis display check screen is
0.7 ± 0.1 *2 Screen color turns to blue
(M6−2 « M6−6) white (Using an oscilloscope)

DI−838
B « VG Diagnosis display check screen is

0.7 ± 0.1 *2 Screen color turns to yellow
G « VG Diagnosis display check screen is
0.7 ± 0.1 *2 Screen color turns to red−purple.
SYVC « VG Display ON
0.5 − 1.3 *1 Screen is in disorder
(M6−8 « M6−6) (Using an oscilloscope)

DI−839
NAVIGATION ECU
N4 N3 M5
I21095

C diti
Condition STD V
Voltage
lt (V)
(Terminal No.) Problem symptom when short cir-
cuit is detected.
Screen noise or other types of
VR « VG noise occur.
C
Constant
t t C ti it
Continuity
(N3−1 « N3−6) Navigation system does not oper-
ate.
R « VG Diagnosis display check screen is
0.7 ± 0.1 *1 Screen color turns to blue.
(N3−2 « N3−6) white (Using an oscilloscope)
B « VG Diagnosis display check screen is

0.7 ± 0.1 *1 Screen color turns to yellow.
TX+ AVC−LAN Navigation system does not oper-
−
(N3−5) Communication circuit ate.
G « VG Diagnosis display check screen is

0.7 ± 0.1 *1 Screen color turns to red−purple.
SYNC « VG Display ON
0.5 − 1.3 *1 Screen is in disorder.
(N3−8 « N3−6) (Using an oscilloscope)
TX− AVC−LAN Navigation system does not oper-

−
(N3−10) Communication circuit ate.
AUI+ « GND Driver’s side speaker does not
Radio switch ON 5−7
(N4−1 « N4−17) sound.
AUI+ « GND Driver’s side speaker does not

(N4−2 « N4−17) sound.
SPD « GND Ignition switch ON, and driving Repeatedly changes from below 1 Fuel efficiency cannot be calcu-
(N4−5 « N4−17) wheel rotated smoothly. to 9 V lated.
AUI− « GND Driver’s side speaker does not

(N4−10 « N4−17) sound.
AUI− « GND Driver’s side speaker does not
(N4−11 « N4−17) sound.
+B « GND Navigation system does not oper-

Constant 10 − 14
(N4−9 « N4−17) ate.

DI−840
The direction of advance of the ve-

REV « GND
A/T shift position R 5 hicle is different from that of cur-
(N4−11 « N4−17)
sor.
Pop sound etc.
MUTE « GND
Radio switch ON 5 Navigation system does not oper-
(N4−15 « N4−17)
ate.
GND « Body ground
Constant Continuity Audio system is normal
(N4−17 « Body ground)
ACC « GND Navigation system does not oper-

Ignition switch ACC 10 − 14
(N4−18 « N4−17) ate.

DI−841
AUDIO HEAD UNIT
R3 R2
I21093

C diti
Condition STD V
Voltage
lt (V)
cuit is detected.
B « GND
Constant 10 − 14 Audio system does not operate.
(R2−1 « R2−20)
Audio head unit illumination does
ILL+ « GND not light up.
Light control switch TAIL 10 − 14
(R2 2 « R2
(R2−2 R2−20)
20)
Fuse is blown.
ANT « GND
Radio switch ON 10 − 14 Antenna does not extend.
(R2−4 « R2−20)
BUS+ AVC−LAN
− Audio system does not operate.
(R2−5) Communication circuit
MUTE « GND Pop sound etc.

R di switch
Radio it h ON 5
(R2−7 « R2−20) Audio system does not operate.
R+ « GND Sound from right side speaker is
Constant 10 − 14
(R2−8 « R2−20) small.
L+ « GND Sound from left side speaker is
Constant 10 − 14
(R2−9 « R2−20) small.
ACC « GND
Ignition switch ACC 10 − 14 Audio system does not operate.
(R2−11 « R2−20)
Audio head unit illumination does
ILL− « GND not light up.
Light control switch TAIL Below 0.5
(R2 12 « R2−20)
(R2−12 R2 20)
Fuse is blown.
ANTB « GND
(R2−13 « R2−20)
ANTA « GND
(R2−14 « R2−20)
BUS− AVC−LAN
L− « GND Sound from left side speaker is

Constant 10 − 14
(R2−19 « R2−20) small.
GND « Body ground
Constant Continuity Audio system is normal.
(R2−20 « Body ground)

DI−842
TX− AVC−LAN
TX+ AVC−LAN

DI−843
STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER
S8 S9 S10 S11
I21094

C diti
Condition STD V
Voltage
lt (V)
cuit is detected.
R+
− − RH side speaker does not sound.
(S8−1)
L+
− − LH side speaker does not sound.
(S8−2)
MUTE « E Pop sound etc.

R di switch
Radio it h ON 5
(S8−4 « S10−7) Audio system does not operate.
R−
− − RH side speaker does not sound.
(S8−6)
L−
− − LH side speaker does not sound.
(S8−7)
BUS+ AVC−LAN
(S8−9) Communication circuit
BUS− AVC−LAN
ACC « E
Ignition switch ACC 10 − 14 Audio system does not operate.
(S8−12 « S10−7)
TXM+ AVC−LAN
CDR+ Sound from right side speaker is
− −
(S9−2) small.
CDL+ Sound from left side speaker is

− −
(S9−3) small.
TXM− « E AVC−LAN
CDR− Sound from right side speaker is

− −
(S9−5) small.
MUTE « E Pop sound etc.

CD auto
t changer
h switch
it h ON 5−7
(S9−6 « S10−7) Audio system does not operate.
CDL− Sound from left side speaker is
− −
(S9−8) small.
DI−844
FR+ « E
Radio switch ON 5−7 RH side speaker does not sound.
(S10−1 « S10−7)
FL+ « E
Radio switch ON 5−7 LH side speaker does not sound.
(S10−2 « S10−7)
FR− « E
Radio switch ON 5−7 RH side speaker does not sound.
(S10−5 « S10−7)
FL− « E
Radio switch ON 5−7 LH side speaker does not sound.
(S10−6 « S10−7)
E « Body ground
Constant Continuity
(S10−7 « Body ground)
N−MU AVC−LAN Navigation system does not oper-
−
(S10−10) Communication circuit ate.
RR+ « E Rear RH side speaker does not

(S11−1 « S10−7) sound.
RL+ « E Rear LH side speaker does not
(S11−2 « S10−7) sound.
RR− « E Rear RH side speaker does not

(S11−3 « S10−7) sound.
WF+ « E
Radio switch ON 5−7 Woofer does not sound.
(S11−4 « S10−7)
WF− « E
Radio switch ON 5−7 Woofer does not sound.
(S11−5 « S10−7)
RL− « E Rear LH side speaker does not
(S11−6 « S10−7) sound.

DI−845
CD AUTO CHANGER
C5
I04235

C diti
Condition STD V
Voltage
lt (V)
cuit is detected.
CDR+ Sound from right side speaker is
− −
(C5−1) small.
CDL+ Sound from left side speaker is

− −
(C5−2) small.
MUTE « GND Pop sound etc.

R di switch
Radio it h ON 5
(C5−3 « C5−8) Audio system does not operate.
TXM+ « GND
Ignition switch ON 2−3 Audio system does not operate.
(C5−3 « C5−8)
CD auto changer does not oper-
B « GND ate.
Constant 10 − 14
(C5 5 « C5
(C5−5 C5−8)
8)
Audio system does not operate.
CDR− Sound from right side speaker is
− −
(C5−6) small.
CDL− Sound from left side speaker is
− −
(C5−7) small.
GND « Body ground

Constant Continuity Audio system does not operate.
(C5−8 « Body ground)
TXM− « GND
Ignition switch ON 2−3 Audio system does not operate.
(C5−3 « C5−8)
ACC « E CD auto changer does not oper-

Ignition switch ACC 10 − 14
(C5−10 « C5−8) ate.

DI−846
GATEAY ECU
G3
7 6 543 2 1
14 13 121110 9 8
I13684

IG « GND
GR « W−B Ignition switch ON 10 − 14
(G3−2 « G3−14)
MPD1 (G3−2) W Multiplex communication circuit −

GTX+ (G3−5) BR AVC−LAN communication circuit −
CG « BOdy ground W−B « Body
Constant Continuity
(G3−7 « Body ground) ground
BATT « GND
G−W « W−B Constant 10 − 14
(G3−8 « G3−14)
ACC « GND
GR « W−B Ignition switch ACC 10 − 14
(G3−9 « G3−14)
MPD2 (G3−11) W Multiplex communication circuit −
GTX− (G3−12) Y AVC−LAN communication circuit −
GND « Body ground W−B « Body
Constant Continuity
(G3−14 « Body ground) ground

DI−847
Oscilloscope
*1: wave1
D Measure terminal: SYNC « GND1

D Measure set: 500 mV/DIV 10 ms/DV
D Condition: Navigation display is displayed
GND
I15531
Oscilloscope
*1: wave1
D Measure terminal: R, G, B « GND1

GND D Measure set: 200 mV/DIV 10 ms/DV
D Condition: Navigation map is switched
I15532

DI−848
DI86E−01

Flow chart No.
Component Symptom
1.
Multi display Black screen (Nothing displayed)
2.
No sound with Power switch pressed. (”AUTO OFF” on audio screen)
3. No navigation screen displayed when ”MAP”, ”MENU” or ”DEST” switch

pressed. (Screen cannot be switched.)
4. No corresponding screen displayed when ”AUDIO” or ”Information”
switch pressed.
5. No navigation displayed, ”Audio OFF” on audio screen and no audio
sound.
6.
Screen cannot be dimmed in night time.
7.
Navigation screen not stabilized. (Synchronous error)
8. Color on navigation screen is unusual (RGB signal error)
9.
Black screen appears when ”MAP”, ”Menu” or ”DEST” switch pressed.
10.
Sound of radio, cassette tape or CD only cannot be heard from speaker.
11. No sound (radio, cassette tape, CD) can be heard from driver side door
speaker only.
12.
Map DISC cannot be inserted.
13. MAP screen display does not appear.

(Disc Caution screen does not change.)
14. MAP is displayed in white or blue screen. (Switch and vehicle position
mark is displayed.)
15.
Touch switch does not function. (Navigation screen only)
16. Touch switch does not function. (A/C control screen only)
17.
Panel switch does not function. (Navigation screen only)
18.
Panel switch does not function. (A/C control screen only)
19.
The screen cannot be change to night mode color.
20.
Vehicle position is deviated from correct point badly.
21.
GPS mark does not appear.

DI−849
22.
No voice navigation.
23.
Vehicle position rotates without control. (Map rotates without control)
24.
Driving direction is opposite to moving direction of vehicle position mark.
25.
Audio Head Unit Radio reception poor.
26. Cassette tape cannot be inserted.
27.
Cassette tape cannot be ejected.
28. Any speaker does not work.
29. CD AUTO
CD magazine cannot be inserted.
Changer
30.
CD magazine inserted, but no power.
31.
Power coming in, but CD auto changer not operating..
32.
Sound jumps.
33. Sound quality poor. (Volume faint)
34. CD magazine will not be ejected.
36. Power
No power coming in.
Amplifier
37.
Any speaker does not work.
38.
No power coming, but woofer amplifier not operating.
39.
Noise Noise occurs
40.
Noise produced by vibration or shock while driving.
41.
Noise produced when engine starts.

DI−850
DI7OU−04
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1. Black screen (Nothing displayed)
1 Check the ECU−IG fuse.
NG Replace the fuse.
OK
2 Check multi display.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the multi display connector.
CHECK:
Check voltage terminals +B.
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
Check voltage terminal ACC when turn ignition switch ACC or ON position.
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
Check continuity terminal GND1.
OK:
GND1: Continuity
OK
Replace the multi display.

DI−851
DI7OV−03
2. No sound with POWER switch pressed. (”Audio OFF” on audio

screen)
1 Service check mode. (Check radio receiver assembly)
NG Troubleshoot for each diagnosis.
OK
2 Check the radio receiver assembly.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the radio receiver assembly connector.
CHECK:
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
GND1: Continuity
OK
Replace the radio receiver assembly.

DI−852
DI7OW−03
3. No navigation screen displayed when ”MAP”, ”Menu”, or ”DEST”

switch pressed. (Screen cannot be switched.)
1 Service check mode. (Check the navigation ECU)
OK Replace multi display.
Ncon
2 Check the navigation ECU.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the navigation ECU connector.
CHECK:
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
GND1: Continuity
OK

DI−853
CHECK:
Check terminal R, G and B.
OK:
R, G, B: See ”Naavigation ECU” of ”TERMINAL OF ECU”.
NG Replace the navigation ECU.
OK
4 Check the multi display.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
GND1: Continuity
OK
CHECK:
Check terminal R, G and B.
OK:
R, G, B: See ”multi display” of ”TERMINAL OF ECU”.
OK

DI−854
Replace multi display.

DI−855
DI7OX−04
4. No corresponding screen displayed when ”Audio” or ”Informa-

tion” switch pressed.
1 Service check mode (Panel switch check mode screen)
OK
2 Check AVC−LAN communication circuit (See page DI−914).
NG Repair or replace AVC−LAN circuit.
OK

DI−856
DI7OY−04
5. No navigation displayed, ”Audio OFF” on audio screen and no

audio sound.
1 Service check mode.
OK
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
Check continuity terminal GND.
OK:
GND: Continuity
NG Replace or repair wire harness.
OK
3 Check ”AVC−LAN communication circuit” (See page DI−914).
NG Replace the AVC−LAN circuit or radio receiver

assembly.
OK

DI−857

DI−858
DI7OZ−02
6. Screen cannot be dimmed in night time.
1 Check if the screen is dimmed at night. (With the light control switch ON), do all
screens except the navigation screen appear in Night Mode?)
NG Check the light control switch.
OK
CHECK:
Check terminal TAIL.
OK:
TAIL: See ”Multi display” of ”TERMINAL OF ECU”.
OK
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
GND: Continuity

DI−859
OK

DI−860
DI7P0−02
7. Navigation screen not stabilized (Synchronous error).
CHECK:
Check terminals +B.
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
Check terminal ACC when turn ignition switch ACC or ON position.
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
Check terminal SYNC, VR or VG.
OK:
SYNC, VR, VG: See ”Navigation ECU” of ”TERMINAL OF ECU”
NG Replace the wire harness when all terminals are

faulty. Replace the wire harness when the SYNC
terminal is faulty.
OK

DI−861
DI7P1−02
8. Color on navigation screen is unusual (RGB signal error).
1 Display check mode (Color bar check).
NG Replace the multi display.
2 Navigation check mode (Color bar check).
NG Go to step 4.
OK
3 Check the screen setting. (Day or Night mode)
OK Normal.
NG
CHECK:
Check terminals +B.
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
Check terminal R, G, B, VR or VG.
OK:
R, G, B, VR or VG: See ”Navigation ECU” of ”TERMINAL OF ECU”

faulty. Replace the wire harness when SYNC ter-
minal is faulty.
DI−862
OK

DI−863
DI7P2−03
9. Black screen appears when ”MAP”, ”Menu” or ”DESTINATION”

switch pressed.
CHECK:
Check terminals +B.
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
Check terminal R, G, B, VR or VG.
OK:
R, G, B, VR or VG: See ”Navigation ECU” of ”TERMINAL OF ECU”

faulty. Replace the wire harness when SYNC ter-
minal is faulty.
OK

DI−864
DI7P3−02
10. Sound of radio, cassette tape or CD only cannot be heard

from speaker.
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
GND: Continuity
OK

DI−865
DI7P4−03
11. No sound (radio, cassette tape, CD) can be heard from driver
side door speaker only.
1 Service check mode.
OK
2 Check wire harness (between navigation ECU and stereo component amplifier).
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the navigation ECU and radio receiver assembly connector.
CHECK:
(a) Check continuity between terminal AUI+ of navigation ECU connector and terminal FL+ of radio receiv-
er assembly.
(b) Check continuity between terminal AUI− of navigation ECU connector and terminal FL− of radio receiv-
er assembly.
OK:
Continuity
OK
3 Check the navigation system voice.
OK Go to step 6.
NG

DI−866
4 Check wire harness (between navigation ECU and driver side door speaker).
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the navigation ECU and driver side door speaker connector.
CHECK:
(a) Check continuity between terminal AUO+ of navigation ECU connector and terminal 1 of driver side
door speaker.
(b) Check continuity between terminal AUO− of navigation ECU connector and terminal 2 of driver side
door speaker.
OK:
Continuity
OK
5 Check the driver side door speaker.
NG Replace the speaker.
OK
Replace the navigation ECU.
CHECK:
Check terminal AUO+, AUO−, AUI+ and AUI−.
OK:
AUO+, AUO−, AUI+ and AUI−: See ”Navigation ECU” of ”TERMINAL OF ECU”.
NG Replace the navigation ECU.
OK
Replace the stereo component amplifier.

DI−867
DI7P5−02
12. Map DISC cannot be inserted.
1 Check the MAP DISC.
NG Replace the MAP DISC.
OK
2 Insert a MAP DISC without tilt.
OK Normal.
NG
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the navigation ECU connector.
CHECK:
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
GND: Continuity
OK

DI−868

DI−869
DI7P6−02
13. MAP screen display does not appear. (Disc Caution screen
does not change)
1 Take appropriate measures according to the caution screen.
OK Normal.
NG
2 Check map DISC.
NG Replace the disc.
OK
CAUTION SCREEN
CAUTION MESSAGE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Cover is open.
The cover of the map disk slot is open. Close the cover,
Close it.
No disc is set.
No map disk is inserted. Insert a proper map disc.
Set a map disc.
Data cannot be read properly. Data cannot be read because the map disc is Wipe off dirt on the both disc surface with soft
Check it for scratches or dirt. dirty or scratched. cloth.
Data cannot be read.

Something other than map disc is inserted. Insert a correct map disc.
Check the correct map disc is set.
Stop the vehicle at a shaded cool place and turn
the ignition switch OFF.
Due to high temperature of the player, Pick−up part of the player is heated to a high
When confirming that the temperature of the navi-
data cannot be read. temperature.
gation ECU has been lowered, turn the ignition
switch ON.
Data cannot be read. The player cannot read data from the map disc
Turn the ignition switch OFF and ON.*1
Contact your sales dealer. temporarily.
*1: If the same caution screen appears again after turning the ignition switch ON, replace the navigation
ECU.

DI−870
DI7P7−02
14. Map is displayed in white or blue screen. (Switches and ve-

hicle position mark is displayed)
1 Set the map scale to the max.
OK Normal.
HINT:
Correct the current position and check it again.
NG
2 Wipe the disc with a soft cloth, insert it again, and turn the ignition switch ON
from OFF.
NG Replace the disc.
OK
Normal.
HINT:
If the trouble still occurs, replace the navigation ECU.

DI−871
DI86F−01
15. Touch switch does not function. (Navigation screen only)
1 Display check mode (Touch switch, Touch point screen).
OK
NG Replace or repair AVC−LAN circuit.
OK

DI−872
DI86G−01
16. Touch switch does not function. (A/C control screen only)
1 Display check mode (Touch switch, Touch point screen).
OK
2 Check ”AVC−LAN communication circuit”. (See page DI−914)
OK
3 Check multiplex communication circuit (See page DI−732).
NG Replace or repair multiplex communication cir-

cuit.
OK
Replace A/C amplifier.

DI−873
DI86H−01
17. Panel switch does not function. (Navigation screen only)
1 Display check mode (Panel switch check screen).
OK
OK

DI−874
DI86I−01
18. Panel Switch Does Not Function (A/C control only)
1 Display check mode (Panel Switch Check screen).
OK
OK
3 Check multiplex communication circuit (See page DI−732).
NG Replace or repair multiplex communication cir-

cuit.
OK
Replace A/C amplifier.

DI−875
DI86J−01
19. Navigation screen cannot change to the night mode color.
1 Check the setting. (Is it set to Day Mode in screen adjustment?)
Yes Normal.
No
2 Check if the screen is dimmed at night. (With the light control switch ON, do all
screens except the navigation screen appear in Night Mode?)
NG Go to step 5.
OK
3 Does the beep sound by operating switches on the navigation screen?
OK Replace the navigation ECU.
NG
4 Check ”AVC−LAN communication circuit”. (See page DI−914)
OK

DI−876
CHECK:
Check terminal TAIL.
OK:
TAIL: See ”Multi Display” of ”TERMINAL OF ECU”.
OK Replace the multi display.
NG
Replace or repair wire harness.

DI−877
DI86K−01
20. Vehicle position is deviated from correct point badly.
1 Check the mark display. (At a place with a fine view, is GPS mark displayed or
not?)
No Go to step 7.
Yes
2 Does the trouble occur in the specific area or not?
Yes Normal. (If the vehicle is positioned in the place

where it is difficult to be identified, the current
vehicle position may be incorrectly displayed.)
No
3 Check the setting (Color of the automatic calibration button on the calibration
screen).
Green Normal. (Drive the vehicle (10 km or more) until

calibration is completed.
Blue
4 Service check mode. (Is ”58−43” displayed in the unit check mode of the navigation
ECU?)
Yes Troubleshoot for each diagnosis.
No

DI−878
5 Navigation check mode (vehicle signal check mode: SPD).
NG Replace or repair speed sensor wire harness.
OK
6 Is there anything such as a film stuck to the window or any metal object on the
instrument panel?
Yes Reception may be affected by a screen such as

a film.
No
7 Recurrence Test (Confirm the phenomenon) (Correct the current position and
drive the vehicle for a while with the GPS mark displayed).
OK Normal.
NG
8 Check if the harness is caught or sharply bent or not.
NG Navigation antenna is surely connected.
OK

DI−879
9 Check optional components. (Does it become if the optionals such as the theft
deterrent system is removed?)
Yes Remove or change the position of the compo-

nents.
HINT:
Some optionals receive radio signals, and if this happens, GPS
reception may be affected.
No
10 Is there anything such as a film stuck to the window?

a film.
No
11 Service check mode. (Is ”80−40, 41” is displayed in the unit check mode of the
navigation ECU?)
No
Replace the navigation antenna.
HINT:

DI−880
DI86L−01
21. GPS mark does not appear.
1 Check the mark display. (At a place with a fine view, is GPS mark displayed or
not?)
Yes Normal.
No
2 Is there anything such as a film stuck to the window or any matal object on the
instrument panel?

a film.
No
3 Check if the harness is caught or sharply bent or not.
NG Navigation antenna is surely connected.
OK
4 Check optional components. (Does it become normal if the optionals such as the
theft deterrent system is removed?)
Yes Remove or change the position of the compo-

nents.
HINT:
Some optionals receive radio signals, and if this happens, GPS
reception may be affected.
No
DI−881
5 Is there anything such as a film stuck to the window?

a film.
No
6 Service check mode. (Is ”80−40, 41” is displayed in the unit check mode of the
navigation ECU?)
No
Replace the navigation antenna.
HINT:

DI−882
DI86M−01
22. No voice navigation.
1 Set the volume to the max in the menu screen.
OK Normal (Voice navigation is not available. No

destination is set, or the vehicle is running off
the route.)
NG
2 Check wire harness (navigation ECU and driver side door speaker).
PREPARATION:
Disconnect the navigation ECU connector and driver side door speaker connector.
CHECK:
(a) Check continuity between terminal AUO+ of navigation ECU connector and terminal 1 of driver side
door speaker.
(b) Check continuity between terminal AUO− of navigation ECU connector and terminal 2 of driver side
door speaker.
OK:
Continuity
OK
3 Check the sound (Check if the radio sound can be heard from the driver side
door speaker.).
NG
Replace the speaker.

DI−883
DI86N−01
23. Vehicle position rotates without control. (Map rotates without

control)
1 Recheck. (While not rotating the vehicle, turn the ignition switch ON from OFF
again.)
OK Normal. (While the vehicle was turning, the igni-

tion switch was turned ON.)
NG
2 System check mode. (Is ”58−10” is displayed in the unit check mode of the navi-
gation ECU?)
Yes Replace the navigation ECU.
No
3 System check mode. (Is ”58−43” is displayed in the unit check mode of the navi-
gation ECU?)
Yes Replace and repair SPD terminal wire harness.
No
4 Navigation check mode (vehicle signal check mode: SPD and gyro).
NG

DI−884

DI−885
DI86O−01
24. Driving direction is opposite to moving direction of vehicle

position mark.
1 Navigation check mode (vehicle signal check mode REV).
NG
CHECK:
Check terminal REV.
OK:
REV: See ”Navigation ECU” of ”TERMINAL OF ECU”.
NG

DI−886
DI86P−01
25. Radio reception poor.
1 Check the reception. (Select an AM or FM station band which signals are strong)
Yes An electric wave environment is bad.
No
2 Are there any additional installation parts? (Telephone antenna, etc.)
Yes Does the condition get better if removing them?

Influence of additional installation parts.
No
3 Is the contact of the plug jack of the radio OK?
NG Take a measure for contact.
OK
Is the antenna cord caught or broken?

DI−887
DI86Q−01
26. Cassette tape cannot be inserted.
1 Is there a foreign object inside tape player?
Yes Remove foreign object.
No
2 Is auto search button radio operating normally?
NG Radio assembly faulty.
OK
3 Check the cassette tape for deformation or peeling−off of the label.
NG Replace cassette.
OK
4 Is the tape slack?
NG Remove slack before using.
OK

DI−888
DI86R−01
27. Cassette tape cannot be eject.
1 Check if ACC or DOME fuse is OK?
NG Replace fuse.
OK
PREPARATION:
CHECK:
OK:
+B: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
ACC: 10 − 14 V
CHECK:
OK:
GND: Continuity
HINT:
When sending it for repair, leave as it is without attempting to
take it out by force.
OK

DI−889
DI86S−01
1 Is radio operating normally?
YES Radio assembly faulty.
NO
2 Is hiss noise produced by non−functioning speaker.

Recheck system after repair.
NO
3 Does continuity exist in speaker wire harness?
NO Speaker wire harness faulty.
YES
4 Temporarily install another speaker. Function OK?
YES Speaker faulty.
NO
Power amplifier faulty.


DI−890
DI86T−01
29. CD MAGAZINE CONNOT BE INSERTED
1 Is CD magazine already inserted?
YES Eject CD magazine.
NO
2 Is auto search button of radio operating normally?
YES Go to step 6.
NO
3 Check if RADIO No. 1 fuse is OK?
NG Replace RADIO No. 1 fuse.
OK
4 Is power supplied to +B terminal of stereo component amplifier?
NO +B wire harness faulty.
YES

DI−891
5 Check if GND (wire harness side) of radio receiver assembly.
NG +B wire harness faulty.
OK
Radio assembly faulty.
6 Is power supplied to +B terminal of CD auto changer?
No Radio receiver assembly faulty.
YES
7 Check if GND (wire harness side) of CD auto changer grounded normally?
NG Radio receiver assembly faulty.
OK
CD auto changer faulty.

DI−892
DI86U−01
30 CD magazine inserted, but no power.
YES Go to step 5.
NO
2 Check RADIO No. 2 fuse is OK?
NG Replace fuse.
OK
3 Is power supplied to ACC terminal of stereo component amplifier?
NO ACC wire harness faulty.
YES
4 Is power supplied to ACC terminal of radio receiver assembly?
NO Stereo component amplifier faulty.
YES
Radio receiver assembly faulty.

DI−893
5 Is power supplied to ACC terminal of CD auto changer?
NO Radio receiver assembly faulty.
YES

DI−894
DI86V−01
31. Power coming in, but CD auto changer not operating
1 Is CD inserted with correct side up?
NO Insert correctly.
YES
2 Function OK if different CD magazine inserted?
YES CD magazine faulty.
NO
YES Go to step 7.
NO
4 Does contunuity exist in speaker wire harness?
YES

DI−895
YES Speaker faulty.
NO
6 Hiss noise from speaker?
NO Power amplifier faulty.

YES
Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair.
7 Is temperature inside cabin hot?
YES Protective circuit in operation.
NO
8 Has sudden temperature change?
YES Formation of condensation due to temp.

changes.
NO

DI−896
DI86W−01
32. Sound jumps
1 Does sound jump only during strong vibration?
Yes Jumping caused by vibration.
No
2 Is CD auto changer properly installed?
No Install properly.
Yes
3 Functions OK if another CD is played?
Yes CD faulty.
No
4 Has sudden temperature change occurred inside cabin?
Yes Formation of condensation due to temp.

changes.
No

DI−897
DI86X−01
33. Sound quality poor (volume faint)
1 Function OK if another CD is played?
Yes CD faulty.
No
Yes Radio receiver assembly faulty.
No
3 Is speaker properly installed?
No Install properly
YES
Yes Speaker faulty.
No
Radio assembly or CD auto changer or power

amplifier faulty.

DI−898
DI86Y−01
34. CD magazine will not be ejected.
1 Is auto search button of radio operating normally?
Yes Go to step 5.
No
NG Replace fuse.
OK
3 Is power supplied to +B terminal of power amplifier?
No +B wire harness faulty.
YES
4 Is power supplied to +B terminal of radio receiver?
No Power amplifier faulty.
YES

DI−899
5 Is power supplied to +B terminal of CD auto changer?
No Radio assembly faulty.
Yes

DI−900
DI86Z−01
35. Any speaker does not work
YES CD auto changer faulty.
NO
2 Is hiss noise produced by non−functioning speaker.

NO
YES
YES Speaker faulty.
NO


DI−901
DI870−01
36. No power coming in.
1 Is tape player operating normally?
Yes Radio assembly faulty.
No
NG Replace fuse.
OK
3 Is power supplied to ACC terminal of power amplifier?
No ACC wire harness faulty.
YES
No Replace fuse.
YES

DI−902
5 Is power supplied to +B terminal of power amplifier?
YES
6 Check if GND (wire harness side) of power amplifier grounded normally?
NG Ground faulty.
OK
7 Is power supplied to ACC terminal of radio assembly?
No Power amplifier or wire harness faulty.
YES
8 Is power supplied to +B terminal of radio assembly?
No Power amplifier or wire harness faulty.
YES

DI−903
9 Check if GND (wire harness side) of radio assembly grounded normally?
NG Ground faulty.
OK

DI−904
DI871−01
Yes CD auto changer faulty.
No
2 Is hiss noise produced by non−functioning speaker?

No
3 Does continuity exist in speaker sire harness?
No Speaker wire harness faulty.
YES
Yes Speaker faulty.
No
Radio receiver assembly faulty.


DI−905
DI872−01
38. No power coming, but woofer amplifier not operating.
1 Is tape player operating normally?
No
NG Replace fuse.
OK
3 Is power supplied to ACC terminal of stereo component amplifier?
No ACC wire harness faulty.
YES
4 Check if RADIO No.1 fuse is OK?
NG Replace fuse.
OK

DI−906
5 Is power supplied to +B terminal of stereo component amplifier?
YES
6 Check if GND (wire harness side) of radio receiver assembly grounded normally.
NG GND faulty.
OK
7 Is power supplied to ACC terminal of radio receiver assembly?
No Stereo component amplifier faulty.
YES
8 Is power supplied to +B terminal of radio receiver assembly?
YES
9 Check if GND (wire harness side) of radio receiver assembly grounded normally.
NG GND faulty.
OK

DI−907
No Speaker wire harness faulty.
YES
11 Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK?
Yes Speaker faulty.
No
12 Hiss noise from speaker?

YES
Radio receiver assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair.

DI−908
DI873−01
39. Noise occurs
1 Does the noise occur only in the radio?
NO Refer to No. 24. (It occurs in the cassette and

CD.)
YES
2 Does the noise occur in a particular place?
YES An electric environment.
NO
3 Is there any additional installation part around the glass imprinted antenna?
(Sun shade film, telephone antenna etc.)
YES Does the noise stop by removing it?

Influence of the film or the noise radiation of the
additional installation part.
NO
4 Does the noise occur even pulling out the antenna cord from the radio?
YES Check the radio.
NO

DI−909
5 Does the noise occur even pulling out the antenna terminal on the glass sur-
face?
YES Noise mixing into the antenna cable.
NO
6 Isn’t there any adhesive (Butyl rubber) stuck on the bases of the antenna termi-
nal, defogger terminal and bus bar?
YES Failure of glass installation. Must plane the bu-

tyl rubber.
NO
7 Does the noise occur even pulling out the defogger terminal?
YES Interfering noise from the defogger line and

choke coil.
NO
8 Check the grounding of the antenna, antenna cord, coke coil, and noise filter
(See Pub. No. RM588E on page BE−237).
NG Grounding failure.
OK

DI−910
9 Does the condition get better by replacing the choke coil?
YES Replace the choke coil.
NO
10 Does the condition get better by replacing the antenna cord.
YES Replace the antenna cord.
NO
Noise rediates directly to the antenna from

the generation source.

DI−911
DI874−01
40. Noise produced by vibration or shock while driving
NO Install properly.
YES
NO Install properly.
YES
3 With vehicles stationary lightly tap each system. Is noise produced?
YES Each system faulty.
NO
Noise is produced from static electricity ac-

cumulating in the vehicle body.

DI−912
DI875−01
41. Noise produced when engine starts
1 Whistling noise which becomes high−pitched when accelerator strongly de-

pressed, disappears shortly after engine stops.
YES Alternator noise.
NO
2 Whining noise occurs when A/C is operating.
YES A/C noise.
NO
3 Scratching noise occurs during sudden acceleration, driving on rough roads or

when ignition switch is turned ON.
YES Fuel gauge noise.
NO
4 Clicking sound is heard when horn button is pressed, then released. Whirring/
grating sound is heard when pushed continuously.
YES Horn noise.
NO
5 Murmuring sound stops when engine stops.

DI−913
YES Ignition noise.
NO
6 Tick−tack noise occurs in co−ordination with blinking offlasher.
YES Turn signal noise.
NO
7 Noise occurs during window washer operation.
YES Washer noise.
NO
8 Scratching noise occurs while engine is running, and continues a while even af-
ter engine stops.
YES Water temp. gauge noise.
NO
9 Scraping noise in line with wiper beat.
YES Wiper noise.
NO
Other type of noise.

DI−914
DI876−01
AVC−LAN (Communication bus) Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Each unit of LEXUS navigation system connected with AVC−LAN (communication bus) transfers the signal
of each switch by communication.
When +B short and GND short occur in this AVC−LAN, LEXUS navigation system will not function normally
as the communication is discontinued.
In this AVC−LAN, multi display becomes the master of the communication, and the audio head unit has a
resistance necessary for transmitting the communication.
Multi display is connected between Navigation ECU and Audio head unit, LEXUS navigation system has
the structure that makes communication impossible without Navigation ECU, or Audio head unit.
AVC−LAN
Navigation ECU Multi−Display Radio Receiver Assembly Power Amplifier CD Auto Changer
Gateway ECU
BEAN
I21092

DI−915
WIRING DIAGRAM
Stereo Coponent Navigation
Amplifier ECU
2 4 7 1
L−B (*3) L−B
FL+ S10 IM1 IG1 N4 AUI+
P (*4)
6 11 6 10
L−R (*3) L−R
FL− S10 IM1 IG1 N4 AUI−
F9 Front Door
Speaker LH
17 6 3 9 P (*1) 2
Tweeter P P L−G (*2)
IB1 IJ3 IM1 IG1 N4 AUO+
1 P (*1)
L−G (*2)
V (*1) 10 8 V (*1) 11
16 11
V V L (*2) L (*2)
IB1 IJ3 IM1 IG1 N4 AUO−
2
V (*4)
Radio Receiver Multi−Display

10 Assembly 3 5 3 (*1) 3 (*2) 5
L BR L−W BR
BUS+ S8 BUS+ M3 TXI+ TX+ M6 IM3 IG2 N3 TX+
TX+ 10
9 10 10 12 (*1) 12 (*2) 10
P Y O G−W
BUS− S8 BUS−
TX− M3 TXI− TX− M6 IM3 IG2 N3 TX−
9
C5 CD Auto
1 Changer 4 1
P (*5) BR BR
TXM+ S9 TXM+ TX3+ M3 IE2 GTX+
5
4 11 8
TXM− S9 V (*5) Y Y
TXM− TX3− M3 IE2 GTX−
12
(*3): w/ Lexus Navigation system : AVC−LAN circuit
(*1): LHD
(*4): w/o Lexus Navigation system
(*2): RHD
(*5): CD Auto Changer I21091
1 Disconnect the connector of CD auto changer and check if AVC−LAN will be re-
covered normally.
CHECK:
Check that the display will change by pressing either of the Pan-
el switch or Touch switch on the display.
HINT:
It can be judged that AVC−LAN is recovered if the display is
changed.
OK Replace the CD auto changer.
NG

DI−916
2 Disconnect the ”S8” connector of the stereo component amplifier, check if AVC−
LAN will be recovered normally.
CHECK:
HINT:
changed.
OK Repair or replace wire harness or connector be-

tween stereo component amplifier and CD auto
changer.
NG
3 Disconnect the ”S9” connector of the stereo component amplifier, check if AVC−
LAN will be recovered normally.
CHECK:
HINT:
changed.
OK Replace the stereo component amplifier.
NG

DI−917
4 Disconnect the ”R2” connector of the audio head unit, check if AVC−LAN will be
recovered normally.
CHECK:
HINT:
changed.
OK Repair or replace wire harness or connector be-

tween Audio head unit and stereo component
amplifier.
NG
5 Check wire harness and connector between audio head unit and multi display
(See page IN−30)
NG Repair or replace wire harness or connector be-

tween audio head unit and multi display.
OK
6 Check wire harness and connector between multi display and navigation ECU.
(See page IN−30)

tween multi display and navigation ECU.
OK
7 Check wire harness and connector between multi display and gateway ECU.
(See page IN−30)

tween multi display and gateway ECU.
OK
DI−918
8 Skip multi display and check AVC−LAN.
PREPARATION:
Navigation ECU Multi−Display
(a) Connect all the connectors except ”M3” and ”M6” of the
TX+ TX+
multi display..
TX− TX− (b) Using 2 SSTs (Diagnosis check wire P/N 09893−12040),
Radio Receiver connect the terminal TX+ of connector ”M3” and TX+ of
Assembly connector ”M6”, the terminal TX− of connector ”M3” and
M6 M3 TX− of connector ”M6” respectively of Display ECU.
TX+
TX+ CHECK:
Operate audio head unit (CD, Cassette tape, etc.) and check
that the sound comes out from the speaker.
(Check that AVC−LAN is recovered.)
TX− TX−
I19647
OK Replace the Display ECU.
NG

DI−919
9 Skip Audio head unit and check AVC−LAN.
Multi−Display PREPARATION:
Navigation ECU (a) Connect multi display connector.
TX+ (b) Disconnect Audio head unit ”R3” connector.
TX− (c) Using SST (Navigation Check Wire P/N 09843−18050),
connect the terminal TX+ to terminal TX− of ”R3” connec-
Radio Receiver tor of Audio head Unit.
Assembly CHECK:
TX+ TX− Operate the panel switch and the touch switch of the display
and check that the navigation functions.
(Check that AVC−LAN is recovered.)
SST
I12172
OK Replace the audio head unit.
NG

DI−920
DI877−01
Gateway ECU (AVC−LAN adapter) circuit
WIRING DIAGRAM
G3
Multi Display Gateway ECU
4
5
TX3+ M4 GTX+
R
11
12
TX3− M4 GTX−
G
I15475

DI−921
1 Check ”Service check mode” of audio system (AVC−LAN diagnosis check)

CHECK:
Connection of the gateway ECU can be checked by AVC−LAN diagnosis. (”Servive check mode” of audio
system)
OK:
Display
G/W: OK (System is normal)
G/W: NG (Communication error)
G/W: None (Never registered)
NG Replace the gateway ECU.
OK
2 Check wireharness
Multi Display PREPARATION:

Disconnect connector ”G3” of gateway ECU and ”M3” of multi
display.
CHECK:
(a) Check continuity between terminals GTX+ of gateway
TX3+ ECU and TX3+ of multi display.
(b) Check continuity between terminals GTX− of gateway
ECU and TX3− of multi display.
Gateway ECU OK:
TX3− There is a continuity in wireharness of both (a) and (b), or either
(a) or (b).
HINT:
it.
GTX+
GTX−
I15538 NG Repair or replace wireharness.
OK
Replace the gateway ECU.

DI−922
DIAGNOSTICS − AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

DI261−01
Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure on the following page.
Items inside are titles of pages in this

Vehicle Brought to Workshop manual with the page number indicated in the
bottom portion. See the indicated pages
P. DI−923

P DI−924
Symptom does not

3 occur 4 Symptom Simulation
P. IN−20
5
DTC Check Normal code
P.DI−924
Malfunction code

P.DI−928 P. DI−930
9
8 Circuit Inspection Actuator Check
Parts Inspection
P. IN−20
Step 2, 5 and 11 : Diagnostic steps permitting the

Repair use of the LEXUS hand−held
tester.
10 End
Confirmation Test

DI−923
DI262−01
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s name:
Registration No.
Frame No.
Date vehicle km
Brought In / / Odometer Reading Miles
Date of Problem Occurrence / /
How Often does Problem Occur? j Continuous j Intermittent ( times a day)
Weather j Fine j Cloudy j Snowy j Various / Other

˚F
Outdoor Temperature j Hot j Warm j Cool j Cold (Approx. )
˚C
j Blower motor does not operation

Air Flow Control is
Faulty j Blower motor speed does not change
(Always Hi, Always Med, Always Lo)
Temperature j Cabin temperature does not go down

Control is Faulty j Cabin temperature does not rise
Symptoms j Response is slow
Air Inlet Control is j Cannot change between FRS and REC
Faulty (Always Fresh or always Recirculating)
Vent Control is j Mode will not chage
Faulty j Will not enter the desired mode
1st Time j Normal Code j Malfunction Code (Code )

DTC Check
2nd Time j Normal Code j Malfunction Code (Code )

DI−924
DI2QW−01
0.5 Seconds PRE−CHECK

1. WARNING FOR A/C COMPRESSOR LOCK
If compressor lock occurs during A/C operation, the A/C switch
ON indicator on the A/C control assembly starts blinking.
When this occurs, check for compressor lock (DTC B1422/22)
OFF
using diagnosis trouble code check then proceed to inspect the
circuit or the component.
Compressor lock sensor circuit. ® (See page DI−936)
0.5 Seconds AT0716
2. LIST OF OPERATION METHODS

By operating each of the A/C control switches as shown in the diagram below, it is possible to enter the diag-
nosis check mode.
Turn ignition switch ON with AUTO and

R/F switches held down.
If both Auto switch and R/F switch

are not pressed at the same time.
Indicator Check
R/F
OFF DTC Check OFF
(Sensor Check) AUTO Actuator Check
(continuous operation) (continuous operation)
Up Dr SW Up Dr SW
R/F R/F
DTC Check OFF
OFF Actuator Check
(Sensor Check) AUTO AUTO
(stepped operation) (stepped operation)
Up Dr SW Up Dr SW
Cancel check mode and can start

A/C control
: Indicates a switch operation.

Up Dr SW: Driver Side Temp. Control Switch

DI−925
3. INDICATOR CHECK
(a) Turn the ignition switch on while pressing the A/C control
R/F SW AUTO switch and R/F SW simultaneously.
AUTO SW I05082
Blinking Pattern (b) Check that all the indicators light up and go off at 1 second
intervals 4 times in succession.
4 times
1 sec. HINT:
1 sec. S After the indicator check is ended, the diagnostic trouble
ON
code check begins automatically.
S Press the OFF switch when desiring to cancel the check
OFF
mode.
AC2163
4. DTC CHECK (SENSOR CHECK)

(a) Perform an indicator check. After the indicator check is
completed, the system enters the DTC check mode auto-
matically.
(b) Read the DTC displayed on the panel. Refer to the list of
DTCs on page DI−928 when reading the DTCs.
(DTCs are out put at the temperature display.)
If the slower display is desired, press the Driver Side
Trouble Code Display I05082 Temp. Control Switch and change it to step operation.
Each time the Driver Side Temp. Control switch is
pressed, the display changes by 1 step.
HINT:
A/C SW W/ EMV only
S If the buzzer sounds when a DTC is being read, it means
the trouble indicated by that DTC continues to occur.
S If the buzzer does not sound when a DTC is being read,
it means the trouble indicated by that DTC occurred earli-
er (such as poor connector contacts, etc.)
I05082
DLC3
5. DTC CHECK USING LEXUS HAND−HELD TESTER
(a) Hook up the LEXUS hand−held tester to the DLC3.
(b) Read the diagnostic trouble codes by following the
prompts on the tester screen.
Please refer to the LEXUS hand−held tester operator’s
manual for further details.
Lexus Hand−held Tester I06354

DI−926
Passenger Side J/B 6. CLEARING DTC

(a) Pull out the ECU−B2 fuse in Passenger Side J/B for 10
sec. or longer to clear diagnostic the DTC’s memory.
(b) After reinserting the fuse, check that the normal code is
output.
ECU−B2
I05435

DI−927
7. ACTUATOR CHECK
(a) After entering the sensor check mode, press the R/F
R/F SW switch.
(b) Since each damper, motor and relay automatically oper-
ates at 1 second intervals beginning in order from 0 in the
temperature display, check the temperature and air flow
visually and by hand.
If a slower display is desired, press the driver side temp.
I05082 control switch and change it to step operation. Each time
the driver side temp. control switch is pressed, the display
Driver Side Temperature changes by 1 step.
Control Switch HINT:
S The buzzer sounds when the display trouble code
changes.(w/ EMV)
S Code are displayed in order from the smaller to the larger
numbers.
S To cancel the check mode, press the Off switch.
I05082
Conditions
Display
Step No.
code Blower Air flow Air inlet Magnetic Air mix
motor vent damper clutch damper
FACE OFF Cool side

1 0 OFF FRESH
(−10% open)
2 1 LO
R/F
3 2 MED ON
(54.5% open)
4 3
Cool / Hot
5 4 (RECIRC) (50% open)
6 5 BI−LEVEL
FOOT*1 Hot side

7 6 (52.0% open) (110% open)
FOOT*2
8 7 (31.0% open)
9 8 FOOT/DEF
10 9 HI DEF
*1: There is air leakage from defroster.

*2: There is no air leakage from defroster.

DI−928
DI264−09

If malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check, check the circuit listed for that code in the table below
(Proceed to the page given for that circuit.).
DTC No.
Detection Item Trouble Area Memory
(See page)
00 Normal − −
Ambient temperature sensor circuit S Ambient temp. sensor
B1412/12 S Harness or connector between ambient temp. sensor and f
(DI−932) A/C amplifier (8.5 min. or more)
S A/C amplifier
All conditions below are detected for 3 S Compressor drive belt

sec. or more S Compressor lock sensor
B1422/22 *1 (a) Engine speed: 450 rpm or more S Compressor
−
(DI−936) (b) Ratio between engine and compres- S Harness and connector between A/C amplifier and compres-
sor rpm deviates 20% or more in com- sor, compressor lock sensor
parison to normal operation. S A/C amplifier
Open in pressure sensor circuit S Pressure switch

Abnormal refrigerant pressure S Harness or connector between pressure switch and A/C
B1423/23 [below 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) amplifier
−
(DI−939) over 3,140 kPa (32.0 kgf/cm2, 455 psi)] S Refrigerant pipe line
S A/C amplifier
S Compressor
*1 Compressor lock (DTC B1422/22) is indicated only for a current malfunction (See page DI−936).
To confirm DTC B1422/22, preform the following steps.
(1) With the engine ON, enter the DTC check mode.
(2) Press the R/F switch to enter actuator check mode, and set the operation to Step No. 3.
(3) Press the AUTO switch to return to DTC check mode.
(4) The DTC is displayed after approx. 3 secs.

DI−929
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

DI85Y−01
TERMINALS OF ECU
3UZ−FE:
Engine and ECT ECU terminals
E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
A14471
LCKI « E01 IG ON. 10 − 14

GR « W
W−B
B
(E2−34 « E4−2) Engine speed between 2,500 − 4,000 rpm Below 3.0
TAM « E2 IG ON. Ambient temp.: 25 ˚C (77 ˚F) 1.4 − 1.8

LG R « BR
LG−R
(E6−18 « E6−19) IG ON. Ambient temp.: 40 ˚C (104 ˚F) 0.8 − 1.3
ACMG « E01 Start engine (idling). A/C switch: ON Below 1.0

L O«W
L−O W−B
B
(E6−16 « E4−2) Start engine (idling). A/C switch: OFF 10 − 14
PRE « E01 Refrigerant pressure: Less than 0.19 MPa (2.0 kgf/cm2) or more From 10−14 to
L−B « W−B
(E6−25 « E4−2) than 3.14 MPa (32 kgf/cm2). below 1.0

DI−930
DI29M−07

1. A/C control assembly IN−30
Whole functions of the A/C system does not operate
2. ACC power source circuit DI−945
1. ACC power source circuit DI−945

2. Heater main relay circuit DI−646*
Air Flow Control: No blower operation
3. Blower motor circuit DI−967*
1. Heater main relay circuit DI−646*

2. Blower motor circuit DI−967*
Air Flow Control: No blower control 3. A/C control assembly IN−30
4.Solar sensor circuit DI−926*
DI−935*
Air Flow Control: Insufficient air flow Blower motor circuit DI−967*
1. Refrigerant volume AC−22*
2. Drive belt tension AC−2
3. Refrigeration system inspection with manifold gauge set AC−3*
4. Compressor circuit DI−948
5. Pressure switch circuit DI−939
6. Compressor lock sensor circuit DI−936
Temperature Control: No cool air comes out 7. Air mix damper position sensor circuit DI−938*
DI−947*
8. Air mix damper control servomotor circuit DI−950*
DI−959*
9. Room temp. sensor circuit DI−914*
10. Ambient temp. sensor circuit DI−932
1. Air mix damper position sensor circuit DI−938*

DI−947*
DI−959*
Temperature Control: No warm air comes out
5. Evaporator temp. sensor circuit DI−920*
1. Refrigerant volume AC−22*
2. Drive belt tension AC−2
3. Refrigeration system inspection with manifold gauge set AC−3*
4. Cooling fan system CO−22*
5. Solar sensor circuit DI−926*
DI−935*
8. Evaporator temp. sensor circuit DI−920*
Temperature Control: Output air is warmer or cooler that the set 9. Air mix damper position sensor circuit DI−938*
temperature or response is slow DI−947*
DI−959*
11. Air inlet damper position sensor circuit DI−941*
12. Air inlet damper control servomotor circuit DI−953*
13. Condenser AC−52*
14. Evaporator AC−57*
15. Heater radiator AC−60*
16. Expansion valve AC−62*

DI−931

3. Air mix damper position sensor circuit DI−938*
Temperature Control: No temperature control (only Max. cool or
DI−947*
Max. warm)
DI−959*
1. Air inlet damper position sensor circuit DI−941*
No air inlet control 2. Air inlet damper control servomotor circuit DI−953*
1. Air outlet damper position sensor circuit DI−944*
2. Air outlet damper control servomotor circuit DI−956*
No air flow mode
4. Exhaust gas sensor DI−923*

Engine idle up does not occur, or is continuous
Blinking of A/C indicator
Set temp. value displayed does not change up with operation of

A/C control assembly IN−30
temp. control switch.
DTC not recorded. 1. Back−up power source circuit DI−942
Set mode is cleared when IG switch is turned off. 2. A/C control assembly IN−30

DI−932
DI266−05
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
DTC B1412/12 Ambient Temperature Sensor Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This sensor detects the ambient temperature and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C control assembly.
S Ambient temperature sensor.
S Harness or connector between ambient temperature sensor
and engine and ECT ECU
A/C control assembly
B1412/12 Open or short in ambient temperature sensor circuit. S Harness or connector between engine and airbag sensor
assembly.
S Harness or connector between airbag sensor assembly and
S A/C control assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
3UZ−FE: A/C Control Assembly
L (RHD)
Engine and ECT ECU
MPX+
10 A16 5
LG−R
E5 TAM (RHD) ID1 3
L (LHD)
1
22 W (RHD)
Ambient
Temp. Sensor MPX2 Airbag (LHD) IJ1 3
Sensor
2 MPX1 Assembly
19 27 24 L (RHD)
BR
E6 E2 MPX2 E5
L (LHD)
I15811

DI−933
HINT:
In case of using the hard−held tester, start the inspection step 1 and in case of not using the hard−held tester,
start form step 2.
1 Check ambient temp. sensor using hard−held tester.
PREPARATION:
Connect the hard−held tester to the DLC3.
CHECK:
Check the ambient temp. sensor using DATA LIST.
OK Check and replace A/C control assembly.
NG
2 Check voltage between terminals TAM and ETAM of engine and ECT ECU.
PREPARATION:
ON Remove engine and ECT ECU with connectors still connected.
Engine and ECT ECU
CHECK:
(b) Measure voltage between terminals TAM and ETAM of
engine and ECU ECU connector at each temperature.
OK:
Voltage :
ETAM(−) TAM(+) I15790 at 25˚C (77˚F) : 1.35 − 1.75 V
at 40˚C (104˚F) : 0.85 − 1.25 V
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the voltage decreases.
NG Go to step 3.
OK
Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on problem symptoms table (See page DI−930). Howev-
er, if DTC B1412/12 is displayed, check and replace engine and ECT ECU and A/C control assem-
bly.

DI−934
3 Check ambient temperature sensor.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect ambient temperature sensor connector.
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of ambient tem-
perature sensor connector at each temperature.
2 1 OK:
Resistance :
at 25˚C (77˚F) : 1.6 − 1.8 kW
at 50˚C (122˚F) : 0.5 − 0.7 kW
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases.
NOTICE:
When installing the ambient temperature sensor, be sure to
I05262 connect the sensor connector before connecting the bat-
tery.
NG Replace ambient temperature sensor.
OK
4 Check harness and connector between engine and ECT ECU and ambient tem-
perature sensor (See page IN−30).
OK

DI−935
5 Check harness and connector between engine and ECT ECU and A/C control as-
sembly (See page IN−30).
OK
Check and replace engine and ECT ECU and

A/C control assembly.

DI−936
DI26A−05
DTC B1422/22 Compressor Lock Sensor Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This sensor sends 1 pulses per engine revolution to the engine and ECT ECU.
If the number ratio of the compressor speed divided by the engine speed is smaller than a predetermined
value, the engine and ECT ECU turns the compressor OFF. And, the indicator flashes at about 1 second
intervals.
S Compressor.
S Compressor drive belt.
S Compressor lock sensor.
S Harness and connector between compressor and engine and
ECT ECU
All conditions below are detected for 3 secs. or more
S Harness and connector between engine and ECT ECU and
(a) Engine speed : 450rpm or more
B1422/22 A/C control assembly
(b) Ratio between engine and compressor speed deviates 20%
S Harness or connector between engine and airbag sensor
or more in comparison to normal operation.
assembly.
S A/C control assembly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
3UZ−FE:
Engine and ECT ECU
34
GR
E2 LCKI
1 MPX2
27 E5
Compressor Lock Sensor L (RHD)
24 L (LHD)
2
BR MPX1
A Airbag Sensor
J49 (LHD) Assembly 3 IJ1 (LHD)
J/C MPX2
J26 (RHD)
A 22
W (RHD) L (LHD)
BR
BR 5 A16
3 ID1 (RHD)
MPX+
EC ED
L (RHD)
I15812

DI−937
1 Check voltage between terminal LCKI of engine and ECT ECU and body ground.
CHECK:
Engine and ECT ECU (a) Start engine.
(b) Push AUTO SW.
(c) Measure voltage between terminal LCKI of engine and
ECT ECU connector and body ground when A/C switch
is ON.
OK:
Voltage : 10 − 14 V
LCKI(+) (−)
I15791

NG
2 Check compressor lock sensor.
PREPARATION:
2 1 (a) Jack up the vehicle.
(b) Disconnect compressor lock sensor connector.
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of compressor
lock sensor connector.
OK:
Resistance :
I05252 at 20˚C (68˚F) : 990 − 1210 W
at 100˚C (212˚F) : 1280 − 1550 W
NG Replace compressor lock sensor.
OK

DI−938
3 Check harness and connectors between engine and ECT ECU and compressor
lock sensor.(See page IN−30).
OK
4 Check multiplex communication system (See page DI−732).

DI−939
DI26B−06
DTC B1423/23 Pressure Switch Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The pressure switch sends the appropriate signals to the engine and ECT ECU when the A/C refrigerant
pressure drops too low or rises too high. When the engine and ECT ECU receives these signals, it outputs
signals via the engine and ECT ECU to switch OFF the compressor relay and turns the magnetic clutch OFF.
S Pressure switch.
S Harness or connector between pressure switch and engine
and ECT ECU
S Harness or connector engine and ECT ECU and A/C control
S Open in pressure sensor circuit.
assembly
S Abnormal refrigerant pressure.
B1423/23 S Harness or connector between engine and airbag sensor
below 181 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi)
assembly.
over 3,140 kPa (32.0 kgf/cm2, 455 psi)
S Refrigerant pipe line.
WIRING DIAGRAM
3UZ−FE:
Engine and ECT ECU A/C Control Assembly
Pressure Switch
21 27 L (LHD) 3 5
4 1 L−B L (LHD)
E5 PRE MPX2 E5 IJ1 A16 MPX+
(LHD)
L (RHD)
W−B
3
24 MPX1 22
ID1
MPX2 W (RHD) L (RHD)
(RHD)
EB Airbag Sensor
Assembly
I15813

DI−940
1 Check voltage between terminal PRE of engine and ECT ECU and body ground.
PREPARATION:
ON
Install the manifold gauge set.
CHECK:
(b) Check voltage between terminal PRE of engine and ECT
ECU connector and body ground when A/C gas pressure
is changed.
(−)
PRE(+) OK:
I15792 The voltage changes with gas pressure, as shown in
the diagram below.
Low Pressure CutSide Reference : High Pressure Cut Side
ON (0V)
ON (0V) 2,550 kPa
225 kPa
196 kPa 3,140 kPa
OFF (12V) OFF (12V)

NG
2 Check pressure switch.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect pressure switch connector.
3 1 CHECK:
4 2 (b) Check continuity between terminals 1 and 4 of pressure
switch when A/C gas pressure is changed.
OK:
The continuity changes with gas pressure as shown
I05439 below.
Low Pressure Cut Side Reference : High Pressure Cut Side
ON (continuity) ON (continuity)
211 kPa 2,550kPa
181 kPa 3,140kPa
OFF(continuity) OFF(continuity)

DI−941
OK
3 Check harness and connector between engine and ECT ECU and pressure
switch, pressure switch and body ground (See page IN−30).
OK

DI−942
DI26K−03
Back Up Power Source Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This is the backup poser source for the A/C control assembly. Power is supplied even when the ignition
switch is off and is used for diagnostic trouble code memory, etc.
WIRING DIAGRAM
3UZ−FE:
Passenger Side J/B

2 ECU−B2 7 J/C 11 11 1
R−L W−R *1 *1 W−R
2B 2F IJ1 ID1 A16 +B
W−R
LHD: J19 (LHD) (RHD)
RHD: J31

ECU−B1 Battery
2 1 B−L
1 1
*1: LHD ® C, RHD ® B
I05989

DI−943
1 Check voltage between terminal +B of A/C control assembly connector and body
ground.
PREPARATION:
Remove the A/C control assembly with connector still con-
nected.
CHECK:
Measure voltage between terminal +B of A/C control assembly
OK:
(−) +B(+)
Voltage : Battery positive voltage
I05284

NG
2 Check ECU−B1 fuse.
Engine Room No.1 R/B PREPARATION:

Remove ECU−B1 fuse from Engine Room No.1 R/B.
CHECK:
Check continuity of ECU−B1 fuse.
OK:
Continuity
ECU−B1 NG Check for short in all the harness and compo-

I05440
nents connected to the ECU−B1 fuse (See at-
tached wiring diagram).
OK

DI−944
3 Check ECU−B2 fuse.
Passenger Side J/B PREPARATION:

Remove ECU−B2 fuse from Passenger Side J/B.
CHECK:
Check continuity of ECU−B2 fuse.
OK:
Continuity
NG Check for short in all the harness and compo-

ECU−B2 nents connected to the ECU−B2 fuse (See at-
I05435
OK
Check and repair harness and connector between A/C control assembly and battery.

DI−945
DI26L−03
ACC Power Source Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This is the power source for A/C control assembly and servomotors, etc.
WIRING DIAGRAM
3UZ−FE: Engine Room No.1 R/B
B−L W−L GR
Driver Side RADIO Driver Side
J/B No.2 J/B Instrument
Panel J/B
1 1J 3 1C 1
3 3A (RHD)
1 2 2 3 3G (LHD)
ALT AM1 Ignition
Switch
2 1
3
1 1A (RHD) 1J 4 3E 3
1
1 1K (LHD)
2
W L−Y GR
A16 ACC
Instrument Panel J/B

5 5 5 22
W−B W−B
3A 3G 3E A16 GND
(RHD) (LHD)
1C 6
Driver Side J/B
1G 6 1F 13
(RHD)
J/C
(LHD) B
W−B J37
A A W−B
J/C B
J/C A W−B
Battery LHD: J8 J18
RHD: J42 J/C
A J32
W−B
LHD: IF II IF
RHD: II
I15814

DI−946
1 Check voltage between terminals ACC and GND of A/C control assembly con-
nector.
ACC PREPARATION:
A/C Control Assembly Remove A/C control assembly with connectors still connected.
ACC(+) CHECK:
(b) Measure voltage between terminals ACC and GND of
GND(−) OK:
Voltage : Battery positive voltage
I05286

NG
2 Check continuity between terminal GND of A/C control assembly and body
ground.
CHECK:
Measure resistance between terminal GND of A/C control as-
sembly and body ground.
OK:
Resistance : 0 W (continuity)
GND
I05287
OK

DI−947
3 Check RADIO No.2 fuse.
Driver Side J/B PREPARATION:

Remove RADIO No.2 fuse from driver side J/B.
CHECK:
Check continuity of RADIO No.2.
OK:
Continuity
NG Check for short in all the harness and compo-

RADIO No2 I05443
nents connected to the RADIO No.2 fuse (See at-
OK
Check and repair harness and connector between A/C control assembly and battery.

DI−948
DI26N−03
Compressor Circuit
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The A/C control assembly outputs the magnetic clutch ON signal from terminal MGC to the ECM. When the
ECM receives this signal, it sends a signal from terminal ACMG and switches the A/C magnetic clutch relay
ON, thus turning the A/C compressor magnetic clutch ON.
WIRING DIAGRAM
3UZ−FE:
R−L
HTR Relay
L−W 3 5
3 3
R−L
L−O
3 3
2 1
11 EB1 A/C COMP Relay
L−W Engine Room No.3 R/B
Engine and ECT ECU A/C Control Assembly
EB1 10
13 27 3 5
1 EA2 L−O ACMG L (LHD) L (LHD)
E5 E5 IJ1 A16 MPX+
MPX2
L−W (LHD)
3
Magnetic Clutch
Sensor L (RHD) L (RHD)
3
24 MPX1 22
MPX2 ID1
W (RHD)
(RHD)
Airbag Sensor
Assembly I15815

DI−949
1 Check voltage between terminal ACMG of engine and ECT ECU.
CHECK:
(a) Start engine.
(b) Push AUTO SW.
(c) Measure voltage between terminal ACMG of ECM con-
nector and body ground when A/C switch is ON and OFF.
OK:
A/C switch Voltage
(−) ACMG(+) ON 10 − 4 V
I15793
OFF 0V
OK Check and replace engine and ECT ECU and/or

NG
2 Check A/C compressor magnetic clutch.
PREPARATION:
Disconnect magnetic clutch connector.
CHECK:
Connect positive (+) lead connected to battery to magnetic
clutch connector terminal 3.
OK:
Magnetic clutch is energized.
I05334
NG Repair A/C compressor magnetic clutch.
OK

DI−950
3 Check harness and connector between A/C compressor and compressor relay
(See page IN−30)
OK
4 Check harness and connector between compressor relay and and ECM
(See page IN−30).
OK

Output

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Output

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DI−1

DIAGNOSTICS − ENGINE (2JZ−GE)

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING

Titles inside are titles of pages in

2 Connect hand−held tester to DLC3 P. DI−17

3 Check DTC and Freezed Frame Data (Precheck)

4 Clear DTC and Freezed Frame Data P. DI−17

6 Setting Check Mode Diagnosis P. DI−17

7 Problem Symptom Confirmation

9 DTC Check P. DI−17

12 Problem Symptoms Table*

14 Parts Inspection 13 Circuit Inspection P. DI−21

15 Check for Intermittent Problems P. DI−17

LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

Titles inside are titles of pages in

2 Check and clear DTC (Precheck) P DI−21

3 Problem Symptom Confirmation

5 DTC Check P. DI−17

8 Problem Symptoms Table*

10 Circuit Inspection P. DI−21

*: See Pub. No. RM588E on page DI−24

LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK

Customer’s Name Model and Model

Driver’s Name Frame No.

Difficult to Engine cranks slowly

Poor Hesitation Back fire Muffler explosion (after−fire) Surging

Soon after starting After accelerator pedal depressed

Weather Fine Cloudy Rainy Snowy Various/Other

Highway Suburbs Inner city Uphill Downhill

Engine Temp. Cold Warming up After warming up Any temp. Other

Starting Just after starting ( min.) Idling Racing

Normal Mode Normal Malfunction code(s) (code )

LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

the technician can cause the check engine warning

(b) Description for M−OBD (Except European spec.)

In addition to an indication of the CHK ENG when

LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

(c) Check the DLC3.

Terminal No. Connection/Voltage or Resistance Condition

LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

(b) Except European spec.:

LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

(2)Using SST, connect between terminals 13 (TC) and

(2) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

Interface Vehicle (b) Engine ECU Terminal Values Measurement Using

LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

P0120/41 Saved driving mode Ignition switch OFF

1 Is battery voltage 11 V or more when engine is stopped?

NO Charge or replace battery.

NO Proceed to problems table (See Pub. No.

LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

3 Does engine start?

4 Check air filter.

A07103 NG Repair or replace

5 Check idle speed.

NG Proceed to problem symptoms table (See Pub.

LEXUS GS300/GS430 SUP (RM786E)

6 Check ignition timing.

NG Proceed to Pub. No. RM588E on page IG−1 and

Proceed to problem symptoms table (See

7 Check fuel pressure.